JP7429429B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Traditionally, pachinko machines have been equipped with a game board that is removably attached to the frame, and it has been possible to change to a game machine with different specifications by replacing the old game board with a new one. is possible (for example, see Patent Document 1). In such gaming machines, universal designs are simply applied to the frame body, so there is little relationship between the designs and the designs applied to the game board. Therefore, in recent years, decorative members have been made removable to the frame, and when replacing a game board with a new one, the decorative members attached to the frame can be replaced with decorative members that have a design that corresponds to the new game board. A game machine has been proposed in which the design can be unified throughout the game machine by changing the design to .

JP2017-221608A (Paragraph [0016], Figure 1)

However, the gaming machines described above lack novelty, and it has been difficult to further improve gaming interest.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve gaming enjoyment.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are presented below. In addition, the effects, etc. will be explained as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention will be shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the present invention,
a frame component having an outer frame, a main body frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame;
a game component that is removably installed in the frame component;
a plurality of light emitting bodies provided in the frame component and the game component,
The game component includes a first game component and a second game component,
The first game component includes a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes a game performance,
The second game component includes a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor,
The specific board has a first unique value that can be identified as the second game component, and can transmit the first unique value to the production control board,
The production control board can compare the first eigenvalue transmitted from the specific board with a second eigenvalue that it owns,
The first game component and the second game component are each individually fixed to the frame component,
If the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is not a regular combination, the light emitting body provided in the second game component does not emit light, and the frame component and the first game component The light emission of a specific light-emitting body among the light-emitting bodies provided in the part is not set as a normal light emission mode, but is regulated,
Further, after it is determined that the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is not a normal combination, a comparison is performed to determine whether the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is a normal combination. no comparison period occurs , and a non-comparison period occurs during which it is not compared whether the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is a normal combination;
Furthermore, it is possible to execute error notification regarding the RAM during the non-comparable period, and in the error notification, what is the mode that is regulated when the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is not a regular combination. The specific light emitter is controlled in different manners.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to further improve gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the lock seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a) and showing the main parts. FIG. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front and lower. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upward moving end position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where it has moved to the raised position. It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship of the production operation part outer periphery decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected in (a). It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between them, and (c) is an illustration in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and back direction, and the production operation unit FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact sensing bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the device. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. 62(a) is a sectional view taken along the line U--U in FIG. 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). 66A is a cross-sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the door frame as it is and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view showing each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of a production operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine including a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment when viewed from the back and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail. (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a ( It is a perspective view of tank rail etc. of a) seen from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carcar line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. (a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 111(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a); FIG. 111(a) is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from behind. (a) is a sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the K-ke line. 111(a) is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 111(a). FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit in (a) seen from the lower right back. (a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Koko line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sasa line in (a). FIG. FIG. 121(a) is a sectional view taken along the line C--C in FIG. 121(a). FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 when viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing how ball clogging is resolved in the board unit of FIG. 119; FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing prevention of intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool into the board unit of FIG. 119; 120 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 129 viewed from the front right. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel, (b) is a sectional view taken along the sous line in (a), and (c) is a front view showing the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components, as seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the gate member seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and seen from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. (a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line in (a). It is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the front unit. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged portions of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144; It is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a detection range by a magnetic sensor in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and a magnetic body in which lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected, and (e) FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which a magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is a perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated. It is an exploded view showing a member in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. It is a front view of the back front production unit in the back unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back-front production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-front production unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front production unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the left side of (a). ) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-front left decoration unit of the back-front presentation unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. This is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decorative unit disassembled to show only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base. be. (a) is a front view of the first decorative body on the front left side of the back side shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second decorative body on the left front side of the back side shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the second decorative body on the left side of the back front side shown in a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in a state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit and a decorative board for decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit with light emission; FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light plate and the decorative board for illuminating the decorative body of the back front and lower presentation unit. It is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is decorated with light. (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting configuration of a second pattern on the light guide plate. It is a front view of the back-front presentation unit shown in a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper first decorative part of the back upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper production unit of the back unit is moved to a lowered position with the rear upper first decorative part facing forward. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position and the rear upper second decorative part is directed forward. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back left movable decorative body and the back rear right movable decorative body in the back rear lower performance unit of the back unit are moved to appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back front lower middle decoration body of the back front lower presentation unit of the back front presentation unit of the back unit is raised. A state in which the back front left logo decoration part, the back front left upper logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit of the back unit are decorated with light. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. A game in which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back-front production unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission, and the back-rear left movable decoration body and the back-rear right movable decoration body in the back-rear lower production unit are moved to appearance positions. FIG. 3 is a front view of the board. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second picture of the light guide plate in the back-front production unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3A is a perspective view of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and FIG. 3B is a top view of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 173(a) is a view taken along arrow P in FIG. 173(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a through hole showing an overview of the positional relationship between a through hole formed in a peripheral control board and a through hole formed in a conversion board. (a) is a perspective view of a control ROM and a ROM socket having a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and (b) is a top view of the control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. . 5A to 5C are schematic diagrams showing board management numbers of peripheral control boards; FIGS. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a main control input circuit with an error detection function. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and the cover body and the base body are sealed. It is a perspective view (b) of the main control board box sealed by the mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch as seen diagonally from the front right side; FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box. Figure (a) shows the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, and the solder surface of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted; This is a diagram (Part 1) (b) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted. )(c). This is a continuation of FIG. 186 and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board, and the setting key switch is FIG. 4 is a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an overview of the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back side) of the main control board, illustrating the outline of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU on the main control board. 2 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is covered with an insulating film on a land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on a land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of a main control board 1310; It is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in a), and it is a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to a land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a third embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board with an insulating film. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in FIG. (a) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same site as in (a). It is a front view. (a) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view showing the back front left decoration unit of the back front presentation unit in (a) in a state where it is decorated with light. It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 195(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in a state where it is decorated with light emission. It is an exploded perspective view of a panel board and a cell in a game board of a third embodiment, and seen from the front. (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a sectional view taken along the Soso line in (a), and (c) is a front view of the function display unit of (a). (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind. FIG. 199 is an exploded front perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198; FIG. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198, viewed from behind. FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 198 and a player. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player according to the third embodiment. It is a sectional view of a function display unit of a fourth embodiment. (a) is a sectional view showing a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (b). It is an exploded perspective view showing attachment of a magnetic sensor, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing attachment of a magnetic sensor with a holding member different from (c). (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as a positioning hole for the second member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration. It is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which a closed space is formed by a second member behind the separation hole of one member, and (c) is a cross section showing a state in which decoration bodies with different thicknesses are attached in (b). (d) is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the attachment hole of the decoration. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a decorative body is attached to the first member from the front, (b) is a sectional view of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative body attached to the first member. It is an explanatory view showing the first member from the front. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member that are provided symmetrically, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member that are provided symmetrically and have a different shape from (c). be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a sectional view taken along the tartar line in (a), and (c) is a ) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative body in a different form from that in (a) and the movable first member. It is an explanatory view, and (e) is a sectional view taken along the Chi-Chi line in (d). FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 211 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 210. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 217 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 216. 217 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on. FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first starting port passing process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding performance advance judgment processing (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second starting port passing process (step S234). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a jackpot symbol determination table (B), and a small hit symbol determination table (C). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284). It is a flowchart showing the procedure for jackpot control processing (step S235A). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rainbow color effect. It is an explanatory view showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow color effect. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect during an abnormal situation. (A) is a front perspective view of the rear upper movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the rear upper movable decorative body taken along the line AA. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of rainbow color production. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of rainbow color production. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of rainbow color production. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of rainbow color production. It is a schematic front view (a) of a split game board, and a schematic rear view (b) of the split game board. (a) is a rear perspective view of the divided game board seen from the lower left rear before the right side game board and left side game board constituting the divided game board are combined; b). FIG. 248 is a schematic front view of the divided game board in which the divided game board in FIG. 248(a) has been decorated. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits. It is a list showing a compatibility (matching)/non-matching (mismatching) table of combinations. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing that can perform ID determination. It is a table showing various error handling (specific example 1) at the time of power-on. This is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection during the progress of the performance after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors associated with magnetic detection (Specific Example 1) when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for a customer. It is a table showing various error handling (specific example 2) when the power is turned on. This is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection during the progress of the performance after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors associated with magnetic detection (Specific Example 2) when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for a customer. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID comparison circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit of a relay board provided in a dish unit. 263 is a circuit showing an example of a modification of FIG. 262. 263 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a case where the LED driver forming the ID comparison circuit included in the frame-side decorative board shown in FIG. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit; FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of allocation of each unit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. 268 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit in which the ID output circuit in each unit in FIG. 267 further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value). FIG. It is a schematic front view (a) of a split game board in which an ID error determination switch is provided, and FIG.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 that includes a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 that includes a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player and a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1. , a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. We are prepared.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is provided, an effect display device 1600 which is placed in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100. A front unit 2000 is provided, and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. , the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, or displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, The upper performance unit 3200, the rear and lower performance units 3300, etc. perform light emission effects and movable effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat plate-like lower lateral fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper lateral fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 13a, and The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d has a flat plate shape and extends briefly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the curtain front member 42 (curtain interior space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders and communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the plurality of inclined blades 46b transmit the air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 to the handle cover unit 290 located diagonally above and in front. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player inserts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, it is not released from the port member 47 to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 or to other players who are roaming around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the performance sound can be heard, the interest of the players can be attracted by the performance sound, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output sound with deeper bass, thereby entertaining the players and preventing them from losing interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 , a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 , a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 , and the upper side of the pan unit 200 . a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit; The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a door window 101a penetrating back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 installed near the right end in rear view at the lower rear side of door frame base 101, and the back side of door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side in view, the handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, the handle unit 180 moves the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher. 540 to play a game by hitting into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side in a front view so that the hinge can rotate, and the front side of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 The gaming area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. .

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and rear directions and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in front view and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.). A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b when viewed from the front. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front and back and allows the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in front view of the upper part of a rectangle extending vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board etc. of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 34(a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening/closing and locking the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key hole 132 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 that is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates when a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132 is rotated, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction at a lower part than the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a part to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A first arm 136 in the form of a band plate, whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135; A second arm 137 in the form of a band plate is rotatably attached at a position below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to the rear cover 115 and both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the cylinder attachment frame 115 so as to be rotatable therewith. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axis. are doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a protruding outward from the lower ends of the left and right sides in a cylindrical shape and is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side is fitted with a screw (not shown). It is removably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be explained. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment As shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. At the same time, both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to positions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise at an angle of 90 degrees from a normal state using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It happens. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is There is almost no force trying to rotate it clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is applied to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do so increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 will be larger than that on the first arm 136. , the second cam member 135 is rotated counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

In addition, when the key is used to return to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, an action opposite to that described above is used. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from a normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first cam member 134 moves downward, and the second arm 137 whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 can be rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is hardly any force trying to rotate it in the direction of .

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second cam member 135 rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is transmitted to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. and the rotation center of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes smaller in the first arm 136, whereas In the arm 137, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force increases, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state and then rotated 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the key operates in the opposite manner to the above. I will do it.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) is connected at any rotational position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected to transmit the rotation. By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133) can be rotated, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked effectively.

Moreover, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, by transmitting rotation by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to any desired position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the pachinko machine 1 The increase in costs can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who is aware of the configuration may insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 using the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened and a fraudulent act may be carried out. On the other hand, the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmitting member 133 located at a position away from the axis (backward) of the cylinder body 131, so that a tool cannot be inserted into the rear of the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present in the relevant part, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 with respect to the first arm 136, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. The portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 that is attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts furthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It becomes a state of being. Therefore, by having one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. The key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly without much resistance being applied to the rotation, making it easy to unlock and lock the lock, and without forcing the key inserted into the keyhole to be rotated. This can prevent the key from being damaged, and can prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and a pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Moreover, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 having a smooth rod shape (band plate shape). Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. By making the arm 136 and the second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 from being unlocked due to unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650. be able to.

Note that in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but is not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts. , etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 37(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 169) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Note that the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, in which the operation transmitting portion 242b that the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with, is biased upward by a spring, so that the game ball B is not placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extracting member 143, etc. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the attached string to cause an unauthorized game ball B to enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the unauthorized game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also allows the player to view the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, and is spaced apart from side to side. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper tray 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be explained. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 that are attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 that will be described later; and a disc-shaped handle guide 196 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. A front lens 185 is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring part 195c connecting the tips of the parts 195b, and two rings extending in an arc shape around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub part 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend counterclockwise from positions at angles of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend to a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

This handle 195 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated to be electrically continuous from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect a touch on the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, even if the outer ring portion 195c is rotated, the game ball B can be hit.

The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the attachment stays 196b are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer ring portions 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, into the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three attachment bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two on the upper left of the outer circumference, two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See Figure 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls each group with 3 systems, for a total of 15 systems, so that each of the 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can emit light in full color. That's what I do.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. Each group of the 10 LEDs 184a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since this handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which number is greater than the number of electric wires making up the wiring cable to be connected, is controlled individually (in this case, as a group). Since the number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front handle lens 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward, and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The front handle lens 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes in accordance with the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with a force depending on the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When a player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the static electricity acting on the player and prevents the player from touching the handle 195. To detect. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 195 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side than the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. an inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative board 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted; It includes an annular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylinder part 291a that extends back and forth with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer circumferential ring part 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylinder part 291a that has an inner diameter that becomes smaller toward the front from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a. a cylindrical rear cylinder part 291c that penetrates the middle wall part 291b and extends back and forth with an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base 181a of the handle base 181; and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder part 291c. The handle base 181 is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d that protrude inwardly from the handle base 181 and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion in the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a. A cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward to 291f, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a, and a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a in a region between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. An opening 291h passing through the lower part of the portion 291a is provided.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate shape with an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively unrotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylindrical portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylindrical portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in a range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three circumferential directions at angular intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearwardly than the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the U-shaped guide portion By positioning the guide piece 291g within the guide portion 196a, it is possible to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a to the vicinity of the flange part 291e, and has a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and passes through the front cylinder part 291a. .

The inner 292 includes an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and a larger outer diameter than the flange part 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to near the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base part 292a from the front, and the base part 292a is located behind the flange part 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape that swells outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 groups: 2 on the lower left from the center, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. (See Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and is designed to control a total of 18 systems, 3 systems for each group, so that each of the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and signals from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as address, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the steering wheel cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b divides the LED driver into six groups according to the command. Each set of the 12 LEDs 293a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate part 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and approximately the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base part 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate part 294a. It has a cylindrical side plate part 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short distance. In this board cover 294, a front plate part 294a is located between the flange part 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate part 294b extends to the base part 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end that has the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and has a spindle (kamakura-shaped or bowl-shaped) shape that expands toward the rear. , etc.), and is provided with a plurality of cutout openings 295b (four in this case) in the circumferential direction, which are cut out from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and a plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed to match the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). Note that when molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled into the pachinko machine 1, and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is placed inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291. The handle 195, the front handle lens 185, and the like are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is connected to the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 while sandwiching the part that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. 101b.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, an outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outside of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. This handle guide 196 has a rear end side of the guide part 196a inserted (locked) between the front cylinder part 291a and the outer cylinder part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange part 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, so that the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 can emit light. In addition to being able to decorate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 with light emitting light, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light emitting light.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 has a cutout opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player who inserts his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub part 195a and the outer peripheral ring part 195c of the handle 195. I can do it.

Note that the upper notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notch 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 is inserted. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the bottom It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they will pass through the gap between the front cylinder part 291a and the leg part 292b of the inner 292, and It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed in the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2. It is provided on the extension line of the blade part 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid body 40 in the inclination direction. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) released obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player inserts his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (playing device for driving game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, you can hook your finger on the right side notch opening 295b and pull it. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring part 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring part 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by gripping the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b by hooking your fingers on the handle cover 295. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant force even if the user does not keep twisting his hand. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven in by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can select a driving operation suitable for the player.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c is provided, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is not provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have a shape that has never been seen before, can be seen in the area where the player is playing, giving a strong impact to the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play at the pachinko machine 1, and to encourage the players who are roaming around the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, when operating the handle 195, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained and amused by the new sensation of operating the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and outputs a performance sound from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to The air inside the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 is caused by sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 transfer the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in the gaming area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 can be supplied to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , it is possible to surprise the player, foreshadow the arrival of an opportunity, and change the amount of operation of the handle, thereby entertaining the player and making it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the hands and fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, the stress on the player can be alleviated and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, as described above, the handle 195 and The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle cover unit 290 is provided, is absorbed by the grill member 46. Since the stimulation is guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various sensors provided on the handle 195 (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc., it is possible to make the handle unit 180 difficult to damage, and the damage to the handle unit 180 can cause injury to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer circumferential ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to a steering wheel of a car, so it is similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine that allows players to play without hesitation. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

Furthermore, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a downwardly facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Because of the provision of the This makes it possible to give a feeling of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, which reduces the player's anxiety about inserting his or her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and makes the player feel more comfortable. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a penetrating notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened toward the front, even if liquid such as a drink or the game ball B gets into the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for liquid etc. discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of handle cover 295 having the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub part 195a allows the handle to be grasped and operated with the hand, similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the spoke part 195b allows the operation to be performed using only the fingers. The handle cover unit can be operated by using the portion 195c like a steering wheel of a car, by gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b by putting your fingers on the outer ring portion 195c, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which operations such as pinching the inside and outside of the ball 290 with fingers can be performed, and various driving operations (handle operations) for driving game balls B can be performed. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate depending on the game state, the player's state, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b may be gripped with fingers, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, it is also possible to perform handle operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to provide players with a wide variety of handle operations. , it is possible to make steering wheel operations more enjoyable and prevent players from getting bored.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance in which the handle 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a good appearance and attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. By suppressing the upward pressure on the gaming area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to avoid narrowing the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a relatively large. The large gaming area 5a allows the pachinko machine 1 to stand out, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the light-emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c is not obstructed by the player's hands, making the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c more noticeable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look bad, and the door frame 3 can have a good look.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring part 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also includes a flange part 291e and a flange part 291e that restricts movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring part 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke parts 195b and the outer ring part 195c Even if the handle 195 is touched, the game ball B can be driven in, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made capable of a variety of driving operations (handle operations) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. The pan unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is attached to and protrudes forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) that is attached to the right side of the mounting base, and a ball that is attached to the top of the mounting base. A rental operation unit 220, an upper plate ball pre-extraction unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit, It is equipped with

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, a plate left decoration unit 270 and A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touched and operated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, and an operation section base 315. An annular production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320, and an operation part attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A relay board unit 330 is provided.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 350 that can protrude upward from the production operation cover unit 310 and is provided with the production operation unit 301, and a production operation unit 350 that is attached to the operation base 315 to operate the production operation. A production operation part lifting mechanism 360 that supports the production operation part unit 350 so as to be able to rise and fall, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. There is.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed into a container shape that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center on the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right in front view, and has a guide passage section 201a (FIG. 73) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled into the tray unit 200, its bottom surface extends from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls on it), the game ball B can remove static electricity.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing main parts. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed into a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided at the front of the center axis. The lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape extending straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the lower plate ball supply port 211j is configured to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202b, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265, the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed. Since the ball extraction hole 202b and the ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower tray 202, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B from inside the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are transferred to the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely to the left front. To be more specific, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow therethrough. It is tilted diagonally forward to the left so that the distance is the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis line (the line shown by the dashed line) of the rear end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c (the ball discharge port 150d). I am moving it to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower plate 202 (the part of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a moves to the left. With 202a closed, the game balls B can be prevented from being concentrated and stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply is stopped. Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends diagonally and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which the game balls B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray ball The game ball B released from the post-ejection unit 240 (ball ejection guiding path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. This allows the game balls B to be properly stored throughout the lower tray 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a pan unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the pan unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper plate ball operating unit 220 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-bulb removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. An upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) is provided, which extends vertically through the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the upper tray by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222. After the ball is removed, the ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port is located in front of the ball socket (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the plate base unit 210, and The game balls B are supplied from the ball socket of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays connections between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The pan unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the pan unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and pays cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine can be displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the machine after deducting the amount for the loaned game balls B, to adjust the volume, and to adjust the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball extraction button 222 arranged near the left end of the top surface of the base part 221, and a button on the top surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is placed on the right side of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and a ball lending button 224 is placed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 located at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221. It includes a volume adjustment button 227 placed in front and a light amount adjustment button 228 placed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the word "ball" written on its top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen from the player side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section 226 when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sounds for production such as music, voices, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. This volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The area has a pattern that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the volume adjustment button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume increases, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume decreases.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The part has a light bulb pattern on it. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. This light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes darker when the "-" side is pressed. In addition to the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5, the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 may also be adjustable.

The volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are of different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light amount adjustment button 228 is black), so that it is difficult for the player to confuse them.

By the way, when the volume and light intensity are adjusted using the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301, the player participation type production that requires the operation of the production operation section 301 is not executed. At times, by operating the effect operation section 301 as appropriate, a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light intensity, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation section 302 is operated. This requires changing the volume of the volume, the brightness of the light amount, etc., and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and light amount. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be directly adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity is It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before upper plate ball removal and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 49. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A spring (not shown) that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward and then backward on the rear surface of the rear base 241; It is provided with a ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides it to the right in rear view.

The ball socket opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 enter the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiver (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the actuation receiver. A protruding operation transmission portion 242b is provided. The operation receiver has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operating receiving part penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an upper plate ball extracting member on the upper surface of the operating receiving part. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact with it. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can be moved downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 positions the upper plate ball removal slider 242 at the upward movement end due to the biasing force of the spring, and removes the upper plate ball via the operation receiving part of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The eject button 222 is located at the end of the upward movement. Furthermore, since the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the batted ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 moves downward and comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the ball extractor 143 can now move downward, and the ball extractor 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extractor 143, and the partition portion 143a is connected to the entrance port 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b are ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction member 143 returns to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 feeds the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharges them to the lower tray 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, when the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located at the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. is provided with a lower front decoration part 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A plate left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulges 252a, respectively.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a production operation unit attachment part to which the production operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left and right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 27, 50, and the like. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal cover is aligned with the lower plate ball removal button 263. 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the ball in the lower plate 202 is inserted through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200.

Note that when the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. returns to its normal position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The plate left decoration unit 270 includes a plate left decoration body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate left decoration body that penetrates the plate left decoration body 271 and has translucency. It includes a lens 272 and a plate left decorative board 273 that is provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, its left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate left decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate right decoration unit 275 includes a plate right decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has translucency, and a plate right decoration body 276 that has translucency and passes through the plate right decoration body 276. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 which is provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate right decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decorative body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 sides are higher. As a result, the player can hook his/her finger using the level difference between the plate left decorative unit 270, the plate right decorative unit 275, and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 can be evened out. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 52(a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front bottom. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upwardly moving end position, and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the unit has moved to the raised position. FIG. 56 is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downwardly moving end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. (vibration), and allows the player to participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 is provided above a pressing operation section 303. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 of the outer diameter of the production operation unit 300.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200 and has a spherical outer shape, and a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is attached to the outside and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a performance operation unit mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and used to decorate the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (upper unit cover 312) with light. An outer peripheral decorative board 320, an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operating unit base 315 so as to cover the production operating unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and an operating unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operating unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the production operation unit 350, and the production operation unit 350. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be movable upwardly and backwardly from the top surface of the production operation section cover unit 310 by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting section of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation section base 315. The production operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the production operation unit 300 (around the production operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upwardly and backwardly, and an annular structure having an insertion hole 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and into which the production operation section 301 is inserted. A unit upper cover 312 is provided. The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the production operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the performance operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The production operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the same as that of the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 has at least a unit upper cover 312 having translucency, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of a performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected such that a plate left decoration body 271 and a plate right decoration body 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 is covered with a unit lower cover 311 on the front and lower side, and is covered with a unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301 on the upper side. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operating unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a that is open at the top, and a flange 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates a performance operation unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in a production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Furthermore, a board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange part 315b so as to sandwich the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 315. The operation section relay board unit 330 covers a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315, an operation section relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation section relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333 is attached to the board base 331 as shown in FIG.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), an outer button decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. It relays connections between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, and the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation section unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the production operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303. It is.

The production operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 352 that is inserted into the button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disc-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to be raised and lowered by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button base 354 arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular outer button decoration board 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

The production operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is connected to the button sleeve 353 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface part 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a cylindrical cylindrical part 351b extending downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface part 351a, and a cylindrical part 351b. It has a locking part 351c projecting downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape constituting a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular decoration having a diameter approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation section cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed into a dish shape with an inner side bulging upward by a certain width from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and has a flat inner side. This makes the contact sensing body 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat plate-like downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punched metal, so that the capacitance relative to the entire area is suppressed, thereby preventing false detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 can be easily detected. It can be decorated with light emitting light.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the top or side surface of the button body 351. I can do it. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The sleeve body 353a has an outer diameter that is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and a length that is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit the light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is in the shape of a disc having approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that are symmetrical with respect to the center and that extend vertically through the center, a center hole 354b that extends vertically through the center, and a center hole 354b that projects from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. A pair of guide pins 354c are provided. The guide shafts 362 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The center hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 further includes a flat detection piece 354d that extends downward and is detected by a press detection sensor 373 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The button base 354 has a lower surface in contact with the upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The outer button decorative board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on double concentric circumferences. Specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the button outside decoration board 355, the area on the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact sensing body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the production operation section 301 moves forward and backward. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation section 301 (performance operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, vibrations from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the performance operation section 301 in a good manner. Furthermore, the influence of the vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and the sensor IC and output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects capacitance with a sensor electrode, and outputs an ON signal when a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor is exceeded. Note that in this embodiment, an ON signal is output when a predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of levels of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The production operation unit 350 of this embodiment includes a contact detection body 352 that is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 and is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 can be detected via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the production operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button body It is possible to detect contact or approach of the detected object (player's hand) to the side of 351. For this reason, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the touch operation section 302 using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

This production operation section unit 350 is supported by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to rise and fall in the vertical direction. When the production operation section unit 350 is in the most downwardly moved state (normal state), the top surface part 351a of the button body 351 is aligned with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310, and the production operation section unit 350 is not operated. The unit 300 appears to be one sphere. Then, when the production operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state in which it protrudes higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

To be more specific, when the production operation unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it will not move further downwards even if it is pressed, and is in a state where it cannot be pressed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the press. Detected by sensor 373. As a result, a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is detected.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, when operating the contact operation unit 302, the top surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal which has irregularities due to a plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation section 302. In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is covered by the button body 351, by forming minute irregularities, multiple lines, etc. on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be provided to the touch operation part 302. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation section 302, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

In addition, although the button body 351 is transparent in the above, it is not limited to this, and may be opaque or semi-transparent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the production operation unit 350 can be improved. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be decorated with light emitting light using the light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 provided below, the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364, etc. can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation part elevating mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation base 315, and is capable of raising and lowering the performance operation unit 350. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the production operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically and have lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362, a disc-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and a disc-shaped upper base 363 that is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and emits light upward. It includes a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and which urges the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an operation button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and an operating button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating and lowering drive motor 367. A driving gear 368 in the form of a spur gear, a driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the driving gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a driven gear 369 that is rotated by the driven gear 369. and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 has a lower end connected to an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough and is rotatably attached to the elevating cam that raises and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the press operation unit 303, and an elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 that detects the elevation of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and an elevation detection sensor 374 that is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361 and a holding member under the elevation spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380. A protrusion force detection sensor 375 that detects the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the stage 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base main body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base main body 361a, and a lifting spring that passes through the base main body 361a together with a pair of guide shafts 362. 365 through a pair of through holes 361c. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion force detection sensor 375 are attached to the top surface of the base body 361a. Furthermore, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. By bringing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button interior decorative board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration board 364 can decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light as appropriate.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through the center thereof. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a rotates counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (presentation operation unit 350) is biased upward by the elevating spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Furthermore, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a portion that faces the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the upper protrusion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the production operation section unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowest position (normal state). When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 becomes in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates. When the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 350. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the coupling portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370. The rotational position of is detected.

The ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit 350 in a vertically movable manner via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and also supports the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The performance operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through the above. In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) relative to the production operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. can be done. Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can decorate the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration board 364 as appropriate.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is latched to a locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a) ). In this normal state, the production operation unit 350 is located at the end of downward movement via the button base 354, and even if the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the production operation cannot be performed. The lower unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit top cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350 match, and the production operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevation drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 in the normal state (the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), it engages with the elevation drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 371c to the left side of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

Note that the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact with, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381, although details will be described later. can. Since the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the holding member 385 under the lifting spring, the production operation unit 350 is raised with a protruding force corresponding to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. It can be projected into position.

When the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the top surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is lowered from the top surface of the unit upper cover 312. It also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lift spring 365 in this raised position, the production operation unit 350 presses the lift spring 365. The button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the button base 354 and comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( A press on the press operation section 303) is detected.

In order to return the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so the third cam 371e moves the guide pin 354c is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward through the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In addition, when returning the production operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381 of the ejecting force adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also decreases. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and to reduce damage (failure) to the operation button lift drive motor 367. Further, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the button base 354 stops moving downward, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the production operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In addition, in the above, in the production operation part elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( Although an example has been described in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project from the lowered position to the raised position at once, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved from the lifting cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of 371 and moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a clockwise direction when viewed from above. It may also be rotated in the circumferential direction. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is approximately 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 354c to the third cam 371e. It will move upward along. When the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 can be moved upwardly at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 is pushed to the pressing operation section 303. It can function as

Note that when the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. Thereby, the load applied to the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be made lighter.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2002 or By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004), it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest.

In addition, at least one shallow recessed portion capable of locking the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be stably projected to a position with the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least in one location in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the elevating cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the force (of force) for the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) to protrude upward by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward. It is possible to change the ejection force (ejection force). The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, and a pinion gear in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. The adjusting screw 384 has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; 384, a pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and lower ends of a pair of lift springs 365 are in contact with a holding member 385 under the lift spring.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft protruding into a gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in the vertical direction. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a that extends back and forth, a threaded hole 385b that vertically passes through the center of the main body 385a and is threadedly engaged with a screw part 384b, and a threaded hole 385b that extends from the front and back of the main body 385a. It has a downwardly recessed spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . In the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385, the guide shaft 362 passes through the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 to rotate the adjustment screw 384, thereby moving the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction through the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower lifting spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 to urge the production operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Accordingly, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation section unit 350 upward can be reduced. Thereby, the upward protrusion force of the production operation section unit 350 can be adjusted by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 is the largest. As a result, when the ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is moved by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. By stopping the upward movement of the lifting spring 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 as appropriate, so when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button body. 351 is detected, and the performance operation unit 350 is projected by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the detected target. At times, the protruding force of the button body 351 may be varied by appropriately selecting the vertical position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, it is possible to vary the strength applied to the player's fingers, etc., so that when the button body 351 makes strong contact, something good may happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that the player is playing the game, and to increase the player's expectations for the game. Therefore, according to the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380, the button By increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest to the player.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by adding twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the production operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it will be difficult to use it differently from the original use. This causes stress to act on the compression coil spring, leading to early deterioration of the internal structure and risk of damage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress is not applied to the lift spring 365, and early deterioration of the lift spring 365 can be reduced. It is possible to stably protrude over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board, the outer button decoration board, and the button inner decoration board in a plan view of the production operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed into a spherical shape as a whole, and includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by the player. The production operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by contact or approach with the player's hand, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing. The contact operation section 302 is provided above the press operation section 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 in such a state that the projection direction of the press operation section 303 (the performance operation section unit 350) which can protrude upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the production operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300. Thereby, the production operation section 301 is easily visible to a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the presentation operation unit 300, the press operation section 303 (the presentation operation section unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the presentation operation section unit 350 is This corresponds to the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the press operation section 303 is pressed downward, the press operation section 303 (performance operation section unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 appears to the player as a mere spherical decoration, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 disposed below a unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the press operation section 303 (presentation operation section unit 350). An annular outer-button decorative board 355 is arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and an inner-button decorative board 364 is arranged further inside thereof. The production operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button inner decoration board 364, the button outer decoration board 355, and the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Note that the LEDs 355a inside the inner button decorative board 364 and the outer button decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, the light transmittance is improved. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (towards the player) in a good manner.

The performance operation unit 300 can decorate the annular unit top cover 312 with light emission using the LED 320a of the performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Furthermore, the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer circumferential surface can be decorated with light by the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355. Furthermore, the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 can be decorated with light by the LED 364a of the button interior decoration board 364.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, so that By sequentially emitting light, a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the press operation section 303 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect in which the light spreads from the center of the press operation part 303 to the outside, and a light emission effect in which the light spreads from the outside to the center of the press operation part 303 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that appears to converge.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the touch operation section 302 can enable touch operations depending on the player participation type performance to be performed.

As a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance) in which the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is not protruded, for example, a performance image that prompts the user to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs audio, sound effects, etc. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the process moves to the next presentation stage. Note that when a contact is detected, the button body 351 is decorated with light by emitting light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the player has accepted the contact operation. It is also possible to provide a feeling of operation to the contact operation section 302. At this time, the player's expectations for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game) are determined by the light emitting color, light emitting brightness, light emitting pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation section 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the touch operation has been accepted. Note that at this time, the vibration motor 356 may be used to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to give the player an indication of their expectations for the game. good.

In addition, as a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance), a performance image that prompts the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and audio, sound effects, etc. are output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (his/her hand or finger) to the top surface of the button body 351, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (production operation unit 350). The biasing force of the spring 365 causes it to protrude upward (pop up). To be more specific, in a normal state, when the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operating button lifting drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves toward the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), and due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the production operation section unit 350 (button body 351, press operation section 303) together with the button base 354 forcefully protrudes upward to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is positioned higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player. It can strongly attract interest.

Thereafter, the game moves to an effect in which the button body 351 (press operation section 303) is pressed, and the player is entertained by pressing the button body 351 (press operation section 303). To be more specific, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and pressing the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved. As the button body 351 moves downward, the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the performance can be changed using the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with a player participation type performance.

In addition, during the above performance, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion force (force) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, thereby adjusting the player's expectations for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion force. It is also possible to make it suggest. Further, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In a performance that causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the movement range (within the protrusion range) of the button body 351 that projects upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like, giving a shock, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the player can be informed of his/her expectations for the game based on the strength of the protrusion force.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the contact detection body 352 detects whether the player's finger or the like is outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user approaches the user. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, thereby indicating to the player his/her expectations for the game based on the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation section unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is made to protrude with a strong protrusion force by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully and generate a sound (protrusion sound), so the protrusion sound may surprise the player. I can do it. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made to protrude with a weak protrusion force using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 protrudes. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

For the performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the urging force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is It is also possible to perform an effect that causes the user to perform a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as a performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, a performance such as a touch operation on the protruding button body 351 may be performed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated by contact. In addition, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby making it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move. 302) can be easily touched.

In addition, as for the effect of protruding the effect operation part unit 350, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Although an example has been shown in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b (locking part 371c) to the second cam 371d. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked with the locking part 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifts and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 clockwise in plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is moved in the middle of the third cam 371e. The button body 351 may be stopped from protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position by stopping the rotation of the button body 351. At this time, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude partway through the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the press operation section 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, expectations for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain players.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the projected performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. to its minimum state. As a result, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is at its weakest, so the production operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation. Can entertain. In addition, as a performance that presses the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351), the holding member 385 under the vertical movement spring is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the special lottery result, and the biasing force of the vertical movement spring 365 is applied. may be made to have any strength from the strongest to the weakest. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and it is possible to enjoy a more diverse range of functions. It is possible to present effects and make it difficult for players to get bored.

In addition, as a performance using the performance operation unit 300, a contact detection body is installed so that the contact of a player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of levels of threshold values may be provided according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each level. In other words, by focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 increases as the player's finger approaches the button body 351 (contact sensing body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. By providing a multi-stage detection, it may be used for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, or the game By dividing the presentation into stages such as when the player's hand or finger is in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the presentation according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 can present a variety of presentations to the player. This makes it possible to make it difficult for players to get bored of the game, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), as shown in FIG. It may also be in a state where it is moved downward. Thereby, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Moreover, the urging force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the holding member 385 under the lifting spring.

In this way, the performance operation unit 300 of the present embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation type performances, so it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performances, and to keep the players from getting bored. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, in the production operation unit 300, an annular (two circular arcs combined) production operation part outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided on the top of a spherical production operation part cover unit 310, and a production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the performance operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative board 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the production operation section unit 350, a button decoration board 364 whose position is fixed is provided. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the production operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation part outer circumference decorative board 320 and button inner decoration board 364, and as the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 and button inner decoration board 364 approach, the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield is connected to the ground (GND) between the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 or button inner decoration board 364 changes by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down, the contact detection sensor main body 358 A shield connected to the ground (GND), which does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor body 358, is connected between the outer peripheral decoration board 320 of the production operation part 320 and the button inner decoration board 364, so that the outer decoration board 320 of the production operation part It is possible to reduce the influence of changes in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent false detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Next, a dish unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of a production operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching section is provided between the plate unit and the plate unit, and (c) is an explanatory diagram that allows the plate left decoration unit, plate right decoration unit, production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the production is performed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the operation unit and the like. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right parts, a left contact detection body 390L and a right contact detection body 390R. A left contact detection sensor body 391L and a right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when the player moves his or her fingers from the left side to the right side on the upper surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes sensing, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-sensing. becomes. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both 391R on the right are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-sensing, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R decreases. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. is determined by the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, and the patterns of their changes. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player participatory performance that allows the contact operation section 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the contact operation section 302. Note that by adding more contact detectors, more complex motions can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact by a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, any one of them will be detected. Contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation section 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, parts where the player may get injured, parts that may cause trouble to other players). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent activity, etc.), and when any contact detection body 393 detects a human body, etc., a caution or a warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switch between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired part (contact detection body 352). . Note that the switching unit 394 may be ``a device that is switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor,'' ``a device that is switched by another electronic circuit,'' or ``a movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c). unit 270, plate right decoration unit 275, and effect operation unit 300) that are switched as the unit 270 moves, etc.

For example, in the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type performance is executed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 in the order in which they are touched, and the contact detection bodies 393 detect whether or not the player's finger or the like has touched the contact detection bodies 393. good. Thereby, it is possible to present to the player a highly game-like, player-participatory performance using the plurality of contact sensing bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300 are made to be able to move forward and backward, the first plate is placed on the front side of the production operation unit 300. In addition to providing the contact detection body 393a, a second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are to be retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. It may also be possible to switch it so that it does.

As a result, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player, and the forward movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. Make it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressuring the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is made to protrude forward, a gap may be formed at the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc., and when the player's finger or the like is inserted into the gap, the production operation unit 300 etc. If the operation unit 300 and the like are moved back to the initial position, there is a risk that the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving the production operation unit 300 and the like that have been moved forward to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's hand, etc., the movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. to the rear is stopped and the hand, etc. is removed from the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc. The player is notified of the guidance, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the performance operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 that detects the contact of a player's finger or the like is star-shaped, so that it has decorativeness (design). Note that the shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a shape imitating a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, etc. As a result, since the contact detection body 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be formed of a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as above can be achieved. It should be noted that it is desirable to provide the contact sensing element on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers and the like do not touch it directly.This can avoid wear of the contact sensing element and also improve the tactile sensation with the surface member. It can be made smooth.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the button decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact sensing body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), A contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the production operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(b), the contact sensing body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the decorative body 398 provided below is not visible due to the metallic luster of the contact sensing body 397. , the decoration 398 may be made visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 upon detection of contact with the surface member 396, etc. good.

Further, the contact sensing body 352 may be formed so as to be unrecognizable to the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact sensing body include "one formed of a transparent member" and "one formed so as to be visible integrally with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body". As a result, the production operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot detect the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of a finger or the like with respect to the player or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and a player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the side, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detection body 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest. I can do it.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is a sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame left side base 421. The decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame has a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and the lower part of the front side of the left side base 421 of the door frame. The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are covered with a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front side. a left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423; A door frame left side decoration body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and an upper and lower left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. A left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light forward from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and a first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. and a lower left side light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the left side base 421 of the door frame are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). In addition, when molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. An LED 422b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 422a and 8 second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

On the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, a total of 15 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, there are two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and the right side is formed to be uneven. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. An LED 423b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups. Thus, a total of 21 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a comes into contact with the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 424a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, which will be described later. It is. This holding tube 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second part of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing from the through hole 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof The light from the LED 422b is irradiated onto the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, thereby avoiding the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a comes into contact with the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 425a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guiding member 428 and a cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guiding member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. This holds the light guiding shaft portion 428a and the light guiding shaft portion 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which is facing closer, is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides, and the left side of the door frame is illuminated with equal light intensity. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the lower left side reflector 425, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decoration body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guiding shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guiding member 427, a light guiding shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guiding member 428, a light guiding shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guiding member 429, The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 further includes a decoration part 426b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft parts 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 427a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding tubes 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft parts 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 428a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 428a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft parts 429a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 429b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 429a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the side decoration body 426. This lower left side light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed in the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward than a lower portion, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. This door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end below the door window 101a and the pan unit base 210 of the pan base unit 210. The speaker port 211b is located above the speaker port 211b. Moreover, the upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are placed at a position a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. , the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame. is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. (light), the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than other parts.

In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft part 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, and the middle left side light guiding member 428 The light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side lower light guide member 429 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides. Even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows will be difficult to see, and the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame will not be evenly spaced. It can be decorated with light emitting light on a surface.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decoration body 426 has a decoration part 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, and light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 due to the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, Since the decorative part 426b is provided in the area where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft part 427a, the light guide shaft part 428a, and the light guide shaft part 429a can be made difficult to see. The appearance of the light emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front are mounted, and the lower part of the front of the right side base 431 of the door frame. A lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, an upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and a lower decorative board 432 on the lower right side of the door frame. The right side reflector 434 is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433, and the right side reflector 434 of the door frame is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration body 435.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and The lower right side light guide member 437 guides the light from one LED 433a forward.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a having a predetermined shape and penetrating left and right. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431, and is configured to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A right-side left lens 439 having translucent properties and a decorative portion 439a to be fitted therein, and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439 having a translucent property and having a decorative portion 439a fitted thereto, and a plurality of lenses that are attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A right-side right lens 441 having a light-transmitting property and having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close a decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width from side to side. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends downward from the upper end almost straight to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439, and a right side right lens). A plurality of reflector parts 431a are provided at the height where the decorative parts 441a) are provided, and are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end. These reflector parts 431a have a rear end side that is inside the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a that is inclined toward the side surface side, and a bottom surface that is curved.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is , penetrates in the left and right direction (concave from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the right side base 431 of the door frame reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and a third LED 433c of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction to decorate the decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, and a third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 16 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 432a, 8 second LEDs 432b, and 4 third LEDs 432c, are mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so each first LED 432a, second LED 432b, In order to cause each of the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 21 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the LED driver 432d on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later, The third LED 433c is divided into two groups, and a total of 24 systems are controlled, including three systems for one group on the upper side.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires and one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 groups, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 2 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 LEDs on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The upper two third LEDs 433c of the divided groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and a third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 22 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c, so each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, In order to cause each of the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 27 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame can only control up to 24 systems at the maximum, the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame controls the third LED 433c, which is divided into two groups. Of these, three systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side) 2) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has two wires that supply power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one control signal line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to the main clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of Each group includes 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups. Each can be made to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a comes into contact with the front surfaces of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The sides are shaped like a saucer that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. This is to hold the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame facing from the through hole 434a on both upper and lower sides of the light guiding shaft 436a and the light guiding shaft 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward. The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides, and the right side decorative body of the door frame It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the light guide shaft 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decoration body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a passing through in the vertical direction at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left and right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426. Further, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further includes a decoration part 435b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft parts 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 436a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding tubes 434b from the top of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip end surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This upper right side light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 436a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft parts 437a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 437b that connects the lower ends of the six light guide shaft parts 437a. , made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This lower right side light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 437a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed into a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a front end formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is molded in two colors from two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). When the decorative portion 439a is fitted into the decorative hole 438a, its surface coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. This door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed to have approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the total height of the door frame 3. Moreover, the front end side of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435.

The right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame right side left side decorative body 438, has an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. It is molded in two colors using two types of resin, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and protrudes to the right to attach to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). When the decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a, its surface coincides with the outside (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (see FIG. 70). The right lens 441 on the right side is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and is connected to the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration of the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern parts on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are different from those on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side decoration body 438. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial pattern part on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes more forward than a portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from the upper end to the lower end. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely protrudes forward from the top to approximately half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side to see the inside of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) in the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed into a screen shape, it can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. By making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without worrying about it.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. , the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and a door frame right side lower decorative board. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (light guided) forward by the light guide shaft part 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft part 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be caused to emit light in a dotted manner more brightly than other parts.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 lights up the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, thereby changing the reflector part of the door frame right side base 431. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side can be decorated with light emission. Furthermore, since parts of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a) can be decorated with light, this pachinko machine 1 can be displayed to other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can stand out and has high appeal to players.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Because of the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b is transmitted to the rear door. The frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are illuminated to decorate with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front side. It can be used to decorate or prevent luminescence. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435, the rear door frame right side left side decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be completely independently illuminated and decorated, so It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light-emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, a first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and a light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a are illuminated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides, so that the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame is illuminated with light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be evenly illuminated in a planar manner.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side decoration body 435 with a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decoration body 435 due to the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows will not be projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the area where the light guide shaft 435b is located, the shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, respectively.

The door frame top unit 450 covers a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top and bottom plate (not shown) are connected to the bottom end of the door frame.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the door A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration body 453 so as to cover the front of the side speakers (not shown), the top center speaker and the top side speakers, and the front side of the door frame top base 451. It includes a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from above, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top cover 452 in plan view. Further, the door frame top decoration body 453 has a front surface formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the center portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 457a to emit light.

A pair of top center speakers are provided spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters and output high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a portion behind the inside of the upper parts of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. has been done. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71, and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. As a result, the entire circumference of the door window 101a can be seen as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights to the player.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration body 271, a plate right decoration body 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration body 426, a door frame right side decoration body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration body 453, a plate left decorative board 273, a plate right decorative board 278, a production operation section outer circumference decorative board 320, a left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By causing the LEDs to emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, and a light emitting effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 is attached at the center in the left-right direction. As a result, since the large spherical production operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200, the visual impact can be increased. This allows the operation section 303) to stand out.

In addition, in a normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 as the production operation section 301 is continuously aligned with the top surface of the unit top cover 312, forming one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable. It is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from a pachinko machine, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to increase the appeal to the players. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300, the production operation section 301 (contact operation section 302 The upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entire performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, and the performance operation section 301 can be easily viewed. You can make it look bigger. Further, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical performance operation section 301, and it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the player participation type performance in which the player operates the performance operation section 301. In addition, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, thereby increasing the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, a door frame right side unit 430 is shown as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 as an example.

To be more specific, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the outer surface of the door frame 3 are made of two different colors and two types of synthetic resins with different translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, with a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, circular or radial patterns are formed.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a is visible, and the opaque outer layer 3b is visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior with an emphasized circular or radial pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern on the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, making it relatively circular and Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior appearance emphasizes the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a.

In addition, in FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 that is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration part 441a fitted into the decoration hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthetic By appropriately selecting and combining the color, light transmittance, etc. of the resin (resin), it is possible to make the appearance significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without increasing cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern on the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, by changing the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot, and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look for players. It is possible to increase the appeal of

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame molded in two colors. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiments, circular or radial patterns are formed, but the invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295 provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the left side of the right side of the door frame Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot pattern decoration is created by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is also applied to the decorative body at the same time. There is no need to apply desired decorations by painting or the like after the formation, and the effort required for decorations can be omitted and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outside appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the circle of the polka dot pattern and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. If they are formed using the same color with different ratios, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are of the same color, giving the appearance that the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b will cause The polka dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka dots. In this way, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. Costs can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and pachinko machines 1 from different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment becomes colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can give a strong impact to players who are roaming around the game hall and can attract players.

Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances is provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward in the door frame 3, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, etc. are provided, so the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorative bodies to improve the appearance. I can do it.

Furthermore, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made transparent so that it cannot be seen from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin with high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body to be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

In addition, as described above, since the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, it is possible to create a pattern on the surface of the inner layer 3a (such as a pattern by shape, painting, printing, pasting of a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, an opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance was used to prevent the pattern on the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , it is possible to suppress the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, a third LED 432c of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and a lower decorative board on the right side of the door frame are capable of irradiating light inside the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame. 433 third LEDs 433c, and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the door frame 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is illuminated. The part of the layer 3a (the polka dot part) can be decorated with bright light, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light to improve the appearance. The light-emitting decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be enjoyed, and a decline in player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be decorated with light by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that are irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be decorated with light emitting light, and the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame can be made to look beautiful for games. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the attention of players.

Further, as described above, the decorations of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances. (molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c may emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface or the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the player is not in use can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is emitting light, and by changing the decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player. To explain in detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a at a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED will not emit light. In this state, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the part of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed, so that the inner layer is exposed to the surface of the outer layer 3b. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion become visible, and a different decoration is visible than when the LED is not emitting light. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is decorated with light. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light, so depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED, the decoration is decorated with light. It is possible to change the parts that are decorated with light, and the decoration that is decorated with luminescence can be changed. In this way, since the decoration of the decoration body can be made different by emitting light from the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED light up according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorations can alert the player to the arrival of a chance or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "hitting right"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to suggest and can perform a variety of performances.

In addition, since the amount of protrusion in the front and rear direction of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) is different, Since the impression (view) of this pachinko machine 1 can be made different when viewed from the front left and from the front right, the pachinko machine 1 can be played around the game hall where it is installed. Even if a player passes in front of this pachinko machine 1, when approaching this pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1 will be drawn because the appearance will be different from the previous time. This makes it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players who are roaming around the game hall to select a pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a player's rotation operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b. It has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. It is divided into 5 groups: 1, 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery, and 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by broken lines in FIG. 72: two on the lower left from the center, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into six groups: the two on the bottom right and the two on the bottom right. These 6 groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the handle 195, or to direct the light toward the center of the handle 195. A light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated or a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be decorated with light by the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decoration 435 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. Because of this, it is possible to present to the player a decoration that looks like the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A lower side decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

To be more specific, the plate left decorative board 273 includes four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LED 273a of the plate right decorative board 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 273a are controlled by six systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The plate right decorative board 278 includes four LEDs 278a mounted on the front side in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED drivers on the plate left decorative board 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for causing a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, there are four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b are mounted, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. A first LED 432a divided into two sets, a second LED 432b divided into three sets, a third LED 432c divided into two sets, and a third LED divided into two sets on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The upper set of third LEDs 433c among the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and third LED 433c of each set are controlled by an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

On the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front side arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b are mounted, four third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower side. and an LED driver 433d for causing the light to emit light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and the 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower 1 group divided into 2 groups? , 24 systems are controlled by LED drivers 433d, and each set of first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the border. Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

Note that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are The numbers of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. (systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are installed symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create data of an LED lighting pattern for performing a light emission effect.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front side at intervals in the left-right direction, and the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the light to emit light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by nine systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, The light from the first LED 433a of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is transmitted through the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the lower left side guiding member. The opening of the left side decoration body 426 of the door frame is formed by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, players can see a light-emitting effect that emits bright light in the form of dots on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light-emitting effect that flashes brightly in spots can make players ``awk''.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the lower left side of the door frame Second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame, LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, top left decorative board of the door frame By making the LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the light can be produced so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to the player.

In other words, in the door frame 3, a light emitting effect is performed in which spot light is emitted in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 using the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface light emission) using the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. 72. I can do it.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and from there forward. Therefore, compared to the general surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the openings 426a and the openings 435a can be spot-emitted with high brightness and brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame is illuminated as a spot with high brightness, the glare will not make it difficult to see inside the gaming area 5a facing from the door window 101a, and the game can be played through the door window 101a. The game balls B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the left side decoration body 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration body 435 are made to protrude forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and emit spot light with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that project forward. Since the light from the spot emission is provided on the vertical line), the light from the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (toward the door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and The inside of the gaming area 5a is not difficult to see, and other players can be drawn to the pachinko machine 1 by emitting spot light with high brightness.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, parts that emit spot light are provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which protrude forward and outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emitting part is located outside of the player, so the player will not block the spot light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the high-intensity spot light is visible even to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to other players about the existence of this pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can attract players who are playing around the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for causing spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pins (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the LEDs for the two surfaces are illuminated in the same manner, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the LEDs on the left side of the door frame 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame are illuminated with the same amount of light. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the top surface. A production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided. This production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 of the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, 6 LEDs 320a are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner periphery, and 3 LEDs 320a are provided at intervals on a circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer periphery.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322, 4 LEDs are provided on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 2 LEDs are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 LEDs are provided at intervals between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. They are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals of three on the circumference near the outer circumference near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 73, 6 LEDs on the inner circumference, 3 sets of 2 LEDs each in the circumferential direction, and 3 LEDs on the middle circumference. They are divided into 9 groups in total: 3 groups with 1 piece each, and 3 groups with 3 pieces each in the circumferential direction of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference. Furthermore, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. The 3 pieces are divided into 3 groups of 1 piece each, and the 9 pieces on the outer circumference are divided into 2 groups of 3 pieces near each end, for a total of 7 groups. That is, in the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, a light emission production in which the light rotates in the production operation section 301 or a light emission in which light is concentrated at the center can be produced. It is possible to show the player a performance and a light emission performance in which light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the outside of the door window 101a facing the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction is different from each other on the outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. 435, a left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted, and a lower left side decoration on the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted. A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and guides the light from the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forwards it. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 to be irradiated, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the right side of the door frame are provided. By causing the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame to emit light, the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are illuminated. Light emitting decoration (surface luminescence) can be performed in a planar manner, and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light irradiated forward is transmitted to the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is emitted forward from their front ends (front end faces), and the light is emitted forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Corresponding to the tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to decorate the area with dots of light (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. By appropriately emitting light from the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the gaming area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the whole of the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner, or a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emission in dots. Since the entire side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with luminescence in a planar manner, and a portion can be decorated with luminescence in a dotted manner, a variety of luminescence effects can be shown to the player. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated, and the system on the right side of the door frame. The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated are made bilaterally symmetrical with respect to each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are in different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side When creating the data, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side may be used as the data for the door frame right side decoration 435 side, or the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side and the door frame side may be used. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that on the right side decorative body 435 side, the effort required to create lighting pattern data can be reduced (with the same creation time) ) It becomes easier to construct data for more complex lighting patterns, and it is possible to show players a variety of lighting effects using lighting patterns. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit a sufficient lighting effect for the light emitting effects in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the right and left sides of the door frame 101a.

Furthermore, since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LED 423b, 2nd LED 432b, and 2nd LED 433b provided with the 1st LED 422a, 1st LED 423a, 1st LED 432a, and 1st LED 433a in between are of the same system. , first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b provided in the LEDs 422b, 423b, and 433b are always lit at the same time, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a, the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide by the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are irradiated with light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 427a, light guiding shaft portion 428a, light guiding shaft portion 429a, light guiding shaft portion 436a, and light guiding shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly decorated with light in a planar manner.

In addition, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are Parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are decorated with dots of light by the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see a light-emitting effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as emitting light in a planar manner and partially emitting dot-like light. It is possible to strongly attract the attention of players through light-emitting effects, etc., and the light-emitting effects that emit sparkling spots in the form of dots, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, can make players ``ah-ha''. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are shaped asymmetrically with respect to each other, at first glance, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame are assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid incorrectly attaching the lower right side decorative board 433, improve assembly workability, and suppress increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Next, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, are shown. The upper side decorative board 432, the lower door frame right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. That's what I do. As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board is reflected to the front side, making it possible to decorate the front decorations etc. with brighter light. This makes the decorative board less noticeable.

Note that the white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identification parts 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification section 7 includes a character identification section 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b using different colors (indicated by different shades of shading in FIG. 74). It has .

To be more specific, as the character identification part 7a, the plate left decorative board 273 has the characters "lower left", the plate right decorative board 278 has the characters "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the characters "upper left". The lower left decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has the characters "lower left," the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "upper right," and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "lower right." The text is "Top Middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "Top Left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "Top Right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification part 7b is applied not to the entire rear surface but only partially so as not to interfere with soldering of LEDs etc. mounted on the decorative board. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In addition, in the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but the various decorative boards provided in the handle unit 180, the production operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc. Identification parts 7 such as character identification part 7a and color identification part 7b may also be provided on the decorative board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification section 7 includes both the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification section 7a may be used. However, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to use a decorative board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative board from being assembled during assembly work, and to improve the workability of assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be By reflecting the light to the front side on the front side of the decorative board, the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light, and the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player's side), improving the appearance. You can make it better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification part 7b serving as the identification part 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, a desired (desired color) can be determined just by looking at a part of the decorative board. ) can recognize whether it is a decorative board or not. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards overlap during assembly, as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, the desired decorative board can be easily found, reducing the time and effort required for assembly. can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative board, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, it is necessary to use the same color If there is a decorative board provided with the identification part 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative substrate, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative substrate that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, you can easily recognize whether you have prepared extra decorative boards or not enough decorative boards. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the necessary number of decorative boards, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing from other boards is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the operator can read the characters in the character identification part 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear surfaces of each decorative board are white, and the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface, so that the decorations provided in front of the decorative board have high transparency. Also, the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (player side), and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the white front surface of the decorative board can reflect the light from the LED forward. This makes it possible to decorate the decorative body with brighter light, and to entertain the players with the highly effective light-emitting performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so that the functional parts are not visible from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly due to visibility, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration (gaming machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by providing them on the rear surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to omit the trouble of coloring the functional parts and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired part where it is desired to detect approach or contact of a player By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired part, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect changes in capacitance, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. In response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392, predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512. On the other hand, when the contact detection body 393 of the desired part and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in other parts and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected. will be disconnected, so even if the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 provided at the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact sensing body 393 will be disconnected. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 are not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 at the desired location is reliably detected. can be used to prevent false detections.

In this way, from among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions, the contact detection body 393 to be connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. It becomes possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means, the number of channels required to detect the approach or contact of a player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, it becomes possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, and the increase in the number of performance means allows players to enjoy a more diverse range of performances. In addition to making it difficult for the players to get bored, it is possible to fully entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 are set to the desired parts by the switching unit 394 depending on the game state. The contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to detect the approach or contact of a player to a desired part, and control the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to ignore a predetermined caution or alarm by means of this method, it is possible to monitor a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and to relatively reduce the number of channels that can be used for production. The number can be increased, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor body containing electronic components such as sensor IC and output circuit can be installed in a part that is difficult for players to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increases its appeal to players. can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The contact detection sensor main body 392 can detect the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 by simply connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor body 392, the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected to each other. This reduces the number of parts compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. This reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and also eliminates the need for designing the routing of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented.

Further, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact sensing body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can select the contact sensing body 393 to be detected. When a player participatory performance is executed in which a plurality of distributed contact sensing bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection sensor body 392 at the timing when the player touches them in order. By switching the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detectors 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can be operated by pressing the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352, which is made of a metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with 351 (performance operation unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the outside button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating and lowering. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button interior decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game. At this time, when a player approaches or touches the production operation unit 350, a predetermined production is output, so the production operation unit 350 is activated as a non-contact operation unit or It can function as a touch operation section. Since the performance operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed and operated by the player when it is protruded, the performance operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation. Since it is possible to perform a variety of performance operations such as operation, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 that has a different appearance from conventional pachinko machines with operation buttons that can only be operated by pressing, and it is possible to make it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that has an appearance different from that of conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be operated by pressing. By differentiating the pachinko machine from other machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button body 351). Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the capacitance and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the player's approach to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to the time of contact in multiple stages, and therefore output a performance according to each stage. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the production operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, so that the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its appeal to players can be increased.

In addition, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of performance operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, so it is possible to perform player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible for the players to enjoy the player participation type performance, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate in which a plurality of holes are formed, it is difficult for the player to touch the button body 351 due to the plurality of holes. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of a plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact sensing body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance. It is possible to widen the range in which the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is detected. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, so as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged and , if the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the top surface 351a of the button body 351, the player will not be able to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the top surface 351a of the button body 351, the player's hand or finger approaches or contacts the production operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, it is difficult to miss the operation timing in a player participation type performance, and the player can be reliably participated in the player participation type performance. This performance can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as a performance means provided on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side can be inserted through the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. The light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the medium decorative board 364 can be outputted to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing is provided with a contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even if the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced. 350 can be made less likely to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the production operation unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the production operation unit 350 without hesitation, and can operate the production operation unit 350. To make a player participatory performance more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact sensing body 352 can be made thinner than when the contact sensing body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to make it easy to provide the contact detection body 352, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, making it more appealing to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be designed easily.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal, so the contact sensing body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be easily shaped to be optimal for detecting the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the production operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button body 351, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to the player touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed. In a player participatory performance using the player as an operation part, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the performance can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact sensing body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. Therefore, the effort required for cleaning can be reduced, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side. A predetermined performance can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be It is possible to reliably enjoy the performance outputted through (via) the operation unit 350 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since the contact sensing body 352 is provided in such a way that the presentation means is covered by the contact detection body 352, it is possible to compactly organize the contact detection body 352 (the presentation operation section unit 350) and the presentation means, as described above. To provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by making it easy to install a performance operation unit 350 and a performance means etc. in a desired part of the pachinko machine 1, which have the above-mentioned effects. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the performance is activated. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to prevent the player from approaching the performance operation unit 350. Or contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350, the production operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the production operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the production operation unit 350, it will come into contact with (collide with) the player, and the player will be in contact with the production operation unit 350. When the performance operation section unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player a performance using physical force such as pushing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to players with performances that have not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players to the performance operation unit 350. The protrusion of the performance operation section unit 350 can be surely noticed.

When projecting the production operation unit 350, if the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lifting spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes weaker and the urging force can be increased, and the lifting spring 365 is By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the production operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be projected with various protruding forces, it is possible to increase the variation of performances based on physical force, making it difficult for players to get bored, and making it possible to control the performance operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect caused by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the protruding force of the production operation unit 350 is changed depending on the gaming state, when the player approaches or contacts the production operation unit 350 with his or her fingers, a strong force is applied to the production operation unit 350. When the 350 comes into contact, a strong impact is given to the player, making him think that something good is going to happen (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage), and the game It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is configured as a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player participation type production is executed, the player can press the production operation unit 350 to play the game. The player can participate in the participatory performance, and can enjoy pressing operations on the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing loss of interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible for players who place their hands or fingers on the production operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) to be able to perform the press operation at any time. When a player participatory performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Even without providing guidance on the start of execution of the performance, it is possible to quickly make the player aware of the start of execution of the performance with player participation, and increase the desire to press the performance operation section unit 350 to start the performance with player participation. You can enjoy it even more.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared to the case where the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude using a drive motor. Therefore, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected. Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the production operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and cause the production operation unit 350 to protrude with a different ejection force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 to the time of contact in multiple stages. By making the game stand out with a projecting force, it is possible to present a more diverse range of performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, by causing the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 to pop up when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can enter the performance operation unit 350 that is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. When approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches in the performance operation section unit 350 changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, it is possible to detect contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the detection body 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is activated by the capacitance. Players can be detected. Then, by detection of the contact detection sensor body 358 or movement (pressure) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer button decoration board 355, the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board A predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the performance operation unit 350 or approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest in playing games.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation section unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) is operated as the performance operation section (non-contact operation section, contact operation section). You can make it work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances or retreats (presses) the performance operation unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation unit 350 can function like a performance operation unit (press operation unit). For this reason, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored, and it is also possible to let the players enjoy the player participation type performance, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of a contact detection body 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface part 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact sensing body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined performance are provided, and each It becomes possible to perform different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since a predetermined performance is executed by the player's detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the performance operation (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation (contact operation), and it is possible to make the performance operation more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, it includes a performance operation unit 350 that the player can move forward and backward (press), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Therefore, in a player participation type performance, the player is required to perform an operation to move the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (press operation), or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. I can do it. When a player participates in a player participation type production, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player in the participatory performance, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the production operation unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the production operation unit 350 is locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, until a performance such as advancing or retracting the performance operation unit 350 is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is prevented from moving forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking on its own. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel distrustful or anxious due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and making the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable. You can make it possible to

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position apart from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor that has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is difficult for players to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be selected according to the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to optimally correspond to the above, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. When the user approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396 with the button outer decorative substrate 355, the inner button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the contact sensing element 352 or the contact sensing element 397 The capacitance of the button changes, and a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player side by the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The player's attention can be strongly attracted to the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light irradiated to the button, and the performed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398, Since it is formed along the decorative part provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397 is part of the decorative part, and the game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting a player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, it is assumed that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be concerned about the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397, and the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 will not be bothered by the player. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 will not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effects of the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covers the outside of the button. Since the decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 is configured to perform a production in which light is irradiated to the player side, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the production operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and it is also possible to provide the player with a sense of operation using light. Therefore, for example, when executing a player participation type production, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact sensor 352 or the contact sensor 397 approaches or contacts the player's finger or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396. By detecting the contact, the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decoration body 398 executes the effect, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the kata performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Since it is possible to change the effect of the outside button decorative board 355, button inside decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 depending on the distance from the outside button decorative board 355, depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the presentation by the decorative board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button, and it is possible to show a more diverse presentation to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the variety of presentation. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 are detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is configured to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member, so that, for example, When the contact detection body 397 is made of a metal vapor deposited film, it can be made transparent by making the vapor deposited film thin, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by making the vapor deposited film thick and have a metallic luster. I can do it. Alternatively, if the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punched metal with a design such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection bodies 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable from the player side, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacitance is increased when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front side). As a result of the change, a predetermined effect is produced by the effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact sensing body 395 (including the contact sensing body 352, the left contact sensing body 390L, the right contact sensing body 390R, the contact sensing body 393, the contact sensing body 397, etc.) for displaying the Since the contact sensing body 395 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact sensing body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact sensing body 395. Since the means presents a predetermined effect via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can function as the performance operation section 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the production operation section 301 appears to have a design, which is unlike any previous pachinko machine. Since the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the operation section 301, it can give a strong impact to players, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as described above, the touch detection body 395 etc. with a design can give a strong impact to the player, so it is possible to strongly arouse interest in the touch detection body 395 etc. (button body 351). It is possible to increase expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to make the operation of the button body 351 enjoyable when a player participation type performance in which the button body 351 is operated is executed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, some effects may be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the performance operation section 301 (button body 351) for presenting the performance by means of means. Therefore, when a player participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, by prompting the player to approach or touch the button body 351, the button body 351 is first activated by the contact detection body 395, etc. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation section 301, and it is possible to give a surprise to the player and make the player participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player participatory performance that operates the performance operation section 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing that it is the performance operation section 301, the static state of the contact detection body 395, etc. Since the capacitance is changed and the performance is presented by the performance presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presentation means in accordance with the change in capacitance in the contact detection body 395 etc., the player's finger or the like does not touch the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented. In addition, since the effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395, etc., contact is caused by the approach of the player's finger, etc. to the button body 351 that covers the contact detection body 395, etc. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making it difficult for the user to get bored with the game.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punched metal, expanded metal, wire mesh, etc. is used as the conductive contact sensing body 395 etc., It is possible to impart a design to the contact sensing body 395, etc., to prevent deterioration in appearance due to the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to make the contact sensing body 395, etc. stand out, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer circumferential shape of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct something with design properties without forming the contact sensing body 395 etc. into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust, food and drink stains, etc. do not adhere to the contact sensing body 395 etc., and the effort required for cleaning is simplified. It can be made into something. To be more specific, since the contact detection body 395 is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drinks easily adheres to the irregularities, and it takes time and effort to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering to the pachinko machine, and as it is easy to clean, the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact sensing body 395 etc., the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a metal vapor deposited film or the like. If a material that enhances the design, such as foil stamping, is used, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by a player, and it is possible to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as mentioned above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact sensing body 395 etc. Since it is possible to use materials that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player as the sensing body 395, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the materials used for the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to meet the needs of the user. The contact sensing body 395 and the like can be formed from a suitable material.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 and the like is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or touching the button body 351 that covers the contact sensing body 395 and the like, the button body 351 and the contact sensing body 395 Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player through the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc., the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with a finger or the like due to the effect presented through the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc. This allows the player to intuitively recognize the player's actions, and allows the player to enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Since the effects presented to the player are executed via the button body 351, the contact sensing body 395, etc., the button body 351 can function like a contact operation section, and the presented effects can improve the operational feel. can be given, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can perform multiple operations, the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with his/her finger or the like, and the contact detection body 352 is activated. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 emit light, allowing the game to be activated through the button main body 351. A light-emitting effect in which a player is illuminated with light, an effect in which the vibration motor 356 vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with the button body 351 through (via) the button body 351, and a effect that causes the button body 351 to protrude upwards by the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360. As a result, the button body 351 can function as the contact operation section 302, and the player can enjoy it. You can do it. In addition, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the user's desire to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and presses the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the player's finger or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303, so that the contact sensing object 352 detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., and the pressing operation of the button body 351 allows the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored and keeping the player interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Further, a detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface part 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 will cause the button main body 351 to It is possible to detect the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like with the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is constituted by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit Since the sensor body 358 can be placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353, which is remote from the upper surface part 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be placed in an inconspicuous area. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, there are provided an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation part lifting/lowering mechanism 360, so that light and light can be transmitted to the player through the button main body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily applied, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging the water to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball firing device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a ball launcher 540 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

The main body frame base 501 also has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 has a main body frame release switch for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch is installed. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinged and rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left and right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment part 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment part 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upwardly from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is installed. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front and back direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 89(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape open to the rear and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position of about 1/3 height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward to the left in rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper ball removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is released downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or toward the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b is opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in the normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B will stay and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), the system also controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detecting it. Temporarily stop it until the

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is smaller, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and The space is in communication with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made wider, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (Fig. 96). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a specified number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and lock the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 98(a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that is sloped so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow part 552f has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to flow through the ball.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed (balls jammed) inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball jam in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, so the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball jam can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-back direction, and has the same side in the left-right direction as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. A detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and has a wider interval in the left and right direction than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and has a bottom surface. A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is covered with overflow. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a lower position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m; The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir portion 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this region. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately ⅓ of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o) is formed higher than the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner thereof is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner thereof is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is directed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with an overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they can be made difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and rides on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, since the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view of a pachinko machine including a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment when viewed from the back. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. In the tank rail 553A of the embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball rectifying member 556A are provided. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other, and similar structures will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) etc., the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c that meanders in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. This meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protective walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends upstream from the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a. It has an opening 555c passing through the cover part 555a between the pair of protection walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A. It has a flat rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A contacts the game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a line. The game balls B are restrained from moving quickly to the downstream side, thereby preventing ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, due to the weight of the electric wire, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A There is a possibility that the ball will not be able to rotate upward, and there is a possibility that the ball rectifying member 556A will not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying effect on the game balls B. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, fully exhibiting the rectifying action, and preventing the ball from biting inside the tank rail 553A. Occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A where the height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in multiple stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the distribution speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is possible to prevent the upper game balls B from moving to the downstream side first. This can reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Placing near a terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which electric wires are connected, or placing a terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near tank rail 553A. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-13. Another embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 620A of an embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. 111(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a front view of the board unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 112(b) is a perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the back. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cooke line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a sectional view taken along the K-ke line. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the substrate unit 620 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. An out ball passage 663 is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and through which the game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 circulate, and a game where the out ball passages 663 circulate. an out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one; a ball extraction guide section 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in front view; The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 flows, and the ball removal passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal passage 665 are closed. and a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open to the front and long from side to side. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide part 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall 662a. In addition, a bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed into a box shape with the rear side of the partition wall 662a open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the insides of the ball removal guiding section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly viewed from the upper and lower sides of the base unit 660, making it easier to check for ball clogging, etc. There is.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right in the vertical direction at a substantially constant height in the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 includes a ball ejection receiving section 663a that is open upwardly at approximately the center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a ball ejection receiving section 663a that receives the game balls B received in the ball ejection receiving section 663a. An out ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies the game balls B in a line while meandering greatly in the left and right direction, a downward guiding section 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a line downward by the out ball rectifying section 663b, and a lower end of the downward guiding section 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided at the rear of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed to have a depth in the front-rear direction of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving part 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lower.

The out-ball rectifying section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end side becomes lower toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving section 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the front-rear direction becomes narrower as it goes downstream (to the left), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, it is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. It has depth. In addition, in the part of the out-ball rectifying part 663b that is to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving part 663a, the vertical height decreases as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the part of the ball discharge receiving part 663a that is on the left side is The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out ball rectifying section 663b.

The lower guide part 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying part 663b which is below the ball discharge receiving part 663a, and the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall part) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backwards in a small crank-like curve. As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located further back than the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide portion 663c. The downward guide portion 663c is curved so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a horizontally extending portion. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it will not jump upward toward the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes through.

The ball ejection guiding portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball ejection receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opening toward the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream side bent rearward and extending to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the bulb removal passage 665 (see FIG. 115(a), etc.).

The bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a in the rear base 662. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of the game ball B ahead of the rear end of the rear base 662. That is, a gap larger than one game ball B is formed between the ball ejecting passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball ejection passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding part 627, and has the same slope as the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is lower than the ball ejection receiving part 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) and a bulb removal outlet 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

Further, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately protrude inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball discharge passage 665 allows the game balls B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag pattern. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c can be suppressed.

This ball ejecting passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, so when the ball ejecting lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B from the ball tank 552. , many game balls B can be smoothly guided and ejected.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 The system detects this and discharges it to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (take out) the game balls B from inside the ball tank 552, etc., operate the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 and move the game balls B ejected to the ball removal path 580b side to the out ball path 663. The ball is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through a ball removal guiding section 627 and a ball removal passage 665, which are separate and independent from the ball removal guide section 627 and ball removal passage 665. As a result, only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected accurately. can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to accurately determine the number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the number of balls B hit in the game area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole. The number of game balls B that were received in the winning holes such as the opening 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that were not received in any winning hole after being hit into the gaming area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B received by the out port 1008 and ejected from the game board 5, and is the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a (number of fired balls). be.

Note that the payout rate (ball rate) changes depending on the gaming status, so the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as follows: number ÷ number of out pitches within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period.

Further, according to this embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is removably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, and The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and since the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, an "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. As a result, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are connected to A pachinko machine 1 in which the influence of electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of game balls B on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and malfunctions due to the circulation of game balls B are reduced. It can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose distribution speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifier 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game Since a player wants to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is difficult to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

Additionally, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player's side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of the game board 5 by eliminating the need to provide an out ball detection unit (out ball detection unit), and to secure space on the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing the performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game ball B can circulate through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage to the inside of the ball ejection passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game balls B ejected from the ball ejection passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, a meandering out ball rectifying section 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guiding section 665b from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude is provided in the ball ejecting passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. that are present can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball outlet passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet passage 665 are designed to open downward. Since the game balls B are ejected downward from the pachinko machine 665, it becomes difficult for the game balls B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines Damage to machines, walls, etc. can be avoided. In addition, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and on the island equipment side, the game balls B are discharged from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction passage 665. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be By simply ejecting the game ball B hit into the region 5a downward, it becomes possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. , it is possible to have a simple (easy) configuration, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the ball removal outlet 665c of the ball removal passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the ball removal outlet 665c and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball outlet passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2. Since the ejected game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B flowing vigorously through the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. It is possible to avoid damage to the outer frame 2 and provide a pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged.

In addition, since the ball extraction outlet 665c of the ball extraction passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the part where the game balls B are collected on the island equipment side ( There is no need to advance the out-receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the effort of installing the Pachinko machine 1 and the effort of moving the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the above board unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117, 118, and the like. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG. 118(a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. To be more specific, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a merging portion 663e that merges with the ball-extraction discharge passage 665. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end thereof serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward for a short distance from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. . As a result, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game hall, the parts for collecting game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, since the direction of ejection of the game ball B can be directed diagonally rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 can be connected to the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side within the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island facility. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out ball passage 663 (out ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, it is possible to widen the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4. Therefore, by moving the out ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663 can be avoided. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and removed from below at the out ball outlet 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out bulb passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. A sensor cover 668 that restricts downward movement of the sensor 664 is provided.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out bulb rectifying portion 663b in the out bulb passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment as well, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 includes a main body part 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose proximal end side is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and a sensor cover 668 for detecting the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body part 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion that coincides with the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a and is elastically deformable. have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached at its proximal end to a portion of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outside of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c to lock the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a comes into contact with the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closes the locking claw portion 668c. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. through which it is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of this sensor cover 668 also serves as an out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release the locking from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body part 668a so that the locking claw part 668c moves downward, the main body part 668a of the sensor cover 668 is exposed to the bottom surface of the sensor 664. The out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118(b)).

As shown in FIG. 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the object that may be touched (for example, the outer frame 2 A certain amount of clearance is created between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it, thereby preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B are distributed. However, as mentioned above, by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may be touched, such as the outer frame 2. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come in contact with the out sensor 664. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 may open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during a game and the out sensor 664 falls off, the out sensor 664 will detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been hit into the gaming area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 etc. will notify the occurrence of an abnormality. In response to this notification of the occurrence of an abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like will open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the proximal end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out bulb rectifying portion 663b. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly viewed from below. Therefore, when game balls B are jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually confirmed from the outside, making it possible to identify at a glance the location where the game balls B are jammed. This allows the game ball B to be freed from clogging at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, this pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 can be replaced from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily check the inside of the ball discharge passage 665 and the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so a game that has been interrupted due to the out sensor 664 is damaged can be restarted quickly. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the frustration of players due to interruptions in play and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 does not come away from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a hanging state and does not fall off, it is possible to avoid losing the sensor cover 668.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer part of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front and back direction (horizontal direction). Since the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of game balls B is limited to the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side It is relatively small on the locking claw 668c side (the other end side) that is locked on the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the force is applied to the sensor cover 668 at one end where it is rotatably attached. Since the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is difficult to release, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[4-14. Third embodiment of board unit]
Next, a substrate unit 700 according to a third embodiment that is different from the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment in which the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit are omitted, viewed from the front right, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) from the front left. FIG. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 120(a) seen from the lower right back. 121(a) is a plan view of the board unit in FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Corco line in (a), and (c) is a sectional view taken along the Sasa line in (a). FIG. 122 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X--X in FIG. 121(a).

123 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the back. 125(a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit in FIG. 119 seen from the front, and FIG. 125(b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 119 seen from the back. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing how to eliminate ball clogging in the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how to prevent a linear unauthorized tool from entering the board unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the board unit of FIG. 119.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 119 to 128, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above-described board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

This board unit 700 is provided with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and is provided behind the first ball path 701 so that the game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow. A second ball path 702 through which game balls B can be distributed; a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701; and a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702. It is provided with a second ball sensor 704 that detects b, and a ball removal path 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance opening upward, and each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 detects the game ball B one by one with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. Discharge downward.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game balls B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game balls B received in the game board 5 receive a general prize. The game balls b received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are configured to flow through the second ball path 702. In other words, the configuration is such that out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. This prevents fraudulent activities from occurring with respect to winning ports (winning port sensors) such as the general winning port 2001, first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, and accessory winning port 2006 on the game board 5. If this is done, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity with respect to the winning opening.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 has a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface and has a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 are provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. A ball path member 713 having a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate ball clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 and to prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a security cover 714 that can be opened and closed on the rear base 712; a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705; A frame relay board 716 is provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and upward and long in the left and right directions. The front base 711 accommodates a ball path member 713 therein from the rear. The front base 711 closes off the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball socket 711a that is open long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release port 711b that is opened at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the lower peripheral wall. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 rotatably around an axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the release port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and long in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes off the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball extraction passage 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in front view, and guides it downward to discharge it. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712, and is entirely open to the rear. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715. The part of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 in the ball extraction passage 705 (the part on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side is closed by a passage wall member 715.

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first discharge guide part 712a that receives the game ball B flowing through the first ball route 701 of the ball route member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide part 712a of the ball route member 713. It has a second discharge guide part 712b that receives the game ball B that has passed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide part 712a opens toward the front. , the inlet of the second discharge guiding portion 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b are provided at the same position in the front and rear direction. The first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are open to the rear at the rear side relative to the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the respective exits of the bulb removal passage 705, the first discharge guide part 712a, and the second discharge guide part 712b are located to the left of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711, and the left They are arranged in order from the top to the right. The outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 has a front end side that widens forward greatly and a rear end side that widens a little rearward with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide part 712a and the second discharge guide part 712b (Fig. 120(b) ). That is, the outlet of the bulb removal passage 705 is formed larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the exits of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a that extends vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713d that slopes downwardly toward the right from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c; A rectifying wall portion 713e extending obliquely to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a rectifying wall portion 713e extending to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, increasing in height toward the right and increasing the height of the upper right shelf. A lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right than the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and a right wall portion 713g extending to the right from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f. An upper wall portion 713h extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and open upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also extends vertically upward from the lower wall upper part 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall part 713e and from the left end of the lower wall upper part 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf part 713b. The protruding inner wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downwardly toward the left from the middle of the left side of the inner wall portion 713k, and the eaves portion 713l extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a hanging wall part 713m extending, and a lower wall lower part 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall part 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall part 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is vertically cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and includes a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 also includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the upper lower wall 713j, the middle wall 713k, the hanging wall 713m, and the lower lower wall 713n into front and rear parts.

Moreover, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches in the upper left shelf part 713b, the upper right shelf part 713d, and the lower shelf part 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end of each one toward the partition wall part 713p side. It has a notch 713q. Each notch 713q is provided so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, which is smaller in the front and back direction than the radius of the game ball B, Through the gap, dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by an upper lower wall 713j, a hanging wall 713m, and a lower lower wall 713n on the front side of the partition wall 713p, and is surrounded by a sensor housing in which the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. The rear part of the sensor accommodating part in which the second ball sensor 704 is housed is surrounded by the upper lower wall part 713j, the hanging wall part 713m, and the lower part 713n of the lower wall part on the rear side of the front part 713s and the partition wall part 713p. 713t.

The front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t are arranged so that the detection holes of the first spherical sensor 703 and the second spherical sensor 704 are located below the area between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f. In other words, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection holes facing to the right. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend from the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part to the left of the inner wall part 713k. .

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a first ball guide portion 713u that is provided at a portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n, projects downward, and is open to the rear. have. When the first sphere guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the entrance side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. The first ball guide part 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f in front of the partition wall part 713p to the right and then to the rear. It can be delivered to the first discharge guide part 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall part 713p in the ball path member 713, a part of the lower wall lower part 713n is opened downward (a part of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 accommodated in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t). ) An inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 is located below. Thereby, behind the partition wall part 713p, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f can be delivered to the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located closer to the right than the right end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side is directed vertically downward. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify the plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed such that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (the downstream direction in which the game balls B circulate), so that the game Depending on the flow rate of balls B, etc., there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball clogging (see FIG. 126). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, if ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened and the clearing port 711b is opened. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f, and the game ball B bitten by the tool is inserted. You can clear the ball jam by poking the ball.

By the way, since the lower shelf part 713f is provided with a cutout part 713q for eliminating ball clogging and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, it is possible to prevent wire-like illegal tools such as piano wire or catheters from falling. from below through the notch 713q to the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and then insert the tip of the unauthorized tool into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk that a fraudulent act may be carried out against the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). There is a similar fear that such an unauthorized tool may be inserted not only in the lower shelf part 713f but also in the upper left shelf part 713b and the upper right shelf part 713d where the notch part 713q is provided.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it will come into contact with the inhibiting rib 713o and the tip will Movement can be prevented, and further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented (see FIG. 127). Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Note that in the upper right shelf section 713d and the upper left shelf section 713b, on the right side of the middle wall section 713k, their lower and left and right sides are the rectifying wall section 713e and the lower wall where the notch section 713q is not provided. Since the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b are closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the notches 713q of the corresponding parts. Fraudulent acts will not occur via the cutout 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches 713q provided in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, so that dirt and dust are directed downward through the notches 713q. (See Figure 128). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the front 713s of the sensor accommodating part and the rear 713t of the sensor accommodating part in the upper left shelf 713b are discharged onto the rectifying wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle part. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall 713k. This prevents dust and the like from adhering to the first bulb sensor 703 and second bulb sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t. It protrudes to the left from the front sensor accommodating part 713s and the rear sensor accommodating part 713t. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall part 713k, since the eaves part 713l extends to the left from the upper part of the front sensor housing part 713s and the rear sensor housing part 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper left shelf part 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, and are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves section 713l, causing the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 to protrude to the left beyond the inner wall section 713k. It is possible to prevent the wire from falling onto the wiring cable and the connector, and it is possible to avoid problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 forms the first ball path 701. The rear left wall 713a, upper left shelf 713b, step wall 713c, upper right shelf 713d, rectifying wall 713e, lower shelf 713f, right wall 713g, groove wall 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guiding portion 712b.

The security cover 714 is formed into a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side is rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 122, this security cover 714 closes the release opening 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is in a horizontal state, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. When the release port 711b is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and vertical, the release port 711b is opened. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the release port 711b.

When the security cover 714 is in the closed state, it is possible to close the release port 711b of the front base 711, so that a linear unauthorized tool can enter the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and the first ball path 701) from the release port 711b. It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the two-ball path 702). Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch part 713q of the lower shelf part 713f to clear the ball clogging of the game balls B. I can do it. This work to clear the ball jam is carried out with the main body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

When the security cover 714 has the opening 711b open (vertically), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking part 714a side) is connected to the object that is likely to come into contact with it (here, behind the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 122). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 left open. Even if an attempt is made to close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with an object (the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. Thereby, forgetting to close the security cover 714 can be avoided, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is possible to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 while the security cover 714 is opened. , an object that is likely to come into contact with the open security cover 714 will come into contact with it from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is attached to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction, an object that is likely to come into contact with it from the front will come into contact with the open security cover 714. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when it comes into contact with the security cover 714, the body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 getting caught on the object that may come into contact with it, and damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may come into contact with it can be avoided. .

In addition, the security cover 714 of this embodiment is designed to rarely open when the game balls B become clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically left in the closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes a portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game balls B flowing through the second discharge guiding section 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 holds the frame relay board 716 between the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is held between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. .

In the base unit 710 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121(a), from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711, the upper left shelf 713b and part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 are connected. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball b that has fallen onto the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they will be broken down by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so that they are aligned in a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the lower shelf section 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf section 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall section 713p, it falls into the ball B that is accommodated in the front sensor accommodating section 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guide section 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, if it is located behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor accommodating part 713t, and then discharged downward through the second discharge guiding part 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through separate paths before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first ball path 701 is located in front of the partition wall 713p, and a second ball path 702 is located behind the partition wall 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 forward of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 transfers the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 in order to extract the game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc. It can be discharged downward through. The game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guiding part 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guiding part 712b (second ball path 702), and ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 are The game ball B is delivered to the side collecting part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.).

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the plurality of notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, dirt can be removed through the notches 713q. Since dirt and dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid dust and the like from interfering with the circulation of game balls B, and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, etc. can be done.

In addition, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, it is possible to check from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) whether or not game balls B are clogged in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily confirmed. In the part of the ball path member 713 where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q, so that the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf If a ball jam occurs between the part 713f and the outer frame 2, open the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and open the security cover 714 to insert a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall part 713e and the lower shelf part 713f, and the ball clogging can be cleared using this tool.

Furthermore, a release port 711b that opens downward is provided below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a crime prevention cover 714 that closes the release port 711b is provided. In addition to being able to clear the ball jam as described above, by keeping the clearing port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear unauthorized tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701 or It is possible to prevent the ball from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the front end side around the axis in the left and right direction, it is possible to open and close the main body frame 4 in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close it against the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it (the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), making it impossible to close the main body frame 4. It is possible to make the user aware of the fact that the user has forgotten to close the cover, the security cover 714 can be reliably closed, and the security function of the security cover 714 can be exerted.

Further, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, a plurality of flat inhibition ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward are provided. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it can contact the inhibition rib 713o and prevent the tip from moving; Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden is placed on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the risk of fraud and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guiding portion 712a and second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Even if a linear unauthorized tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide part 712a or the second discharge guide part 712b, the complicated route will prevent the intrusion. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all the game balls B released from the game board 5, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out ball detection unit) for detecting the out ball B, and the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced. It is possible to secure a space corresponding to the configuration, and by providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can further entertain players.

In addition, since out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 and the safe ball detected by the second ball sensor 704 are By comparing the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game Since a player wants to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is difficult to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal path 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 702 Game balls B without balls are not counted. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, an out ball flows through the first ball path 701 and a safe ball flows through the second ball path 702, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 The safe ball may flow through the second ball path 702, and the out ball may flow through the second ball path 702, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path, regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball. Any of the ball paths 702 may be used for circulation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the release port 711b, but the invention is not limited to this, and the release port 711b is opened and closed by sliding back and forth or left and right. Good as a thing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall part 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 can be separated into two parts before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although the ball is ejected through one of two ball paths, the present invention is not limited to this. The game balls B passed through and released from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 129 to 137. FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 seen from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 seen from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory etc. made transparent. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board shown by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 195 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate 2003 that provide a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B. , a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is placed in the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game balls B within the game area 5a are carried out so that they are accepted or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. It also has the following.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached to the back of the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes the main control board 1310, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, and the V It is for relaying connections with the winning opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open so that game balls B can be received at different positions within the game area 5a, and a gate 2003 that is always open so that game balls B can be received at further different positions within the game area 5a, Game balls B are accepted into the gate 2003, and the second starting port 2004 becomes capable of accepting the gaming balls B according to the normal lottery result drawn by drawing, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is used for gaming. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the ball B, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. A game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the game ball accepted into the game ball B. It is provided with a V winning opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 in which an opportunity of acceptance is given to B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is installed slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 and is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2004, a big prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021. It includes a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the approximate center in the front view in the game area 5a. .

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has an accessory prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 that is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate that is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003. A member 2800.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the big winning hole 2005. It is equipped with. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a prize winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006. The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 that detects passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism (not shown) for removably attaching the effect display device 1600. In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. A first starting hole sensor 3002 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006, and a V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006. It has a losing hole sensor 3004 that detects the game balls B distributed to the losing hole 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that is received in the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 forward and backward. A V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back-front presentation unit 3100 provided near the front end inside the back box 3010, and a back-rear top presentation provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back-front presentation unit 3100. unit 3200, and a rear lower production unit 3300 provided at the lower part of the back box 3010 below the rear upper production unit.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 138(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. FIG. 139(a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel, FIG. 139(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sous line in FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the vehicle a) taken apart into its main components and viewed from the front.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122, and the lower full ball path unit 610 is opened. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b face forward.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the front component 1000 is recessed from the front to the rear in a predetermined range along the right rail 1005 from the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right corner in front view, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. A spec sticker affixing part 1021 to which a spec sticker 1020 is pasted, an insertion pin 1022 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the rear of the spec sticker 1021 and is used to position the stopper 1006, and the center of the insertion pin 1022. A separation hole 1023 penetrating from the front to the rear is provided.

The spec sticker attachment part 1021 is formed to have a size that is one size larger than the outer shape of the spec sticker 1020, and is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the spec sticker 1020 (FIG. 139). (see (b)). In this spec sticker pasting section 1021, a horizontally extending portion at the lower end and a straight portion extending vertically upward from the right end of the portion serve as a contact surface for pasting the spec sticker 1020. It is set.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker attachment part 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The blocking portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates the front component 1000 from the front side to the rear side. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends back and forth with a constant inner diameter. When this separation hole 1023 is assembled to the game board 5, the front side is closed by the spec sticker 1020 affixed to the spec sticker affixing part 1021, and the rear side is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). As shown in the figure, this separation hole 1023 is provided near the edge of the spec sticker attachment part 1021 (spec sticker 1020).

The separation hole 1023 of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and prevent the spec seal 1020 from being pressed sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, the spec sticker 1020 may be bent at the separation hole 1023 portion, and the appearance of the spec sticker 1020 may deteriorate.

According to the front component 1000 of the present embodiment, when the spec sticker 1020 cannot be correctly pasted on the spec sticker pasting part 1021 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, it can be separated from the rear of the front component 1000. By passing a bar-like member through the hole 1023 and pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear to the front with the tip of the bar, the spec seal 1020 can be removed so that the edge of the spec seal 1020 can be rolled forward. By pulling the spec sticker 1020, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment part 1021, and the spec sticker 1020 can be reapplied.

In addition, with the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the spec sticker 1020 is pressed from behind with the tip of the rod-shaped member. Since the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment part 1021, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily replaced when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated, the spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker attachment part 1021 using the separation hole 1023, so that the pachinko machine 1 The component parts can be easily separated by material, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by pasting the spec sticker 1020 on the spec sticker pasting portion 1021, the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1023, and also making it possible for players to see the separation hole 1023. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1023, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 assembled on the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec sticker 1020 is pasted. Since it does not have a hole that passes through to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent a wire-shaped illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole. can prevent fraudulent acts from occurring.

In addition, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the spec seal 1020 and into the separation hole 1023, the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) prevents it from being blocked. Since the above-mentioned insertion (intrusion) to the rear can be prevented, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering into the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from being carried out. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which can prevent fraudulent acts, and can deter people from committing fraudulent acts because a trace is left on the spec seal 1020 when a fraudulent tool penetrates the spec seal 1020, and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. be able to.

Note that in the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker affixing part 1021, but the invention is not limited to this, and the separation hole may be provided in the part where the seal is affixed, such as the certificate stamp affixing part 1012. It may also be provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nail N even if it is planted in the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at its lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Although not shown, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 138, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is such that the left side and bottom side of the center have a plurality of game balls. The width is wide enough to allow balls B to line up, and the upper side is narrow enough to prevent a plurality of game balls B from being lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (eg, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engagement claws that elastically engage with the engagement steps on the upper and lower left inclined parts of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step. A pair of engaging pieces that engage with two engaging step portions on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the holding portion with the engagement pawl, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, and the player It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the players, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 or the out-ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball path 663 are detected (counted) one by one by an out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 133) that can set the gaming performance, A main control board box 1320 that accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether a fraudulent IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and a setting change board 1311. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2402, an accessory winning opening sensor 2601, It is connected to the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch the setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected via). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), signals from the setting key switch 1311a and signals from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has a vertical distance between its right side and left side that is almost the same as a vertical distance between the right side and left side of the main control board 1310 , and a horizontal distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and a setting key switch 1311a has a press operation section above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is located on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is located above and to the left of the setting key switch 1311a (bottom left of the setting switch button 1311b), where the switch button 1311b is arranged. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged further down, and is located near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a press operation section is disposed at.

In this embodiment, the setting key is at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). In this case, the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the insertion slot, other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

By rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON, and this setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal of this OK key ON can be turned on. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized with only the setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although exposed, "gaps" are formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the openings corresponding to the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, wire intrusion prevention parts are molded on the cover body for each of these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch The wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b should be routed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also connects various signals from the setting key switch 1311a. (In other words, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted. The wiring pattern (to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns through which signals are transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting switch button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be briefly explained. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting value, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. A "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value should first check that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON to power on the pachinko machine 1. Note that the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 131Of is operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and It may be possible to change the setting value when a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied, that is, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a in FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the settings of a setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Every time a person who changes the setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. The value is increased by 1 from 1, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key where the setting key is turned ON). Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from its rotational position to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and determined setting values in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, moving the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key was turned on) to the original position (in other words, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g by pressing the push operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the set value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and then the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. This improves work efficiency.

The person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and from lighting the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turning it off.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying confirmation of the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage has occurred), and then , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to open the first By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

A person who wishes to display the currently set setting values must first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), and then Then, insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. Among them, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains turned off, and even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, this press operation will not work. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (that is, Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then sets the current setting value. Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are as follows: When the power is restored at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is as described above. 1, or after the power is restored after a power outage (momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the , turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power restoration," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power restoration."

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the allocation rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. It is used to select the small winning symbol determination table that will be used, the normal time transition determination table that defines the percentage of the determination value for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Note that the various tables used in various lottery decisions are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible), and an error message will be displayed to inform you of this. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects the game balls B launched into the game area 5a through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B played is displayed. Among the game balls B fired into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169, etc.), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a could be set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting key switch 1311a' can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on. In this case, move the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on as the enter key ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be referred to as "modified example (1) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure will be molded. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a, or may be near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with an enter key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switch button 1311b should be routed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. In the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance from each other). In addition, when a setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The aspect of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as "Modified example (2) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a finger is touching the ball, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The signals may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; When it is not touched, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and/or when the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is not ON. On the other hand, when the launching of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (aspects of the handle touch sensor (including the aspect of a single button operation sensor). ) may be referred to as "determination key modification (3)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633, which will be described later, The firing reference pulses are branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing timing control circuit 633b and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the firing control board 633. It may also be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while determining that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the game board 5 is provided with a distance measurement sensor capable of detecting The signal may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. The distance sensor detects light emitted by a light emitting part that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, thereby making it possible to detect the player's actions. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and when it determines that there is movement, it turns on the enter key. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "modification of the enter key (5)") .

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modified example (6) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting the pulse may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys that the enter key is ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modified example (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal are The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V), and at the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a can turn ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. It is also possible to determine whether it is ON or OFF. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (a mode of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "determination key modification (8)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening so that wires etc. cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

In addition, the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error cancellation switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed are affixed to the positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch, respectively, so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch). ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the payout control board 633 should be routed between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch. They are formed so as not to approach each other on the control board 633 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately, Also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch should be routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed. In addition, when a determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (9) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON. Good too. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, When the press operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (10) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error release switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the push operation section is being operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and notifies the payout control MPU of that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that fact. When this happens, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on (aspect 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (11) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to be put out. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on an operation signal that is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns the decision key ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. I can do it. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed between the opening and the corresponding opening and modifying the payout control board 633, a wire intrusion prevention section is attached to the cover body for the opening. The structure is molded into

Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f may be disposed on the payout control board 633 near an error release switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the press operation part) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation part may be used as the RAM clear switch 131Of. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotary operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various types of switches can be mentioned. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for the error release switch should be routed. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (12) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring during the processing, and the command created in the command transmission process of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows setting values to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the push operation part of the button is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. ).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the out of bulb detection sensor 574, or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or may determine the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, out of ball detection sensor 574, or delivery detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the setting key switch 1311a' (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (16) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the main body frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the OK key, and after turning on the OK key, close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the door frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, while the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main body frame 4. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the configuration of the setting key switch may be referred to as "modified example (18) of enter key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the initial position and then turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input, while determining that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input. If it is not present, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the main control board 1310. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The enter key button may be placed on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when providing an enter key button and a RAM clear switch 1310f on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed. They are formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, when a decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (Aspect 2 of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is input to the RAM clear switch. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the enter key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (RAM clear switch Aspect 3 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch, which will be described later, the payout control board 633 does not require an error release switch.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the signal of the gate 2003 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2801, various sensors for various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2401, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), main body frame 4 The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the out sensor 664 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (various sensors, etc.). This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (22) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the gate 2003 or open the various winning slots in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to feed the game ball B to the out port 1008 or feed the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the stepping motor, DC motor, The operation of the movable body (accessory object) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid, and the operation of the movable object (accessory object) is controlled based on the detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a' may be used (optical function The aspect of the object sensor (which may also include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification of enter key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, so that the optical sensor can detect the original position of the movable object (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory object) so as to detect the operation position, etc.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to detect illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the magnetic sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (24) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to move the magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1. By applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed, and the game ball B is allowed to enter various prize openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of throwing a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor, and also determines whether or not there is a fraudulent act based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the vibration sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (25) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, radio waves are irradiated to the pachinko machine 1 to control the game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio wave sensors that detect fraudulent activities in which game balls B are fraudulently obtained by causing malfunctions of various sensors of the various prize openings provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided in the payout device 580. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (radio wave sensor). (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (26) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the production operation section unit 350 A detection signal from the press detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the , and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation section 302 of the production operation section unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, The signals may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the production operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (27) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separately housed. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent the wire from entering the opening, a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body. Note that if the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above (setting change board box (This aspect may be referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the settings of the setting key switch 1311a are A wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring patterns for transmitting the signals from and to the terminals (main control The connections to the terminals of the connector MSCN of the board 1310 are also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, wiring pattern from which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and wiring pattern from which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. However, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal were formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). 1311a, one of the wiring patterns is transmitted via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on this setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided in 1310 via a harness (a mode of routing the wiring pattern may be referred to as "determination key modification (29)").

Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the enter key (the selection combination of the modified examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the enter key"). ”).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, increasing the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. In some cases, there is a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which the probability (advantage degree) has only a single preset value and does not require any setting changes. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the set value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. I can do it.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and light up the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable body to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). You can move the (accessory object) and light up the light emitter. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as a setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of symbol variation until entering the player waiting state, variations can be given to the time from the end of symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 which specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern which specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2 is assigned. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned, which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessories)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the content of the demonstration performance is changed and set, variations can be given to the content of the demonstration performance that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, it is possible to vary the default volume that is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light emitter, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the default brightness are changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, you can turn on, blink, change the gradation point, etc. of the light emitter. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitting body, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are satisfied in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Furthermore, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be selected as appropriate and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required that the setting key be turned on. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the push operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on process to be described later. Clear the game except for , and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In addition, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and stores data in the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. In other words, when powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are satisfied when the power is restored to the Pachinko machine 1, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. It happens. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned on by pressing the button, the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed. be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in a setting value confirmation display process that is performed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later. Display on container 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the press operation section be pressed when powering on the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned ON, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not need to be pressed (when described as "a modification of predetermined setting value display permission conditions") ). In this case, when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and instead In the input process, initial settings and start-up settings for the built-in WDT are performed before the game is started, and after that, interrupt permission settings and the like are performed to proceed with the game. Note that when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is set to the initial state. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a performs a main body frame opening process to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied and setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, it is possible to prevent When the power is restored after a momentary power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted. The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs settings such as enabling interrupts. While the game is in progress, when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and then The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a collects balls by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and outputted to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. to be displayed. Therefore, the current setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h (this may be described as a "modified example of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, there is no need to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the enter key described above.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 129 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the gaming status, and two indicators that display the normal lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2003. It is equipped with a normal symbol display made of an LED, and a normal reservation display made of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the gate 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the pending number of game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. Equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 132, 136, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 169).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes one left fixing piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and two right fixing pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. This effect display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and the back box 3010 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the right inner circumferential surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting part 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two right fixing pieces 1602 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the left fixing piece 1601 side forward, insert the left fixing piece 1601 into the opening of the locking mechanism, and move the locking mechanism upward in rear view. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 140 and 144. FIG. 140(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 140(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side in the front unit. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged portions of the first attacker unit and second attacker unit in FIG. 144. The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of receiving game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the area 5a, and a gate 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, and a game to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The grand prize opening 2005 is provided in a different position from the grand prize opening 2005, which can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the ball B. Accessory prize opening 2006 that allows the acceptance of game balls B according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a V prize opening 2007 in which an opportunity to accept the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is given.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the horizontal center in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part of the gaming area 5a. It is placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate 2003 is disposed near the right end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a slightly higher height than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The accessory prize opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general prize opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning opening 2007 is located at the rear of the gaming panel 1100 at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the second starting opening 2004.

The first sub-out port 2021 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is located on the right side of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a starting port unit 2100 on the left side when viewed from the front of the starting port unit 2100. On the other hand, there is a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , a first opening is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2021. It includes an attacker unit 2400 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the approximate center in the front view in the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has an accessory prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 that is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2022, and a gate that is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003. A member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the first starting port 2002 is opened upwardly, and the first starting port 2002 is opened upwardly. Located directly below the center.

The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the production unit 3160.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general prize openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. can be delivered to.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 140 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. 1st attacker unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. . This first attacker unit 2400 includes a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 144, etc.).

In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the big winning port 2005 is located at a position lower than the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The first sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a lower position than the big winning port 2005.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a big winning hole sensor that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005. 2402, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 169, etc.). Two big winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the second starting port door 2411 at the gate 2003. A starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes in accordance with and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first shelf 2421 that extends downwardly to the left from near the upper right corner, and a first shelf 2421 that extends downwardly to the left from the left end of the first shelf 2421 when viewed from the front. It extends shorter than the first shelf part 2421 so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf part 2421, with an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The second shelf part 2422 forming the second starting opening 2004 between the second shelf part 2422 and the second shelf part 2422 which is lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left of the left end of the second shelf part 2422 and lower to the left. A third shelf part 2423 that extends shorter than the second shelf part 2422 is spaced from the left end of the third shelf part 2423 to the left by a length of four to six times the diameter of the game ball B, and the third shelf It has a fourth shelf part 2424 that extends lower to the left from a position lower than the part 2423 and forms a big prize opening 2005 with the third shelf part 2423.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2421 is separated from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400 to the left by a length slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2421, the second shelf 2422, and the third shelf 2423 are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2421, etc. ing.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a first standing wall 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf 2421 and a lower end of the first standing wall 2425 extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf 2421. A second standing wall section 2426 extends to the same height as the first standing wall section 2426, a third standing wall section 2427 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf section 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall section 2425, and a third shelf section. A fourth standing wall section 2428 extends vertically downward from the right end of the section 2423 to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth standing wall section 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf section 2423, and a fourth shelf. It has a sixth standing wall section 2430 extending downward from the right end of the section 2424, and a seventh standing wall section 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf section 2424.

The fifth standing wall portion 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. , further extending downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. Further, the sixth standing wall section 2430 extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf section 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf section 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the right. It extends further downward to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400 . The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall part 2429 and the sixth standing wall part 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first horizontal wall part 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall part 2425, the second standing wall part 2426, and the third standing wall part 2427, and the right side of the first attacking unit 2400. The fourth standing wall section on the left slopes from a position lower than the lower end of the first standing wall section 2425 to the first horizontal wall section 2432 with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow therebetween. 2428, and a second horizontal wall portion 2433 that is inclined so as to become higher toward the middle. The second horizontal wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 moves from near the lower portions of the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the sixth standing wall section 2430 toward the center between the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the sixth standing wall section 2430, respectively, in a direction approaching each other. It has a third horizontal wall portion 2434 that extends to the vicinity, and a partition portion 2435 that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2434 and extends upward. There is.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 extends in a step-like manner so as to be lower to the left along the upper side, and provides an interval between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423 at which the game ball B can flow. It has an upper shelf section 2436 that is provided in an open manner. The right end of the upper shelf section 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf section 2421, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf section 2424. Further, the upper shelf portion 2436 is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 forms a space within the space between the upper shelf section 2436 and the big prize opening 2005 in which the game balls B can flow to the left. A plurality of abutting portions each having a triangular shape in plan view protrude into the space from the front wall and the rear wall so as to alternate in the left-right direction. These plurality of abutting parts allow the game ball B rolling on the big winning opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag shape in the front and back direction when the big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state.

This second starting port door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves forward by projecting the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 due to the biasing force of the spring, and closes the second starting port 2004. There is. In addition, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward as the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retreats against the urging force of the spring, and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. The mouth 2004 is open.

When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The big prize opening door 2413 has a flat plate shape long from side to side, and is provided so as to move back and forth. The big winning opening door 2413 can open and close the big winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 forward and backward. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the big prize opening door 2413 moves forward by protruding the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 by the biasing force of the spring, thereby closing the big winning opening 2005. In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the big prize opening door 2413 moves backward by retreating against the urging force of the spring, and opens the big winning opening 2005. are doing.

When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are each de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starting port door 2411 projects forward. In this state, the second starting port door 2411 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2411 makes it impossible for the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball B. ing. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 projects forward. In this state, the big winning hole door 2413 is located above the big winning hole 2005, and the game ball B cannot be accepted into the big winning hole 2005. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf section 2421, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf section 2421, and the upper surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the After rolling on the second shelf 2422, it is released from the left end of the second shelf 2422 to the left. The game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the big prize opening door 2413 depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. Note that when the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 may enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the big winning opening door 2413 that closes the big winning opening 2005 is placed between the plurality of balls provided in the space between the upper shelf part 2436 and the big winning opening 2005. It comes into contact with the contact portion alternately, and rolls to the left while zigzagging in the front-back direction. The game ball B that rolled to the left on the big prize opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf 2424 and is then released from the left end to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf section 2421, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall section 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2433, and falls on the second horizontal wall section 2433. Due to the inclination of the portion 2433, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2021. Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423, it passes between the third standing wall section 2427 and the fourth standing wall section 2428 and the second horizontal wall section 2433. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and enters the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B that entered the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a, It is discharged from the discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that have passed on the right side of the first shelf section 2421 and the game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423 are both It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2021, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, the plunger resists the biasing force of the spring. It retreats, and the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 becomes open, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427 and reaches the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it is released backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the third discharge passage 3183 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, in a normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats against the biasing force of the spring, and the big prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. By moving the big winning hole door 2413 backward, the big winning hole 2005 becomes open upward, and the game ball B can be received into the big winning hole 2005. In other words, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the game ball B is accepted into the big prize hole 2005 when the big prize hole 2005 is in the open state, it passes between the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the sixth standing wall section 2430, and then separates from the fifth standing wall section 2429 and the partition. part 2435 or between the sixth vertical wall part 2430 and the partition part 2435, and is detected by one of the two big prize opening sensors 2402, and then onto the third horizontal wall part 2434. It falls and is ejected backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received by the grand prize opening 2005 and released backward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. , is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2435, and each is detected by a different big winning hole sensor 2402. Since the game ball B is released backward after the game is released, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being stuck between the big prize hole 2005 and the big prize hole sensor 2402, and also to release many game balls B in a short time. Can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 141(a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 141(b) is an exploded perspective view of the separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. FIG. 2 is a side cross-sectional view taken from the right side by cutting left and right at the site. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is made inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. This closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from passing through the frame of the center accessory 2500 and intruding into the rear (back unit 3000).

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. Then, the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 can be released from the warp exit 2512 which is opened in a frame on the rear side of the front side of the game panel 1100 and can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel board of the game panel 1100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central release part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520, which is provided at the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) is located at the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the front component 1000). 1006), and is formed so that a game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove open to the front, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outside of the peripheral wall part 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and a first guide passage 2521 that extends along the peripheral wall part 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522 extending from the top. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally downward to the right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly under the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the stopper 1006 are in the first guide It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left and right direction, and an exit opening diagonally downward to the left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

To explain the center accessory 2500 in more detail, the center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc., and a lower right guide passage 2530. A transparent flat plate-shaped front member 2531 is attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the front panel, and a lower right guide passage decoration is attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and has a predetermined decoration printed on it. A seal 2532 (see FIG. 141).

The center base plate 2540 has a guide passage flange part 2540a that forms part of the flange part 2502 and extends to the right in a flat plate shape at the lower right corner in front view, and a peripheral wall part 2501 that extends along the lower side of the guide passage flange part 2540a. A guide passage wall 2540b extends to the right to be shorter than the guide passage flange part 2540a so that the right end side is lower than the flange part 2502 on the outer peripheral surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, and the right end near the right end of the guide passage flange part 2540a. A flat plate-shaped vertical wall portion 2540c extends vertically along the side and extends forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, and after continuing with the lower end side of the vertical wall portion 2540c and extending diagonally to the lower left. It has a left guide portion 2540d that extends obliquely to the lower right and is bent. A gap through which one game ball B can pass is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c.

The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B that has flowed down from above onto the guide passage wall 2540b to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then allows it to flow downward from between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c. After that, it can be discharged diagonally to the lower left by the left guiding part 2540d. The center base plate 2540 constitutes most of the lower right guide passage 2530 by the guide passage flange part 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the standing wall part 2540c, and the left guide part 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall part 2501 to the same position as the right end side of the guide passage flange part 2540a, and the upper end side is higher than the upper end side of the guide passage flange part 2540a. The lower end side is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 includes an attachment recess 2531a that is recessed from the front surface to the rear along the outer circumferential shape, and a separation hole 2531b that penetrates back and forth at a portion of the attachment recess 2531a that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b when viewed from the front. It has a plurality of attachment bosses 2531c that protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface and are used for attaching to the center base plate 2540.

The pasting recess 2531a is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 (see FIG. 141(b)). In the pasting recess 2531a, the left end side and the upper end near the left end side are set as contact surfaces for pasting the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a round hole with a circular inner shape. When this separation hole 2531b is assembled to the center accessory 2500, the front side is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 affixed to the attachment recess 2531a, and the front side of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 is closed. The rear side is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2531b becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2531b of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b will become smaller, making it easier to bend and making it impossible to press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 sufficiently. This is because there is a risk that if the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 will be bent, and the appearance of the lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532 may deteriorate. It's for a reason.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, when the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532 cannot be correctly pasted to the pasting recess 2531a of the front member 2531 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, the front member 2531 through the separation hole 2531b and press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the rear to the front with its tip, so that the vicinity of the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be rolled forward. By pulling the rolled-up portion, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a, and the lower right guiding passage decorative seal 2532 can be reapplied.

Also, with the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear with the tip of the rod-shaped member. Since the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a, it is possible to easily replace the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b. The component parts of the machine 1 can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by pasting the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 on the pasting recess 2531a, the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 2531b, and also preventing players from seeing the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2531b.

In addition, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 attached to the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is attached allows separation. The hole 2531b is closed from the rear, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, the hole is not passed through to the rear, so a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole to the game board 5. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being inserted into the inside or a part where the game ball B is distributed, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, Since further insertion (intrusion) to the rear can be prevented by the guide passage wall 2540b, unauthorized tools cannot enter from the front through the separation hole 2531b into the inside of the game board 5 or the area where the game balls B circulate. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, and since a trace is left on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 when an unauthorized tool penetrates the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, so that in the area where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the center accessory. 2500, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the performance image of the rear performance display device 1600 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, Decorations and the like on the back unit 3000 can be made more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

In the above embodiment, the front member 2531 is provided with one separation hole 2531b, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of them may be provided.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion of the center base plate 2540 inside the bent left guide portion 2540d (a portion on the right side when viewed from the front). When the separation hole 2531b is provided in this area, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b. Therefore, since the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, the same effect as described above can be achieved. In this case, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the left guiding portion 2540d guides the tip of the unauthorized tool toward the game ball inside the lower right guide passage 2530, etc. It is possible to prevent B from entering the area where it is distributed. Furthermore, in this case, since the right side of the left guide portion 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, the separation hole can be accessed from the rear even when the front member 2531 is assembled. A tool can be inserted into 2531b and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a, and It is attached to the front surface of a panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes an accessory prize opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left.

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a prize winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 (Fig. 146). In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 includes a prize winning port door 2611 for opening and closing the prize winning port 2006, and a door 2611 for opening and closing the prize winning port 2006 by moving the prize winning port door 2611. A transmission member (not shown) that moves the accessory prize opening door 2611 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger of the prize winning opening solenoid 2612, and the game accepted in the prize winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the ball B and releases it rearward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened to the left from the left side. 2611 is provided.

The accessory prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that touches the right end of the lower side and extends straight upward, and a lower side that bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called feather shape, consisting of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the . The accessory prize opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a that extends in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as the axis, and a link pin that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from a position further away from the rotating shaft. (not shown). The accessory prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached with a rotating shaft at the bottom so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration of the accessory prize opening solenoid 2612 is omitted, the plunger is attached in such a direction that it projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the accessory prize opening solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction, so that the link pin of the accessory prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit into which it is inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

When the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side is located so as to be in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the accessory prize opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion 2500 of the center accessory 2500 A space through which game balls B can flow is formed between the right side and the right side. In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the accessory prize opening solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the accessory prize-winning port door 2611 is upright, and the accessory prize-winning port 2006 is closed by the accessory prize-winning port door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006.

In this normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the winning result is determined according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result). When the object prize opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the accessory prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the accessory prize opening door 2611 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the accessory prize opening door 2611 moves to the left, and the accessory prize opening 2006 becomes open to the left, and the right end side of the accessory prize opening door 2611 is tilted lower. The state will be as follows. In other words, the accessory prize opening 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the accessory prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2601, and is then guided by the guiding path 2613 and released to the rear. The game ball B released backward from the guide path 2613 is delivered to the distribution path 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is sent to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. After being sorted, the sheets are discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back, front and lower presentation unit 3160.

[5-8g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144. The middle right side unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. This side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning hole 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and the general winning hole 2001 is adjacent to the right side of the general winning hole 2001, and the left-right direction is the game ball B. A second sub-out port 2022 is always open upward with a width equal to two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 backward, and a second guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 backward. It has two guiding passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bent rightward, and further bent rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

When this side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of each of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Furthermore, when the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, its right end is in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and its lower end is in approximate contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, A space is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the accessory winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over almost the entire area (see FIG. 144).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the first guidance passage 2701, and then guides the game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the first back guidance path 3156 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200 through the back front lower production unit 3160. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 through the second guide passage 2702, and then guides the game ball B received into the second sub-out port 2022 to the back side of the panel board 1110. It can be delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of 3000. The game ball B delivered to the second back guiding path 3157 passes through the back front lower presentation unit 3160 and is discharged onto the lower board holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. 142(a) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front with the gate member disassembled, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member viewed from the back with the gate member disassembled. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 143(a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is being The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 where a normal lottery result is drawn, which opens and closes a second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through the gate, and a gate sensor 2801 that detects when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003. ,have. The gate 2003 is a detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely toward the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general prize opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700 when assembled on the game board 5.

When assembled to the game board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. A gap is formed through which the ball B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

To further explain the gate member 2800 in detail, the gate member 2800 includes a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and holds a gate sensor 2801, and a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front surface of the gate body 2810 and has a predetermined shape. It has a gate seal 2811 on which a decoration is printed. Gate body 2810 is formed transparent.

The gate main body 2810 includes a front plate portion 2810a that is long in the shape of a flat plate in the left and right directions, a pasting recess 2810b that is rectangular in a horizontally elongated shape and recessed toward the rear on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, and a pasting recess 2810b provided at the upper left corner of the pasting recess 2810b. a separation hole 2810d penetrating the front plate part 2810a back and forth near the right end of the pasting recess 2810b, and a pair of arm parts extending rearward from both left and right ends of the front plate part 2810a. 2810e, and a flat flange portion 2810f extending outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arm portions 2810e and connected to each other at a portion below the front plate portion 2810a.

The surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e that face each other are separated from each other by a distance greater than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel board 1110 with its rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100.

Further, the gate body 2810 is recessed at a constant height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e, and has an accommodation groove 2810g for accommodating the gate sensor 2801. , a rear extending portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the housing groove 2810g, and a rear extending portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e. A locking portion 2810i is provided, which extends rearward from the housing groove 2810h, has a rear end bent to the left, and locks the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g.

Further, the gate main body 2810 includes a protrusion 2810j that protrudes into the accommodation groove 2810g at a portion where the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e intersect. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the gate main body 2810 includes a guide piece 2802 extending downward from the lower surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

The attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed rearward deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143(b)). The erroneous pasting prevention portion 2810c is formed into a C-chamfer shape that is larger than the chamfers at the other corners of the pasting recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (applying recess 2810b) has a rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side, it is difficult to determine the vertical direction of the gate seal 2811, and there is a possibility that the gate seal 2811 may be pasted upside down. However, with this erroneous pasting prevention part 2810c, the pasting direction of the gate seal 2811 can be specified, and the gate seal 2811 can be pasted in the normal direction (the direction in which the notch 2811a of the gate seal 2811 matches the wrong pasting prevention part 2810c). can be pasted. Note that when attempting to attach the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b upside down, a portion of the gate seal 2811 protrudes from the attachment recess 2810b due to the erroneous attachment prevention section 2810c, and the gate seal 2811 is exposed to the operator. It is possible to make the user aware of incorrect pasting of the sticker 2811.

In this pasting recess 2810b, the left end portion and the diagonal portion of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 2810c are set as abutting surfaces for pasting the gate seal 2811. Thereby, clearance for pasting the gate seal 2811 can be ensured not only in the vertical and horizontal directions but also in the vertical direction of the obliquely extending portion of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the effective clearance directions when pasting the gate seal 2811 are three directions: the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction, making it easy to perform the pasting work (see FIG. 207(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular square hole extending vertically. When this separation hole 2810d is assembled into the cage member 2800, the front side is closed by the gate seal 2811 affixed to the affixing recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front side of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g. The separation hole 2810d is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2810d becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2810d of this embodiment has a long side length and a short side length within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d will become smaller, making it easier to bend and potentially making it impossible to press the gate seal 2811 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, the gate seal 2811 may be bent at the separation hole 2531b portion, and the appearance of the gate seal 2811 may deteriorate.

The inner circumferential surface on the right side of this separation hole 2810d is on the same plane as the bottom surface (the surface facing left) of the accommodation groove 2810g formed in the right arm portion 2810e. Further, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is formed smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d. protrudes briefly to the left.

This separation hole 2810d has the function of removing the gate seal 2811, which will be described later, and is also used to insert a core for forming the rear end of the under locking part 2810i when injection molding the gate body 2810. The gate body 2810 can also function as an insertion hole, making injection molding of the gate body 2810 easy.

The gate seal 2811 is formed to be slightly longer in the left-right direction with respect to the shape offset inward by a certain distance from the outer shape of the pasting recess 2810b. A C-chamfered notch 2811a is formed in the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, which corresponds to the erroneous pasting prevention part 2810c, and the proper pasting direction (in this case, up and down direction) with respect to the pasting recess 2810b can be seen. It looks like this. The entire back surface of this gate seal 2811 is a glue surface with adhesive strength.

According to the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, when the gate seal 2811 cannot be correctly pasted to the pasting recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 during manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the gate body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a) through the separation hole 2810d and press the gate seal 2811 from the rear to the front with the tip of the bar member, so that the vicinity of the edge of the gate seal 2811 can be removed so that it can be rolled forward. The gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion, and the gate seal 2811 can be reattached.

In addition, with the gate body 2810 and gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810, and the gate seal 2811 is pasted by pressing the gate seal 2811 from the rear with its tip. Since the gate seal 2810 can be easily removed from the recess 2810b, it is possible to easily replace the gate seal 2811 when changing the model.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate main body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d. This makes it easier to sort the pachinko machine 1 by material, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front by pasting the gate seal 2811 in the pasting recess 2810b, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance caused by the separation hole 2810d, and it is also possible to prevent the separation hole 2810d from becoming visible to the player. It can be made difficult to notice the presence of the separation hole 2810d, and it can be made difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2810d.

Furthermore, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached. Because it does not have a hole that goes all the way to the rear like in conventional pachinko machines, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole and enter the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. It is possible to avoid being inserted into the Internet, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the gate seal 2811 and into the separation hole 2810d, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 will block the separation hole 2810d. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering into the gaming board 5 from the front through the separation hole 2810d or into the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. In addition to being able to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, when a fraudulent tool pierces the gate seal 2811, it leaves a mark on the gate seal 2811, making it possible to discourage fraudulent acts, which has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since an erroneous pasting prevention part 2810c is provided in the pasting recess 2810b where the gate seal 2811 is pasted, if you try to paste the gate seal 2811 upside down, the gate sticker 2811 will not be pasted correctly. This makes it possible to make the operator aware of the incorrect pasting of the gate sticker 2811, and also allows the worker to paste the gate sticker 2811 in the correct orientation, making it possible to prevent the gate sticker 2811 from being pasted upside down. It is possible to prevent the product from being shipped with the product attached.

In addition, in the gate body 2810, since the protrusion 2810j is provided in the accommodation groove 2810g, if the gate sensor 2801 is inserted from the rear into the accommodation groove 2810g in a direction in which the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, The front surface of the gate sensor 2801 comes into contact with the protrusion 2810j before contacting the rear surface of the front plate section 2810a, making it impossible to engage the locking section 2810i on the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the housing groove 2810g in the direction in which the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 match, the locking portion 2810i is locked to the rear end of the gate sensor 2801, and the gate Since the sensor 2801 is held, it is possible to avoid assembling the gate sensor 2801 in the wrong direction, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems related to the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, by housing the gate sensor 2801 from the rear in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 and locking the locking part 2810i to the gate sensor 2801, the rear of the housing groove 2810g, the locking part 2810i, and the pasting recess 2810b is fixed. The gate sensor 2801 can be positioned by restricting its movement in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, and front-back direction by the side, and the gate sensor 2801 can be positioned easily by assembling the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800). Cost can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located in the front side of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is opened from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. It will be closed. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (attached) controls the separation hole 2810d. Since it is closed from the rear and does not have a hole that passes through to the rear like in conventional pachinko machines, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire could be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole. It is possible to avoid fraud and prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, as described above, by locking the gate sensor 2801 to the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810, movement in the front and back direction can be restricted. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pushed backward by an unauthorized tool, the locking part 2810i can prevent the gate sensor 2801 from moving backward, and the gate sensor 2801 can prevent the separation hole 2810d from closing from the rear. can be maintained to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 projects into the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d also serves as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted. The gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

From the above, the following technical ideas A to C can be understood.

[Technical philosophy A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a prescribed decoration,
It has a decorated part to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated part in the front and back and allows the attached decorative body to be pressed from the rear and separated. a front member that is
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which game media can flow;
The front member is
an accommodating portion that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion and is recessed from the rear end toward the front, and that the separation hole is located on the front end side, and that can accommodate at least a portion of the passage member from the rear; It is characterized by the fact that it further has the following.

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decoration body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting recess 2810b is the decorated part, the gate 2003 (the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , and the housing groove 2810g correspond to the housing portion.

As a result, in the front member, since the separation hole is located in the front side of the accommodating part, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating part, the separation hole can be closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has the same functions and effects as described above.

In addition, since the front member has a storage section, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section from the rear, the storage section prevents the passage member from moving vertically, horizontally, and forward. It is possible to control the positioning, simplify the assembly of the gaming machine, and reduce the cost of the gaming machine.

[Technical philosophy B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a prescribed decoration,
It has a decorated part to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated part in the front and back and allows the attached decorative body to be pressed from the rear and separated. a front member that is
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which game media can flow;
The front member is
The device further includes a locking portion that protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion and locks the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decoration body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting recess 2810b is the decorated part, the gate 2003 (the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , and the locking portion 2810i correspond to the locking portion.

As a result, the locking part that locks on the passage member protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole, so that when the passage member is locked on the locking part, the separation hole is closed from the rear. The passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decoration part and the locking part, and the separation hole can be closed by the passage member, and the movement of the passage member in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

In addition, as mentioned above, by locking the passage member with the locking part, it is possible to restrict movement in the front and rear directions, so that an unauthorized tool that penetrates the decoration body and the separation hole from the front can move the passage member backward. Even when pressed, the locking part can prevent the passage member from moving backward, and the passage member can maintain the separation hole closed from the rear to prevent fraudulent acts. I can do it.

Furthermore, since the locking part of the front member projects into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking part is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical philosophy C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a prescribed decoration,
A decorated part that is recessed rearward than the depth of the decorative body in the front-to-back direction and to which the decorative body is attached from the front; a separation hole that can be separated by pressing from the decorated part; a housing part that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated part and is recessed from the rear end toward the front, and the separation hole is located on the front end side; a front member having a locking part that protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated part;
At least a portion of the front member is accommodated in the accommodating portion from the rear so as to close the separation hole from the rear, and is latched to the locking portion to form a passage portion through which game media can flow. and a passage member having a

Here, the gate seal 2811 is the decoration body, the gate main body 2810 is the front member, the pasting recess 2810b is the decorated part, the gate 2003 (the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is the passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is the passage member. , the housing groove 2810g corresponds to a housing portion, and the locking portion 2810i corresponds to a locking portion, respectively.

As a result, a decorative object having a predetermined decoration is attached to the decorated part which is the front surface of the front member provided on the front side of the passage member having the passage part through which the game media flows. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decoration body. In addition, since the decorated part to which the decorative body is attached is recessed backwards relative to the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction, when the decorated body is attached to the decorated part, the decorated part of the front member is recessed. Since the surrounding parts protrude further forward than the front of the decorative body, the decorative body can be highlighted by being framed by the forwardly protruding portion of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body can be improved. It is possible to make the appearance of the game machine better by making it easier to make use of the functions.

In addition, since the decorated part to which the decoration is attached is recessed backwards, the decoration can be placed in the correct position by using the protruding periphery of the decorated part in the front member as a guide. It is possible to make it easier to attach the decorative body, reduce failures in attaching the decorative body, and suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, the decorated part of the front member is recessed backwards, so when the decorative body is attached to the decorated part, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated part is in a recessed position. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to remove the decoration adhered to the part to be decorated, it is difficult to hook the decoration from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove it. On the other hand, since a separation hole is provided in the part to be decorated, the adhesion to the part to be decorated can be easily released by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decoration forward. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, if it is not possible to properly attach the decoration to the decorated part of the front member during manufacturing, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and its tip presses the decoration from the rear. By doing so, the adhesion to the decorated part can be easily released, so the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the decorative body can be reattached. In addition, with the front member and the passage member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and its tip presses the decoration from the rear, making it easier to attach it to the decorated part. Since the decoration can be released, the decoration can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the work of replacing the decoration when changing models can be facilitated. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole. This makes it easier to separate the game machines, and reduces the cost of disposing of the game machines.

In addition, since the part to be decorated has a separation hole, it is possible to make the separation hole difficult to see from the front or hide it by attaching the decoration to the part to be decorated, thereby suppressing the deterioration in appearance caused by the separation hole. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole.

Then, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the housing part of the front member from the rear and locking the locking part to the passage member, the housing part, the locking part, and the rear side of the decorated part are connected. The movement of the passage member in the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction can be restricted and positioned, and the assembly of the game machine can be facilitated, thereby reducing the cost of the game machine. At this time, since the separation hole is located in the front side of the accommodation part in the front member, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodation part, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. It happens. Therefore, when assembled into a game machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member assembled to the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached. Since the machine does not have a hole that goes all the way to the back like a machine, it is possible to prevent a wire-shaped illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the machine through the hole, which could lead to fraudulent acts. This can be prevented.

In addition, since the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole from the front through the decoration, the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, preventing unauthorized acts from occurring, and preventing unauthorized tools from touching the decorative body. Since a mark is left on the decoration by piercing, it is possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, as mentioned above, by locking the passage member with the locking part, it is possible to restrict movement in the front and rear directions, so that an unauthorized tool that penetrates the decoration body and the separation hole from the front can move the passage member backward. Even when pressed, the locking part can prevent the passage member from moving backward, and the passage member can maintain the separation hole closed from the rear to prevent fraudulent acts. I can do it.

In addition, since the locking part of the front member protrudes into the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking part is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 137, 144, 145, and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly cause the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 to enter the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. Thereby, by hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the game balls B that have passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B that have passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 with respect to the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N, you are guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W. be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, it is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 are discharged from the out hole 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the side and received into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release parts 2513b on the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The substrate is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game balls B are detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are provided. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a can pass through the gate 2003 or be accepted into the second starting opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. There is no gender.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 are not in an open state, it is possible to prompt the player to drive the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left-handed hitting").

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the left side of the gate member 2800 and to the gate 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. , the right side of the gate member 2800, and the probability decreases in this order, and flows down toward the side middle unit 2700.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B hits the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. is emitted downwards. The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the probability is approximately the same on the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800, and the probability is lower on the right side of the gate member 2800. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received into the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a through the back, front, and lower presentation units 3160. Furthermore, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. Upon detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery with a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side, and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2022. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then placed in the first back of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the guide path 3156, detected by the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 through the back front lower presentation unit 3160. At this time, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flowing down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "yakuza hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, if the game ball B is received as a "yakuza" prize. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2601, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, and then placed in front of the back of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the distribution passage 3158 of the back and front right decoration unit 3140 in the production unit 3100. By detecting the game balls B by the accessory prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Then, the game balls B delivered to the distribution path 3158 are distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by driving the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game balls B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 are detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing hole 2008 is discharged onto the board holder 1200 after being detected by the losing hole sensor 3004 without being detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003. When the game ball B is received in this V winning hole 2007, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

Note that the game ball B that is not accepted by the accessory prize opening 2006 and flows down the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. from there to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2425.

The game ball B that has flown down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to the inclination, and rolls on the top surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the second shelf 2422. Then, it is released from the left end of the second shelf 2422 to the left. Then, depending on the momentum, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the grand prize opening door 2413, and rolls to the left due to the inclination thereof. Then, after rolling from the big prize opening door 2413 to the fourth shelf 2424, it is released from the fourth shelf 2424 to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

By the way, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, it does not flow down to the first shelf part 2421 and falls to the upper shelf part 2436. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the upper shelf section 2436 rolls to the left due to the slope, is ejected to the left from the left end of the upper shelf section 2436, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left side. After making contact with it and changing its direction downward, it flows down near the left end of the top surface of the grand prize opening door 2413, and then rolls the grand prize opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 to the left and exits the first attacker unit 2400. released to. Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf section 2436, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf section 2436 and the timing at which the grand prize opening 2005 becomes open, the opening in the grand prize opening 2005 may change. It may be accepted.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may rebound to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2436, etc. By flowing upward, the first shelf portion 2421 may roll to the right against the inclination thereof, and may be ejected from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the right (downward). The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf section 2421 passes between the first standing wall section 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2433. However, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, it rolls to the left and is received into the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a, It is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003, the second starting gate Since the door 2411 moves and the second starting port 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2421 can be received into the second starting port 2004. There is sex. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When a game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a second special lottery result is drawn and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out is provided.

In addition, when the game ball B is released from the second shelf 2422 to the left, the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is determined. As a result, when a "jackpot" is drawn, the big winning opening door 2413 moves and the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left , it will be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Note that depending on the momentum of the game ball B released leftward from the second shelf 2422, it may come into contact with the level difference on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436, flowing diagonally downward to the right and collapsing between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf section 2423 and the shelf section 2423. The game ball B that entered the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423 passes between the third standing wall section 2427 and the fourth standing wall section 2428 and reaches near the left end of the second horizontal wall section 2433. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and is received into the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is not received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2021. If so, it is discharged from the outlet 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower part behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 must accept the game ball B, and the "accessory winning" or "winning" It is necessary to have the first special lottery result such as "Jackpot" or the second special lottery result be drawn. While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 requires the game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 to draw (draw) a "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player should drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "accessory prize" or "jackpot" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the special prize opening 2005 or the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes. In order to do so, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed hitting" so that the game ball B can be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 or the prize winning hole 2006. It is possible to increase expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B by the player.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage allows for easy passage through the gate 2003. Since the game ball B is easily accepted into the second sub-out port 2022, the driving force of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide path, and the player can You can enjoy typing operations.

In addition, by performing a "right-handed hit" and passing the game ball B through the gate 2003, there is a possibility that a "normal win" will be drawn in which the second starting port 2004 will be in an open state. Since the game ball B is accepted into the second starting slot 2004 and there is a possibility that a "yakubutsu" or "jackpot" will be drawn, expectations for the game can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. I can do it.

[5-8j. Magnetic sensor]
Next, the plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 on the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. FIG. 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet, and (c) ) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the detection range by the magnetic sensor in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected, ( e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet. FIG. 148(a) is a perspective view showing the magnetic sensor held by the holding member, FIG. 148(b) is an exploded perspective view showing the holding member and the magnetic sensor separated, and FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing a holding member in cross section.

A plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5, and are used to detect illegal magnetism (lines of magnetic force) acting within the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 148(c), the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1052 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, and the sensor board 1052 and the sensor body 1051. A transparent sensor case 1053 covering the sensor case 1053 is provided. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1051, the sensor board 1052 includes ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, and the like.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is rectangular in plan view, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one of the sides in the height direction is chamfered. In this magnetic sensor 1050, an internal sensor main body 1051 and a sensor substrate 1052 can be visually recognized from the outside through a transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is capable of detecting the passage of lines of magnetic force parallel to the longest long side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in FIG. can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in FIG. Since the magnet 1055 passes in the perpendicular direction), the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

For this reason, this magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection area of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side in the long side direction centering on the magnetic sensor 1050, as shown by the hatching in FIG. 147(c). Has DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA that is a combination of two spheres.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided facing in appropriate directions. Each magnetic sensor 1050 detects an illegal magnetic field acting near the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, and warp entrance 2511 in the gaming area 5a. It is placed so that it can be detected. In other words, the respective magnetic Sensor 1050 is arranged in an appropriate orientation.

In addition, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 receives signals from a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a prize winning port solenoid 2612, a V sorting solenoid, a drive motor provided in the back unit 3000, etc. In order not to detect magnetism (magnetic lines of force), each detection area DA is made so as not to be exposed to the solenoid or drive motor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(d), when a magnetic body 1056 is placed in parallel with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect lines of magnetic force from a magnet 1055, the lines of magnetic force are attracted to the magnetic body 1056, so that The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may no longer be able to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(e), when a magnetic body 1057 is placed in series with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet 1055, the lines of magnetic force are attracted by the magnetic body 1057. The number of magnetic field lines passing through sensor 1050 can be increased. Thereby, the magnetism of a distant magnet 1055 or a magnet 1055 with weak magnetic force can be detected.

By the way, in conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using screws made of magnetic material, so depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, the lines of magnetic force from the magnet may be used to commit fraudulent acts. There was a problem in that the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor decreased due to being attracted to the screw with high magnetic permeability, making it impossible to detect the approach of the magnet. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 includes an accommodating portion 1061 that can accommodate the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that is engaged with the magnetic sensor 1050 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061. Furthermore, the holding member 1060 has a protrusion 1063 that protrudes into the housing portion 1061 from the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062. This holding member 1060 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

In this holding member 1060, when the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the housing part 1061 from the outside, the elastic claws 1062 are elastically deformed in the direction away from the housing part 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing part 1061, the elastic claws 1062 returns and is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing portion 1061 on the opposite side of the elastic claw 1062. There is.

By locking the elastic claws 1062, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction of coming out of the housing portion 1061, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed into the housing part 1061 by the contact of the protrusion 1063, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from shaking within the housing part 1061.

In this way, since the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting lines of magnetic force from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the gaming area 5a, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from decreasing. Therefore, the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a can be easily detected, and fraudulent activities using magnets can be detected at an early stage, and fraudulent activities can be carried out by notifying the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material can avoid attracting magnetic lines of force from the magnet and prevent a decrease in the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented from decreasing. The sensor 1050 makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced compared to the past, making it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1060. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 without using screws, and the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier, thereby reducing the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged (pressed) toward the housing portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the urging by the protrusion 1063 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and installed on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 that is attached to the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, it can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection area DA in the gaming area 5a. Thereby, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws for attaching the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts using magnets.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by a transparent holding member 1060 and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor body is mounted on the sensor board 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and by making the magnetic sensor 1050 visible, it is possible to make the player aware of the fact that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy and to be able to make the player aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy. It is possible to make people hesitate to carry out such acts, and it is also possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made less noticeable, and the sensor board 1052 can be used as a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. It can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a normal player, and it is possible to avoid the appearance of the gaming area 5a from becoming unsightly.

Furthermore, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether or not the sensor body 1051 is damaged, thereby making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 easier. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 149 and the like. FIG. 149(a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism (not shown) for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back-front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end of the back box 3010, and a back-rear upper effect provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back-front effect unit 3100. unit 3200, and a rear lower production unit 3300 provided at the lower part of the back box 3010 below the rear upper production unit.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the right on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the production display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided near the center of the left side in the vertical direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 to which a locking mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a locking mechanism is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting the back and front presentation unit 3100 and the like.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. A first starting hole sensor 3002 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006, and a V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning hole 2007 after being accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006. It has a losing hole sensor 3004 that detects the game balls B distributed to the losing hole 2008 (see FIG. 169, etc.).

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved back and forth to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that has been accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. A V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 is provided. These general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, V winning opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, V winning opening door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back and front production unit 3100. .

[5-9a. Back-front production unit]
Next, the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 150 to 160. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back and front presentation unit in the back unit. FIG. 151(a) is a perspective view of the back-front presentation unit in the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 151(b) is a perspective view of the back-front presentation unit in the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 152(a) is a sectional view of the back-front presentation unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, FIG. 152(b) is an enlarged sectional view of the left part in FIG. 152(a), and FIG. 152(c) is It is an enlarged sectional view of the right part in (a). FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decoration unit of the back front presentation unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. Figure 154 shows the back front left decoration unit disassembled and only the back front left first decoration, back front left second decoration, back front left third decoration, and back front left decoration base seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the first back left decorative body shown in a transparent state, FIG. 155(b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and FIG. 155(c) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state.

FIG. 156(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit and the decoration board for making the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit emit light decoration, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate and the decoration board for making the decoration body of the back front lower presentation unit light-emitting decoration. FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is decorated with light. FIG. 158(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and FIG. 158(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the light emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back-front presentation unit showing the second pattern of the light guide plate in a state where it is emitted.

The back and front presentation unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end inside the back box 3010. The back and front presentation unit 3100 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 provided at the center when viewed from the front, a back and front left decoration unit 3120 provided at the left end of the light guide plate 3110, and a right end of the light guide plate 3110. The lower ends of the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the side, the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided at the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 are connected to each other. It includes a back front lower production unit 3160 and an upper connection base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140, respectively.

The back front right decoration unit 3140 has a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. The V winning hole sensor 3003 detects the game ball B that was later distributed to the V winning hole 2007, and the game ball B that was accepted into the role prize winning hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and then distributed to the losing hole 2008. A loss sensor 3004 is provided. In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is a V winning opening door for sorting the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. 3006, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for advancing and retracting (opening and closing) the V winning opening door 3006.

The back and front lower production unit 3160 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. A first starting port sensor 3002 that detects.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back-front production unit 3100 has a first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158(a)) that is displayed by emitting light by reflecting only the light from the left and right sides forward, and a light guide plate 3110 that displays only light from a specific area below. A second picture 3112 (see FIG. 158(b)) is displayed by emitting light by reflecting the light forward. In other words, the light guide plate 3110 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of a back front left decorative board 3128 in a back front left decoration unit 3120 to be described later, a back front right first decorative board 3148 in a back front right decoration unit 3140, a back front right When the second decorative substrate 3149 and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 can be displayed by emitting light. Moreover, when the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower production unit 3160 are made to emit light, the second pattern 3112 can be displayed by emitting light.

As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a pattern in which the letter "A" is stylized in the center, and a pattern that looks like spreading "wings" on both the left and right sides of the pattern. . As shown in the figure, this first pattern 3111 is configured such that the light and shade of the light emitting display and the degree of illumination differ depending on the part of the pattern, thereby enhancing the design and decorativeness of the pattern. To be more specific, in FIG. 158(a), the first pattern 3111 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED, where the shaded area is the darkest, and where the shaded area is the lightest. The area is made up of a plurality of points that emit light by splitting the cocktail light from the LED, and the other shading areas are made up of a plurality of lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

Here, cocktail light is light of a color that includes two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when a cocktail of yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated to a spectroscopic light emitting section, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and the red and green light components are split into red and green light. A green-looking part will appear. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated as a cocktail light to the spectroscopic light emitting part, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and the parts of the part that look red, green, or blue. , light of an appropriate mixture of these colors will appear, producing sparkling rainbow-colored light. Note that when this spectroscopic light emitting section is irradiated with light of only one color of the three primary colors of light, the light does not have a component to be spectrally divided, so it will emit light of that color. For this reason, the spectroscopic light emitting section can emit light in a single color or in multiple colors, depending on the color of the light emitted, making it possible to create a more diverse range of light effects. can.

The LEDs (light guide plate LED 3128g, etc.) for displaying the first pattern 3111 are the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right first decorative board 3148 of the back front right decorative unit 3140. , the back front right second decorative board 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward, centering on a plurality of parts spaced apart in the left-right direction near the lower end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LEDs 3176 of the lower left decorative board 3174 and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate, which will be described later. The plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are formed so as to reflect only the light from the corresponding LED 3176 forward, and are formed so that each line can independently emit light. ing.

The second pattern 3112 has a plurality of lines 3113, which are five line groups 3114 from the left: a first line group 3114a, a second line group 3114b, a third line group 3114c, a fourth line group 3114d, and a fifth line group 3114e. It is divided into Each line group 3114 is composed of five lines 3113, from the left: a first line 3113a, a second line 3113b, a third line 3113c, a fourth line 3113d, and a fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 of the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e in one line group 3114 have their respective lower ends arranged at the same position, and extend radially upward from the lower end position.

This light-emitting display of the second pattern 3112 allows the player to see a light-emitting effect similar to a searchlight from below on a concert stage, making the inside of the gaming area 5a look dazzling, and providing the player with enjoyment. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

The LED 3176 for displaying the second pattern 3112 by emitting light is mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
The back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front presentation unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5), and is a vertically long back front left logo consisting of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decorative part 3121, a back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 which is provided above the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and has a stylized letter "A", and a back front left logo decoration part 3122 which is provided to the left of the back front left logo decoration part 3121. It has a back front left sub-decoration part 3123.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a transparent back front left decorative body 3124 provided behind the back front left first decorative body 3124. A second decorative body 3125, a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125. The back front left decorative body base 3127 is provided.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 is used to decorate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 with light emission. A front left decorative board 3128, a back front upper left decorative board 3129 for luminescent decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and a back front left decoration board 3129 for luminescent decoration of the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123. A front lower left decorative board 3130 is provided.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a back front left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and a back front left upper reflector 3132 provided below the back front left upper decorative board 3129. , and a back front lower left reflector 3133 provided above the back front lower left decorative board 3130.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a left diffusion lens 3134 provided between the back front left third decoration body 3126 and the back front left decoration body base 3127.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is connected to the back front left decorative body base so as to sandwich the left end of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, the left diffusion lens 3134, and the light guide plate 3110. It is attached to the front of the 3127. The back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed into a transparent flat plate and a vertically elongated rectangle. The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative part 3124a extending from side to side and penetrating from front to back at a portion approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 has a plurality of penetrating decorative parts 3124b penetrating back and forth. The plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper end, near the lower end, and near the upper right end of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b is formed into a rhombus shape in which the four sides of a square are replaced with arcs that bulge inward.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 includes a first front left logo decoration part 3124c that is provided below the partition decoration part 3124a on the front side and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration part 3121; It has a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration part 3124d provided in a portion corresponding to the first front left logo decoration part 3124c on the rear surface. The right side of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape that follows the character strings of the logos of the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative part 3124a on the back surface, and the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e that constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. and a plurality of first left sub-decoration parts 3124f that are provided in a relief shape on the left side of the first back-left logo decoration part 3124d on the back surface and constitute a part of the back-front left sub-decoration part 3123; have. The first upper left logo decoration part 3124e constitutes the outermost part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. The first left sub-decoration part 3124f is formed into a cloisonné pattern in which circles of the same size are stacked quarter by quarter and one circle is extracted, and a diamond pattern in which the outer circle of the cloisonné pattern is removed. They are arranged in rows one above the other.

Although the back front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155(a). The first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be visually recognized.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 when assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, and is arranged so that the right side is located at the rear with respect to the left side. (See Figure 152). In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located so that its left side is in contact with the right side of the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the back A first lower LED 3128a and a first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative board 3128 are located. In addition, in the assembled state of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is located above the upper surface, and the first LED of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is located below the lower surface. One LED 3130a is located.

When the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is attached to the board holding portion of the back front left second decorative body 3125. 3125b, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d and the first left sub-decoration part 3124f provide light-emitting decoration. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3124a and the inner surface of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b provided near the lower end are also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, A part of the light that reaches the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3124a. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3124a. The light will be incident on the inner side above the . In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3124a. The first upper left logo decoration part 3124e above the partition decoration part 3124a is almost illuminated (light-emitting decoration) by the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the left decoration board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decoration board 3130. Instead, only the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be displayed with bright light.

In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left first decorative body 3124 changes to the back front left second decorative body 3125. The first upper left logo decoration part 3124e emits light and is decorated by light that enters the interior from a portion above the partition decoration part 3124a on the left side surface via the holding part 3125b or light that enters the interior from the top surface. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration part 3124a and the penetrating decoration part provided above the partition decoration part 3124a are also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the inner peripheral surface on the upper side, A part of the light that reaches the peripheral surface is reflected toward the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is emitted from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decoration part 3124a. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decorative part 3124a, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3124a. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3124a. The light from the first upper LED 3128b of the left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 illuminates the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d below the partition decoration part 3124a. The first left sub-decoration part 3124f is hardly displayed with light emission (light-emission decoration), and only the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e and the upper penetrating decoration part 3124b can be brightly displayed with light emission.

In this way, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be decorated with light (light emitting display) independently, with the dividing decorative part 3124a as a boundary.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is entirely transparent, and includes a flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the periphery of the decorative plate portion 3125a except for the right side ( The substrate holding portions 3125b are provided on the left side, the upper side, and the lower side. The board holding part 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate part 3125a, projects forward, and is recessed forward from the rear side. The board holding part 3125b cooperates with the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 to sandwich and hold the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130. It is for the purpose of In the back front left second decorative body 3125, the front surface of the board holding portion 3125b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, whereas the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side side is located further back than the left side side. ing.

In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has a partition decorative part 3125c extending from side to side and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate part 3125a at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom. There is. This partition decoration part 3125c is the same size and is formed at the same height as the partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124.

In addition, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is a relief-shaped second back left logo decoration part that is provided below the partition decorative part 3125c on the rear surface and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration part 3121. 3125d. The right side of the second back left decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape that follows the character string of the logo of the second back left logo decoration part 3125d.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative part 3125c on the back surface, and is a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e that constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. and a plurality of second left sub-decoration parts 3125f that are provided in relief on the back side to the left of the second back-left logo decoration part 3125d and constitute a part of the back-front left sub-decoration part 3123; have. The second upper left logo decoration part 3125e is formed to be one size smaller than the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e of the back front left first decoration body 3124. The second left sub-decoration part 3125f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decoration part 3124f, and is formed in a similar shape that is slightly smaller.

Although the back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155(b). The second back left logo decoration part 3125d, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, and the second left sub decoration part 3125f can be visually recognized.

When the back front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. 152 etc., the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a. At the same time, a third decorative body 3126 on the back and front left side is located at the rear. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has the front end side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the back front left reflector 3131, and the back front upper left decorative board 3129 in the board holding part 3125b recessed forward. The front end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the front end side of the back front lower left decorative board 3130, and the front end side of the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The second lower LED 3128c and the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate part 3125a, the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is on the upper side of the upper surface, and the second LED of the back front left decorative board 3129 is on the lower side of the back front The second LEDs 3130b of the lower left decorative board 3130 are located respectively.

When the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left second decorative body 3125 emits light from the dividing decorative part 3125c on the left side of the decorative plate part 3125a. The second back left logo decoration part 3125d and the second left sub-decoration part 3125f emits light and are decorated by the light that enters the inside from the lower part of the decorative plate part 3125a or the light that enters the inside from the lower surface of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3125c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3125c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3125c. The light will be incident on the inner side above the . In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3125c. The second upper left logo decoration part 3125e above the partition decoration part 3125c is almost illuminated (light-emitting decoration) by the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the left decoration board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decoration board 3130. Instead, only the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f can be displayed with bright light.

In addition, when the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left second decorative body 3125 becomes a partition decorative part on the left side of the decorative plate part 3125a. The second upper left logo decoration part 3125e emits light and is decorated by light that enters inside from a portion above 3125c and light that enters inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3125c is also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, A part of the light that reaches the circumferential surface is reflected toward the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3125c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3125c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3125c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3125c. The light from the second upper LED 3128d of the left decorative board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 illuminates most of the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and second left sub-decorative part 3125f below the partition decorative part 3125c. There is no light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration), and only the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e can be displayed brightly.

In this way, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be independently decorated with light (light emitting display) with the dividing decorative part 3125c as a boundary.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent, and has a flat plate-like decorative plate portion parallel to the decorative plate portions 3125a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left second decorative body 3125. 3126a, and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a excluding the right side. In the back front left third decorative body 3126, the rear surface of the flange portion 3126b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side is located further back than the left side. There is.

In addition, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has a partition decorative part 3126c extending from side to side and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate part 3126a at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom. There is. This partition decoration part 3126c is the same size and is formed at the same height as the partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is a relief-shaped third back left logo decoration part that is provided below the partition decorative part 3126c on the rear surface and constitutes a part of the back front left logo decoration part 3121. 3126d. The right side of the back front left third decoration body 3126 is formed in a shape that follows the character string of the logo of the third back left logo decoration part 3126d.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative part 3126c on the back surface, and is a third upper left logo decoration part 3126e that constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. and a plurality of third left sub-decoration parts 3126f that are provided in a relief shape on the left side of the third back-left logo decoration part 3126d on the back surface and constitute a part of the back-front left sub-decoration part 3123; have. The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e is formed to be one size smaller than the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e of the second back front left decoration body 3125. The third left sub-decoration part 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decoration part 3124f, and has the same size between the first left sub-decoration part 3124f and the second left sub-decoration part 3125f. It is formed into a shape.

Although the back front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155(c). The third back left logo decoration part 3126d, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the third left sub decoration part 3126f can be visually recognized.

When the back front left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the back front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in FIG. The decorative plate portion 3125a of the second decorative body 3125 is located, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located at the rear. In addition, in the assembled state of the back front left third decorative body 3126, the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 are on the left side of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the third lower LED 3128e and third upper LED 3128f are on the left side of the left side of the back front left decorative board 3126a, and The third LED 3130c of the front upper left decorative board 3129 and the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are located below the lower surface of the front upper left decorative board 3129, respectively.

When the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 emit light, the back front left third decorative body 3126 emits light from the dividing decorative part 3126c on the left side of the decorative plate part 3126a. The third back left logo decoration part 3126d and the third left sub-decoration part 3126f emits light and are decorated by the light that enters the inside from the lower part of the decorative plate part 3126a or the light that enters the inside from the lower surface of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3126c is also decorated with light emission.

In addition, in the partition decorative part 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, A part of the light that has reached the inner circumferential surface is reflected to the lower inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3126c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3126c. The light will be incident on the inner side above the . In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3126c. The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e above the partition decoration part 3126c is almost illuminated (light-emitting decoration) by the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130. Instead, only the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f can be displayed with bright light.

In addition, when the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 emit light, the back front left third decorative body 3126 becomes a partition decorative part on the left side of the decorative plate part 3126a. The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e emits light and is decorated by light that enters the interior from a portion above 3126c and light that enters the interior from the upper surface of the decoration plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative portion 3126c is also decorated with light.

In addition, in the partition decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, A part of the light that has reached the circumferential surface is reflected to the upper inner side of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is emitted from the inner circumferential surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative part 3126c. When the light emitted inside the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected to the inside of the partition decorative part 3126c, and the rest is transmitted from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decorative part 3126c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 is greatly attenuated by passing through the partition decorative part 3126c. The light from the third upper LED 3128f of the left decorative board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 illuminates most of the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and third left sub-decorative part 3126f below the partition decorative part 3126c. There is no light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration), and only the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e can be displayed brightly.

In this way, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is configured such that the upper side and the lower side can be decorated with light (light emitting display) independently, with the dividing decorative part 3126c as a boundary.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is entirely transparent, and includes a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and a substrate provided around the decorative plate portion 3127a except for the right side (left side, upper side, and lower side). It has a holding part 3127b. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The board holding part 3127b extends further outward than the decorative plate part 3127a, has a rear surface located at the rear, and is recessed from the front side to the rear. The board holding part 3127b cooperates with the board holding part 3125b of the second back front left decorative body 3125 to sandwich the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130. It is for holding. Moreover, the left end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the board holding part 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower production unit 3160 is attached to the lower part.

In addition, the back front left decoration base 3127 extends across the entire width at a constant vertical height near the center of the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a in the vertical direction, and is provided with an interval in the vertical direction. Three back front left band decoration parts 3127c, and a base left upper logo decoration part 3127d which is provided in a relief shape near the upper part of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. ,have. The upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the base is formed to be one size smaller than the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e of the back front left third decoration body 3126.

Although the back front left decoration base 3127 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, it is actually transparent, so as shown in FIG. 155(d), the back side provided from the front to the back The front left band decoration part 3127c and the upper left base logo decoration part 3127d can be visually recognized.

When the back front left decoration base 3127 is assembled to the back front left decoration unit 3120, the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decoration plate portion 3127a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. In addition, in the assembled state, the back front left decorative body base 3127 has a board holder 3127b recessed rearward, a back front left decorative board 3128, a back front left reflector 3131 on the rear end side, and a back front left upper left decorative board 3129. The rear end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the rear end side of the back front lower left decorative board 3130, and the rear end side of the back front lower left reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The lower base LED 3128h and the upper base LED 3128i of the back front left decorative board 3128 are located on the left side of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, respectively.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 can decorate the back front left band decoration part 3127c of the decorative plate part 3127a by emitting light when the base lower LED 3128h of the back front left decorative board 3128 is made to emit light. The three back front left band decoration parts 3127c can each be decorated with light emission independently. Furthermore, when the LED 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 is made to emit light, the back front left decoration base 3127 can decorate the upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the base.

The back front left decorative board 3128 has a vertically long flat plate shape, and its plate surface is oriented in the left-right direction. The back front left decorative board 3128 includes the back front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decoration. It is arranged to the left of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front left decorative board 3128 is held between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left reflector 3131. ing.

The back front left decorative board 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and includes a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a provided below the partition decorative part 3124a, and a back front left first decorative body. A plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b are located on the left side of 3124 and provided above the partition decoration part 3124a, and a partition decoration A plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c are provided below the portion 3125c, and a plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c are provided to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the second back and front left decorative body 3125, and are provided above the partition decorative portion 3125c. A plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the front left third decorative body 3126 and provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c; A plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f are provided to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the left third decorative body 3126 and provided above the partition decorative portion 3126c.

In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 includes a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g located to the left of the left diffuser lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), and the back front left decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Three base lower LEDs 3128h located to the left of the left band decoration part 3127c and a plurality of bases located to the left of the base left upper logo decoration part 3127d in the decoration plate part 3127a of the back front left decoration base 3127. It is equipped with an upper LED 3128i.

When the plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decoration body 3124 are illuminated with light. I can do it. When the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124, etc. can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the like can be decorated with light. When the plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be decorated with light emission.

Moreover, when the plurality of lower third LEDs 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission.

When the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by emitting light through the left diffusion lens 3134. When a plurality (three) of the lower base LEDs 3128h of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of LEDs 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 are made to emit light, the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be decorated with light emission.

The first lower LED 3128a, the first upper LED 3128b, the second lower LED 3128c, the second upper LED 3128d, the third lower LED 3128e, the third upper LED 3128f, the light guide plate LED 3128g, and the lower base mounted on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128. The LED 3128h and the LED 3128i on the base are full color LEDs.

Further, the back front left decorative board 3128 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes it possible to make the back front left decorative board 3128 difficult to see, as well as to reflect the light from the mounted LEDs. The decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, etc. can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 has electronic components such as LEDs mounted thereon, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards, using ink of a color with high brightness or saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing. This makes the characters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the back front left decorative board 3128 is equipped with a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, etc. in addition to the LED.

The back front upper left decorative board 3129 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and its plate surface is oriented in the vertical direction. The back front left upper decorative board 3129 includes the back front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decoration. It is arranged above the decorative plate part 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front upper left decorative board 3129 is held between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left upper reflector 3132. ing.

Although not shown, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 includes a plurality of first LEDs provided above the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs provided above, and a plurality of third LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When the plurality of first LEDs of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be decorated with light emission. When the plurality of second LEDs of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the like can be decorated with light. When the plurality of third LEDs of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission.

The plurality of first LEDs, second LEDs, and third LEDs mounted on the lower surface of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are full-color LEDs.

Further, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front upper left decorative board 3129 difficult to see, and also to reflect the light from the mounted LED, making the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 brighter and more luminous. can be done. In addition, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 has electronic components such as LEDs mounted thereon, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes the characters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown in the drawings, in addition to LEDs, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, and the like are mounted on the back front upper left decorative board 3129.

The back front lower left decorative board 3130 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and its plate surface is oriented in the vertical direction. The back front lower left decorative board 3130 includes the back front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decoration. It is arranged below the decorative plate part 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front lower left decorative board 3130 is sandwiched together with the back front lower left reflector 3133 between the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding part 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127. ing.

The back front lower left decorative board 3130 is provided below the plurality of first LEDs 3130a provided below the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 3130b and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When the plurality of first LEDs 3130a of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, etc. of the back front left first decoration body 3124 can be decorated with light. can. When the plurality of second LEDs 3130b of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the like can be decorated with light. When the plurality of third LEDs 3130c of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the like can be decorated with light.

The plurality of first LEDs 3130a, second LEDs 3130b, and third LEDs 3130c mounted on the lower surface of the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are full-color LEDs.

Further, the back front lower left decorative board 3130 has a surface coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front lower left decorative board 3130 difficult to see, and also to reflect the light from the mounted LED, making the back front left logo decoration part 3121 brighter and more luminous. can be done. In addition, the back front lower left decorative board 3130 has electronic components such as LEDs mounted thereon, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. This makes the characters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, in addition to LEDs, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, and the like are mounted on the back front lower left decorative board 3130.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front left decorative board 3128 (back front left reflector 3131), and is located between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127. is sandwiched between. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128 and illuminates the left side surface of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes the first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part 3124d of the back front left first decoration body 3124, and the back front left second decoration body 3125. The second back left logo decoration part 3125d of the back left logo decoration part 3125d and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d of the back front left third decoration body 3126 form one back front left logo decoration part 3121 by overlapping front and back. These first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and third back left logo decoration part 3126d have different positions in the front and back direction, so the game As the position of the user's eyes moves, the degree of overlapping changes, making it possible to make a predetermined logo consisting of a plurality of alphabets appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c, and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b, and a third LED of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are independently activated. The back front left logo decoration portion 3121 can be decorated with light emission in a variety of light emission modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decoration part 3124e of the back front left first decoration body 3124 and a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e of the back front left second decoration body 3125. , the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e of the back front left third decoration body 3126, and the base left upper logo decoration part 3127d of the back front left decoration body base 3127 overlap in the front and back to form one back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. are doing. The positions of the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d are different in the front and back direction, so that the position of the player's eyes is different. As they move, the degree to which they overlap changes, making the logo with a stylized letter "A" appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, a third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, a base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, which are located at approximately the same position when viewed from the front. Even with a logo like this, by sequentially decorating the back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127, the game can be played. It is possible to show a pseudo animation with movement to the player, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player. This animation-like light-emitting effect is achieved by sequentially decorating the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d. However, similar effects can be achieved.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first upper LED 3128b, a second upper LED 3128d, a third upper LED 3128f, a base upper LED 3128i, and a first LED, a second LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129, By causing the LED and the third LED to emit light as appropriate, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d each independently emit light. The back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 can be decorated with light in a variety of light-emitting modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a first left sub decoration part 3124f of the back front left first decoration body 3124 and a second left sub decoration part 3125f of the back front left second decoration body 3125. , the third left sub-decoration part 3126f of the third back-front left decoration body 3126 are overlapped one after another to form one back-front left sub-decoration part 3123. These first left sub-decoration part 3124f, second left sub-decoration part 3125f, and third left sub-decoration part 3126f are located at different positions in the front-rear direction, so when the player's eye position moves, the extent to which they overlap will change. changes, and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123 can be made to look three-dimensional.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a first lower LED 3128a, a second lower LED 3128c, and a third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and a first LED 3130a, a second LED 3130b, and a third LED of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first left sub-decoration part 3124f, the second left sub-decoration part 3125f, and the third left sub-decoration part 3126f can be decorated with light emission independently. The portion 3123 can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 includes a partition decoration part 3124a of the back front left first decoration body 3124, a partition decoration part 3125c of the back front left second decoration body 3125, and a partition decoration part of the back front left third decoration body 3126. 3126c, the lower side (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left sub-decoration part 3123) and the upper side (back side The light-emitting decoration of the front upper left logo decoration part 3122) can be clearly separated, and the decorative effects of the light-emitting decoration of the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123 and the light-emitting decoration of the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 can be clearly separated. can be further increased. At this time, the partition decoration part 3124a, the partition decoration part 3125c, and the partition decoration part 3126c are also decorated with light, so that the appearance of the partition decoration part 3124a, the partition decoration part 3125c, and the partition decoration part 3126c can be improved, and they also emit light. You can enjoy decoration.

In addition, when the back front left decorative unit 3120 lights up the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is decorated with a partition. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b below the portion 3124a can be decorated with light. In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are made to emit light, the penetrating decoration above the partition decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is illuminated. The portion 3124b can be decorated with light emission. The appearance can also be improved by the light-emitting decoration of these penetrating decorative portions 3124b.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 allows the back front right first decorative board 3148 and the back front right second decorative board in the back front right decorative unit 3140 to emit light from the light guide plate LED 3128g of the back front left decorative board 3128. 3149 and the light guide plate LED of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed by emitting light.

As described above, according to the back front left decoration unit 3120, transparent three-dimensional decorations such as the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123, Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming area 5a, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123 can be decorated with various light emitting modes, so players will not get bored with the various light emitting effects. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In the above description, the decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c that cut off the light from the LEDs are shown as penetrating the front and back, but the present invention is not limited to this. , protrusions may also be used. Further, a protrusion that is inserted into the penetrating decoration part 3124b of the first back left decorative body 3124 is provided on the back front left second decorative body 3125, so that the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. It's okay. In other words, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as a positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decorative unit]
The back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front presentation unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5), and is a vertically long back front right logo consisting of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. A decorative part 3141, a back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 (see FIG. 151(b)) which is provided above the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and has a stylized letter "A", and a back front right logo decoration part 3142. It has a back front right sub-decoration part (not shown) provided near the decoration part 3141.

The back front right decorative unit 3140 includes a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 which has a vertically long shape when viewed from the front, and a transparent back front right second decorative body provided behind the back front right first decorative body 3144. A decorative body 3145, a transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and a transparent back provided behind the back front right third decorative body 3146. A front right decorative body base 3147 (see FIG. 152).

The right end of the upper connection base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the back front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower production unit 3160 is attached to the lower part. In addition, the back front right decoration base 3147 has three back front right band decorations that extend across the entire width at a constant height vertically near the center in the vertical direction, and are provided at intervals vertically. 3147a (see FIG. 151(b)).

In addition, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is used to decorate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front right upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub decoration part to emit light. The first right decorative board 3148, the second back right decorative board 3149, the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 for decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 with light, and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142. It includes a back front upper right decorative board 3151 for luminescent decoration and a back front lower right decorative board 3152 for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration part 3141 (see FIG. 156).

In addition, the back front right decorative unit 3140 includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decorative board 3148, and a space between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decorative board 3149. and a lower right diffusing lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 (see FIG. 156). . The upper right diffuser lens 3153, the middle right diffuser lens 3154, and the lower right diffuser lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third decorative body 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147.

Furthermore, the back front right decoration unit 3140 receives the game ball B that has been accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and is guided backward by the first guide path 2701, and guides it downward. 3156, and a second back guidance passage 3157 that receives the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guidance passage and guides it downward. . In the first back guidance passage 3156, one general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 is provided. The game balls B guided to the first back guidance passage 3156 and the second back guidance passage 3157 are discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower presentation unit 3160.

In addition, in the back front right decoration unit 3140, the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and guided backward by the guidance passage 2613 circulates, and the V prize opening 2007 and the losing opening 2008 are distributed. A sorting passage provided, and a V prize opening door 3006 that distributes game balls B that advance and retreat into the sorting passage and are accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008; A V distribution solenoid 3007 that advances and retreats the V winning opening door 3006, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the gaming balls B distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening sensor 3003 that detects the gaming balls B distributed to the losing opening 2008. A mouth sensor 3004 is provided. The game ball B detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and the losing opening sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower production unit 3160.

The configurations of the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right sub-decoration part, etc. in the back front right decoration unit 3140 are the same as those of the back front left decoration unit 3120, and detailed explanations are as follows. Omitted.

In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 include a back front right logo decoration part 3141 and a back front right upper right decoration part 3141. Between the logo decoration part 3142, there is a partition decoration part 3144a extending left and right and penetrating back and forth. This partition decoration part 3144a allows the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 to be decorated with light emission independently.

Furthermore, the back front right first decorative body 3144 has a plurality of penetrating decorative parts 3144b penetrating back and forth. These plural penetrating decorative parts 3144b can have the same effect as the penetrating decorative part 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

In this way, according to the back front right decoration unit 3140, like the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the back front right sub decoration part, etc. The transparent three-dimensional decoration makes it possible to improve the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub-decoration part can be decorated with various light emitting modes, it is difficult for players to get bored with the various light emitting effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, in the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front right upper right logo decoration part 3142, which are located at approximately the same position when viewed from the front, the back front right first decoration 3144, the back front right second decoration 3145, the back front right By sequentially embellishing the three decorative bodies 3146 and the back and front right decorative body base 3147, a simulated animation with movement can be shown to the player, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front lower production unit]
The back front lower display unit 3160 of the back front display unit 3100 has a disc-shaped back front lower middle decoration body 3161 with the letters "SPIN" written on the upper part of the center in the left and right direction, and a back front lower middle decoration body 3161. It includes a back front lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates around an axis in the front and rear direction, and a back front lower elevation drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 has translucency.

In addition, the back front lower direction unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and has a disc-shaped back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 of the same size and a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163. A disc-shaped back front lower left outer decoration 3164 of the same size provided on the left side and a disc-shaped back front lower right inner decoration of the same size provided on the right side of the back front lower middle decoration 3161. body 3165, and a disc-shaped back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 of the same size and provided on the right side of the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165. The back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 have translucency.

Further, the back front lower production unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and includes a back front lower logo decoration body 3167 on which the letters "Queen" are printed. The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 has translucency.

Furthermore, the back front lower direction unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163. An inner decoration board 3169, a back front lower left outer decoration board 3170 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and a back front lower right inner decoration for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165. A substrate 3171, a back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back front lower logo decorative board 3173 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower logo decorative body 3167; (See FIG. 156(b)).

These back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo decoration The board 3173 includes a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a back front It is provided at the rear of the lower logo decoration body 3167.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo The decorative board 3173 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on its front surface, and its surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED or from the front, and the decorations provided in front of each can be decorated with bright light.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo On the decorative board 3173, characters and symbols are screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is carried out by Thereby, the characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the decoration provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be reliably exerted.

Note that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 are top view type LEDs. On the other hand, it is mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173. The plurality of LEDs are side view type LEDs.

Furthermore, in these decorative boards, components that do not emit light other than LEDs (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. There is.

Back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163, back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front lower logo decoration 3167 is located above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 from the upper end, as shown in FIG. As a result, the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 is not visible from the player side (front). In addition, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 are arranged at the upper ends of each As shown in FIG. 160, it is located below the lower end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and is spaced on the left and right at intervals corresponding to each line group 3114 that constitutes the second pattern 3112. placed in the direction.

To be more specific, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is placed in the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 is placed in the second line group 3114b, and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 is placed in the first line group 3114a. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 is provided to correspond to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 is provided to correspond to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 emit light (the upper end When the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is made to emit light (only or the entire part), the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 appears as if it were a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, The light from the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 can give the player the illusion of a luminescent display, allowing the player to enjoy a luminous effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines. can be shown to others.

In addition, the back front lower direction unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative board 3168, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, a back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, a back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, a back front lower right outer A lower left decorative board 3174 and a lower light guide plate are provided at the rear of the decorative board 3172 and the lower front and back logo decorative board 3173, and are used to display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by emitting light (light emitting decoration). A right decorative board 3175 is provided (see FIG. 156(a)).

The light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 each have five LED groups 3177 each consisting of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the following order from the right: first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, and fifth LED 3176e. Each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and from the left, the first LED group 3177a, the second LED group 3177b, the third LED group 3177c, and the fourth The LED group 3177d and the fifth LED group 3177e are arranged in this order.

LEDs 3176 of a first LED group 3177a and a second LED group 3177b are mounted on the lower left decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate. LEDs 3176 of a third LED group 3177c, a fourth LED group 3177d, and a fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175.

The plurality of LEDs 3176 mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 are side view type full color LEDs. The surfaces of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 are coated with white solder resist (protective material). The lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate is made less noticeable. In addition, the lower left decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate have letters and symbols on the brightness and chroma to avoid confusion with other decorative boards and electronic components such as the LED 3176 to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing using highly colored (eg yellow) ink. Thereby, the characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the decoration provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be reliably exerted.

When the first LED 3176a in each LED group 3177 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 emits light, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Moreover, when the second LED 3176b is made to emit light, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Moreover, when the third LED 3176c is made to emit light, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Furthermore, when the fourth LED 3176d emits light, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). Moreover, when the fifth LED 3176e is made to emit light, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration).

As a result, each of the plurality of lines 3113 making up the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be independently displayed with light emission (light emission decoration), and a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for players to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the back front lower direction unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body Decorative body 3166, back front lower logo decorative body 3167, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower It supports the right outer decorative board 3172, the lower front and back logo decorative board 3173, the lower left decorative board 3174 of the light guide plate, the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate, etc., and is provided with a flat unit base 3178 that is long from side to side. . The lower ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 are attached near both left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

In addition, the back and front lower production unit 3160 has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives the game balls B received in the three general prize openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the lower board holder 1200, and a starting opening unit 2100. A second discharge passage 3182 receives the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200, and receives the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400. and a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below. , a fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first discharge passage 3181 is provided with three delivery ports to correspond to the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning port sensors 3001 are provided to correspond to each delivery port. It is being Further, the second discharge passage 3182 is provided with a first starting port sensor 3002.

This back front lower production unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, a back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and a back front lower right outer decoration body. The body 3166 and the lower front and back logo decoration body 3167 can decorate the lower part of the game area 5a, making it look good, and by decorating them with light, it is possible to entertain the players with a light-emitting effect. can. In addition, the back front lower and middle decoration body 3161 can be rotated by the back front lower rotation drive motor and can be raised and lowered by the back front lowering and lowering drive motor 3162, so that the player can be entertained by the movable effect. .

In addition, the back front lower direction unit 3160 can display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by emitting light by the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175. The player can enjoy the light emitting effect by 3112.

[5-9b. Back and top production unit]
Next, the back rear upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 129, 149, and the like. The back rear upper production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear upper part of the back front production unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back rear upper production unit 3200 includes a back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that can be rotated around an axis extending left and right and can be raised and lowered, and a back front left decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120. A rear left side decorative body 3220 having three back left band decorative parts 3221 extending in the front and back direction so as to continue with the three back front left band decorative parts 3127c on the base 3127, and a back front left side decorative body 3220, The back right side has three back right band decorative parts 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to continue with the three back front right band decorative parts 3147a on the back front right decorative body base 3147 of the decoration unit 3140. A side decoration body 3230 (see FIG. 131).

The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 (see FIG. 129 etc.) in which five 7-segment display parts are arranged side by side, and on the back side of the rear upper first decorative part 3211. and a rear upper second decorative portion 3212 (see FIG. 162) in which predetermined characters (in this case, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row.

In the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, each segment in the five 7-segment display parts can emit light independently, and a variety of characters, numbers, etc. can be displayed by combining each segment. Images, etc. can be displayed. As a result, the expectation level of whether or not the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will be a "jackpot" can be determined. can be displayed. Further, in the back upper second decorative portion 3212, each character can independently emit light.

In a normal state, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. This rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is configured to be used in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, or Depending on the acceptance (distribution) of game balls B into the prize opening 2007, the second decorative part 3212 on the back is turned forward by rotating 180 degrees around the axis extending left and right, or it is lowered from the raised position. position (see FIGS. 161 and 162).

According to this rear upper movable decorative body 3210, by rotating or moving up and down, it is possible to suggest to the player that a chance has arrived, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing a drop in interest. be able to.

The three back left band decorative parts 3221 of the back left side decorative body 3220 are the same as the three back front left band decorative parts 3127c extending left and right on the back front left decorative body base 3127 of the back front left decorative unit 3120. They are provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each. The back left band decoration parts 3221 are each capable of emitting light independently, and are also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

The three back right band decorative parts 3231 of the back right side decorative body 3230 are the same as the three back front right band decorative parts 3147a extending left and right on the back front right decorative body base 3147 of the back front right decorative unit 3140. They are provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each. The back right band decorative portions 3231 are each capable of emitting light independently, and are also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

[5-9c. Back and rear production unit]
Next, the back rear lower production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference mainly to 135 and the like. The back rear lower production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached below the back rear upper production unit 3200 at the rear lower part of the back front production unit 3100 in the back box 3010.

The rear rear lower direction unit 3300 has a rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear side whose proximal ends adjacent to each other on the left and right are respectively supported rotatably around an axis in the front and back direction and are also supported so as to be movable up and down. It has a rear right movable decorative body 3302. The back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are formed to rotate in mutually opposite directions as the base end side moves up and down.

In the normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate in a direction in which their respective tips are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the back and front presentation unit 3100. It is in a retracted position where it cannot be seen from the user's side (see FIG. 129, etc.).

The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear rear right movable decorative body 3302 are used to display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. In response to this, the respective distal ends rotate upward with the base end side as the center and rise, so that the right side of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the left side of the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 touch each other. The state is in close contact with each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are integrated to form one large decorative body, and are in an appearance position that can be seen from the front (see FIG. 163). ).

As a result, a large decorative body with a pattern of the letter "A" appears in the center using the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302, which can surprise the player and improve the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making people think that something good will happen to them. The back left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are provided with a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the appearance is improved by emitting light and decoration with the plurality of LEDs. At the same time, it is possible to attract the interest of the players.

As shown in FIG. 167, the rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear rear right movable decorative body 3302 are located so as to overlap behind the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 in the appearance position. As a result, a large decorative body made up of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can be illuminated with light by the first pattern 3111, so that the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back right movable decoration The three-dimensional decoration by the body 3302 and the two-dimensional luminous display by the first pattern 3111 allow the player to see a deep decoration, giving a strong impact to the player and increasing the player's interest. It is possible to strongly attract players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in players' interest in playing games.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main performances on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 161 to 168 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper first decoration part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper production unit of the rear unit is moved to a lowered position with the rear upper first decorative part facing forward. . FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper production unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position and the rear upper second decoration section is directed forward. . FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing the back left movable decorative body and the back rear right movable decorative body in the back rear lower presentation unit of the back unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board showing the back front lower middle decoration body of the back front lower presentation unit of the back front presentation unit of the back unit in a raised state.

FIG. 165 shows the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front presentation unit of the back unit with luminescent decoration. FIG. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first picture of the light guide plate in the back and front presentation unit of the back unit is decorated with light. In Fig. 167, the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front presentation unit of the back unit is decorated with light emission, and the back rear left movable decoration body and the back rear right movable decoration body in the back rear lower production unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board in which the second picture of the light guide plate in the back and front effect unit of the back unit is decorated with light.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side middle right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, , as shown in FIG. 134, through them, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, and the back front lower presentation unit of the back front presentation unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. 3160 back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, back front lower logo The decorative body 3167, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper production unit 3200, the rear rear left side decorative body 3220, the rear rear right side decorative body 3230, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed through the frame 2500.

More specifically, the back front left first decoration body 3124 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 is located near the left side of the center accessory 2500, and about half of it is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. . Further, the back front right first decoration body 3144 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 is located near the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a part thereof is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower production unit 3160 extends left and right at the lower part of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part of it can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can be visually recognized.

Further, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 of the back front lower production unit 3160 is located above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The upper part of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 is the center accessory. It is located within the 2500 range. The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 is located outside the center accessory 2500 and at the lower left corner of the game area 5a.

In addition, since the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 of the back rear upper production unit 3200 is located in the raised position, it extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a, and the upper part on the left side of the center in the left and right direction is transparent. It can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a portion can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative part 3211 having a plurality of seven segment parts facing forward.

The back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 of the back rear lower production unit 3300 are in the retracted position behind the back front lower production unit 3160, and are visible from the front (player side). It has become impossible.

The game board 5 performs the back front performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The unit 3100, the upper rear effect unit 3200, the lower rear rear effect unit 3300, etc. perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear rear upper rendering unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, it has five 7-segment parts. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position while the rear upper first decorative part 3211 remains facing forward. As a result, most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the rear upper first decorative part 3211 can be visually recognized in good condition. At this time, by variably displaying the five 7-segment parts of the upper rear first decorative part 3211, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention, and the five 7-segment parts can display desired numbers and patterns. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it can make the player nervous and nervous.

Further, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, as described above, after moving the rear upper first decorative part 3211 to the lowered position while facing forward, Then, it is rotated 180 degrees around an axis in the left-right direction, and the second decorative part 3212 on the back side having a plurality of character strings is directed forward. As a result, since the letters "JACKPOT" face forward, the player can be made aware that it is a "jackpot", and the player can expect an advantageous gaming state ("jackpot" gaming state). It is possible to increase the feeling and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around an axis in the left and right direction, the intermediate part between the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 can be It is also possible to repeat normal rotation and reverse rotation at the portion, and either the back upper first decorative portion 3211 or the back upper second decorative portion 3212 may be stopped from rotating forward. As a result, depending on whether or not the "JACKPOT" of the second decorative part 3212 on the back side faces forward, it is possible to make the player nervous or nervous, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation and suppressing a decline in interest. can be done.

In addition, as an effect using the back upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, while it is in the raised position, it is rotated 180 degrees around the axis in the left and right direction to direct the second rear upper decorative part 3212 forward. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear rear lower rendering unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. From the retracted position, the proximal ends of each are rotated in opposite directions around an axis that extends back and forth and raised so that their tips rise and touch each other. Move to the appearance position where it touched. As a result, the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 form one large decorative body with a stylized letter "A" in the gaming area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Since it appears in the center of the screen, it can greatly surprise the players, attract their attention, and make them think that something good will happen to them. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a production using the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 in the back front lower production unit 3160 of the back front production unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. Rotate it. As a result, the back, front, and lower middle decorations 3161 rotate at the lower center of the gaming area 5a, making the player think that something good is going to happen, and creating a sense of anticipation for the game. can be made to increase. In addition, since the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is provided at the rear of the stage 2513 directly above the first starting port 2002, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 rotates or moves up and down, so that the game The player can be encouraged to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002, and can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B that is inherent to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as a presentation using the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front presentation unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 3130, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, the back front left band decoration part 3127c, etc. are made to emit light. You can create decorative lighting effects. For example, in the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are sequentially By making the light-emitting decoration, it is possible to create a light-emitting effect like a neon sign that flows back and forth, and it is possible to entertain the players.

Although not shown, the back front right decoration unit 3140 can also perform the same light emitting effect as the back front left decoration unit 3120, and can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. The back front right first decorative board 3148, the back front right second decorative board 3149, and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 in the front right decoration unit 3140 are made to emit light, and the first picture is displayed. 3111 is displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111 with a stylized letter "A" is displayed in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 in the center of the gaming area 5a, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by making him think that something good is going to happen to him.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. The decorative object 3302 is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the first picture 3111 and the large decorative body made up of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 overlap in the front and back, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the player, and also to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur, It can increase expectations for.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the second picture 3112 is displayed as a light-emitting display (light-emitting decoration). As a result, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, the back front lower right outer decoration body in the back front lower production unit 3160. Since a plurality of lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorations 3166 are displayed with light, a light-emission effect similar to a searchlight from below on a concert stage is displayed to the player. The inside of the gaming area 5a can be displayed brilliantly to entertain the players.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. The upper ends or the entirety of the lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 may be decorated with light. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the line group 3114 displayed by emitting light in the second picture 3112 may be decorated by emitting light. As a result, the lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are arranged such that the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 , back front lower right outer decoration 3166, and the like can give the player the illusion that a light emitting display is being displayed, and it is possible to entertain the player by showing an unprecedented light emitting effect. can.

Furthermore, although not shown, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be displayed by emitting light, and the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 may be moved to the lowered position. This allows the player to see a light emitting effect as if the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is illuminated from below by a searchlight, making the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 look gorgeous and entertaining. can.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned light emitting effects and movable effects can be combined as appropriate, and they can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible to attract players with various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, etc., and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that includes a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit 1310d, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and a game board 5. It is equipped with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a which is divided into sections. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in a non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main It has a built-in hard random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. After extracting all the values, extract one value within the predetermined numerical range again, and quickly extract the other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. mouth sensor 2401, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, game ball B accepted into the big winning hole 2005 Big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the winning hole sensor 2402, Accessory winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B accepted in the winning hole 2006, V winning hole sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B accepted in the V winning hole 2007. , a loss hole sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B accepted into the loss hole 2008, an out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B ejected from the game board 5, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. , a vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, and the like are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 without any intervention, they are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are input to the main control board 1310 directly. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, each of the signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, gate sensor 2801, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, V winning opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, and vibration sensor The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to activate the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , the respective drive signals to the prize winning opening solenoid 2612 and the V distribution solenoid 3007 are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit. 1400 status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special reservation number display, round display, Each drive signal is output directly to the other board without going through another board. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is outputted to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the out sensor 664, whereas a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor Detection of game ball B by 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous for the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters the ball frequently, so the game ball is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big prize opening sensor 2402 as well. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 frequently detects the game balls B. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used also for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of a proximity switch. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a push operation unit that releases the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball A ball extraction switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. , is equipped with.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the out of ball detection sensor 574, and the dispensing control I/O port are input. Detection signals from a detection sensor 591 and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power outage of the main control board 1310, A power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and an error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is established that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 195, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs production control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a production display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, various I/O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various A peripheral control ROM that stores processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects referred to by this sound source IC. We are prepared.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends the game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5 is sent to the game board decoration drive board. Drive signals are sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. It consists of door-side drive data for outputting, and door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be displayed is sent from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is sent to the display control unit serial In addition to sending data from the I/O port to the performance display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, press detection sensor 373, elevation detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs sound information from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the production display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 171 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In addition, in FIG. 171, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from the top, it has been omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and A liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the base body 1502 and a base body 1502 closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 at predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various boards installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 have peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing images to the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having about two-thirds of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side, and is arranged close to the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are located in the upper right corner of the cover body 1501 with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape in the remaining approximately one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is arranged at the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, which will be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, which will be described later. connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground. (GND). Note that the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.When viewed from the front, the cover body 1501 has an oblong rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (thickness: 2 mm) on the top and left sides. Cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively protruded toward the rear (toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 1) on the lower side and the right side, thereby forming a box shape with an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is equipped with an air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly to the upper right of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose center point is the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, there are predetermined cylindrical holes inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. Note that by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally taking out various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the cover flat plate 1501a near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and installed, the front side surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front side surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, screw a metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN does not pop out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is now possible to prevent

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there is a gap (with a predetermined distance) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

Note that the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring draw-out recess 1501ab is formed in a position where the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume adjustment switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is a closed, almost horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) in the connector recess. 1501ac is placed at a position lower than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position where the distance is longer than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. It is formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. It is formed. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. They are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has 1 position along its lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A position where the connector recess 1501ad as a closed horizontally long rectangular area is lower than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad. Each of them will be exposed.

Further, when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front, a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae is formed along the left side thereof at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A mounting recess 1501af for attaching a wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae is larger than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position where the distance is shorter than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) and protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 1503a with a predetermined height (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and a mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front side surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front side surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and also connects a flexible flat cable (FFC) to be connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable.A flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wires from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outwardly at the upper and lower sides with a predetermined interval in the center. At the same time, a hinge hook 1501cc is arranged above the guide section 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd is arranged below the guide section 1501cb and projects outward. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda that protrude forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Become. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to connect the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are inserted into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside the side end faces (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of attachment boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. has been done. The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the surface of the copper foil is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is 1520r1 and 1520r3 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, The seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of attachment boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at the position. ing. The four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are surrounded by copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and then attach the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the metal The bearing surfaces of the pan head screws made by the manufacturer are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 are inserted into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the side end surfaces (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is arranged between the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

In this way, when various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm in this embodiment). is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, lower right side, lower left side, and left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation expels the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades, thereby controlling the surroundings. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected to each other. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the air is taken in from the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501). A gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501, and a gap formed between the liquid crystal output board 1530. It will be taken in through the gap formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the cover body 1501 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510) , the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. It is smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are This allows the flow velocity of air flowing into each to be kept low.

Note that when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. When taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks in air through the blades and causes the air to flow into the surrounding area. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.When viewed from the front, the upper side of the base flat plate 1502a has a horizontally long rectangular shape; Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side to protrude toward the front (back side of the Pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape with an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When they fit together, they become inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned at a predetermined interval along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (in other words, the peripheral control board Each terminal of connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 may warp due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals. Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent electrical wiring patterns formed on the control board 1510 from being broken.

When viewing the base body 1502 from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca that protrudes outward is formed on the left base side wall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab at positions corresponding to plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving parts 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag parts 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted into The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. By turning it around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked onto the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. It is now possible to engage.

Further, a base side sealing portion 1502ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the right side base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to a cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501, there are a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, and serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"). ), a peripheral control IC 1510a in which various I/O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various ICs that can control the progress of game presentations and demonstrations (demonstration presentations performed while waiting for players). Various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various schedule data (performance data) that regulates the progress of programs and performances, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in a peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred and stored. An SDRAM 1510c consisting of SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can be used to control the volume, a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown) that provides power even when the power is turned off. A backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying various power supply voltages, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. It has the functions of the peripheral control section 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control section 1512 (excluding the functions of various ROMs).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the functions of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512, etc., and has a capacity of 256 Mbit (or 128 Mbit). SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). Communication, etc.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side are used. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via a corresponding connector among connector CN3, connector CN6, and connector CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to connect the electric drive sources (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and the door frame. Drive data is sent to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive sources (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via connector CN3) provided on the game board 5 side. Emission data is transmitted to the LED control IC for the plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided for the door frame 3 (communicating via the connector CN7) and the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (communicating via the connector CN3). , receive signals from various sensors installed on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, or receive signals from various sensors installed on the door frame 3 side (communicating via connector CN3). (communicating)) as detected data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various types of parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotational state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), Signals from various sensors that confirm the operation and origin position of controlled objects (not shown) are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 are input from GPIO (via connector CN6). A signal is output from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned to SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in accordance with the SATA standard, and achieves a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various types of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , and can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories) that can achieve high data communication speeds. Various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. We are prepared. The front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of multiple types of video signals. The multiple types of video signal formats include, for example, the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) format, the eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) format, and the clockless format. , four systems (total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, a peripheral control board that adopts eDP method instead of MIPI method, has one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system of eDP system. 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there is further an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface 635. The LED ML1 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +5V is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +5V is being supplied. The LED ML2 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +12V is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +12V is being supplied. The LED ML3 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +24V is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +24V is being supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1, SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism, and is similar to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the socket and the plug fit together. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are structured so that when they are fitted together, there is no vertical movement at all when viewing the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 from the front.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are plugs. (Mounting surface) Each of the special connectors SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and plug are connected. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mated, the socket is aligned in the front-rear direction (pachinko The structure includes a floating mechanism that can absorb errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1. Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) moves as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 will not touch the flat cover plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the special connector SCN3.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are connected. Fit together. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mated, the socket is aligned in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1 The structure includes a floating mechanism that can absorb errors in the front-rear direction that occur when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the device. Note that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 will be the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 was adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various types of control information (peripheral data) that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (functions of the image ROM of the effect display control section 1512, etc.). ). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided for the door frame 3 and game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, turning off, etc.) of various LEDs etc. installed in multiple units, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., on the door frame 3 and game board 5. Examples include drive data for driving and controlling the various movable performance bodies provided.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, which is cheaper than a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize high-speed transfer speed through communication compliant with the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to reduce costs, reduce power consumption, and read out various stored data at high transfer speeds. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are By employing a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise that invades the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 connects the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1520x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing in the plug of special connector SCN1 provided for 1510x, it is necessary to fix peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 together with peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a can be absorbed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension and distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when connecting the plug and socket, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be improved. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs, from the connector CN10, the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, to the performance display device 1600 to inform the progress of the game performance (for example, to the player). An image that conveys that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image that tells that a jackpot gaming state will not occur, a state that a jackpot gaming state will not occur but a jackpot gaming state will occur compared to the normal state. This is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey that the player is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration performances that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with a floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb errors in the front and rear direction that occur when fixing and pushing the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be reliably formed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension and distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing errors in the front-back direction that occur during the process, damage to the plurality of connecting terminals formed on the plug and socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be reliably established. can be formed.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected to each other. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is possible to arrange the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 against the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be made smaller. This can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging electrical drive sources and drive mechanisms that can be used, as well as various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[7-4. How to assemble peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( Mounting surface) 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are directed toward the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are directed toward the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Next, insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and screw them into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form the cover flat plate 1501a on the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are filled with metal (not shown). The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting pan head screws made by the manufacturer and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a last.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining its movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining in the vertical and horizontal directions. No protrusion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral control board 1510 is restrained in the vertical and horizontal directions. When fixing to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a have dimensional dimensions, respectively. This is because the company is able to absorb this amount with ample margin.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are Insert into the guide receiving parts 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement part 1502ca of the base body 1502, and insert the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking parts 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 into the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. When the base body 1502 is wrapped around the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501, a metal (not shown) A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted therein is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base-side sealing part 1502ea, thereby forming a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea, which is attached to the base side sealing portion 1502ea, is in a sealed state.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the front surface are brought into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 become electrically connected. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the structure is such that the cover-side seal portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505. is enhanced.

Next, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are inserted through the wiring draw-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the drawer and attachment holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively.

Next, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the production display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wire pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is assembled by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. 1503 is fixed in the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wires are covered by the wire cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 Insert the engaging portion 1502ca side (formed at is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed in the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side of the cover body 1501.) At the same time, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when looking at the cover body 1501 from the back), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed. (Mounting surface) 1520x Insert the socket of special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x into the plug of special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and push it in. Insert and push the socket of the special connector SCN4 prepared for the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided for When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, the cover body 1501 is arranged close to the left side of the cover body 1501). Even in the installation procedure of these various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 that are equipped with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the errors in the front and back direction that occur when pushing in are absorbed, and the plug and socket can be easily connected. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connecting terminals formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are multiple types of game boards installed in pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores data according to the game specifications of the game board. By storing peripheral data corresponding to the board, the board is dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that is dependent on the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and is not dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and thus becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused. Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board, and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the inter-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are multiple types of video signal formats input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI format, the eDP format, and the clockless format. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. In other words, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In this embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Since this is adopted, a liquid crystal output board 1530 compatible with the video signal format (LVDS format) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards), and the noise is removed. (Hereinafter, this may be referred to as "the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of various types of substrates.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, these plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of being able to check whether there is any tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, from multiple angles. In order to be able to check the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the outside, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML1 disposed near the control ROM 1510b is designed to remain lit when +5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Although it has the function of confirming (monitoring) the status of +5V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins can be closely monitored. This can contribute to improving visibility.

Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Furthermore, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, In other words, the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the IC pins are arranged in a large area so that the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be seen from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML3 placed near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state when +24V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Originally, it has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of +24V being supplied, but the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x, the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 The special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x can contribute to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector.

Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) has a larger area. They are distributed and arranged so that This allows modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Furthermore, since the LED ML4 placed near the special connector SCN2 is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, it is originally used to check (monitor) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to improving sexual performance.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with product numbers and The SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 is designed so that the model and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually confirmed, that is, the surface and the status of the IC pin of the SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state when +12V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of +12V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM1510c (that is, SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2) and the condition of the IC pins.

Also, among the plurality of blades that make up the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gaps between the blades (specifically, the gaps between the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN) The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not an unauthorized board is placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In this embodiment, LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface-mount type, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and of a type with weak directivity. It is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting up LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from areas on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, which are opposite to the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and around the area. Reflecting portions (not shown) are respectively formed to reflect the light and direct it again to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective parts (not shown) may be made of a brightly colored paint such as white, or may be a glossy colored paint, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

In addition, near the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so the ball path formed by these When the game balls rub against each other, they become charged and generate electrostatic discharge, which becomes a source of noise. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Furthermore, since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and may be affected by the noise. As described above, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data A configuration is adopted in which the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). This prevents noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Noise can be removed by flowing it to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[7-5. Implementation of control ROM]
Here, a method for mounting the control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 174 is a view taken along arrow P in FIG. 173(a). FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of through holes showing an overview of the positional relationship between through holes formed in the peripheral control board and through holes formed in the conversion board. FIG. 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and ROM socket with a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and a top view (a) of a control ROM with a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. b).

First, a plurality of rectangular pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 where the control ROM 1510b is arranged, as shown in FIGS. They are arranged in two rows with a distance of . Specifically, the pad 1510v is a lead-type ROM to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lead-type package") can be attached or detached. They are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals respectively protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of the socket. The lead terminals of the lead-type ROM socket are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. ) is fixed at 1510x. Note that the pad 1510v is placed near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, there is also information on the surface side such as an area indicating the part number of the surface-side electronic component and a position where the surface-side electronic component is placed. A surface that indicates the attributes of the electronic component (which may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component) The side markings are printed on a solid green resist using white paint that stands out against the green color (for example, part number 1510v1 of control ROM 1510b in FIG. 173(b), control ROM 1510b). 1510v2 (inner area indicated by symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)), mounting direction of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△))) 1510v3).

In addition, the back surface (hereinafter, the surface on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted may be referred to as "non-mounted surface") 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 includes resistors, capacitors, and various other electronic components mounted on the back surface. In addition to the IC, the attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, The marking on the back side indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic components on the back side and the model number of the electronic components on the back side is made of white paint that is easily noticeable against the green color, and is a solid green color. Printed on resist using silk screen printing.

In this embodiment, the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package has a storage capacity of 256 Mbits, and has 35 lead terminals extending outward from both sides in the longitudinal direction (70 lead terminals on both sides in total). ) stands out.

The control ROM 1510b has a lead-type package, but if there is a shortage of supply or the production is discontinued, it will be necessary to replace it with one having another package. However, when the package is changed, the leadless type (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) package (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "leadless type package") changes from the leadless type package. Because the lead terminals do not protrude from the sides and the connection terminals are placed on the bottom of the leadless package, it is necessary to modify the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v and the routing of the wiring pattern to the pad 1510v, which is called a package change. For this reason, it is necessary to manufacture the peripheral control board 1510 even though there are no electrical problems with other circuits.

Therefore, the pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals that respectively protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is inserted and removed. A mechanism is adopted in which a package change can be accommodated by forming the pad 1510x on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and changing the object to be soldered to the pad 1510v. In other words, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510 and the routing of the wiring pattern to the pad 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v, It has a structure that can be used in common (the wiring routing is the same), and 35 pads 1510V per row are arranged in two rows separated by a predetermined distance dimension and connected to the peripheral control board. It is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510.

As mentioned above, the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package has a total of 70 lead terminals, whereas the control ROM 1510b with a lead-less package has connection terminals on the bottom of the lead-less package. There are 56 connection terminals (there are cases where the number of connection terminals is less than 56), and the number of connection terminals is reduced. This includes a power supply terminal to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, a ground terminal to which the ground (circuit ground) (GND) is electrically connected, and an NC terminal that is not connected (non-connection). This is because the number of ``and'' is decreasing.

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from a lead type package to a leadless type package, as shown in FIG. This can be handled by using a conversion board 1510t that changes the number. The ROM socket 1510s allows a leadless type control ROM 1510b to be attached and detached using a special tool, and is mainly composed of a mounting portion 1510sa, a pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and a plurality of lead terminals 1510sc. ing. The control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa, and the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb supports the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package on the placement portion 1510sa. When the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is placed on the placement part 1510sa, the upper surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is opened. It is in a closed state where it is rotated and held so that a force acts toward the bottom.

When the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb and 1510sb are in a closed state, the force acting from the top surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package toward the bottom surface is maintained, and the leadless device placed on the mounting portion 1510sa is The 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the control ROM 1510b having a type package are kept electrically connected to one end of each corresponding lead terminal 1510sc (56 pieces).

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are fixed by soldering to pads 1510ta (56 terminals) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t formed to correspond to these lead terminals 1510sc.

The shape of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm). The pads have the same shape and size as the pads (rectangular shape), and the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Small in comparison.

The outer shape of the conversion board 1510t is a rectangular plate shape, which is larger than the outer shape of the IC package, and is almost the same as the outer shape of a lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is inserted and removed. There is.

The conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm), and is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the front surface (mounting surface) 1510 A green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the layer (copper plane) on which pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed on (non-mounting side) 1510y. . The conversion board 1510t has a through hole (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "through hole") having a land electrically connected to a wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. ) are formed, and the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to make it conductive. The holes of the through holes, except for the end surface through hole 1510tb described later, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the holes of the through holes are the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface). ) 1510ty, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that plugged the through-hole, along with the land, are each completely covered with a green coating ("resin filling") ).

As shown in FIG. 174, on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t, a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package protrudes outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket into which a control ROM 1510b is attached/detached. Semicircular end through holes 1510tb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of lead terminals, and inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end through holes 1510tb are plated with copper to have conductivity. The end face through hole 1510tb is formed into a circular shape during manufacturing, and then shaped into a semicircular shape by router processing. Note that in the end surface through hole 1510tb, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively.

The end through holes 1510tb formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the conversion board 1510t are arranged at the same position as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package. ) 1510x (for example, 0.8 mm) is the same as the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads 1510v formed on the pad 1510x.

The difference between the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package and the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package is that, as described above, there is a power supply terminal to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, and a ground (circuit ground). This is the number of ground terminals that are electrically connected to (GND) and NC terminals that are not connected. Therefore, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, connection terminals for the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, power supply terminal, ground terminal, and number of NC terminals are arranged. The wiring pattern is routed so as to be electrically connected to the end surface through hole 1510tb so as to correspond to the arrangement of the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package.

Returning to FIG. 173, a total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, a total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t, Regarding the positional relationship, as shown in FIG. 173(b), the point where the line connecting the center of the upper side and lower side of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t and the line connecting the center of the left side and the right side intersect (center point) By arranging the ROM socket 1510s so that the line connecting the center of the upper side and the lower side of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the center of the left side and the right side (center point) coincides (including cases where they almost coincide). , the pad 1510ta and the end surface through hole 1510tb are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance zd as a clearance so that they do not come into electrical contact.

A total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the conversion board 1510t include pads 1510v formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. is soldered, so that the back surface (non-mounted surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact (that is, the conversion board 1510t is in surface contact with the surface (mounted surface) of the peripheral control board 1510). Mounting surface) 1510x is surface mounted and fixed with no gaps).

Note that the surfaces of the exposed copper parts on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are covered with solder (coated with solder) by a solder leveler, and are exposed. Processing is applied to protect the copper surface and improve wettability during mounting. The solder liberator for the conversion board 1510t may be a water-soluble flux.

The land of the end surface through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is connected to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. When it is soldered, it comes into surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and becomes electrically conductive. This is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface of the pad 1510v has been treated with a solder leveler and is preliminarily coated with solder (coated with solder). The land of the end surface through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of 1510t is also treated with a solder leveler and has solder on it (coated with solder). When the inner peripheral wall 1510tba and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered, the end surface through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is soldered. This is because the land is in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The solder liberator for the peripheral control board 1510 may be a water-soluble flux.

In the end surface through-hole 1510tb, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, but it is not necessary to form lands. In this case, a clearance is predetermined to prevent electrical contact between the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end through hole 1510tb and the end through hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the end through hole 1510tb. It is preferable that they are spaced apart from each other by a distance dimension zd (for example, 0.5 mm or more). In this case, lower pads electrically connected to the lower end side of the end surface through hole 1510tb may be formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. The shape of this lower pad is smaller (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) than the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. .5 mm to 1.6 mm x 0.5 mm to 0.55 mm), and the distance between the pads (the so-called pitch) is the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. (for example, 0.8 mm). As mentioned above, this lower pad has solder on it (is coated with solder) using a solder leveler, and is treated to protect the exposed copper surface and improve wettability during mounting. It has been subjected. Even with this configuration, the lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end surface through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is connected to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb. and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 when soldering. This results in an electrically conductive state. Also, with this configuration, the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. ) When the lower pad formed on the pad 1510ty is soldered, the peel strength with which the pad 1510v is peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 can be further increased.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510t of the conversion board 1510t, in addition to the ROM socket 1510s, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, there are also surface-mounted electronic components such as a part number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is placed. A surface that indicates the attributes of the electronic component (which may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component) The side markings are silk-printed on a solid green resist using white paint that stands out against the green color (for example, the part number 1510s1 of the ROM socket 1510s, the position where the ROM socket 1510s is to be placed). (inner area indicated by symbols (L-shaped symbols) indicating the four corners) 1510s2, mounting direction of the ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbol indicating the arrangement position of the first terminal (triangular symbol (△))) 1510s3).

Note that a total of 56 pads 1510ta are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, while a total of 56 pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The number of pads is 70, which is larger than the number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Further, as described above, the shape of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. , and their sizes are also the same. Furthermore, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is equal to the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the end surface through hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t. The contact area ( Since the bonding area is smaller than the bonding area (bonding area), the land (or land Alternatively, the bonding strength between the lower pad (described above) and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is the bonding strength between the pad 1510ta formed between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. The bonding strength is higher than that with

Therefore, when the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is soldered to the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is The pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the control board 1510, the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t, and the land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered. The peel strength is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v is peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 in the case where the pad 1510v is peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510.

In other words, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s is the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since the peeling strength of the pad 1510v formed on the pad 1510x (mounting surface) 1510x is smaller than the peeling strength for peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s Since the pad 1510ta formed on the converter board 1510t can be peeled off from the base material of the converter board 1510t, the pad 1510ta formed on the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the converter board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the converter board 1510t Since the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 that is soldered to the formed land can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, Damage can be prevented.

On the other hand, the soldered part between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t is a thin metal wire and easily deforms when force is applied to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s in the peeling direction. The load applied to each lead terminal 1510sc increases unnecessarily, and a force is applied to peel off the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, there is a high probability that pattern peeling will occur in the soldered part on the ROM socket 1510s side that has thin metal wires, but the soldered part on the peripheral control board 1510 side (inner circumferential wall 1510tba of end face through hole 1510tb of conversion board 1510t) Soldering between the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. It can be said that there is a low probability that pattern peeling will occur.

In this way, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s is reduced by adopting a new aspect in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted directly on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. can do. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be implemented in a new manner, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are as described above. On both sides, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film, giving a uniform color. In this way, by making the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t the same color (green), it is possible to make the existence of the conversion board 1510t difficult to detect from the peripheral control board 1510, making it a target for fraud. This can make it difficult for people to recognize this.

Furthermore, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting direction (mounting direction, symbol (triangle symbol (△)) indicating the arrangement position of the first terminal) 1510v3 of the control ROM 1510b is set against the green color of the resist. It is a highly visible white paint that is printed on a solid green resist using silk printing. As a result, if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), it will be difficult to determine the orientation of the conversion board 1510t during mounting. The direction of the conversion board 1510t can be made easier to understand by indicating the 1-pin location (the location of the first terminal). In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 has a 1-pin location (the first terminal location) and the conversion board 1510t also has a 1-pin location (the first terminal location), so the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t have a 1-pin location (the first terminal location). Even when the resists are of the same color (green), the direction of the conversion board 1510t can be easily recognized.

In addition, the through holes of the conversion board 1510t except for the end face through hole 1510tb are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closed the through holes are connected to the surface of the conversion board 1510t (mounting surface). ) 1510tx and the back side (non-mounting side) 1510ty are processed so that they are flush with each other, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closes the through-hole holes are coated with a green coating, along with the lands of the through-holes. Completely covered (resin filled). This eliminates the exposed metal portion of the through hole, thereby avoiding contact with the exposed metal portion of, for example, the through hole formed in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing the occurrence of electrical troubles.

This will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 175. For example, as shown in FIG. 175, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not coincidentally overlap. If they happen to overlap, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t will be electrically connected and conductive. The through holes formed in the substrate 1510t are filled with the resin described above.

Furthermore, for example, if a board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted is provided with a connector for connecting to the peripheral control board 1510, and the board is electrically connected by connecting to the connector on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the mounting The control ROM that is being used approaches the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the influence of external noise becomes stronger. On the other hand, the conversion board 1510t of this embodiment is connected by the soldering described above with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in surface contact. Therefore, the mounted control ROM 1510b can be moved away from the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it less susceptible to external noise.

Furthermore, the number of pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is 70 in order to correspond to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, whereas in the leadless type The control ROM 1510b having a package has 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the leadless package (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56 in some cases). Therefore, the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has, for example, an unconnected pad assigned in advance to the lead terminal of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package. In some cases, an excessive number of NC terminals are arranged as a result. Due to the presence of the excess pad 1510v in this way, the soldering part on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) is This has the effect of reinforcing the soldered part between the land and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and increases the strength of the joint surface of the soldered part on the peripheral control board 1510 side. can contribute. In other words, the number of NC terminals is increased and the land formed on the soldering part on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) The bonding surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (the soldered portion with the pad 1510v formed on the mounting surface 1510x) is strengthened.

In addition, the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t is a land (or the above-mentioned lower pad in place of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. (copper foil), the bonding strength can be increased compared to soldering using simple pads. The soldering part on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering part between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, The soldering part on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad in place of the land) formed on the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t ) and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. Since they are connected by the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) (copper foil) formed on the peripheral control board 1510ty, the soldering part on the peripheral control board 1510 side is smaller than the soldering part on the conversion board 1510t side. A configuration with strong bonding strength can be achieved.

Further, the shape of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm). 5 mm rectangular shape), the size is the same, the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm), and the surface of the conversion board 1510t (mounting surface ) 1510tx is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. , is longer than the distance dimension (pitch) between the pads. The end surface through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t are the same as the distance dimension (so-called pitch) between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 0 .8mm). The distance dimension of the end surface through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t (that is, the distance dimension between both sides of the conversion board 1510t) is the same as the pad formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Among the distance dimensions between the two rows of pads 1510v, it is larger than the inner distance dimension of the pads 1510v between the two rows, and smaller than the outer distance dimension of the pads 1510v between the two rows, and further, It is longer than the distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. As a result, the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad in place of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the peripheral control board 1510 By increasing the pitch between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect of preventing deflection of the peripheral control board 1510 can be enhanced. Furthermore, in order to further enhance the effect of preventing the peripheral control board 1510 from deflecting, for example, it is possible to increase the thickness of the conversion board 1510t.

Furthermore, the soldering part on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering part between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t), and the soldering part on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering part between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) A land (or the lower pad described above in place of the land) formed on the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the soldered portion with the pad 1510v to be formed means that surface mounting can be performed with the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 can be electrically connected without any gaps, and the distance between the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 and the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) can be increased. A connection method that is resistant to noise can be achieved.

Also, a land (or the above-mentioned lower pad in place of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the peripheral control board 1510 A pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x is soldered to electrically connect via the solder. As a result, the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 can be electrically connected without any gaps, and the distance between the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 and the cover flat plate 1501a (board case) can be increased. A connection method that is resistant to noise can be achieved.

In addition, the through holes other than the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that closed the through holes are connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the conversion board 1510t. ) 1510tx and the back side (non-mounting side) 1510ty, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that plugged the through-hole hole, along with the land of the through-hole, were coated with a green coating, respectively. The conversion board is completely covered (filled with resin) and can be surface-mounted with the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact, so that the conversion board can be connected without any gaps. A short circuit between 1510t and peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, although the control ROM 1510b is inserted into and removed from the ROM socket 1510s, this work requires human intervention, which may accidentally damage the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern. Therefore, if the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t and the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t is damaged, the process of removing the conversion board 1510t from the peripheral control board 1510 and replacing it with a new one is necessary. By doing this, the peripheral control board 1510 can be used as is (the same one).

Moreover, only the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, if the ROM socket 1510s or the conversion board 1510t is damaged and needs to be replaced, only the minimum unit ROM socket 1510s and conversion board 1510t are needed.

Further, a peripheral control is soldered to a land (or the above-mentioned lower pad in place of the land) formed on the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. A pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510 is arranged near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. The peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC with a large package and is a surface mount type electronic component, so such surface mount type electronic components are particularly susceptible to board deflection (the connection terminals and lead terminals of the electronic component (There is a risk that it may peel off from the surface of the board.) Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reinforced against deflection.

Furthermore, even if the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package is changed to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, the conversion board 1510t includes a ROM socket 1510s into which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package can be attached and removed. can be handled by mounting on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v of the peripheral control board 1510, and the There is no need to modify the routing of the wiring pattern (the shape and arrangement of the pad 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pad 1510v are the same), so that it can be used in common.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing a sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process. Even when the ROM 1510b is caught in the ROM socket 1510s and an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as described above. In addition, since the peeling strength of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is smaller than the peeling strength of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the pad 1510v is soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s. When the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the board 1510t is peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t is removed. (Mounting surface) Since the pad 1510v formed on the mounting surface 1510x can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented. As a result, the entire conversion board 1510t on which the damaged ROM socket 1510s is mounted is removed from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the conversion board 1510t on which the new ROM socket 1510s is mounted is removed from the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) The peripheral control board 1510 can be used without replacing the peripheral control board 1510 itself with a new peripheral control board 1510 by mounting it on the peripheral control board 1510x.

In addition, since the conversion board 1510t is surface mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and is fixed without any gaps, the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surrounding It is possible to make it difficult to illegally place electronic components in the gap between the control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x.

Furthermore, when changing from the control ROM 1510b having a lead type package to the control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, it is necessary to use the conversion board 1510t as described above, but the thickness of the conversion board 1510t is As described above, since the peripheral control board 1510 is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm), the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box). In the sealed state, the predetermined height and distance dimension extending from the top surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 is also converted at most. The thickness is approximately the same as that of the substrate 1510t, and high noise resistance can be maintained against noise entering from the cover body 1501.

Further, as described above, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when reusing the peripheral control board 1510 or performing a sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process. It will be done. In other words, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted is connected to the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when reusing the peripheral control board 1510 or performing a sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process. removed. When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, it is necessary to use the conversion board 1510t as described above, but if the lead terminals from the conversion board 1510t are directed to the outside. Therefore, even if a person who is removing the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool accidentally drops the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted, Unlike the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, the lead terminals do not bend, and it is possible to prevent the lead terminal from becoming unusable.

Furthermore, as described above, semicircular end through holes 1510tb are formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t in the longitudinal direction, and the diameter of the end through holes 1510tb is determined by the surface (mounting) of the conversion board 1510t. The width dimension (0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) formed on the pad 1510tx is formed to have approximately the same dimension. Instead, the width dimension (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the diameter of the end surface through hole 1510tb. 0.5 mm) may be larger (for example, 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm). In this case, the end face through hole 1510tb has a shorter arc shape than a semicircle.

Further, the pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals that respectively protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached/detached. A mechanism was adopted in which it was possible to respond to changes in the package by forming it on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and changing the object to be soldered to this pad 1510v. You may also use the following mechanism. For example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), lead terminals 1510sc (70 in total) of a lead-type ROM socket 1510s' into which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached/detached are soldered to a pad 1510v (that is, A conventional ROM socket 1510s' is used as is), and a conversion board 1510t' to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on a mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s'. , the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' are in a closed state. Note that the mounting part 1510sa', the pair of rotational holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the plurality of lead terminals 1510sc' are the mounting part 1510sa, the pair of rotational holding pieces 1510sb of the ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173(a). , 1510sb, and the plurality of lead terminals 1510sc, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Note that pads, wiring patterns, and lands to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t'. A green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution onto the layer (copper plane). The conversion board 1510t' has a through hole (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through hole") having a land for electrically connecting a wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. ) are formed, and the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is plated with copper to make it conductive. The through-hole hole is filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that filled the through-hole hole are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty'. One end and the other end of the insulating resin that plugged the through-hole, along with the land, were each completely covered with a green coating (resin filling).

Furthermore, protrusions that protrude downward are formed at both longitudinal ends of the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t', and pads are formed on these protrusions. These pads are arranged at positions corresponding to the lead terminals 1510sc' of the ROM socket 1510s', and a total of 70 pads are formed, 35 at one end and 35 at the other end.

The conversion board 1510t' to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s', and the pair of rotation holding pieces 1510sb' and 1510sb' are closed. Then, as shown in FIG. 176(b), a point (center point) where a line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides of the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' and a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides intersect, The ROM socket 1510s is arranged so that the intersection point (center point) of the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower sides and the line connecting the centers of the left and right side coincides (or almost coincides).

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a lead type package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless type package, it is necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 The modification will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 177. FIGS. 177(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing board management numbers of peripheral control boards. Note that when the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed, it becomes necessary to change the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 177(a), at a predetermined location (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control board 1510) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a foil-cut area KBRGN (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). On the surface of the copper foil to be formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern, an area formed by removing the copper foil is formed, and a common part of the management number ( In the same figure, a foil-cutting character KBNUM is formed using a wiring pattern using "XYZA") as a board control number, and a foil-cutting area KBRGN is formed by applying a solid green resist liquid to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510. The foil-cut letters KBNUM are each covered.

When changing from the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package to the control ROM 1510b with a leadless-type package, for example, as shown in FIG. The symbol HKBNUM (letter A in the same figure) is printed following the foil-cut letters KBNUM placed on the back of the board (it is dug to a predetermined depth from the surface along the symbol HKBNUM), and when a laser marker is used, the conversion board For each replacement (including repair) of 1510t, a board management number ("XYZAA" in the figure) can be obtained by printing the symbol HKBNUM following the foil-cut characters KBNUM. The board control number may be changed by erasing part of the foil-cut characters with a laser marker, or by both erasing part of the foil-cut characters and adding characters. You may change the management number.

For example, as shown in FIG. 177(c), the common part of the management number ("XYZ-" in the figure) is used as the board management number to form the foil-cutting characters KBNUM in the wiring pattern and the foil-cutting area KBRGN. is a different area and forms foil-cutting areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 in neighboring areas (in the same figure, immediately below the foil-cutting area KBRGN), and marks (in the same figure) are formed in the foil-cutting areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3. Letters A, B, and C) are formed using wiring patterns, and green resist liquid is applied solidly to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510 to form foil-cut areas KBRGN and RGN1. , RGN2, and RGN3 are covered. Perforated holes are formed around the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 by a router, so that the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 can be removed from the peripheral control board 1510. When the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from the peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC." When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless type package, one, two, or all of the regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are removed from the peripheral control board 1510. By doing so, it can be used as a board management number.

Note that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and this power generation circuit has various electronic components mounted on a rectangular board, and the back side of this board is It is in a state where it is directly soldered in a state where it is in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) of this board is covered with a metal cover body which is caulked so as to sandwich the end pieces of the board. When the power generation circuit board is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is not a removable electronic component, and if the power generation circuit is damaged, the power generation circuit board can be replaced and a new board installed on the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 itself is not soldered directly in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that gaming machines equipped with performance control boards to which electronic components such as ROMs are installed have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0061], FIG. 5)). However, in conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in the method of mounting electronic components onto the control board.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 shown in FIG. 170 is provided, which is a production control means for controlling production related to games. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 173 which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173 which is a ROM socket into which a control ROM 1510b shown in FIG. The converter board 1510t shown in FIG. 173 is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted. A surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 where the control ROM 1510b in FIG. 173 is placed, which is a specific board mounting area where the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new aspect in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be implemented in a new manner, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 shown in FIG. 170 is provided as a production control means for controlling production related to games. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 173 which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173 which is a ROM socket into which a control ROM 1510b shown in FIG. The converter board 1510t shown in FIG. 173 is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted. A surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is a surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 where the control ROM 1510b in FIG. 173 is placed, which is a specific board mounting area where the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. The conversion board 1510t has a pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 173, which is a first board surface part that can be soldered, and a pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 173, which is a second board surface part. The ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t have inner peripheral walls 1510tba of side through holes 1510tb formed on both sides, and the ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t have a lead terminal 1510sc, which is a lead terminal part of the ROM socket 1510t, and a first The peripheral control board 1510 conversion board 1510t is connected to the pad 1510ta, which is the plate surface part, by soldering (electrically connected by soldering), and the peripheral control board 1510 conversion board 1510t is the peripheral control board 1510, which is the plate surface part of the peripheral control board 1510, in FIG. A pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510 is connected to an inner circumferential wall 1510tba of a side through hole 1510tb, which is a second plate surface portion of the conversion substrate 1510t, by soldering (not soldered). electrically connected).

In this way, by adopting a new aspect in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be implemented in a new manner, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 shown in FIG. 170 is provided as a production control means for controlling production related to games. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 173 which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s shown in FIG. 173 which is a ROM socket into which a control ROM 1510b shown in FIG. The conversion board 1510t shown in FIG. 173 is a specific board on which the socket 1510s is mounted. The conversion board 1510t has a first terminal portion formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 174, which is a first terminal portion for electrically connecting the ROM socket 1510s to the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. Pad 1510ta and the inside of side through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of conversion board 1510t, which are second terminal parts for electrically connecting peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the mounting surface on which ROM socket 1510s is mounted. A peripheral wall 1510tba is provided. The first terminal portion and the second terminal portion have different aspects, and the second terminal portion is electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the plate surface of the peripheral control board 1510, via solder. has been done.

In this way, by adopting a new aspect in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external force applied to the ROM socket 1510s is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the mounting method of the control ROM 1510b, which is an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be implemented in a new manner, and the convenience can be improved.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. First, the power supply board will be explained, and then the backup power supply, the power supplied to each control board, etc. will be explained. Note that the board grounds (GND) of the various boards and the board grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIGS. 94, 95, etc. is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is connected to the power outlet of the island equipment of the game hall. It is inserted. In the island equipment of a game hall, a system is usually adopted in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 are grouped together and AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to one transformer. For example, in an island facility in a game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in one row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is installed for each group. Since a system is adopted in which AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to each transformer (by a total of five transformers), a transformer having a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on. When is turned off, the AC power (AC 24V) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off. The power switch 630a is normally kept in the ON state, and when a clerk or other person in charge of the game hall starts business, the power switch 630a is turned on (turned on) by turning on a breaker installed in the game hall. The power of the pachinko machines 1 installed in a plurality of rows in the equipment is turned on all at once. Then, after the game hall clerk or other staff closes business hours, they turn off (turn off) the breakers installed in the game hall, thereby simultaneously shutting off the power to the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows on the island equipment of the game hall. conduct. For this reason, among the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows in the island equipment of the game hall, when turning on or turning off the power to each pachinko machine 1 individually, for example, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall performs maintenance. When turning off the power switch 630a and then turning it on again after maintenance is completed, the pachinko machine 1 that has experienced some kind of trouble must be operated by a clerk at the game hall, etc. to solve the problem. For example, a staff member may turn off the power switch 630a, and then turn on the power switch 630a again when the trouble has been resolved.

As shown in FIG. 178, the power supply board 630 includes, in addition to the power switch 630a, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, and a power supply. It includes a creation circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power (24V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the interface board via the power supply board 630, regardless of whether the power switch 630a is turned on or off. 635, and from this interface board 635 is supplied to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, AC 24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b via fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and the power switch 630a, and the noise is suppressed in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. removed. The AC 24V from which noise has been removed is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from alternating current to direct current (AC-DC conversion)) to become a direct current power source. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, and the power factor correction circuit 630d generates DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with the power factor improved. be done. The generated +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, where the +35V ripple is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power generation circuit 630f.

When the voltage supplied to the power supply destruction circuit 630g exceeds a predetermined voltage, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g causes the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to flow a large current that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current (predetermined cutoff current for each) to melt them and disconnect them from the island equipment of the game hall. This is to electrically cut off the supplied AC 24V. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit (breaking current) flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element portions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 melt and the AC 24V is supplied to the subsequent unit via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. cut off.

The power generation circuit 630f to which the smoothed +35V is supplied includes a +5V power generation circuit 630fa, a +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and a +24V power generation circuit 630fc. The +5V power generation circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power generation circuit 630fb generates +12V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power generation circuit 630fc generates +24V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power line (power system) created by the power board 630 to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power line, and the power line (power system) created by the power board 630 to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power supply. line, and the power supply line (power supply system) to which +24V created by the power supply board 630 is applied and supplied becomes a +24V power supply line.

[8-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 supplies payout control in the payout control board 633. Backup power is supplied to a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "RAM with built-in payout control") built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a.

+5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the payout control board 633. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes a +5V power line in the payout control board 633 via the payout control filter circuit 633h, and is applied to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and is also applied to the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The voltage is applied to the power supply terminal. +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V from +12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power source that becomes a control power source for the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board side generated +5V") is supplied to the main control board side generated +5V power supply in the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h. The line is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also supplied to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. Note that the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 (+5V created on the main control board side) are electrical. They are not connected to each other and are independent.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control on the payout control board 633. It is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 633. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and the power supply of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction is caused by the diode PD0. Current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1.

In this way, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected so that +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is returned to the output control board 633, and then from the output control board 633 again to the power supply base plate 630. This connection method allows +5V to be supplied and charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa and the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control. The stored contents of the payout control built-in RAM are held.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is connected to the built-in main control board of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. It is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM and also to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in main control in the forward direction by the diode MD0. , and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0.

In this way, the capacitor BC0 has an electrical connection method in which +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g (+5V created on the main control board side) is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, +5V generated on the main control board side is supplied to enable charging. As a result, the +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 633, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g becomes +5V. (+5V created on the main control board side), the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with the main VBB to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM. The contents of the built-in RAM are retained.

[8-3. Power supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the power supplied to each control board etc. will be explained, and then the power supplied mainly to the payout control board and the power supplied to the main control board will be explained.

Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively created by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, are as shown in FIG. Of these three types of power, two types of power, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. In addition, three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively created by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are sent to the interface board 635. At the same time, it is also supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. via the interface board 635.

Note that the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, which are supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., melt down due to overcurrent flowing to each of these power lines. A +5V fuse (not shown), a +12V fuse (not shown), and a +24V fuse (not shown) may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively.

In particular, the +12V power line and the +24V power line are monitored for potential drops by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as will be described later. When the power failure notice signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process, which will be described later. The payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, to stop the payout process (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls). I will do it.

Therefore, when a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the main control board 1310 constituting the main board , when the dispensing control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. have a +12V power line or a +24V power line. Due to electrical trouble for some reason to the relay board 104, door frame main relay board 105, etc., leakage current or short circuit may occur, causing the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, etc. When an overcurrent flows through the door frame relay board 105, etc., the +12V fuse and +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame relay board 105, etc. are blown. be able to. As a result, a drop in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage warning signal is controlled by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. There is no need to output to the MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process which will be described later.

Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 to the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 via +5V fuses, +12V fuses, and +24V fuses (not shown). ing.

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power line of the peripheral control board 1510. It is set in advance, and current can flow up to the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (blocking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +5V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts and the voltage is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +5V power supply line to the subsequent unit.

The +12V fuse (not shown) is connected to the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, which carries the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself, and which is used by subsequent boards such as various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The current and the current used by the subsequent device via the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into account and the capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cutting current). I can do it. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the power is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +12V power supply line to the subsequent unit.

The +24V fuse (not shown) has its capacity set in advance by taking into account the current used by the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510. Current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current). Note that when a +24V system driver circuit is provided for an electrical drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) using +24V in the peripheral control board 1510, the capacity of a +24V fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power supply line is The current used by the 1510 itself and the current used by the subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510 are set in advance. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts and the voltage is supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +24V power line to the subsequent unit.

Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are the source fuses through which the +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 to the subsequent board, and the flowing current is large and may generate heat, so each electronic component (for example, micro processor, VDP, etc.), and near a connector to which +5V, +12V, +24V from the interface board 635 is supplied (in particular, a power supply to which +5V, +12V, +24V from the interface board 635 is supplied). It is preferable that the line be placed near the connector of the terminal to which the line is connected.

The peripheral control board 1510 receives 3.3 V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3 V") as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512 from +12 V supplied via a +12 V fuse (not shown). It is equipped with a control power generation circuit (not shown) that generates a power source (described below). +3.3V generated by a control power generation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). +3.3V generated by a control power generation circuit (not shown) becomes a +3.3V power line in the peripheral control board 1510 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The control power generation circuit (not shown) uses a +5V power line supplied through a +5V fuse (not shown) and/or a +24V fuse (not shown), except for a +12V power line supplied through a +12V fuse (not shown). Even if an abnormal current flows to the +24V power line supplied to the +24V power line and it melts down, the +12V from the +12V power line is used as the local power source for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512. .3V can be generated, so the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 do not stop and continue to operate, and if the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown, the +24V electric drive source Although it becomes difficult to drive the (drive solenoid), it is possible to continue the performance.

The control power generation circuit (not shown) uses, in addition to +3.3V, a plurality of control power supplies (for example, DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as (hereinafter referred to as "+1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.). In this case, control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to the plurality of control power supplies (for example, +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, etc.). A 5V fuse and a +1.5V fuse are provided for +1.25V, which becomes a +3.3V power line through the +3.3V fuse, and a +1.5V power line through the +1.5V fuse. It becomes a +1.25V power supply line via a +1.25V fuse).

The capacity of the control power supply fuse (not shown) is preset by taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +3.3V power supply line. The current can flow up to the +3.3V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (cutting current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +3.3V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse (not shown) melts, and the control power supply fuse (not shown) melts. Cut off the +3.3V power line supplied to the subsequent terminal via the Note that when control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to a plurality of control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, In the case where +1.25V fuses are provided for each +1.25V), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and this current when used by a subsequent board via the peripheral control board 1510 are taken into account. The capacitance is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit (cutoff current) of the power line peripheral control board allowable current for each of the multiple control power supplies, and the power line peripheral control board allowable current for each power line of the multiple control power supplies is set in advance. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the current upper limit flows, the element part of the control power supply fuse (not shown) provided for each of the plurality of control power supplies melts, and the current flows through the blown control power supply fuse (not shown). Cut off the power supply line for control power supplied to subsequent units.

Note that the control power supply fuse (not shown) is the main fuse of the +3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc., and the current flowing through it is large and may generate heat. It is preferable to arrange it at a distance from specific electronic components in order to prevent failures due to thermal shutdown built into specific electronic components in the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512 due to the influence of this heat generation. , it is preferable that the control power generation circuit be placed near the control power supply generation circuit (particularly near the terminal that generates +3.3V and supplies it as a +3.3V power supply line).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and are If a current exceeding the upper limit of allowable current (each predetermined cutoff current) flows, it will melt, and unlike resettable fuses, once it melts, it will continue to supply the power line to subsequent units even if the current decreases. It is an electronic component that cannot be used.

Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead-type fuses instead of SMD-type chip fuses. Further, as the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

Of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, which are supplied to the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, +5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit (not shown) etc. via a +5V fuse (not shown), and +24V is supplied to an input buffer circuit (not shown). +12V is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 through a +12V fuse (not shown), and +12V is supplied to the +12V system electricity of the game board 5 through a +12V fuse (not shown). The voltage is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls a drive source (drive motor), and is also supplied to a plurality of decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5"). ).

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a capacity preset in the +5V power line of the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent board, taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent board itself. Current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the following board in the +5V power line flows, the element part of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts and the power is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +5V power supply line to the subsequent unit.

A +12V fuse (not shown) is connected to the current used by the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 excluding each decorative board of the game board 5 in the +12V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacity is set in advance by taking into account the current used in the +12V power supply line, and the current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) of the following moving board in the +12V power supply line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the subsequent board in the +12V power line flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the power is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +12V power line to the subsequent unit.

The +24V fuse (not shown) has a capacity preset in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent board, taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent board itself. Current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the subsequent board in the +24V power line flows, the element part of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts and the power is supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +24V power line to the subsequent unit.

Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are fuses that supply the +5V power line, +12V power line, and +24V power line, and are the original +5V fuse and +12V fuse in the peripheral control board 1510. Compared to fuses and +24V fuses, the current that flows is small, but the current is large and may generate heat. In order to prevent failures due to shutdown, it is preferable to place it away from electronic components such as a +12V driver circuit (not shown), and near the connectors to which +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 (especially in the vicinity of the peripheral It is preferable that the power source is placed near a terminal connector to which a power line to which +5V, +12V, and +24V from the control board 1510 is supplied is connected.

The input buffer circuit (not shown) receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, and removes noise from the input control signal. This signal is output to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) and a +12V driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 to a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect each other to +5V (not shown). It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected, and multiple wiring (harness) By removing intruding noise, noise tolerance can be improved.

The +24V driver circuit (not shown) includes a driver IC that drives the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter referred to as "+24V driver circuit (not shown)") that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. (Sometimes referred to as "fuses installed in +24V supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) is the current used by the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the gaming board 5 and the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) in the +24V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance in consideration of the above, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (blocking current) for the game board side drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current for the game board side drive solenoid flows, the fuse element provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) melts, as shown in the diagram. The +24V power line supplied to the subsequent +24V system driver circuit via the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is cut off.

The +12V driver circuit (not shown) includes a driver IC that drives the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter referred to as "the +12V driver circuit (not shown)" that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC). It mainly consists of the following: +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) is the current used by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) in the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity is set in advance with this in mind, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutoff current) for the drive motor on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side drive motor flows, the fuse element provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) melts, as shown in the diagram. The +12V power supply line supplied to the subsequent +12V system driver circuit via the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is cut off.

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, the +12V fuse, the +24V fuse, the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mounted. It is a type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and it melts when a current exceeding a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (respectively predetermined breaking current) flows.Unlike a resettable fuse, once it melts, It is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if its current decreases. Note that SMD type chip fuses are used as +5V fuses, +12V fuses, +24V fuses, fuses provided in the +24V system driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. Instead, a lead type fuse may be used. In addition, as a +5V fuse, a +12V fuse, a +24V fuse, a fuse provided in a +24V driver circuit, and a fuse provided in a +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, SMD type or lead type fuses are used. A resettable fuse such as a thermistor may also be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

+12V is supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 via a +12V fuse (not shown) to a plurality of LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "various LEDs of the game board 5") provided on the game board 5. ) is supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as turning on, turning off, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can flow a constant current to various LEDs, etc. of the game board 5, and sets the maximum current of the current to flow to the various LEDs, etc. of the game board 5. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. Note that if the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided at the front stage of the LED constant current drive circuit.

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a capacity preset in the +12V power line of each decorative board of the game board 5, taking into account the respective currents used by each decorative board of the game board 5, and is connected to the decorative board of the game board. Current can flow up to the upper limit of board allowable current (blocking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current on the game board decoration board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the voltage is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +12V power line to the subsequent unit.

Note that the +12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies the +12 power line, and although the current that flows is smaller than that of the original +12V fuse in the peripheral control board 1510, the current is large and may generate heat. In order to prevent the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board from being damaged by the influence of this heat generation, it is preferable to place them away from the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit, and near the connector where +12V is supplied (especially, It is preferable that the terminal be placed near the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which +12V is supplied is connected.

In this embodiment, the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative board of the game board 5 are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and each has a predetermined upper limit of allowable current (predetermined breaking current). If a current exceeding that exceeds the current flow, it will melt, and unlike a resettable fuse, once it melts, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if the current decreases. Note that as the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as a +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the game board 5, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to the door frame relay board 105 from a door frame side drive board (not shown) provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3"). ) and the multiple decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3") are each supplied with the power they need, and A corresponding fuse (not shown) is provided on the board, respectively.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 is connected to, for example, a +24V electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) in addition to a fuse (not shown) corresponding to a power supply (for example, a +5V fuse, a +24V fuse, a +12V fuse). There are also fuses provided in a +24V system driver circuit that controls drive, and fuses that are provided in a +12V system driver circuit that drives and controls a +12V system electrical drive source (for example, a drive motor). The capacity of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is set in advance by taking into account the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3. Upper limit of allowable current for each power line drive board on each side (e.g., door frame side +5V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (cutting current), door frame side +24V power line drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current), door frame side +12V power line Current can flow up to the drive board allowable current upper limit (blocking current). The fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply are the upper limit of allowable current of each power line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of allowable current of +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of allowable current of +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +12V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit) flows, the element part of a fuse (not shown) that corresponds to the power supply melts, and the power is supplied via the fuse (not shown) that corresponds to the blown power supply. Cut off the power line to the following parts.

The fuse installed in the +24V driver circuit takes into account the current used by the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. Its capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (blocking current) for the door frame side drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid flows, the fuse element provided in the +24V driver circuit will melt and the +24V driver circuit will Cut off the +24V power line supplied to the subsequent unit via the provided fuse. The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit takes into account the current used by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V system driver circuit in the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. Its capacity is set in advance, and current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive motor (blocking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows, the fuse element provided in the +12V driver circuit melts and the fuse installed in the +12V driver circuit melts. Cut off the +12V power line supplied to the subsequent unit via the provided fuse.

The capacity of each fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is preset in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3, taking into account the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3. Therefore, current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) on the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of permissible current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows, the element part of the fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3 will melt. Then, the +12V power line supplied to the subsequent parts through the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is cut off.

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is provided in the door frame 3 via a +12V fuse (not shown). The voltage is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of a drive motor, which is an electrical drive source. The +12V system driver circuit mainly includes a driver IC (not shown) that drives a +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse of the +12V system driver circuit has its capacity set in advance by taking into account the current used in the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V system driver circuit in the +12V power supply line of the drive board. This allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutoff current) for the door frame side drive motor. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor flows through the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit, the element of the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit will melt and the voltage will flow through the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit. Cut off the +12V power line to the subsequent ones.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +12V driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted) is provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) is input, and this input Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the +12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured to provide +5V power to multiple wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected, and multiple wiring (harness) By removing intruding noise, noise tolerance can be improved. In place of +5V supplied to this resistor, +12V supplied via a +12V fuse can provide the same effect (that is, improved noise resistance).

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, the door frame 3 The voltage is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided for this purpose. The +24V system driver circuit mainly consists of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. ing. +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse for the +24V driver circuit has a predetermined capacity that takes into account the current used in the +24V power supply line of the drive board, the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and the +24V driver circuit. This setting allows current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (cutoff current) for the door frame side drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid flows through the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit, the element of the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit will melt and the voltage will flow through the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit. Cut off the +24V power line supplied to subsequent units.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +24V driver circuit is provided (mounted, mounted) is provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) is input, and this input Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the +24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit applies +5V to a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and each drive board of the door frame 3. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected, and multiple wiring (harness) It is possible to improve noise tolerance by removing noise that has entered the device. Instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor, if +24V or +12V is also supplied via the +24V fuse, the same effect (that is, the noise immunity improvement).

For example, if one decorative board, a plurality of decorative boards, or all of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the door frame 3 Controls various light emission such as turning on, turning off, blinking, and gradation lighting of multiple LEDs such as full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of door frame 3, etc."). The current is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit is a sink type constant current drive circuit that can flow a constant current to the various LEDs, etc. of the door frame 3, and sets the maximum current of the current to flow to the various LEDs, etc. of the door frame 3. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit that can be used. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is set in advance by taking into account the current used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the decorative board, and the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side decorative board ( Current can flow up to the cut-off current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of permissible current on the door frame decorative board flows, the element part of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and the voltage is supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown). Cut off the +12V power line to the subsequent unit.

Note that among the decorative substrates of the door frame 3, one of the decorative substrates is not provided with an LED constant current drive circuit, and the other decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is provided with an LED constant current drive circuit. When the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on itself is controlled, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative board. In addition, if the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3, the input buffer circuit is installed at the front stage of the LED constant current drive circuit. may be provided.

In this embodiment, each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side is a surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and the current exceeds a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). Unlike a resettable fuse, once a fuse blows, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to subsequent devices even if the current decreases. Note that each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side may be a lead type fuse instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Moreover, as each of the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent device, but if the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent device again. A power line can be supplied to the

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to a payout control MPU 633aa and the like. This payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a, the payout control input circuit 633ab, etc. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. The hall computer monitors the player's games by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from the signal output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in any way by the payout control board 633.

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to a main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and generates +5V which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. In this embodiment, +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and +5V generated on the main control board side generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured so that the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, Also, the +5V generated by the main control board side generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side), and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control input circuit 1310b. +12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors signs of a power outage or instantaneous power outage of these +12V and +24V. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power outage notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633. Further, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to two power lines, a +12V power line and a +24V power line, thereby applying power to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line. Compared to the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of a power outage such as a power outage or momentary power outage.

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, Of the three types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, the two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are connected to the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. It is supplied to various substrates such as That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply has the same potential on the various boards, and the +24V power supply has the same potential on the various boards. Further, the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. are at the same potential.

In addition, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown). A fuse is provided (mounted, mounted), and a +12V fuse and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounted, mounted). ).

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, both the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V, which is the power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, and the The +12V fuse not shown and the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are at the same potential, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 +24V, which is the power supply monitored in ) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the above-mentioned As described above, the power is supplied to the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, via the +12V fuse (not shown), and the voltage of each drive board of the door frame 3 is If one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards require +24V, as described above, the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 ( For example, it is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of a drive solenoid, drive motor). In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V, which is the power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and drive of the door frame 3 The +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the board has the same potential, and the +24V power supply is monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. , a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5. The +24V fuse (not shown) and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are at the same potential.

[9. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 will be briefly explained with reference to FIGS. 179 to 182. FIG. 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 180 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with error detection function, FIG. 181 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 182 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with error detection function. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be explained, and the circuit of the payout control board 633 will be explained. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. Note that the wiring to the power supply and input signal boards in the circuits of various boards will also be explained as appropriate.

[9-1. Main control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power for the main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor is supplied with +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. From this supplied +12V, +5V is generated as a local power source which becomes a control power source for the main control board 1310 in a +5V generation circuit 1310g. This local power source +5V has the same potential as +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 179, +5V as a local power source serving as a control power source for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generation circuit 1310g is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. This main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its No. 2 terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and its No. 3 terminal connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground), so that a ripple (superimposed on the voltage) is generated. AC components) are removed and smoothed.

+5V output from terminal 3 is connected to capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground). By electrically connecting each end to the other end, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when an instantaneous power outage occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 after the instantaneous power outage occurs. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the other end of the capacitor MC3 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. . The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by capacitor MC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). In addition, it is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor MR0. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0, whereas the main control MPU 1310a The diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the power supply board 630 via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the first start The detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 2401, the detection signal from the setting key switch 13100a, etc. are sent to the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. has been entered.

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is transmitted to a main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "main control input circuit 1310b"). ) is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. It is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, etc. have an error detection function. The signals are input to input terminals PA1 to PA4 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b2.

The power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is also input to the payout control board 633 and the production via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to a display device 1600 or the like. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, regarding input terminals that become vacant terminals when detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of input ports PA and PB via the main control input circuit 1310b or the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2, respectively. is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground) as a vacant terminal.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of its predetermined output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power outage clear signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c, or outputs a drive signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c. and outputs it to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

Note that detection signals from other sensors may be input to predetermined input terminals of the port PC in addition to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, and input terminals that are vacant terminals of the port PC is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground) as a vacant terminal. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, is composed of 8 bits.

[9-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be explained. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, here, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a are The input main control input circuit 1310b will be explained.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from RWM switch]
The main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) supplied by In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. (The +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f) It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, which is electrically connected to the resistor MR5, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, one end of the resistor MR2 is connected electrically to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground) in order to match the waveform of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633. The other end of the capacitor may be electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor.

In addition, a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V generation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. An internal pull electrically connected to the created +5V power supply line, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). When electrically connected to the up resistor, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310. It may be electrically connected to.

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, an A terminal, and a B terminal, and the B terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the COM1 terminal, The COM2 terminal and the A terminal are electrically connected. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuit between the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal is electrically connected. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuit between the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal is It becomes conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.

The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is that when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. It becomes what is given.

The main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, as shown in FIG. In addition to the resistor MR10, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line (which is different from the +5V power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power line)) In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC10, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the resistor MR11 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC10. The base terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected thereto. In addition to the resistor MR11, the base terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR12, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply line created by a +5V power creation circuit 630fa of a power supply creation circuit 630f). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The logic inversion circuit 1310iv is a circuit that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a input via the main control input circuit 1310b. The logic inversion circuit 1310iv includes resistors MR14, MR15, MR16, and a transistor MTR11. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, The resistor MR13 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR11 via MR14. In addition to the resistor MR14, the base terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR15, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply line 630fa of a power supply creation circuit 630f). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR16, which is electrically connected to the power supply line created and supplied (that is, the +5V power supply line), and the input of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. Ru.

Note that a +5V power line created on the main control board side (a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This is a +5V power supply line created by the power supply generation circuit 630f, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa (in other words, the +5V power supply line). When electrically connected to the pull-up resistor, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input It may be electrically connected to a terminal). In addition, the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and other input terminals PA1 to PA4 and PA6 to PA7 are connected to the main control board within the main control MPU 1310a. side created +5V power supply line (+5V power supply line created by +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in main control board 1310, power supply line created and supplied by +5V power creation circuit 630fa of power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, +5V power supply line)), one end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. The collector terminal of the transistor is electrically connected to the input terminals PA1 to PA4, PA6 to PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310. You may also connect

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, so the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is The resistor MR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b pulls the voltage to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the logic becomes HI, turning on the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Along with this, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is lowered to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side of the main control board 1310, the transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is turned off, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR11 is turned off. The voltage is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR16 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and the setting key signal whose logic becomes HI is input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. will be input. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HI (logic that conveys a setting disabled state), and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is input.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground). Therefore, the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a becomes LOW, turning off the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Along with this, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR10 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR13 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and the transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is turned on, and the collector terminal of this transistor MTR11 is turned on. The voltage of the terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key signal whose logic becomes LOW is input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. will be input. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys a setting enabled state), and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is input.

When the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 as described later. Therefore, the resistor PR50 of the payout control input circuit 633ab provided in the payout control board 633, which will be described later, pulls it up to the power (+5V) side that is generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f, which will be described later. The transistor PTR60 of the payout control output circuit 633ac provided in the payout control board 633 is turned on, and the voltage at the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side of the payout control board 633, and the voltage from the RWM switch 633d is lowered. The logic of the main RWM signal becomes LOW and is input to the main control board 1310. When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d whose logic is LOW is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned off and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 becomes the main The RWM signal, which is pulled up to +5V generated on the main control board side by the resistor MR5 of the control input circuit 1310b and whose logic becomes HI, is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It happens. In other words, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic that conveys a non-press operation state), and the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA0 (RWM signal input terminal).

On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 as described later. Therefore, the transistor PTR60 of the payout control output circuit 633ac provided in the payout control board 633 is turned off, and the voltage at the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is applied to the resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b provided in the main control board 1310. As a result, the voltage generated on the main control board side is pulled up to the +5V side, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. Along with this, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310, and its logic becomes LOW. The RWM signal is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the press operation state), and the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a (RWM signal input terminal).

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the logic of the setting key signal that conveys this becomes HI by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated, The logic of the RAWM signal that conveys this becomes HI. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is operated to OFF, the logic of the setting key signal that conveys that effect becomes LOW by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, The logic of the RAWM signal that conveys becomes LOW. In other words, the logic that tells that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the logic that tells that the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d is operated are the same logic (HI), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The logic that tells that the key switch 1311a is turned OFF (not turned ON) and the logic that tells that the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated are the same logic (LOW). There is.

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 will be explained. Since the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 is the same circuit, the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here.

The main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input mainly includes a processing circuit 1310b2a, as shown in FIG. The processing circuit 1310b2a is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side that is supplied via the VCC terminal (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply line of the power supply creation circuit 630f). A power supply line created and supplied by the power generation circuit 630fa (that is, a +5V power supply line) is supplied to each internal circuit as an internal power supply, and the ground (GND) of each internal circuit is connected via the GND terminal. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Further, the processing circuit 1310b2a is a power source that monitors the power of the +12V power line (that is, the +12V power line) that is created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f that is supplied via the VS terminal. A terminal circuit, a disconnection monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of a disconnection based on a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, and a disconnection monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of a disconnection based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal. a short-circuit monitoring circuit that monitors the presence or absence of a short circuit, and a comparison circuit that compares and determines whether or not a game ball has passed based on a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 inputted via an input terminal with a predetermined threshold value. , an abnormality processing circuit that determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as a power supply monitoring circuit, a disconnection monitoring circuit, and a short circuit monitoring circuit, and performs processing in the event of an abnormality, and inspections from each monitoring circuit. It includes an error output circuit that notifies you of an abnormality based on the result, and an output circuit that outputs the comparison result from the comparison circuit.

When the abnormality processing circuit determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (when an error is detected), the error output circuit outputs a message to that effect (that it is an abnormality) to the ER terminal. It sets and controls the logic to be output to the outside via the output terminal, and also sets and controls the logic to be output to the outside via the output terminal, such as stopping the comparison result by the comparison circuit output from the output circuit.

The VS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to a +12V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, a +12V power line)), and is also connected to a resistor MR50. It is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor MC50, and one end of the capacitor MC50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50. Note that a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is connected to the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a in order to match the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. It may be electrically connected to the other end.

The VCC terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC51, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

One end of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power creation circuit of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51, which is electrically connected to the power supply line created and supplied by the 630fa (that is, the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to input terminal PA2 of. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input as a gate signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2a.

One end of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power creation circuit of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52, which is electrically connected to the power supply line created and supplied by the 630fa (that is, the +5V power supply line). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of. Further, the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the ER terminal of another main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2. In other words, the signals from the ER terminals of the plurality of main control input circuits with error detection function 1310b2 are OR-connected. A signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 is input as a sensor error signal to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Here, when the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring (error The state of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a at the time of detection will be described. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring result from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is determined to be abnormal when the power supply is abnormal. The logic is uncertain. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring result from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is detected as a disconnection. The logic is HI. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring result from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is detected as a short circuit. The logic is LOW.

In addition, when the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, disconnection monitoring circuit, short circuit monitoring circuit, etc. of the processing circuit 1310b2a (error detection The state of the output terminal and the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a at the time of 1310b2a will be explained. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring result from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (at the time of error detection), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that the power supply is abnormal. In order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a output from the processing circuit 1310b2a, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW. At the same time, in order to notify that there is an abnormality, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI.

When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring result from the disconnection monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a detects a disconnection. In order to stop the output comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW. At the same time, in order to notify that there is an abnormality, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI.

When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality is occurring based on the monitoring result from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a detects a short circuit. In order to stop the output comparison result by the comparison circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW. At the same time, in order to notify that there is an abnormality, the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the error output circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes HI.

[9-1-3. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 has two types: +12V from the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and +24V from the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630. voltage is supplied via the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors +12V and +24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power outages, and when it detects signs of power outages or instantaneous power outages, it sends a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a as well as to the payout control board. 633, the payout control MPU 633aa, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, etc. When a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later and stops the progress of the game. However, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process to be described later, stops the progress of payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), and The control board 1510 performs backup processing of the performance information, and the performance display device 1600 ensures that the main control MPU 1310a can complete the main control side power-off process and the payout control unit power-off process by the payout control 633aa. In order to cut power consumption, an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight is turned off and the progress of the performance is stopped.

Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be explained, and then the monitoring of a +24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of a +12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of a power failure notice signal will be explained.

[9-1-3a. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, have one end connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310). In addition to the resistor MR20, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line (which is different from the +5V power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power line)) It is electrically connected to the terminal and +5V is applied to the main control board side, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set) which becomes a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed and smoothed. Note that the A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is connected to a +24V power line (a power line created and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630f of the power generation circuit 630f) (that is, a +24V power supply It is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitoring voltage V1") of the +12V power supply line (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitoring voltage V1") with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is The monitoring voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as "+12V monitoring voltage V2") of the power supply line (that is, the +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the creation circuit 630f and the reference voltage Vref. It is used for comparison.The +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 2nd terminal, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the positive terminal No. 5, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal No. 6 of MIC21B.The results of these comparisons are applied to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 is equipped with two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment.The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is , one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), the other end of the capacitor MC21 is electrically connected, and the main control board side is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

[9-1-3b. +24V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 181, the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the +24V power line (created by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21 is electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, +24V power line), and the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) at one end. are electrically connected, and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC23 whose one end is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC23. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V has a power outage or instantaneous power outage, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and reaches the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage Vref is reached.

Terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side. At the same time, one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. It is connected. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is mainly controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal generated on the control board side is pulled up to the +5V side and the logic becomes HI, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal pulled down to the (substrate ground) side and whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. +12V power outage or momentary power outage monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power outage or instantaneous power outage is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end connected to the +12V power line (created by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f), as shown in FIG. The other end of the resistor MR24 is electrically connected to the supplied power line (that is, the +12V power line), and the other end of the resistor MR25 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) at one end. are electrically connected, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC25, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and is smoothed by removing ripples by capacitor MC25. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V) when the voltage starts to drop from +12V when there is a power outage or instantaneous power failure of +12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage Vref is reached.

The No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above, so one end is created on the main control board side. The other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of the capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is mainly controlled by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal generated on the control board side is pulled up to the +5V side and the logic becomes HI, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 7 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is lower than the ground (GND). A signal pulled down to the (substrate ground) side and whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, based on a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, it releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal that is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, a latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 inputs a logic HI signal to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latch state, the logic LOW signal enters the preset terminal PR terminal. When a signal is input, the state in which a signal with logic HI is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal is maintained. (maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a 1D terminal, which is a D input terminal, and a 1CK terminal, which is a clock input terminal, which are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), There is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, receives a signal from the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, which monitors a +24V power outage or instantaneous power outage, and a +12V power outage, as described above. Alternatively, a signal from the No. 7 terminal which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors instantaneous power outages is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The +5V generated on the main control board side that is applied to a certain Vcc terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). A negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a power failure clear signal input from the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310c. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310c. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal.At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. It is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, its logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. A signal output from the terminal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is transmitted to the main control output circuit. It is output from 1310c to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage notice signal, and also to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage notice signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is a D-type flip-flop, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected not only to the resistor MR27 but also to the other end of a resistor MR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is connected to the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, for the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (+5V power supply created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. line, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power line)). If connected, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting the resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310.

In addition, for the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V power line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. and an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to a +5V power supply line (which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line)). Even when the resistor is electrically connected to the main control board side, one end is not electrically connected to the other end of the resistor, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side. 1310, the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V power line (main control This is a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the board 1310, and is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line). If it is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the In other words, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310, the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a.

A circuit made up of resistors MR27, MR28, and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and the transistor The MTR 20 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. be done.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and a power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. Ru.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal is of an open collector output type, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b mentioned above, and connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 via the resistor MR30. electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). There is. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and one end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to a resistor MR33, the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground). There is. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and one end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633. is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power line (that is, the +12V power line created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f). At the same time, it is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The circuit composed of resistors MR30, MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is a switch circuit in the former stage, and the circuit composed of resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is changed by the resistor MR32. When the voltage is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, is connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground). ) side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side by the resistor MR32, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. . As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side in the output control board 633 via wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. A notice signal is input to the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the previous stage transistor MTR21 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) (substrate ground) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). The payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal is of an open collector output type, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also to the other end of a resistor MR36 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), one end is connected to the +12V power supply line (power source It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown), which is electrically connected to the power line (that is, +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f, and the peripheral control unit. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of 1511.

A circuit made up of resistors MR35, MR36, and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side, and the transistor The MTR 23 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board side, and the transistor The MTR 23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the output control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic is set to HI. The peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), thereby causing the peripheral power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW. is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, has one transistor each, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral control board 1510. The logic is the same as the peripheral power outage warning signal inputted to the peripheral power outage warning signal, whereas the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is sent to the delivery control board 633 as the power outage warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the output has two transistors, one at the front stage and the other at the rear stage. The logic is the inverse of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal, which is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. While it is electrically connected to the input terminal of the port PB, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected to the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 633ab, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310c is connected to the wiring. In the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510, one end is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line via the (harness). This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310a is implemented in Between the boards with the payout control board 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, main The control MPU 1310a, the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and the control power supply of the peripheral control unit 1511, for example, +12V, which is a DC power source higher than +5V, is used to give a power outage notice signal logic (ON/OFF signal).

In this way, the power line (that is, the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is connected to the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310, as described above. 1310b, a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, a payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, a control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, and a +12V system driver (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board It is supplied to the circuit, the LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5, the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc. There is. In other words, in addition to the main control board 1310, the +12V power line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, etc. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, for example, due to electrical trouble for some reason to the control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, When an overcurrent flows to a control power generation circuit (not shown), the potential of the +12V power supply line decreases, and the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the production display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (not shown), backlight, and drive circuit of the production display device 1600. Due to electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent may flow to either the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc. When the potential of the +12V power supply line drops or when the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the game board 5 (while the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the If the potential of the +12V power supply line drops due to overcurrent flowing to the +12V system driver circuit, or due to some electrical trouble with the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5, the decorative board of the game board 5 may When an overcurrent flows into the LED constant current drive circuit, the potential of the +12V power supply line drops. In addition, wiring patterns formed on boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and each decorative board of the game board 5, and wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, etc. If a leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some electrical trouble, the potential of the +12V power supply line will drop due to the overcurrent. Then, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which causes the main control MPU 1310a to perform main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

Further, as described above, the power line (that is, +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f is connected to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the main control board In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, a payout control board 633 (the +12V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633), a peripheral control board 1510, and a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. It is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown). In other words, in addition to the main control board 1310, the +24V power line is supplied to the dispensing control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, etc., so the main control board 1310 that constitutes the main board, Even if the payout control board 633 is operating normally, when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Or, while waiting for the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 to be activated), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 When an overcurrent flows to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) or a +24V driver circuit (not shown), the potential of the +24V power supply line drops. In addition, some kind of electrical trouble may occur in the wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power line, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, or the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. Therefore, even if a leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs, the potential of the +24V power supply line decreases. Then, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which causes the main control MPU 1310a to perform main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing to be described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[9-1-4a. Overcurrent protection to +12V power line]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +12V power line, as an overcurrent countermeasure, a current is allowed to flow to the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line peripheral control board. A +12V fuse (not shown) is provided in the effect display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided in the effect display device 1600 as the source fuse of the effect display device 1600, which allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the source allowable current. A +12V fuse (not shown) that can flow current up to the upper limit of allowable current of the branch first system is provided as a fuse for the first branch system that branches from the fuse to two systems, and the production display device 1600 has two systems from the +12V fuse (not shown). A +12V fuse (not shown) that can flow current up to the upper limit of allowable current of the second branch system is provided as a fuse for the second branch system that branches to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power supply line production drive board on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. A +12V fuse (not shown) that can flow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board drive motor is provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. Among the decorative boards of the board 5, the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted is equipped with a +12V fuse (not shown) that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side. A +12V fuse (not shown) may be provided to all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of a current drive circuit, allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of allowable current for the game board side decorative board. ). It should be noted that +12V is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse for the first branch system, and a liquid crystal panel power source is created by a liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown), and this liquid crystal panel power source is used as a power source for the production display device 1600 (not shown). Since it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit, it is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600 via a +12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse of the first branch system. A liquid crystal panel power supply generated from +12V is supplied, and +12V is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse of the second branch system.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, the control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +12V power line peripheral control board flows to the control power generation circuit (not shown) due to electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will melt. It has become. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the +12V fuse (not shown) will melt due to an overcurrent exceeding the +12V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit. By suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main The control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game when the power is turned on for the payout control unit to be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the power-off processing of the payout control unit in .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the performance display device 1600. If an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply circuit (not shown) due to an electrical trouble in the power supply generation circuit for some reason, the fuse of the first branch system of the production display device 1600 A +12V fuse (not shown) is blown. In addition, in this embodiment, due to an electrical trouble for some reason to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the effect display device 1600, the voltage is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as a fuse for the second branch system. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit (not shown) that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply from +12V, the +12V (not shown) fuse of the first branch system of the production display device 1600 flows. The fuse is blown, and due to some electrical trouble with the liquid crystal panel (not shown), backlight, and drive circuit of the presentation display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel (not shown), backlight, and drive circuit of the presentation display device 1600 may be damaged. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the second branch system flows to any of the drive circuits, etc., a +12V fuse (not shown) of the second branch system of the effect display device 1600 is blown. In addition, in this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600 has a capacity that is equal to or greater than the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the fuse of the second branch system. Among certain +12V fuses (not shown), one whose capacity is larger than any of the fuses and smaller than the combined capacity of both fuses is selected in advance. Therefore, the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse is connected to the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system and the +12V fuse (not shown which is the fuse of the second branch system) in the +12V power supply line. Even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses blows, if the overcurrent still flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the main allowable current upper limit, the fuse may blow. In addition, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the production display device 1600 is the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system. If the fuse capacity is the same as the sum of , the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse will be the same as the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the branch 1 system in the +12V power supply line. , +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system, if an overcurrent flows and one of them blows, overcurrent will still flow through the system of the blown fuse, and the upper limit of the original allowable current will be exceeded. If the voltage exceeds the current, it may melt, and an overcurrent may flow through the +12V fuse (not shown) that is the fuse of the first branch system and the +12V fuse (not shown) that is the fuse of the second branch system. If it also melts, it will melt. In this way, the effect display device 1600 is equipped with a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system. The main fuse (+12V fuse, not shown), the fuse of the first branch system (+12V fuse, not shown), and the fuse of the second branch system (+12V fuse, not shown) will blow out due to overcurrent. , the power failure warning signal is sent to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board 1310a by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, suppressing the drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. There is no need to output to the control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the process when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the payout control unit, which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, in the +12V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board When the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit (not shown) (or when the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven). ), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the upper limit of allowable current for the game board side drive motor to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) is exceeded. When an overcurrent flows, a fuse provided in a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) is blown. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 in addition to the +12V driver circuit (not shown). The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance based on the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) and the upper limit of allowable current of each decorative board of the game board 5. ing.

The +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to drive, so the effects of the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and each decorative board of the game board 5 are limited. Among the lighting effects of various LEDs by the game board 5, the lighting effects of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 are given priority over the effects by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. It has become. Therefore, the game board is designed such that the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 blows out before the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 blows out. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are selected in advance, and the +12V of the game board 5 is In order to be able to continue giving priority to the lighting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 rather than the effect by the system electric drive source (drive motor), the following board of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to +12V (not shown). The capacity of the fuse is preset.

In a case where the lighting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is continued with priority over the effect by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is larger than the capacity selected when each decorative board of the game board 5 is used up to the upper limit of allowable current of the game board side decorative board, and the selected capacity and the selected capacity are not shown. If a fuse smaller than the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) is installed on each decorative board of the game board 5. When the upper limit of allowable current is used, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the drive motor on the game board flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown), which is not shown. Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit blows, it may blow if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line production drive board. For example, as the capacity of a +12V fuse (not shown) of a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to be used up to the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the game board, and the capacity shown in the diagram. If the same capacity as the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) is installed on each decorative board of the game board 5. When the upper limit of the board's allowable current is used, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown), as shown in the figure. Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit blows, it may blow if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line production drive board.

It should be noted that among the effects by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the light emitting effects of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5, the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 Contrary to the case where the lighting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued over the effect by the motor), the light emission effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is prioritized and continued. 5, when continuing the performance using the +12V electric drive source (drive motor), the game board The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are set so that the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5 blows out first. The capacity of the fuse provided in the game board 5 is selected in advance, and the display by the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is given priority over the light emission display of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 is set in advance so that the process can be continued.

In addition, due to an overload or electrical trouble to the 12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 for some reason, an overcurrent flows to the 12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V system of the game board 5 When stopping both the performance using the electric drive source (drive motor) and the light emission performance of various LEDs using each decorative board of the game board 5, the +12V system (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. The capacity of the fuse provided in the driver circuit and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the game board 5, whichever is smaller, must be lower than the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. The capacity of the fuse will be set in advance.

In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse (not shown) is provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to prevent overcurrent from occurring. Since the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 are designed to be fused, a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 allows the power outage warning signal to be sent to the main control board 1310. There is no need to output to the control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process to be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the game board 5. A +12V fuse (not shown) on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted on the board causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side to each LED on the game board 5 and the decorative board on the game board 5. When the voltage flows, a +12V fuse (not shown) on the decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, a +12V fuse (not shown) is installed to allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side for all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied. If provided, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side will flow through each LED of the game board 5 and all the decorative boards of the game board 5 through +12V fuses (not shown) on all the decorative boards of the game board 5. Then, +12V fuses (not shown) on all decorative boards of the game board 5 are blown. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the +12V (not shown) fuse is installed in the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, so that an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side will cause the +12V Because the fuse for the game board is designed to blow out (regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit), for all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power line is supplied, the maximum allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side If a +12V fuse (not shown) that can conduct current is provided, install +12V fuses (not shown) on all decorative boards of the game board 5 to prevent +12V fuses (not shown) from overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side. (because the fuse is blown), the power failure warning signal is generated by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 by suppressing the drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing, which will be described later. However, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, the game In the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the board 5, due to electrical trouble for some reason to the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. If a leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs, and an overcurrent flows to the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. , +12V fuses (not shown) provided on each board are blown, thereby suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and controlling the main control The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a performs main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing to be described later. In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the game without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. can continue to perform these movements. Note that if a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to electrical trouble to a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 for some reason, an overcurrent will flow to the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, an overcurrent also flows to the peripheral control board 1510, which is an upper board of the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, so that a +12V fuse (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 blows.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit on the board (or when the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven). ), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor may be applied to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V system driver circuit. When the voltage flows, a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the drive motor on the door frame side to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) or +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the current flows and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit blows, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of allowable current of the +12V power line drive board on the door frame side, it will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +12V driver circuit, so that the +12V fuse and the +12V driver circuit fuse are blown due to overcurrent. Therefore, the drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the door frame 3. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows to each LED of the door frame 3 or the decorative board of the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted on the board. , the +12V fuse on the decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown. In addition, when installing a +12V fuse that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side for all decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse on all the decorative boards of the door frame 3, the door frame The +12V fuses on all the decorative boards in No. 3 are designed to blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is fused due to an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame side decorative board. (In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, current must be passed to all decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power line is supplied up to the upper limit of allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side. When installing +12V fuses, install +12V fuses on all decorative boards of the door frame 3 so that the +12V fuses will melt due to an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of allowable current on the door frame side decorative board. ), suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and outputting a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and payout control MPU 633aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the +12V power supply for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decoration board of the door frame 3, etc. In the line, due to electrical trouble for some reason to each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., leakage current or short circuit occurs, and the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board is blown, so that the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 are By suppressing the drop in the potential of the supplied +12V power line, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not need to output a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The progress of the game can be continued without performing the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process, and the payout control MPU 633aa can be The progress of payout (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) can be continued without performing the time processing.

[9-1-4b. Overcurrent protection to +24V power line]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +24V power line, current can be passed through the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power line peripheral control board as an overcurrent countermeasure. A +24V fuse is provided in the effect display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the source allowable current is provided in the effect display device 1600 as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, and a +24V fuse is provided in the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. A +24V fuse (not shown) is provided that allows current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the power supply line production drive board, and current is passed to the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side drive solenoid. There is a fuse that can be used.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or the peripheral If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power line peripheral control board flows due to an electrical trouble to a subsequent board of the control board 1510 for some reason, a +24V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will melt. It has become. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power supply line peripheral control board. By suppressing the drop in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main The control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game when the power is turned on for the payout control unit to be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the power-off processing of the payout control unit in .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, in the +24V power line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, When the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the board (or when the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is on standby) ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the upper limit of allowable current for the game board side drive solenoid is set to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown). If an overcurrent exceeding that amount flows, a fuse provided in a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) will melt. The +24V fuse (not shown) is designed to blow if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line production drive board even if the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) blows. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse (not shown) is provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) to prevent overcurrent from occurring. Since the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 are designed to be fused, a drop in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 prevents the main power outage warning signal from being sent. There is no need to output to the control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process to be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, in the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, Due to electrical trouble for some reason to the peripheral control board 1510 or the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, leakage current or short circuit may occur, causing the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 to become damaged. When an overcurrent flows to the subsequent board 1510, a +24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board melts, and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 is cut off. By suppressing the drop in potential, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not need to output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can perform the main control side power-on process described later. It is possible to continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off process in , and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the game without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. (the action of paying out game balls as prize balls) can be continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is connected to the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V driver circuit on the board (or when the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven) ), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid may be applied to the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V system driver circuit. When the voltage flows, a fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 prevents an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of allowable current of the door frame side drive solenoid to the +24V electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. Even if the current flows and the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit blows, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, it will blow. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit, so that the +24V fuse and the +24V driver circuit fuse are blown due to overcurrent. Therefore, the drop in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the processing when the power is turned off of the payout control unit in the process when the power is turned on of the control unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, each of the door frame 3 If an electrical problem with the drive board, etc. for some reason causes leakage current or short circuit, and an overcurrent flows to each drive board, etc. of the door frame 3, each board will Since the provided +24V fuse is blown, a decrease in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is This eliminates the need for the power outage warning signal to be output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a continues the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process, which will be described later. In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. I can do it.

[9-2. Payout control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power of the payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the control power of the payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor. The backup power supplied to the payout control built-in RAM is supplied as payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 182, +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is first inputted to the payout control filter circuit 633h. This payout control filter circuit 633h is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This output control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The output control three-terminal filter PIC0 has its No. 1 terminal applied with +5V from the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and its No. 2 terminal connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) and electricity. It is connected to the 3rd terminal, and +5V with noise components removed is output from the 3rd terminal. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, which has one end electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground), so that a ripple (superimposed on the voltage) is generated. AC components) are removed and smoothed.

+5V output from terminal 3 is connected to capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (substrate ground). By electrically connecting the other ends, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, when an instantaneous power outage occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is transferred to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, after the instantaneous power outage occurs. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). Note that the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (In this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is larger than the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)) has been selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 can connect the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the gaming hall is cut off. The respective charges are applied as +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the instantaneous power failure occurs.

One end of the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. . The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by capacitor PC3. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. In addition, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground). In addition, it is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the resistor PR0. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0, whereas the payout control MPU 633aa The diode PD0 prevents the supply voltage VBB from the backup power circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, through the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the dispensing control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 are respectively input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the out of ball detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d are used for dispensing control, respectively. The signals are input to input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa through the input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits.

A dispensing power outage notice signal, which is a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of the input ports PA and PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and input terminals that become vacant terminals are grounded (GND) as vacant terminal processing. (board ground).

[9-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be explained. Since the payout control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input, and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input. The dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which the dispensing power outage notice signal, which is the power outage notice signal, is inputted will be explained.

First, the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is connected to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It functions as a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (erase) various stored (memorized) information (gaming information), and selects a set value during a predetermined period after powering on the pachinko machine 1. It has a function as a setting switching button that can be switched by pressing the button, and a function as an error canceling button that can cancel the error when an error is notified after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 has terminals No. 1 to No. 4, and the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. At the same time, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are electrically connected. When the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the 1st and 2nd terminals and the 3rd and 4th terminals are not electrically connected in the internal circuit, whereas the RWM switch 633d's When the press operation part is pressed, the 1st and 2nd terminals, the 3rd and 4th terminals are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the 1st and 2nd terminals and the 3rd and 4th terminals are electrically connected. The internal circuit with the No. 4 terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633.

The signal from the RWM switch 633d indicates that when the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the 1st and 2nd terminals and the 3rd and 4th terminals are not electrically connected in the internal circuit. On the other hand, when the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the internal circuits of the first and second terminals and the third and fourth terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the payout control board 633. ) (board ground).

The payout control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d is input, as shown in FIG. In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 which is electrically connected to the line), a capacitor PC50 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50 via a resistor PR51. In addition to the resistor PR51, the base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR52, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is electrically connected to the power line (that is, +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa. A signal from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input as the RWM signal 2 to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Note that the other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (the side opposite to the other end of the resistor PR51 that is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50). It is electrically connected to the payout control output circuit 633ac. The payout control output circuit 633ac includes resistors PR60, PR61, and a transistor PTR60. The other end of the resistor PR50 and the other end of the capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR51 (the side opposite to the other end of the resistor PR51 that is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR50). It is electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR60 via a resistor PR60. In addition to the resistor PR60, the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR61, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. The other end of the resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the power line (that is, the +12V power line) created and supplied by the circuit 630fb.The payout control output circuit 633ac of the payout control board 633 A signal outputted from the collector terminal of transistor PTR60 in is inputted to main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) as a main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Output power outage warning signal which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 182, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which the dispensing power outage notice signal, which is the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, has one end connected to a +12V power supply line (+12V of the power generation circuit 630f). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40, which is electrically connected to the power supply line created and supplied by the power generation circuit 630fb (that is, the +12V power supply line), and is also connected to the other end of the transistor PTR40 via the resistor PR41. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control board 633.The collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 has one end connected to the power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, which is electrically connected to the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line), and is an input to the payout control MPU 633aa. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the port PB.The output power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal, from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is sent to the power failure warning signal 2 via the output control input circuit 633ab. It is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.The waveform of the dispensing power outage warning signal, which is the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the other end of the resistor PR40. To improve the condition, one end may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game will be explained with reference to FIG. 183. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. FIG. 183 is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body. FIG. 3 is a perspective view (b) of a main control board box sealed with a sealing mechanism.

In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is an important board that controls the progress of the game. For this reason, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from those who attempt to obtain illegal game balls by making unauthorized changes to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are connected to a caulking portion which is a sealing mechanism. For example, it is caulked with a one-way screw or the like of 1303.

The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality of caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 using a one-way screw of the caulking part 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 can be opened. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the mounting surface (front surface) side and solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 1310 (unauthorized modification is prevented). from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the next In order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

To briefly explain how to assemble the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. The various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 and a portion of the setting key switch 1311a are exposed from openings formed in the corresponding cover body 1301. Next, insert fixing screws from the solder side (back side) of the main control board into the through holes formed at the four corners of the main control board 1310, and head toward the mounting boss holes formed at the four inner corners of the cover body 1301. The main control board 1310 can be fixed to the inner space of the cover body 1301 by screwing in the main control board 1310. Next, the base body 1302 is arranged at a predetermined position so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is moved in a specific direction (the direction of the arrow in the figure) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. The outer circumferential surface of the base body 1302 is slid toward the inner circumferential surface of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd), completely closing the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are separated. The main control board 1310 is housed in the space formed by. Next, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are screwed and caulked using the one-way screw of the caulking part 1303, so that the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed as shown in FIG. 183(b). Control board box 1320 is sealed (ie, main control board box 1320 can be closed).

The inner wall of the cover body 1301 has a cover body side rib portion 1301rb that can come into contact with the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. A plurality of them are formed spaced apart by a predetermined distance. Further, the base body 1302 is formed with a plurality of base body side rib portions 1302rb that are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and are capable of coming into contact with the outer periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 has a plurality of cover body side rib parts 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and a plurality of base body side rib parts 1302rb formed on the base body 1302. It will be in a state where it is placed (pinched) in the gap (space) formed by.

Further, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. ing. The protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a and the main control board 1310 is bent due to the force of the insertion. This prevents the main control board 1310 from further curving and bending, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder.

[11. Setting key switch]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be explained with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch seen diagonally from the front right side, (b) a perspective view of the setting key switch seen diagonally from the front left side, and (c) a top view of the setting key switch. . Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a is of a type in which a setting key cylinder made of resin is housed inside a resin outer cylinder and a setting key is inserted and rotated (hereinafter referred to as a "resin type"). "Setting key switch 1311a") is a type in which a metal setting key cylinder, into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, is housed in a metal cylindrical outer cylinder. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "metal type setting key switch 1311a"). The resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure, but are partially different in material.

[11-1. Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in FIGS. 184(a) and 184(b), the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a setting key switch 1311a for a non-conductive resin cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and the inside of the outer cylinder 1311aa. A setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a key is inserted and rotated is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and a circuit is formed in which a contact is turned ON or OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of non-conductive resin is formed, and a hole is formed through the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and the base body 1311ac is bent so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. The base body 1311ac includes a metal frame plate 1311ad on which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada that protrude rearward are formed on both sides (the front side and the rear side in the figure).

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially in the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. An insertion port 1311aba into which a metal setting key is inserted is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. As shown in FIG. 184(c), when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key is inserted into the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a. Insert the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the cylinder 1311ab (at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port 1311aba is along the vertical direction). and can be removed from the insertion port 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad, and two brass lead terminals on both sides (in the same figure, (right side and left side).

In the figure, the COM1 terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the left side, and the COM2 terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the left side, are common terminals, and either one terminal or both ends can be used. The A terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the right side, and the B terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the right side, are connected to the base when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa. The circuit formed in the body 1311ac electrically connects and conducts the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal, and electrically disconnects and cuts off the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal (this On the other hand, when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated by 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa, The circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects and cuts off the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal, and electrically connects and conducts the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal ( As a result, the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted). Note that the distance between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal and the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal are the same.

A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada that extend and protrude from the metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310, thereby controlling the setting key switch 1311a as the main It can be fixed to the control board 1310. The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. A setting key is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac so that when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in the figure. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the switch 1311a is formed to protrude. Due to this cylindrical protrusion, when a manufacturer's worker mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, for example, he or she may turn the setting key switch 1311a upside down (by mistake) and solder the setting key switch 1311a. You can prevent it from being attached.

Note that when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic noise enters through the metal setting key, the resin type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa, the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the base body 1311ac are each molded from non-conductive resin. There is no influence.

[11-2. Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal type setting key switch 1311a includes a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated inside the outer cylinder 1311aa. 1311ab has the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a described above, except that the material is different. Further, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. In other words, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected to the setting key cylinder 1311ab, there is a risk that electromagnetic noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad.

[11-3. Relationship between setting key switch and main control board box cover]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be explained with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

As described above, an insertion port 1311aba into which a metal setting key is inserted is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is separated from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box. As shown in FIG. 185, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a diameter (larger diameter than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) at a position corresponding to the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. For example, a tubular rib portion 1301za (tubular rib portion 1301za) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the main control board 1310 along the inner periphery of the through hole 1301z having a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. has the same thickness as the thickness of the cover body 1301). The inner periphery of the through hole 1301z and the inner periphery of the tubular rib portion 1301za communicate with each other so that they form the same inner periphery without any step. As a result, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane ( (become flush).

Since the through hole 1301z is also the part where the finger or fist of the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a comes into contact, the rib portion 1301za can increase the strength around the through hole 1301z. As a result, the area around the through hole 1301z can be pushed in with human force, the area around the through hole 1301z can be bent, and the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab can be increased, or the area around the through hole 1301z can be damaged and the area around the through hole 1301z can be damaged. Since it is possible to prevent the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab from increasing by increasing the outer diameter of the hole 1301z, for example, if a person who has unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a intentionally Even if the user pushes his or her fist around the through hole 1301z, it can contribute to preventing the insertion of a slender unauthorized tool such as a wire into the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

Note that the diameter of the through hole 1301z is such that it fits inside the rectangular shape that is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having a rectangular parallelepiped of the setting key switch 1311a. The end of the rib portion 1301za and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are separated by a distance d1 (about 2 mm in this embodiment), and 1311ad is configured so that it cannot be directly touched by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

This creates a gap between the through hole 1301z and rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). Even if a long and slender unauthorized tool such as a wire is inserted into the " Since it is formed to fit inside the rectangular shape, the tip of the elongated unauthorized tool cannot hit the surface of the base body 1311ac and bend, thereby preventing it from penetrating toward the main control board 1310. In other words, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being altered.

In addition, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each molded from a non-conductive resin. Even if a finger approaches or touches the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge is transmitted through the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board. 1310 can be prevented. Further, the distance dimension d1 is between the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. (in this embodiment, about 2 mm), so if a person charged with static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its surroundings. Also, it becomes difficult for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a through the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za. 1310 can be prevented.

Note that in the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It is in a state of being Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. In other words, if a person charged with static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its surroundings, electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge will cause damage to the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting keys. Since the cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected to the cylinder 1311ab, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad. Therefore, if a person charged with static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its surroundings, electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge will be transmitted to the metal frame plate 1311ad. There is a risk that the main control board 1310 may be entered via the setting key switch 1311a.

Further, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (plane Therefore, when an operator attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of the game hall, first, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and its surroundings must be Since the temporarily placed game board 5 is placed temporarily, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged if the worker's foot accidentally hits the game board 5 during work and causes it to fall. can. Further, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (plane 1) Therefore, even when removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed in front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. If the operator's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 while working on the game board 5 and causes it to fall, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

Note that the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane. The protective cover is made of polycarbonate resin and is made of transparent ) may be provided on the cover body 1301.

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base body of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 185 to 187. FIG. 186 is a diagram (a) showing the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, and the main control board corresponds to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted. This is a diagram (part 1) (b) showing the solder side (back side) of the main control board, which corresponds to the mounting side (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted. (Part 2) (c). FIG. 187 is a continuation of FIG. 186, and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. , is a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is connected to the cover body side rib portions 1301rb formed in plurality on the cover body 1301 and the bases formed in plurality on the base body 1302. The body side rib portion 1302rb is arranged (held) in the gap (space) formed by the body side rib portion 1302rb. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 has a protrusion that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. A portion 1302p is formed. The protrusion 1302p prevents the main control board 1310 from bending when the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. By coming into contact with the solder side (back side) of the board 1310, the main control board 1310 is prevented from curving and bending any further, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder. It is something that can be prevented.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the metal setting key is not inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or when the setting key cylinder When 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned ON, the setting key is released and the setting key is no longer pressed), as shown in FIG. 185, the main control board 1310 The solder surface (back surface) of and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p are separated by a distance dimension d2 (approximately 1 mm in this embodiment) as a clearance, and when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed, The solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p are prevented from coming into contact with each other.

The protrusion 1302p has a cylindrical shape and a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). ). Here, first, the routing of the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a will be explained, and then the protrusion 1302p having a cylindrical shape and the protrusion 1302p having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 will be explained.

[11-4-1. Routing of wiring to setting key switch 1311a]
As shown in FIG. 186(a), the setting key switch 1311a is located near the lower side of the main control board 1310 and at a side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (an insertion/removal reference position formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa). It is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x so that the side surface opposite to the lower side surface of the main control board 1311aaa is parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x such that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces toward the upper side of the main control board 1310.

Specifically, a long elongated hole is formed along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310 through which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "long through holes SLH1 and SLH2") having a pair of opposing lands having a shape are formed in the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. , through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 (hereinafter simply referred to as " The COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, which are two lead terminals formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted through the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, respectively. Through-holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through-holes SLTH3 and SLTH4") having a pair of lands have a rotation angle of 90 degrees with a pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2. are formed on the main control board 1310, respectively.

In addition, a through hole SSTD, which is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a and into which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the surface (front surface) 1310x, it is on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting key switch 1311a and is surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2. is formed within the area.

The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a through hole SLTH4 into which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, as shown in FIG. 186(b), for example. A vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 electrically connects the through hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal is inserted and soldered, and is formed by being routed linearly along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. That is, since the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is routed in a straight line from the through hole SLTH4 to the through hole SLTH4, its length is the minimum length.

Further, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there is a through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a through hole SLTH3 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. A left-right straight wiring pattern SPTN2 electrically connecting the through-hole SLTH1 is formed in a straight line along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board. In other words, since the left-right direction straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is routed in a straight line from the through hole SLTH3 to the through hole SLTH1 in parallel with the lower side of the main control board 1310, its length is the minimum length. There is.

In addition, the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a through hole SLTH1 into which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a main control input circuit 1310b (one end is the main The other end of the resistor MR10, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the control board side, or the other end of the capacitor MC10, whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground), is electrically connected. A plurality of bent wiring patterns SPTN3 connected to the main control board 1310 are formed by being bent and routed in the vertical and horizontal directions of the main control board 1310.

Further, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there are no various wiring patterns electrically connected to the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. It is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. There is.

In addition, in the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered through the through hole SLTH1 to the predetermined input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (the input terminal of the input port PA). Various wiring patterns forming the setting signal transmission path up to PA5) are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In other words, through holes for electrically connecting various wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y are not interposed in the setting signal transmission path, and the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 is Even if the surface (front surface) 1310x is visible, it is difficult to see how each wiring pattern electrically connected to the various terminals of the setting key switch 1311a is routed.

Further, as described above, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed in the inner space of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is arranged at a predetermined position so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd). to completely close the opening side of the cover body 1301. Therefore, when the base body 1302 slides in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302. It happens. During this sliding movement, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with and rubs against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which may damage the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, various wiring patterns are arranged in the area where the protrusion 1302p slides and around the area so as not to be routed. In other words, the various wiring patterns are routed so that the protrusion 1302p does not straddle the various wiring patterns when the protrusion 1302p slides. Thereby, when the main control board box 1320 is being assembled, various wiring patterns can be prevented from being damaged by the sliding protrusion 1302p.

The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a through hole SLTH4 into which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a through hole into which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. The copper foil around the through hole SLTH1 into which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is removed, and various wiring patterns forming setting signal transmission paths (for example, vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1, left and right The copper foil around the straight wiring pattern SPTN2, bent wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.) is removed, and the copper foil around the through hole SSTD is removed through which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. The foil has been removed.

On the other hand, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil is removed approximately around the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, and the copper foil is removed in the longitudinal direction of each long hole. A thermal pattern (a cross-shaped pattern) is formed in each of the regions provided at both ends. The thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) allows the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 to connect electrically to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The device will be connected. Further, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil approximately around the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is removed. At the same time, a thermal pattern (a cross-shaped pattern) is formed respectively. Through the thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern), the through hole SLTH2 is electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The state will be as follows.

The entire mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are provided with various through holes (for example, lead terminals of electronic components are inserted through them), as shown in FIGS. 186(a) and (b). those that are soldered on the soldering surface (back side) 1310y, those that electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the soldering surface (back side) 1310y, and the solid ground ( (GND) (board ground) and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) With the exception of the through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern between (front side) 1310x and solder side (back side) 1310y, the copper thin layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns and various through holes are formed is covered. A resist solution of a predetermined color (in this embodiment, green) having insulating properties is applied to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr and a solder side insulating coating film 1310yr, respectively. Further, on the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr, an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is silk-printed and has an insulating property, and is printed in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist liquid (in this embodiment). In this case, it is printed with solid lines using white paint. The color of the resist liquid may be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black instead of green, and the color of the silk printing paint may be green, red, or black as long as it is different from the color of the resist liquid. Any color among yellow, orange, blue, white, and black may be used.

The size of the area SSLKSW1 is larger than the external shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in the area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310). In this state, the line of area SSLKSW1 (solid rectangular line) is arranged outside the outline of setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even if the setting key switch 1311a is installed, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the lines (rectangular solid lines) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping.

[11-4-2. Projection having a cylindrical shape]
When the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p has a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. ing. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A terminal and B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a, and when the main control board box 1320 is being assembled. Even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not touch the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. The land of the through hole SLTH1 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered thereto does not come into contact with the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, when the main control board 1310 is bent due to the force of the insertion, a circular protrusion 1302p is formed. The front surface of the main control board 1310 comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the circular protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has a predetermined color (in this embodiment, The solder side insulating coating 1310yr formed by applying the resist liquid (green) is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped, and the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310 is rubbed. ) 1310y may be damaged.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(b), the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 that the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p comes into contact with and its surroundings are provided with a circular shape in which the copper foil is removed. A region SINSy is formed. As a result, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the protrusion 1302p, damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 due to the protrusion 1302p can be prevented. . The foil removal area SINSy, which has a circular shape from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

Note that when assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd). be. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction (movement distance dimension sd) together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(c), a foil-cut area SINSy having an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil is cut may be formed in the area where the protrusion 1302p slides and around the area. As a result, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the protruding part 1302p that slides (movement distance dimension sd) while the main control board box 1320 is assembled, the main control by the protruding part 1302p Damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310 can be prevented. The foil removal area SINSy, which has the shape of a long hole from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-4-3. A protrusion having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base]
The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same dimension as the outer diameter of the protrusion 1302p having a cylindrical shape. ), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Note that both ends of the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, are rounded and have a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. ing. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A terminal and B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a, and when the main control board box 1320 is being assembled. Even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not touch the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. The land of the through hole SLTH1 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered thereto does not come into contact with the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, when the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the force of the insertion, the main control board 1310 bends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. The front surface of the protruding portion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the line, comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the protrusion 1302p having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, insulation on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is caused. The solder side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying a resist solution of a predetermined color (in this embodiment, green) having a characteristic, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, and the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped. , there is a risk of damaging the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187(d), copper foil is removed from the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p comes into contact and its surroundings, along the length of the base body 1302. A foil-cutting area SINSy having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction is formed. Both ends of the foil-cutting area SINSy are provided with rounded portions and have a circular shape. As a result, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the protrusion 1302p, damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 due to the protrusion 1302p can be prevented. . The foil removal area SINSy, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

Note that when assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187(e), a foil-cut area SINSy having an elongated hole shape from which the copper foil is cut may be formed in the area where the protrusion 1302p slides and around the area. As a result, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the protruding part 1302p that slides (movement distance dimension sd) while the main control board box 1320 is assembled, the main control by the protruding part 1302p Damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310 can be prevented. The foil removal area SINSy, which has the shape of a long hole from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-5. [Notification of the location of the RWM switch used for setting changes]
The main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is housed in a main control board box 1320, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d is mounted is housed in the payout control board box 632, and the payout control board box 632 is placed on the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. installed on. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards, and by making the boards to which they are attached different, it is possible to separate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. . In the case where the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on one board, unauthorized modification only needs to be made to one board, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in this embodiment, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards, and adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate boards. Improves security against 633d.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls the game preparation and the game (following the game preparation control, the game is controlled). Control of game preparation is performed in a first step (main control described later) in which setting values can be changed based on signals from a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. Following this first step, the RWM switch 633d of the payout control board 633 (here, the setting change button for selecting and switching the setting value) A second step (determination at step S216 and processing at step S218 in the setting change process to be described later) in which a setting value can be selected and switched based on a signal from the controller. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, a main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Although such security can be improved, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards, and by adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located, but it is not necessary to tell where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. It may be difficult for the game hall manager, game hall clerk, or other personnel to understand whether the game is being played or not, as they may be inexperienced.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a notation is attached to the main control board box 1320 that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. Specifically, a sticker (not shown) is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, which can tell the location of the RWM switch 633d. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" is printed in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm). There is. This allows the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button) to be communicated to the game hall manager, game hall clerk, and other personnel. When operating the switch 633d, it is possible to easily find the RWM switch 633d, thereby avoiding dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Note that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, it does not hinder the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. When molding the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, concave or convex characters may also be molded (in other words, the cover body 1301 and the characters may be integrally molded). good). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. The words (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" may be printed in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the board 1310, or the mounting surface of the payout control board 633 may be printed. The text (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting changeover button)" may be printed in white as a silk screen on the surface (front surface). Note that the color of silk printing may be the same color or may be different colors. Further, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. The text part may be masked on the mounting surface (front surface) of the board 1310 and cut out text (height: 7 mm) such as "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" may be formed using resist, or the payout control board may be formed with a resist. A character portion may be masked on the mounting surface (front surface) of the board 633 and cut out (height: 7 mm) as "RWM switch (setting change button)" using a resist. Note that although the resists may be of the same color, it is preferable that the resists be of different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. Further, instead of a blank character, a blank symbol with a symbol such as an arrow masked may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. A similar seal (this seal is a transparent rectangular sheet) is attached to the mounting surface (surface) of the board 1310, and on this rectangular sheet, there is, for example, a red translucent letter (height: 7 mm) that says "RWM switch (setting changeover)". button) is printed on the dispensing control board.), or you can paste red translucent letters (height: 7 mm) on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 saying "RWM switch". You may also attach a transparent rectangular sheet called "(Settings Switching Button)". Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the embodiment described above, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. 633d may be placed from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, with the power of the pachinko machine 1 turned on, an employee such as a manager of the game hall or a clerk of the game hall operates the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display the performance display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice telling where the RWM switch 633d is located, ``The RWM switch is located on the payout control board.The RWM switch also serves as a setting switch button,'' is played from various speakers, and the RWM switch 633d An announcement image (which may be taken as a photograph) that conveys the location of the is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After understanding the location of the RWM switch 633d from the announcement voice and image, the game hall manager, game hall clerk, and other staff members shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 to smoothly change the setting values. can be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead of this, the setting value When changing the settings, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to let you know where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The RWM switch is located on the payout control board, which tells where the RWM switch 633d is located under the control of the control board 1510.The RWM switch also serves as a setting changeover button.Operate the RWM switch to change the setting value. "Please." is heard repeatedly from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the announcement voice and proceed with various processes based on the received predetermined command. (Proceed with the presentation, presentation of the state of waiting for customers (demonstration presentation), etc.). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known. Incidentally, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that informs how to operate the setting keys may be played from various speakers after the setting value is determined. Further, while the announcement voice is being played, an image indicating "setting in progress" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, a sticker is attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation serving as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. When changing the settings, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to let you know where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting switch button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The RWM switch is located on the payout control board, which tells where the RWM switch 633d is located under the control of the control board 1510.The RWM switch also serves as a setting changeover button.Operate the RWM switch to change the setting value. Please.'' is repeatedly heard from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. In addition, although such announcement voices are repeatedly played from various speakers, in order to assume that the content of the announcement voice may be missed, a message is placed on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement voice begins to be played. By visually observing the sticker, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be determined. In addition to the announcement, "The RWM switch is located on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." It may also be possible to provide information that tells the location where the sticker is affixed. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value has become accustomed to changing the setting value due to the work and it is annoying, if he operates the RWM switch immediately after starting the work, he will take this opportunity as an opportunity to change the setting value. It is possible to stop the announcement sound immediately, and even if it is necessary to perform the work after the game hall has started operating, it is possible to stop the announcement immediately after starting the work so as not to inconvenience the players. When the RWM switch is operated, this can be used as a trigger to immediately stop the announcement voice. In addition, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys may be played from various speakers after the setting value is determined. Furthermore, while the announcement voice is being played, an image "setting in progress" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[11-6. [Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for confirming setting values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, and the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. ) The base monitor 1310h that doubles as a setting display will be briefly described. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is moved clockwise to 60. When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated and turned ON, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is operated. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and then the power switch 630a is operated while operating the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d to power on the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Open the setting key switch 1311a, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a. Next, while operating the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the Pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). (the current value) is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

As mentioned above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row, and can display numerical values up to 6 digits. It is. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display among the six 7-segment LED displays in a row (that is, the 6-digit (in this case, the dot may be lit or turned off.Also, the dot may also function as a setting change permission lamp). ), one 7-segment LED display out of six 7-segment LED displays in a row. display the setting value on the device, multiple 7-segment LED displays, or all 7-segment LED displays (in this case, the dot can be lit or turned off, and the dot can be set to allow setting changes). If the lamp also functions as a lamp, it may be turned on when changing settings and turned off when changing settings is completed.

When the person who changes the settings of the set value presses the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is transmitted from the payout control board 633 to the main unit. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310. Each time the person who changes the settings of the set value presses the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current set value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. When the maximum value, set value 6, is reached, control is performed to return to the initial value, set value 1, increase the value by 1 again, and display the set value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a). Turn off the setting key by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the cylinder. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set values determined by changing the settings in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and sends the set values to the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display. After or immediately after switching from the display state to the non-display state, data is collected from a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a through the output port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. Control is performed to display the number (total number) of game balls that have been played on the base monitor 1310h.

The person who changes the settings of the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. Complete the configuration change task.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. As a result, a "predetermined set value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Open the main body frame 4 from the frame 2, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d.

A person who wants to check and display the currently set setting values must first check that the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Then, insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 without operating the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). (the current value) is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the set value will not be changed at all in response to this press operation, and the setting display will not change at all in response to this press operation. The contents displayed in 1310g are also not changed.

As mentioned above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row, and can display numerical values up to 6 digits. It is. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display among six 7-segment LED displays in a row (that is, a 6-digit (In this case, the dot may be lit or turned off.Also, the dot may also function as a setting change permission lamp.) (If the current setting value is being checked, the light will turn on, and when the currently set setting value has been checked, it will turn off.) Among the 7-segment LED displays, display the set value on one 7-segment LED display, multiple 7-segment LED displays, or all 7-segment LED displays (in this case, the dots may be lit or , it can be turned off.Also, if you want the dot to also function as a setting change permission lamp, it will turn on when the currently set setting value is being checked, and the It may also be configured so that the light turns off when confirmation of the set value is completed.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting values completes the confirmation of the currently set setting values, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting values moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the initial position, which is the original position. Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from displaying the setting values to the non-displaying state on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display, and then or immediately after that, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Control is performed to display on the base monitor 1310h the number of game balls (total number) collected from the specific area through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must remove the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. to complete the confirmation display of the currently set settings.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are such that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. However, as mentioned above, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is When power is turned on to the machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. A setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on, thereby turning on the setting key, and pressing the RWM switch 633d. It is necessary that the part has not been manipulated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions and the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are the conditions that apply when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). When the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is moved clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on, and the predetermined setting value change permission conditions include ``When the power is turned on to Pachinko machine 1 or when there is a power outage ( In contrast to the requirement that the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d be operated when power is restored after a momentary power outage (instantaneous power outage), predetermined setting value display permission is required. The condition requires that ``the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage).'' The difference is that

[12. Wiring pattern of setting key switch and RWM switch on main control board]
Next, from the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. The wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram illustrating the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram illustrating the outline of various wiring patterns for the main control board to the main control MPU. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back side) of the main control board. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320.

The mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 includes connectors MCN1 to MCN8, a crystal oscillator, DIP type electronic components such as various ICs, a setting key switch 1311a, a resistor, a collective resistor, a diode, a capacitor, an electrolytic capacitor, and a transistor. Lead-type electronic components such as the following are mounted. Each lead terminal of the DIP type electronic component is inserted into a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Each lead terminal of the lead type electronic component is inserted into a through hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 include those input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function via connectors MCN1 to MCN5, and the main control input without an error detection function. There is one that is input to the circuit 1310b, and one that is input to the circuit 1310b. The connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are arranged near the top side of the main control board 1310 in order from the center of the top side toward the left side, and the connector MCN5 is arranged near the top side of the main control board 1310 near the left side. .

Various detection signals inputted through the connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are inputted to the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2, and various detection signals inputted through the connector MCN5 are inputted to the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2. Some signals are input to the main control input circuit 1310b (the above-mentioned circuit composed of a resistor and a transistor) which does not have an error detection function. Note that the connector MCN4 is for outputting commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is a DIP type in which a plurality of main control input circuits with error detection function 1310b2 (in this embodiment, eight main control input circuits with error detection function 1310b2) are integrated. A plurality of ICs (in this embodiment, two) are mounted. Note that a plurality of main control input circuits with error detection 1310b2 may be mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 without converting the plurality of main control input circuits with error detection 1310b2 into ICs.

Connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are arranged near the lower side of the main control board 1310 in the order of connector MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and connector MCN8 from the left side to the center of the lower side, and connector MCN8 is located near the main control board 1310. It is located near the lower side of 1310 and closer to the left side than the center of the lower side. The connector MCN6 outputs a signal that drives the electric drive source (solenoid) provided in the game board 5, and the connector MCN7 inputs and outputs signals related to exchanging commands with the payout control board 633. A detection signal (main RWM signal) from an RWM switch 633d (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633") mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 is input. It is something that will be done. The connector MCN8 is for exchanging various signals when performing inspection and verification.

The main control MPU 1310a is located above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310 and to the right of the center of the main control board 1310 so that the main control MPU 1310a is parallel to the lower side (upper side) of the main control board 1310. (that is, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). The IC package of this main control MPU 1310a is ZIP (Zigzag
The lead terminals protruding perpendicularly from the bottom of the main control MPU 1310a are arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction of the bottom of the main control MPU 1310a by bending them alternately. . Here, for convenience of explanation, the lead terminals arranged in two rows will be described as lead terminals arranged in the upper row and lead terminals arranged in the lower row.

A plurality of lead-type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc. are arranged above the setting key switch 1311a arranged near the bottom of the main control board 1310, and above these, two lead-type collective resistors are arranged in a row on the left and right. A detection signal ( Resistors MR2 and MR5 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal (main RWM signal) is input via the connector MCN7 are arranged, and below this lead type left collective resistance (that is, the lead type left collective resistance Resistors MR3, MR4, and transistors constituting the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7. MTR0 is arranged.

In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b, into which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is input via the connector MCN7, is configured with the lead type left collective resistor as a boundary (protective wall). Resistors MR3, MR4 and transistor MTR0 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b are arranged below the lead type left collective resistance, and the main control input circuit is arranged above the lead type left collective resistance. Resistors MR2 and MR5 forming part 1310b are arranged. As a result, by using the lead type left collective resistor as a protective wall, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistors MR2 and MR5 placed above the lead type left collective resistor, contributing to improved security. can do. Furthermore, since the transistor MTR0 has built-in resistors MR3 and MR4 as bias resistors, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistors MR3 and MR4, contributing to improved security. can do.

Above the connector MCN8 arranged to the right of the setting key switch 1311a arranged near the lower side of the main control board 1310 is a resistor constituting the main control input circuit 1310b into which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. MR10 to MR13, a capacitor MC10, and a transistor MTR10 are arranged. Note that the transistor MTR10 has built-in resistors MR11 and MR12 as bias resistors. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistors MR11 and MR12, contributing to improved security.

On the right side of the main control input circuit 1310b, into which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, there is a logic inversion circuit that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is input through the main control input circuit 1310b. Resistors MR14 to MR16 and transistor MTR11 forming circuit 1310iv are arranged. Note that the transistor MTR11 has built-in resistors MR14 and MR15 as bias resistors. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the resistors MR14 and MR15, contributing to improved security.

Connectors MCN1-MCN5 are arranged near the top side of the main control board 1310 in a line parallel to the top side; connectors MCN6-MC8 are arranged near the bottom side of the main control board 1310 in a line parallel to the bottom side; When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, a part of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, and the cover body Even if an attempt is made to tamper with the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 by inserting an unauthorized tool (for example, a thin wire, etc.) through the gap formed by the connector MCN1 to MCN1 to MCN8, and the setting key switch 13111a, the connector MCN1 ~Electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, collective resistors, various ICs, and transistors are arranged around the MCN8 and setting key switch 13111a, and resistors and diodes are arranged around the main control MPU 1310a. , a capacitor, a crystal oscillator (located near the bottom of the main control MPU 1310a), a collective resistor, various ICs, and other electronic components are arranged, so these electronic components can become obstacles or protective walls. It is necessary to bend the unauthorized tool (eg, thin wire, etc.) multiple times, and the unauthorized tool (eg, thin wire, etc.) cannot actually reach the main control MPU 1310a.

A plurality of through holes are formed in the main control board 1310, into which each lead terminal of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a is inserted. Each lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is inserted into these through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a are inserted into the solder surface of the main control board 1310. (Back side) Soldered and fixed at 1310y.

As shown in FIG. 189, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, lead terminals that are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) are connected to the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the substrate 1310. In addition, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a +5V power line created by the main control board side (a +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310) is connected to the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. A +5V power supply wiring pattern is formed which is electrically connected to the main VBB power supply line supplied from the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, output signal wiring patterns for outputting various signals from the lead terminals of the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, and input signal wirings for inputting various signals to the lead terminals. A pattern is formed.

The input signal wiring pattern includes a connector MCN7 to which a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input, to an input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms an RWM signal transmission path extending from the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The setting key signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms the setting signal transmission path extending to the setting key signal input terminal (setting key signal input terminal) and the detection signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e (power outage A power outage warning signal wiring pattern (hereinafter referred to as "various (sometimes referred to as "wiring pattern").

On the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the through holes through which each lead terminal of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a is inserted, there are holes that are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground). around the through holes except for the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through holes (for example, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) ) A foil-cut area is formed in which the copper foil around the through-hole ( ) that electrically connects the output signal wiring pattern with ) 1310y is blanked.

The main control board 1310 except for the area where various wiring patterns are formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where foil cutouts are formed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is A predetermined insulating ground is formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of A resist liquid of a color (in this embodiment, green) is applied to form a solder side insulating coating film 1310yr over the entire area of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, among the through holes through which each lead terminal of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a is inserted, there are electrically connected to a solid ground (GND) (board ground). around the through-holes except those that are connected to the wiring, around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the output signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, the output signal between the mounting surface (front side) 1310x and the soldering side (back side) 1310y). Although a foil-cut area is formed by removing the copper foil around the through-holes (through-holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns), the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lower part of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a Between the lead terminals arranged in the side rows and the terminals of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a, there are , a foil cutout area is not formed on the upper side of the main control board 1310 (parallel to the lower side or the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the main control board 1310), and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) is formed. There is.

Other areas on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, excluding the area where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where the foil cutout is formed, are the main control board 1310. It is formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and has insulating properties so as to cover the base material of the main control board 1310 and the copper thin layer (copper plane, copper foil surface). A resist liquid of a predetermined color (in this embodiment, green) is applied to form a mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr over the entire region of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

The copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has various wiring patterns and main control patterns routed to the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. A small copper foil area surrounded by multiple lead terminals of the MPU 1310a may be formed. Therefore, in order to stabilize the ground of the small copper foil area, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are provided. A solid ground through hole is formed to electrically connect the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the substrate.

Note that there are multiple sizes of land in the solid ground through hole, and the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically The size of the land of the through hole for the lead terminal into which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted and soldered on the solder side (back side) 1310y. The land size is the same as that of the through hole for the wiring pattern, the land size is larger than the land size of the through hole for the lead terminal, and the land size is smaller than the land size of the through hole for the lead terminal. There are large ones, etc., and a plurality of betagran through holes are formed so as to be scattered over substantially the entire surface of the main control board 1310. As a result, the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are connected. It is stabilized so that the ground (GND) (board ground) is the same.

In addition, the main control board 1310 has a wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, for the wiring pattern into which various signals are input. While no through-holes are formed for wiring patterns for electrical connection, wiring patterns for outputting various signals are formed on the main control board 1310 in order to prevent wiring patterns from interfering with each other. A plurality of through holes for wiring patterns may be formed to electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Note that the wiring pattern for inputting various signals to the main control board 1310 is a wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. It is preferable that no through-holes be formed for electrically connected wiring patterns; however, in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to the routing of the wiring patterns, wiring where various signals are unavoidably input. A through hole for a wiring pattern may be formed in the pattern to electrically connect the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

However, a wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter referred to as an "input signal wiring pattern through hole") formed for a wiring pattern into which various signals are input is, for example, a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground). If an unauthorized modification is made by electrically switching the +5V power line created on the main control board side, the fraudster will be able to obtain fraudulent game balls because the main control MPU 1310a is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game. There is a risk that

Therefore, it is necessary to take security measures for the through holes for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1. Security measures for through-holes for input signal wiring patterns]
As a security measure for the input signal wiring pattern through-hole, the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole is covered with an insulating film (hereinafter referred to as "the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the first to fourth embodiments"). 190 to 193, the structure of covering the land with an insulating film will be described. FIG. 190 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. 191 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modification of (b). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on a land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a second embodiment formed in FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of FIG. 192, and FIG. 192 is an input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is coated on a land of a through hole for use, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a). 193 is a schematic diagram (c), and FIG. 193 shows a structure in which an insulating film is covered with a land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment formed on a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of a main control board 1310. It is a schematic diagram (a) for explanation, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modification of (b). Note that in FIGS. 190 to 193, components that perform the same functions are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The various through-holes have copper plating on the inner circumferential wall of the hole that they pass through, making them conductive. In addition to through holes, the main control board 1310 is also provided with non-through holes, and the non-through holes have no copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the hole that passes through, and the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 In addition, copper plating is applied to the inner circumferential wall of the through hole in that the solder surface (back surface) 1310y does not have a land, and the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 It is very different from a through hole that has a land on it. A non-through hole is formed to attach a board to a member, or to fix an electronic component to which an external force is applied (such as a connector to which wiring is attached/detached) to the board. Note that there is no problem in adopting the structure of covering the land of the through hole with an insulating film for the through hole for mounting an electronic component (that is, inserting each lead terminal of the electronic component). In addition, the structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with an insulating film is a wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "output signal wiring pattern through hole") formed for the wiring pattern where various signals are output. There is no problem in adopting it for the land of ). In addition, the configuration in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole is applied to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. There is no problem in adopting it for the land of a solid ground through hole that electrically connects the ground (GND) (substrate ground).

[12-1-1. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the first embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310, and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the main control board 1310 By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed. A wiring pattern SPTN on the mounting surface (front surface) side and a wiring pattern on the solder surface (back surface) side are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (front surface) side formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

A solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and one end of a solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310. and the other end of the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 or electronic component formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. is electrically connected to the land (pad) to which a specific terminal is soldered.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are as follows. They are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1, and the mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other. A solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y, a mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a through hole KTH1, and They are electrically connected via a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on a solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. In a region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed. has been done.

Furthermore, on the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. In the area of the coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, there is a solder side (back side) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. It is formed.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the mounting surface (front surface) side and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back surface) side are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards and finally cutting them out from one fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material). There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, making holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 has the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. Since the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having the opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 is formed, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is extended from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. The outer periphery of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side is covered with a green resist as an insulating film toward the center. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with the green resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is not exposed. The area of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side can be kept small. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern with, for example, the solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole.

In addition, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, so from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 to the mounting surface (front) side. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land KRDx1. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the front (back) side land KRDy1. In other words, the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) and the land KRDy1 on the solder surface (back surface) can be used as check terminals when electrically inspecting the main control board 1310. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

Note that in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface ( A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region corresponding to the back surface) side land KRDy1. From the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back side) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. However, as shown in FIG. 190(c), in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, there is an outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. A resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back surface) side having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and placed on the back side of the game board 5. This is because when making modifications, only the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. In addition, the operator who inspects the main control board 1310, when determining which through hole is the input signal wiring pattern through hole among the plurality of various through holes formed in the main control board 1310, Comparing the sizes of the lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the lands on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y can contribute to determining whether the holes are through holes for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1-2. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the thickness of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 is as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction (perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the board 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, are formed. At the same time, a wiring pattern SPTN on the mounting surface (front surface) side and a wiring pattern on the solder surface (back surface) side are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size, and the mounting surface (front surface) side in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (front surface) side formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

A solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and one end of a solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310. and the other end of the solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern and the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 or electronic component formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. is electrically connected to the land (pad) to which a specific terminal is soldered.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. In the region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, there is a through hole for the input signal wiring pattern that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side and according to the first embodiment described above. A resist opening KBxra on the mounting surface (front surface) side is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in a configuration in which the land of the hole is covered with an insulating film and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. has been done. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account a resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (front surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1. The resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension from the inner peripheral edge on the (front) side (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.0 mm in order to prevent the green resist liquid from intruding into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. A distance dimension of 5 mm or more is required, and in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for input signal wiring pattern is covered with an insulating film according to the second embodiment, a distance of 0.5 mm is adopted. It has become. Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. It is larger by 1.0 mm.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr; A resist opening on the solder side (back side) side having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is provided in a region of the front side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. A section KByra is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards and finally cutting them out from one fixed-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, drilling holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. .

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 has the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. It is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1, and further smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film, and is smaller than the outer diameter of the through hole KTH1. Since the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 larger than the inner diameter of the hole is formed, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is extended from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. Toward the center of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, resist liquid intrusion prevention area (in other words, the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm) from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) side). The outer periphery is covered with a green resist as an insulating film, except for the area extending to a distant position. As a result, from almost the inside of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the entire outer peripheral part (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (The area of the side land KRDx1 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) can be covered with green resist as an insulating film, so the exposed copper foil area is covered with resist liquid. The area of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front side) where the copper foil is exposed because it becomes an intrusion prevention area is covered with an insulating film over the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment. Compared to the configuration, it can be kept extremely small. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern with, for example, the solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power supply line created on the main control board, and makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole.

In addition, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, a green insulating film is formed on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. When the resist solution is applied, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. ) is manufactured by arranging multiple boards and finally cutting them out, so the front side of one fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward) and is fixed to the manufacturing equipment. Even if a green resist solution is applied to the main control board 1310, the green resist solution enters the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and is dried without blocking this hole.

In addition, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the soldering surface (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, so from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 to the mounting surface (front) side. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land KRDx1. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the front (back) side land KRDy1. In other words, the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) and the land KRDy1 on the solder surface (back surface) can be used as check terminals when electrically inspecting the main control board 1310. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

Note that in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the second embodiment is covered with an insulating film, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface ( A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region corresponding to the back surface) side land KRDy1. From the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back side) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. However, as shown in FIG. 191(c), in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, there is an outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. A resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back surface) side having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and placed on the back side of the game board 5. This is because when making modifications, only the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. In addition, the operator who inspects the main control board 1310, when determining which through hole is the input signal wiring pattern through hole among the plurality of various through holes formed in the main control board 1310, Comparing the sizes of the lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the lands on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y can contribute to determining whether the holes are through holes for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1-3. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the thickness of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 is as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction (perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the rear surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the board 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, are formed. At the same time, a wiring pattern SPTN on the mounting surface (front surface) side and a wiring pattern on the solder surface (back surface) side are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size, and the mounting surface (front surface) side in the configuration in which the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (front surface) side formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. A region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side is also coated with a green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards and finally cutting them out from one fixed-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, drilling holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . For this reason, when a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film onto the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. (The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging and finally cutting out multiple boards from a single regular-sized copper-clad laminate (base material); The copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that the front surface is vertically upward, and green resist liquid is applied from the inner periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. enters and blocks this hole. The green resist liquid that entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 becomes depressed from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (front surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight and dries. I will do it.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr; A resist opening on the solder side (back side) side having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is provided in a region of the front side insulating coating film 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. A section KByra is formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the mounting surface side insulating coating film 1310xr is also covered with the green resist as an insulating film. At the same time, the green resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and the hole is blocked. As a result, the entire mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be covered with the green resist as an insulating coating. The copper foil is not exposed on the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and the conductive plating portion applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole KTH1 is the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310. 1310x can be prevented from being exposed. Further, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be closed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern with, for example, the solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole.

In addition, although the green resist liquid entered from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the mounting surface (front surface) side and blocked this hole, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 The solder surface (back surface) side of the hole is open. That is, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed on the mounting surface (front surface) side with green resist solution, but is open on the solder surface (back surface) side. This is caused by the green resist liquid entering from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and air remaining inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. If the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is closed, liquid such as resist removal liquid may remain inside through hole KTH1, and this liquid may affect through hole KTH1. The internal conductive plating may corrode, resulting in poor contact, or during the soldering (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied, the liquid inside the through hole KTH1 instantly vaporizes and expands (so-called "steam explosion"). This is because there is a risk that the electrically conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged and electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1 may occur.

Furthermore, although there are holes for the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1, their presence can be hidden by the green resist, so the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side can be made inconspicuous with respect to the green resist painted all over, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous. This will prevent unauthorized persons who attempt to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-hole by electrically switching it to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is possible to make it difficult to discover through holes for the input signal wiring pattern (holes of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side and the through hole KTH1).

In addition, since the copper foil of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is exposed, the tip of the contact probe is connected from the solder side (back side) side of the main control board 1310 to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (operation check and abnormal potential check) by bringing the parts into contact with each other. In other words, the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as a check terminal when electrically inspecting the main control board 1310. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

Note that in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the third embodiment is covered with an insulating film, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface ( A solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is formed in a region corresponding to the back surface) side land KRDy1. From the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (back side) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. However, as shown in FIG. 192(c), in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1, there is an outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1. A resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back surface) side having a larger opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) may be formed. This is because the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and placed on the back side of the game board 5. This is because when making modifications, only the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. In addition, the operator who inspects the main control board 1310, when determining which through hole is the input signal wiring pattern through hole among the plurality of various through holes formed in the main control board 1310, Comparing the sizes of the lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the lands on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y can contribute to determining whether the holes are through holes for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1-4. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered with a land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film, the thickness of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 is as shown in FIGS. A thin through hole is formed in the direction (perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the rear surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main control By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the board 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, are formed. At the same time, a wiring pattern SPTN on the mounting surface (front surface) side and a wiring pattern on the solder surface (back surface) side are formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by applying conductive plating to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 The outer diameter is the outer diameter KTHD1 and has the same size, and the mounting surface (front surface) side in the configuration in which the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film. The outer diameter of the land KRDx1 is the same as the outer diameter of the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1.

The mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and another mounting surface (front surface) side formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The land KRDx1 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered is electrically connected.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. In a region of the film 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is formed. has been done. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with an insulating film.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. A region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) side land KRDy1 is also coated with a green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form a solder side insulating coating 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of boards and finally cutting them out from one fixed-sized copper-clad laminate (base material). There are processes such as fixing a fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) to manufacturing equipment, painting it, drying it, drilling holes, and other processes, and finally each board is cut out. . Therefore, when a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film onto the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. (The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging and finally cutting out multiple boards from a single regular-sized copper-clad laminate (base material); The copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment (so that the rear surface of the base material faces vertically upward), and green resist liquid is applied from the inner periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. will enter and close this hole. The green resist liquid that entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 becomes depressed from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight and dries. I will do it.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 has the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. Since the mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra having the opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 is formed, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is extended from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. The outer periphery of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side is covered with a green resist as an insulating film toward the center. Furthermore, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the region of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also covered with green resist as an insulating film. At the same time, the green resist liquid enters from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the solder surface (back surface) side, and this hole is blocked. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be covered with the green resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is not exposed. The area of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) can be kept small, and the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be closed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern by electrically switching the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern with, for example, the solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern. Security measures can be taken for pattern through holes. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole.

In addition, since the copper foil of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is exposed, the tip of the contact probe is connected from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. The main control board 1310 can be electrically inspected (operation confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) by being brought into contact with the main control board 1310. In other words, when electrically inspecting the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

In addition, although the green resist liquid entered from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the solder side (back side) side and blocked this hole, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 The mounting surface (front surface) side of the hole is open. That is, the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is closed on the solder surface (back surface) side with green resist liquid, but is open on the mounting surface (front surface) side. This is because the green resist liquid entered from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 on the solder side (back side) side, and air remained inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. If the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is closed, liquid such as resist removal liquid may remain inside through hole KTH1. The internal conductive plating may corrode, resulting in poor contact, or during the soldering (reflow, etc.) process where heat is applied, the liquid inside the through hole KTH1 instantly vaporizes and expands (so-called "steam explosion"). This is because there is a risk that the electrically conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged and electrical disconnection of the through hole KTH1 may occur.

In addition, although the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 exist, the existence of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is hidden by the green resist on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The presence of the through hole KTH1 can be hidden by the green resist on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so that it can be hidden on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. With respect to the solid white resist 1310x, the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side can be made inconspicuous, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous. This will prevent unauthorized persons who attempt to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-hole by electrically switching it to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side. It is possible to make it difficult to discover through holes for the input signal wiring pattern (holes of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side and the through hole KTH1).

Note that in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with an insulating film, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface ( A mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region corresponding to the front surface) side land KRDx1. From the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the (front) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating film. However, as shown in FIG. 193(b), the area corresponding to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr has an outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. A mounting surface (front) side resist opening KBxra may be formed that is smaller and has an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. . The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account a resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (front surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1. The resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension from the inner peripheral edge on the (front) side (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension is at least 0.0 mm in order to prevent the white resist liquid from intruding into the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. A distance dimension of 5 mm or more is required, and in the configuration in which the land of the through hole for input signal wiring pattern is covered with an insulating film according to the fourth embodiment, a distance of 0.5 mm is adopted. It has become. Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. It is larger by 1.0 mm.

As a result, from almost the inside of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the entire outer peripheral part (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (The area of the side land KRDx1 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) can be covered with green resist as an insulating film, so the exposed copper foil area is covered with resist liquid. By serving as an intrusion prevention area, the area of the land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, a green insulating film is formed on the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. When the resist solution is applied, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces vertically upward. ) is manufactured by arranging multiple boards and finally cutting them out, so the front side of one fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward) and is fixed to the manufacturing equipment. Even if a green resist solution is applied to the main control board 1310, the green resist solution enters the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and is dried without blocking this hole.

Further, from almost the inside of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the mounting surface on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 ( By covering the area of the side land KRDx1 (excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) with green resist as an insulating film, the exposed copper foil becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. Although the main control board 1310 is smaller in size, electrical inspection (operation check) of the main control board 1310 can be performed by touching the tip of the contact probe from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 to the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1. Therefore, when electrically inspecting the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal. Note that the contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for checking continuity of a so-called "tester".

[12-2. Wiring pattern to input terminal]

The detection signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is transmitted to one of the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a through various wiring patterns (power failure notice signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The signal is input as a power outage warning signal to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB located third from the left in the figure. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The RWM signal is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is located eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the lead terminal arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The signal is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA located 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure).

Various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 and detection signals (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633. Various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) and various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 are arranged close to each other and parallel to each other. It is routed around the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that it does not run (does not run in parallel).

In addition, various wiring patterns (power failure advance notice signal wiring pattern) for transmitting detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 and detection signals (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the dispensing control board 633 are provided. Various wiring patterns for transmission (RWM signal wiring pattern) and various wiring patterns for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 (setting key signal wiring pattern) have a mounting surface (front surface). The wiring patterns 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y are routed only to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 without passing through a through hole that electrically connects the wiring patterns.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting of the probability of giving a profit to the player, are connected to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the pattern (setting key signal wiring pattern). Therefore, it can contribute to improving security. In addition, various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 used for setting changes are provided on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. By forming the RWM signal wiring patterns, it becomes difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the RWM signal wiring pattern). Therefore, it can contribute to improving security. In addition, various wiring patterns (power failure warning signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so that the main control When viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the board 1310, it is difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) are routed, and the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) can be This can contribute to making it difficult to make unauthorized changes. Therefore, it can contribute to improving security.

When changing the setting value, as described above, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are important signals that can change the setting of the probability of generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and are used in the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , it is necessary to make it difficult for the person in charge of the hall to make unauthorized changes to the settings that are not intended by the person in charge of the hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and RWM switch 633d, which can change the setting of the probability of giving a profit to the player, are provided. The various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit the detection signals of ing. As a result, the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are interconnected. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to predetermined input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a separately. The various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d (the RWM signal wiring pattern) can be made difficult to be tampered with at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the security of setting changes.

In addition, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern). has been done. The input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA is placed eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. Terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is arranged at the 20th lead terminal from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, into which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as the setting key signal. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used as the setting key signal so that the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, which is input as the RWM signal, is not placed next to the other. A predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the input is input, and a predetermined input of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal. Between the terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and other lead terminals (specifically, the 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a) A total of 11 lead terminals (lead terminals arranged in the lower row) are arranged so as to intervene.

As described above, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, among the through holes through which each lead terminal of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a is inserted, there is a solid ground (GND) (board ground) and an electrical connection. around through-holes other than those connected to the A foil-cutting area is formed in which the copper foil around the through-hole for electrically connecting the output signal wiring pattern with the solder side (back side) 1310y is blanked out. Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (the logic that conveys the setting enabled state), and the input terminal PA5 (the setting key signal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a When the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal is LOW (logic that conveys the press operation state) as described above. This signal is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, by removing the foil around the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) can be connected to the ground. (GND) (substrate ground) can be made difficult to tamper with electrically, contributing to improved security.

Note that the settings of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the key signal input terminal and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. In addition to between the RWM signal input terminal and the terminals, the peripheral terminals of the setting key signal input terminal (other adjacent terminals) and the peripheral terminals of the RWM signal input terminal (adjacent terminals) are connected to the RWM switch 633d by pressing operation. The logic of the RWM signal is HI (logic that conveys a non-pressing state), which indicates that the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the logic of the setting key signal is HI, which indicates that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. It may also be electrically connected to a wiring pattern into which other signals are input or a wiring pattern which outputs other signals so that the logic to transmit the other signals is achieved. This makes it difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

In addition, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern). As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal may be inputted from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern). The input terminal PB7 of the port PB is arranged at the 22nd lead terminal from the left in the figure (11th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminal arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminal arranged in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is inputted to the main control MPU 1310a. Even if a configuration is adopted in which two detection signals are input to the lead terminals of the upper and lower rows by inputting them to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the control MPU 1310a, it contributes to improving the security of setting changes. I can do it.

The logic states of the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in the address space using the memory mapped I/O method. It is now possible to obtain the logic state of each input terminal. Similarly, for the input port PB, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logic state of each input terminal at the same address (different address from the input port PA). The input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are input ports having 8 bits, and each input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA7 and PB0 to PB7 of the input ports PA and PB are the 0th bit to the 7th bit. Each bit is allocated in advance to one of the bits.

[Summary A]
A1. As described above, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. terminals, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal), lead terminals of electronic components (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, transistor MTR10) constituting the main control input circuit 1310b, and lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a (input port PA The wiring patterns for electrically connecting the input terminals PA5) are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which is the surface opposite to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x.

A2. The wiring pattern is set on the main control board 1310 in the signal transmission path between the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) and the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of input port PA). Since it is formed by routing on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, as described above, there is a through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , a through hole for this wiring pattern is not formed in the main control board 1310.

A3. The wiring pattern is set on the main control board 1310 in the signal transmission path between the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) and the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of input port PA). It is difficult to route only the solder side (back side) 1310y, and the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 must also be used. 190 to 193, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and/or the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is formed. Then, the outer periphery and the entire land of the through hole are covered with a green resist which is an insulating film.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in the main control board box 1320, which can be opened and closed by sliding in the longitudinal direction and is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the outer circumferential surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner circumferential surface of the cover body 1301, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 The main control board 1310 is housed in the space that is formed. Thereafter, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed by screwing in a one-way screw or the like of the caulking part 1303, which is a sealing part, and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is rotated by inserting the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. Ru. If the setting key switch 1311a is pressed when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and the main control board 1310 is bent, the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 may be disconnected. There is. Therefore, in order to prevent the main control board 1310 from curving, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is A protrusion 1302p shown in FIG. 185 is formed protrudingly on the base body 1302 in the corresponding region.

Note that when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and is rotated). When the setting key is released (when the setting key is not inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), as described above, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the main A distance dimension d2 (for example, approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the control board 1310, and when the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p is connected to the main control board. The main control board 1310 is brought into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing the main control board 1310 from being bent.

A6. As described above, a distance dimension d2 (for example, approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to set it). When the key press is released (when the setting key is not inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 come into contact with each other. There's nothing left to do. In addition, when assembling the main control board box 1320, when sliding the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, or when taking out the main control board 1310, the sealed state of the main control board box is released and the cover body 1301 is removed. When the base body 1302 is slid, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p is prevented from coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and damaging the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. ing.

The front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact with the solder surface of the main control board 1310 As shown in FIG. 186(b), a copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed in the region of the surface (back surface) 1310y and the region corresponding to its surroundings, and this copper foil portion copper foil layer, The entire area from which the copper plane (copper plane) has been removed is covered with a green resist, which is an insulating film, and when the setting key switch 1311a is pressed repeatedly, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is caused by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p. Even if the green resist that is the insulating film formed on the protrusion 1302p is rubbed and peeled off, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the copper foil section (copper foil layer, copper plane) will not come into contact with each other. This prevents the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from coming into contact with the wiring pattern or the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and prevents the wiring pattern from being damaged or disconnected by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 that can be opened and closed by sliding in the longitudinal direction and is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the outer circumferential surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner circumferential surface of the cover body 1301, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 The main control board 1310 is housed in the space that is formed. When the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also moves in the longitudinal direction. A wiring pattern is formed so as not to be routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which corresponds to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. Although a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the base body 1302 is not connected to the cover body 1301. When the front surface of the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 rubs against the green resist that is the insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board when moving it in the longitudinal direction to a predetermined position. This is because it is necessary to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or disconnected.

In addition to the wiring pattern, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) is provided on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which corresponds to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves. may not be formed. Although a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the base body 1302 is not connected to the cover body 1301. When moving in the longitudinal direction to a predetermined position, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may rub against the green resist, which is an insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so do not use a solid ground. This is because it is necessary to prevent damage to (GND) (substrate ground).

A8. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. In this way, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves can be set as the area in which the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder that is the protrusion 1302p moves. By sliding the portion 1302p parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance dimension in the left and right direction becomes the length of the sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the vertical By setting the distance in the direction to the diameter of the cylinder, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves can be reduced. This can contribute to increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern when the wiring pattern is routed while avoiding the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves.

Further, by sliding the protrusion 1302p parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance dimension in the vertical direction in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves is the diameter of the cylinder and is constant, and when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder of the main control board 1310 It is possible to prevent (suppress) interference with the lead terminals of electronic components (lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)) soldered to the surface (back side) 1310y. .

A9. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape whose constant width is the same dimension as the outer diameter of the protrusion 1302p having a cylindrical shape). may be formed. In this way, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves can be moved in the left-right direction by the protrusion 1302p sliding parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). The distance dimension becomes the sliding length of the protrusion 1302p, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction can be made a constant width of the protrusion 1302p. As a result, when the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near the position corresponding to the area where the protrusion 1302p moves, the wiring pattern is mainly routed along the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p. By routing it to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the control board 1310, the wiring pattern and the shape of the protrusion 1302p in the longitudinal direction can be placed in a parallel positional relationship. It is possible to prevent the wiring pattern from being damaged or disconnected by rubbing the green resist that is the insulating film formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

Further, by sliding the protrusion 1302p parallel to the lower side of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance dimension in the vertical direction in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves is the constant width of the protrusion 1302p, and when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the main control board Prevent (suppress) interference with lead terminals of electronic components (lead terminals of setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)) soldered to solder surface (back surface) 1310y of 1310. be able to.

A10. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is not formed to have a long shape in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. If the protrusion 1302p is formed to have a long shape in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the protrusion The side surface of 1302p will interfere with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the protrusion 1302p is not formed to have a long shape in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. By doing this, when moving the base body 1302 in the longitudinal direction to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 It is possible to prevent (suppress) interference with lead terminals of electronic components (lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) soldered to the electronic component.

A11. As shown in FIG. 184, the setting key switch 1311a is connected to a setting key cylinder 1311ab into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and an outer cylinder 1311aa, and a contact is made by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A base body 1311ac in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped in which a circuit to turn ON or OFF is formed, and a hole passing through the outer cylinder 1311aa is formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and the base body 1311ac is bent to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. The frame plate 1311ad includes a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada that protrude rearward of the base body 1311ac, and a frame plate 1311ad formed on both sides thereof. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from a non-conductive resin, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from a conductive metal. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected and are electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and are connected to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. It protrudes from 1310y and is soldered to it, and is electrically connected to a wiring pattern forming a signal transmission path to main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310 by an internal circuit of setting key switch 1311a. A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada are formed on the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a, and the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada are mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 1310 through the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and are soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby electrically connecting to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other.

Note that the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and are inserted into the solder surface ( Although it is soldered protruding from the back side) 1310y, it is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame board 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically floating. It may be.

A13. A locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is made of conductive metal. Unlike the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is grounded to the island equipment of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown).

A14. The operator who operates the setting key switch 1311a must first open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, so insert a key into the keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131 in the locking unit 650 , which is a conductive metal key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "metal key"), must be inserted and rotated. Even if the worker is charged with a potential, if the worker inserts a metal key into the keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 in the locking unit 650, the charged potential will be transferred from the worker to the locking unit. 650, and can be grounded to the island equipment of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown) and released, so that the electric potential charged on the worker can be removed.

Even if the operator inserts the setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the electric potential charged on the operator has already been applied to the island equipment of the game hall. Since the setting key switch 1311a is grounded and removed, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from being damaged by electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the electric potential charged on the operator. Even if the setting key switch 1311a is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the frame plate 1311ad are electrically insulated as described above, so that the electric potential charged on the operator is not affected. There is no intrusion into the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab, thereby preventing damage to the main control board 1310. be able to. (Naturally, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) which are lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Furthermore, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a remains in a charged state. It will never become.

Note that if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is connected to the main control board together with the frame board 1311ad. This means that it is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of 1310. Even if the operator inserts a charged setting key into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a will not connect to the frame plate 1311ad or the main control board 1310. Since it is not electrically connected (insulated) to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), the potential charged on the operator is transferred to the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. There is no intrusion into the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground), and damage to the main control board 1310 can be prevented. However, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, if the setting key switch 1311a is charged, it will not be able to discharge.

Long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' to which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. It is in an electrically floating state. The through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, the through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted are wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2. The through hole SLTH1 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern SPTN3, and the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted is connected to the solid ground (GND) of the main control board 1310. electrically connected to ground).

In this way, since the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 exist around the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2', there is a gap between the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3. A solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed, and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. ), if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a is charged, the discharge will not occur. In order to avoid this effect even if it becomes impossible, the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are arranged adjacent to each other without intervening solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. It is necessary to make sure that there is no such thing. Further, it is necessary to prevent the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 from being adjacent to each other without intervening solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.

[Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), and transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. The RWM signal wiring pattern is connected to the input terminal PA5 ( This is another lead terminal different from the setting key signal input terminal) and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

Note that the logical state of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a is memory mapped I/O. It is handled as memory information in the address space according to the system, and the main control MPU 1310a can acquire it at the same address at the same time. In other words, the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a have 8 bits, as described above. Each of bits from the 0th bit to the 7th bit is allocated in advance to a predetermined port.

As mentioned above, the IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag)
The main control MPU 1310a has lead terminals vertically protruding from the bottom surface of the main body that are bent alternately and arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not formed adjacent to one of the two columns.

For example, when arranging input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA in one of the two columns, In order to prevent input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA from being placed next to each other, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA should be Another lead terminal is arranged to be interposed between input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), and transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. The RWM signal wiring pattern is connected to the input terminal PA5 ( By being electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is different from the setting key signal input terminal), the input port PA is placed in one of the two columns. input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA were arranged, but the setting key mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 A setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the switch 1311a and an RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 are arranged in two rows. They may be electrically connected so that they are arranged in separate columns.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. ), and transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. The RWM signal wiring pattern is connected to the input terminal PA5 ( The other lead terminal, which is different from the setting key signal input terminal) and was electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, is connected to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A setting key signal input terminal to which a setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the mounted setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected, and an RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. The logic state of the RWM signal input terminal to which the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM signal wiring pattern is electrically connected may be acquired at different addresses. That is, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be allocated in advance so that they can be obtained separately from different input ports. If the input terminals (lead terminals) are arranged together for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by having different addresses. .

B4. The setting key signal is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and is transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is divided into a logic (HI) that conveys a setting-disabled state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a settable state. The logic (HI) that conveys the setting disabled state is created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, where the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is set. On the other hand, the logic (LOW) that conveys the setting enabled state is pulled up to the +5V power supply line side, whereas the logic (LOW) that conveys the setting enabled state is the logic that is pulled up to the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, +5V generation circuit 1310g includes input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other input terminals adjacent to it (or other input terminals around input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) on main control board 1310. The circuit is configured to be electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created in . As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made that shorts input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and another input terminal adjacent to it, it will be electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). The voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern is pulled up to the +5V power supply line side created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. As a result, the logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern connected to the setting key switch 1311a becomes a logic (HI) that conveys a setting disabled state, and the setting cannot be changed. It can be eliminated.

RWM switch mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from 633d, includes a logic (HI) that conveys a non-press operation state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a press operation state. The logic (HI) that conveys the press non-operation state is that the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. On the other hand, the logic (LOW) that conveys the press operation state is mainly caused by the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). It is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the control board 1310.

Therefore, regarding input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), similarly to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals (or input terminal PA0 ( The circuit is configured such that other input terminals (in the vicinity of the RWM signal input terminal) are electrically connected to a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made that shorts input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and another input terminal adjacent to it, it will be electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). Since the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern is pulled up to the +5V power supply line side created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, it is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). The logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern, becomes a logic (HI) that conveys the pressed non-operation state, making it impossible to change settings. .

Note that the settings of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the key signal input terminal and various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633. In addition to between the RWM signal input terminal and the terminals, the peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal, and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal are connected to the RWM switch 633d by pressing operation. The logic of the RWM signal is HI (logic that conveys a non-pressing state), which indicates that the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the logic of the setting key signal is HI, which indicates that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It may also be electrically connected to a wiring pattern into which other signals are input or a wiring pattern which outputs other signals so that the logic that the signal is transmitted is transmitted. This makes it difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

B5. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (the logic that conveys the setting enabled state), and the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Therefore, the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the surroundings of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) The ground (GND) ( (substrate ground) is not formed and becomes a foil-cut area. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is located around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). A ground (GND) (substrate ground) in which the logic of the setting key signal that causes the ON-operated state is LOW (logic that conveys a settable state) is not formed (arranged). This can prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being illegally lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. .

Further, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the press operation state), and the input port of the main control MPU 1310a Since the signal is input to the PA input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the area around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). In order to prevent the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly shorted to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, a ground ( GND) (substrate ground) is not formed and becomes a foil-cut area. In other words, the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d is located around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). A ground (GND) (substrate ground) where the logic of the RWM signal indicating the operated state is LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state) is not formed (arranged). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the voltage applied to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being illegally lowered to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310.

B6. The setting key signal is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and is transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is a logic (HI) that indicates a setting not possible state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a settable state. This is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, which is transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of The logic states of the operation signals are a logic (HI) that conveys a push-button non-operation state and a logic (LOW) that tells a push-no-operation state, a logic (HI) that tells a setting-disabled state, and a logic (HI) that tells a push-no-operation state. HI) had the same logic (HI), and the logic (LOW) that conveyed the settable state and the logic (LOW) that conveyed the press operation state were the same logic (LOW). Instead, the logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the push operation state are the same logic (HI or LOW), and the logic that tells the settable state and the logic that tells the push operation non-operation state. It is also possible to have the same logic (LOW or HI) as the logic state. Compared to the same logic that conveys the settable state and the logic that conveys the press operation state, it is better to use the same logic to convey the settable state and the logic that conveys the press non-operation state. Anyone who intends to tamper with terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), setting key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), or RWM signal wiring pattern should not do so until they understand the logic of this combination. This takes time, and as a result, one end is short-circuited to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) and the other end is short-circuited to the power supply, which contributes to time-consuming and troublesome operation. , the setting key signal wiring pattern, the setting key signal input terminal, and the RWM signal wiring pattern can be made difficult to tamper with, thereby contributing to improved security.

In addition, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, a plurality of main control boards 1310 are formed in the cover body side rib portions 1301rb formed in the cover body 1301 and in the base body 1302. The base body side rib portion 1302rb is disposed (held) in a gap (space) formed by the base body side rib portion 1302rb. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 has a protrusion that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. A portion 1302p is formed. When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the main control board 1310 bends and bends due to the force of the insertion. By coming into contact with the solder side (back side) of the board 1310, the main control board 1310 is prevented from curving and bending any further, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder. It is something that can be prevented. As shown in FIG. 186(b), copper foil is removed from the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which is in contact with the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302, and its surroundings. A foil removal area SINSy having a circular shape is formed. As a result, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the protrusion 1302p, damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 due to the protrusion 1302p can be prevented. . The foil removal area SINSy, which has a circular shape from which the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

B7. The setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633, so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are mounted on separate control boards. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5, and the RWM switch is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4. 633d are placed apart from each other, and even if an attempt is made to tamper with the setting key switch 1311a, it is necessary to tamper with both the setting key switch 1311a side and the RWM switch 633d side, which takes an extremely long time. When a fraudster sees the arrangement of the RWM switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d, he or she loses the motivation to make unauthorized changes, making it difficult to commit fraud.

Note that when actually changing the settings, it is necessary to operate the power switch 630a for powering on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RWM switch 633d after operating the setting key switch 1311a. Since the power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, the setting key switch 1311a, RWM switch 633d, and power switch 630a required for changing settings are Each is mounted on a separate board.

B8. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, a main control input circuit 1310b (mainly an input circuit composed of resistors and transistors) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a common circuit configuration. The inputs were inputted to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a through a circuit (in other words, input from the setting key switch 1311a) through dedicated ICs each having an input circuit. Even if the detection signal is inputted to the predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a (via the IC dedicated to setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is inputted via the IC dedicated to RWM input). good. This makes it difficult to tamper with the logic states of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which can contribute to improving countermeasures against fraud.

Furthermore, the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, which is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, is an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and is a circuit with a common circuit configuration. Therefore, it may be configured as a DIP type transistor array in which the transistors of the plurality of main control input circuits 1310b are combined into one IC.

B9. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, a main control input circuit 1310b (mainly an input circuit composed of resistors and transistors) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a common circuit configuration. The inputs were input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a through the circuits (in other words, the inputs from the setting key switch 1311a) through dedicated ICs each having an input circuit. Even if the detection signal is inputted to the predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a (via the IC dedicated to setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is inputted via the IC dedicated to RWM input). good. In this case, a resistor and a transistor constituting a main control input circuit 1310b without any other error detection function are interposed between the separate dedicated ICs. This makes it difficult to determine which circuit is responsible for the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which can contribute to improving countermeasures against fraud.

B10. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, the signal is input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function. When using a DIP type transistor array in which the transistors of the plurality of main control input circuits 1310b are combined into one IC, an input terminal of the DIP type transistor array to which a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input; The input terminals of the DIP type transistor array to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other, or among the plurality of input terminals protruding from one side of the DIP type transistor array. The wiring pattern is arranged so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the input terminals, and the RWM is connected to one of the plurality of input terminals protruding from the other side. A wiring pattern is arranged so that the detection signal from the switch 633d is input. In this way, it is possible to contribute to improving countermeasures against fraud.

B11. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 are shown in FIG. As shown, the respective voltages are pulled up to the power supply line side by resistors MR16 and MR5, respectively. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors MR16 and MR5, and are placed apart from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, one end of the resistor MR16 constituting the logic inversion circuit 1310iv is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the other end is connected to the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a, and is arranged to the right of the connector MCN8 which is arranged to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. The resistor MR2 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function has one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the other end It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead type collective resistor arranged above the setting key switch 1311a. There is. Since the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged apart from the RWM switch 633d. If the resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, there is a risk that the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, may be tampered with. Therefore, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), the resistors MR16 and MR5 can be mixed with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The existence of important resistors MR16 and MR5 can be hidden.

Furthermore, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), it is possible to prevent a long and thin unauthorized tool such as a wire from entering the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Even if unauthorized access is made to insert the resistors MR16 and MR5, unauthorized modification to the resistors MR16 and MR5 can be made difficult, contributing to improved security.

B12. The resistor MR16 constituting the logic inversion circuit 1310iv has one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the other end connected to the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of , and is arranged to the right of connector MCN8 which is arranged to the right of setting key switch 1311a. The resistor MR2 constituting the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function has one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310, and the other end It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is arranged above the lead type collective resistor arranged above the setting key switch 1311a. There is. In this way, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are arranged apart from each other. As a result, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are mixed with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the RWM It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the switch 633d is an important electronic component related to the logic state of the operation signal that is the detection signal.

Further, by separating the resistors MR16 and MR5 from each other, it is possible to make it difficult to simultaneously tamper with the resistors MR16 and MR5, contributing to improved security.

B13. An error in which a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 are input. As shown in FIG. 187, various DIP type ICs, lead type resistors, lead type diodes, and lead type are connected between the main control input circuit 1310b without a detection function and the main control MPU 1310a. capacitor, a lead type electrolytic capacitor, and a DIP type crystal oscillator. In this way, even if a slender unauthorized tool such as a wire intrudes into the main control board box 1320 and attempts to short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, other circuits can prevent the unauthorized tool from entering. By inducing a short circuit to other circuits, the operation of the main control board 1310 can be blocked, making it impossible to play games. Note that a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 are input. Even when the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function is replaced with a dedicated IC having an input circuit, another circuit is placed between the main control input circuit 1310b and the dedicated IC. Even with this configuration, even if a slender unauthorized tool such as a wire enters the main control board box 1320 and short-circuits the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, other circuits can prevent the unauthorized tool from entering. In addition, it is possible to induce a short circuit to other circuits and prevent the operation of the main control board 1310, making it impossible to play games.

B14. The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 may be configured to be transmitted by coupling the game board side drawer connector and the main body frame side drawer connector. In this case, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board drawer connector is mounted is formed on the opposite surface on which the game board drawer connector is mounted (or Even if it is formed on the mounting surface where the drawer connector is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector, making it difficult to see, and the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the drawer connector on the main body frame side is mounted. Since the pattern is formed on the surface opposite to where the main body frame side drawer connector is mounted (or even if it is formed on the mounting surface where the main body frame side drawer connector is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector), making it difficult to see. There is.

Here, the drawer connector will be explained. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically establish an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is placed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board to be installed, and a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer of the game board 5 is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4. Each terminal of the connector (convex type) and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

For example, to explain the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is formed of a non-conductive resin, has a rectangular opening on the front side, and has a rectangular opening on the left and right sides. It has a box-like main body that is long in the direction, and a plate-like base body that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-like main body, so that the overall shape is T-shaped.

The game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is connected around the opening of the box-like main body for a predetermined distance from the front of the opening toward the bottom of the box-like main body. A sloped portion for guiding toward the bottom surface is formed in each case. The game board side drawer connector (convex This prevents the drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame side from being inserted into the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side upside down in a different direction from the normal orientation, and also prevents the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 from being inserted in the normal orientation. When inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), the game board 5's game board side drawer connector (convex type) and main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) are prevented from shifting in the left and right direction. Grooves that enhance the engagement between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 are formed from near the front of the opening of the box-like main body toward the bottom surface of the box-like main body. It is formed.

On the bottom of the box-like body, there are pin-type terminals (six pin-type terminals are lined up in one row in the left-right direction) arranged in two rows in the left-right direction and perpendicular to the bottom. It passes through the box-like body and the base body.

Attachment through holes are formed on the left and right sides of the base body, respectively. When mounting the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side relay board, rivets are first inserted into the mounting through holes from the front of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). The end portion of the substrate is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface). Thereby, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is fixed to the main body frame side relay board.

In addition, on the back side of the base body, when mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side relay board, there is a A cylindrical protrusion is formed to be mounted.

In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), the main body frame side relay board is equipped with a DIP (Dual Inline Package) type small connector that is electrically connected to this main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). , is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) ) and the terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side are electrically connected, and the main control provided for the game board 5 is connected via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness). A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals by the board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4.

The drawer connector on the main body frame side (concave type) electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and also connects various power sources from the power supply board 630 to the game machine. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that are supplied to various boards provided in the panel 5, and is connected to another main unit in addition to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. A frame-side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on a main body frame-side relay board different from the main body frame-side relay board. This other body frame side relay board is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) that is electrically connected to another body frame side drawer connector (concave type) in addition to another body frame side drawer connector (concave type). A type of small connector is mounted and electrically connected to each decorative board and various sensors provided in the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 that is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is connected to another game board side drawer. The connector (convex type) is guided to the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4, and the terminals of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the other main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) are guided. ) are electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness). Control signal lines are formed to transmit various control signals and detection signals from various sensors, speakers, and the like. The structure of other main body frame side drawer connectors (concave type) is the same as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the structure of other main body frame side drawer connectors (concave type) is the same as that of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). The method of fixing to the side relay board' is the same as the method of fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

Also, how to fix the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board, and the other main bodies of the main body frame 4. Another game board side relay board of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the frame side drawer connector (concave type) (this other game board side relay board is connected to the main body frame 4 The method of fixing the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the game board side relay board on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is mounted is different from that of the game board side drawer connector (convex type)). This is the same method of fixing the side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

Rivets are used to fix the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side to the relay board on the main body frame side.By using the drawer connector, the game board 5 can be installed automatically by simply attaching it to the main body frame 4. Although electrical connection can be made between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, when installing the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, it is necessary to connect the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the main body frame side. A large force may be applied to the box-shaped body of the drawer connector (concave type), and this large force causes each pin type terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side to touch the back side of the main body frame side relay board ( This is to prevent the soldered surface from peeling off. In addition, when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main body frame side relay board or when fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) to the game board side relay board using bolts and nuts. However, there is a drawback that the nut may loosen when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, pin type terminals are used as each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), but if a bellows type terminal using terminals and contacts is used, the following problems arise. For example, in the case where each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal, and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1. If the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the power supply turned on, the contacts between the terminal and the contacts (specifically, large currents (rush currents) flow through contacts for various power supply lines) may weld together. Become. If you try to forcefully push the game board 5 into the main body frame 4 while it is in this welded state, the contacts of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side may bend and break, or the game board 5 may be removed from the main body frame 4. When removed, the contacts may peel off from the drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame side and be damaged, making the drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame side unusable.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts weld, there is a risk that various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on various control boards may be damaged due to damage to the connector, so special circuits are required to prevent welding. The problem is that it needs to be established.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned problem does not occur at all by using pin type terminals as each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). In other words, even if an operator accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 with the power turned on to the pachinko machine 1, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame side of the frame 4 are not welded together, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

B15. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may be a pulse signal or a serial signal (command transmission) instead of an ON signal or an OFF signal.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 shown in FIG. The main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 188 has a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x on which the electronic component is mounted, and a soldering surface (back surface) 1310y on which the lead terminal of the electronic component through which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted is soldered. ing.

On the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a ZIP type main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 188 is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and is electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a. A setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 188 is implemented as an operating unit, which is an electronic component that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to a player.

A lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and a lead terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is also soldered. A wiring pattern for electrically connecting the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, a wiring pattern is formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to transmit a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operation unit that can change the setting of the probability of giving a profit to the player. This makes it difficult to see how the wiring pattern is routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it difficult to tamper with the wiring pattern. can. Therefore, it can contribute to improving security.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 shown in FIG. A setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 188 as a first operation unit that can be set in a state where settings can be changed, and a ZIP type main control shown in FIG. 188 as a storage unit that can store and hold game information. A main control built-in RAM of the MPU 1310a is provided, and a main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 188 as a control board on which a ZIP type main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. An RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board in FIG. 182 is provided as a second operation unit that can clear (erase) the gaming information stored (held) in the RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to a player based on an operation signal that is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and an operation signal that is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. be.

The setting key signal wiring pattern is used as a first transmission path through which an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. The RWM signal wiring pattern is formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to run in parallel with the RWM signal wiring pattern as a second transmission path.

In this way, the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is the first operation unit that can change the setting of the probability of giving a profit to the player, is input to the main control MPU 1310a through the first transmission path. A certain setting key signal wiring pattern and an operation signal that is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which is a second operation unit that can clear (erase) game information held in the main control built-in RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a. is formed on the main control board 1310 so that the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is a second transmission path input to the main control MPU 1310a, does not run parallel to the RWM signal wiring pattern. As a result, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path, are input to the main control MPU 1310a while being separated from each other. It is possible to simultaneously make it difficult to tamper with the signal wiring pattern and the RWM signal wiring pattern which is the second transmission path. Therefore, it can contribute to improving security.

[13. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more clockwise the handle 195 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The downward speed of the ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "accessory win", "probability change (probability change) win"), A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "time reduction (time saving) win" is held.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 A plurality of obstacle nails are discharged above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003. After coming into contact with N, the object passes through gate 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. A second guide passage 2522 is provided. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first guide path 2521 and hits the ball B with such force that it does not hit the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the ball B, it will enter the second guide path 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide path 2522 than through the first guide path 2521. Furthermore, the configuration is such that when flowing through the second guide path 2522 rather than through the first guide path 2521, the flow passes through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 with a higher probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit 2400 The second starting port 2004, which has been closed, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Note that if game ball B passes through gate 2003 after passing gate 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested, so the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at four, and for more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, it is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 has a high probability of passing the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2022. When the game balls B are accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022, there is no opportunity for it to be received in the accessory winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the big winning port 2005, and it is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700, and is received by the general winning port 2001, the accessory winning port 2006, and the second starting port of the side right middle unit 2700. 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, and is discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received at the second sub-out port 2022 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the gaming area 5a. It is possible to encourage a driving operation in which the game ball B cannot be received by the opening 2022. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide passage 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, rather than "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the stop portion 1006, it is possible to encourage a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment of the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which is mainly based on.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left, it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "yakuza hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, if the game ball B is received as a "yakuza" prize. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is accepted into the game ball B when the game ball B is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 release a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. ) game balls B are put out onto the upper tray 201.

The game ball B received by the prize winning hole 2006 and detected by the prize winning hole sensor 2601 flows through the distribution passage 3158, and is transferred to the V winning hole 2007 or the losing hole 2008 by the V winning hole door 3006 which advances and retreats back and forth. It can be divided into either. When the game balls B are distributed to the V winning hole 2007, the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game balls B are distributed to the losing slot 2008, no advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player occurs.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first shelf section 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf section 2422, with the upper part to the left. After rolling, it is released to the left, and further rolled to the left on the third shelf 2423, the big prize door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424, and is released into the gaming area 5a. .

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2411, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003 is a "normal win", and the second starting port door 2411 When the game ball B is retreating, the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "accessory win", "probability change (probability change) win"), A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "time reduction (time saving) win" is held.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the big prize opening door 2413, the special lottery result (first special If the lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (e.g., "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the big prize opening 2005 opens and closes the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The state is now ready for acceptance. When the game ball B is received in the big prize hole 2005 while the big prize hole 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the grand prize opening 2005 to accept the gaming balls B when the grand prize opening 2005 is enabled to accept the gaming balls B, it is possible to pay out many gaming balls B and entertain the players. can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result will be drawn that will generate a "medium win," "small win," "yakuza win," "probability fluctuation (probability change) win," and "time reduction (time saving) win." The special lottery result will be shown to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). The special lottery results that will be drawn upon acceptance include "Loss", "Small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "Probability change (probability change) win", "Time saving (time saving)". There are "shortened) hits", "probable variable time saving wins", "probable variable time saving wins", "second jackpot", etc.

If the special lottery result is a "winning prize", the prize winning hole 2006 is kept open to accept the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern of closing after the opening is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", after the grand prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the grand prize opening 2005 is closed. Acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B. An opening/closing pattern that brings the game balls B into a closed state where they cannot be accepted when any of the following conditions is satisfied (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot", after the big prize opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is set as an advantageous gaming state. ) occurs. This ST is to maintain a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a performance operation on the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the upper rear effect unit 3200, the lower rear effect unit 3300, etc., and it is possible to entertain players with various effects, and to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

[14. Second embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196 and the like. FIG. 194(a) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 194(b) is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board of the second embodiment, showing the same part as (a). FIG. FIG. 195(a) is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 195(b) is a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front presentation unit in FIG. 195(a) is decorated with light emission. FIG. FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in FIG. 195(a) in a state where it is decorated with light.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is the game board 5 of the first embodiment except that the front component 1000A and the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 are made of a translucent milky white synthetic resin. It has the same configuration as , and a detailed explanation of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110 and panel holder 1120) are made of transparent synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. 194(a), , the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front (player side).

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, the front component 1000A and the panel board 1110A are made of milky white synthetic resin, so as shown in FIG. The parts of the back unit 3000 etc. provided at the rear of the game panel 1100, except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, cannot be seen from the front (player side).

The front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are made of a translucent milky white opaque synthetic resin. The panel board 1110A may be formed by cutting a milky-white synthetic resin plate, or may be formed by injection molding using a milky-white synthetic resin.

Since the game board 5A of this embodiment has a milky white panel board 1110A etc. of the game panel 1100, a part of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear through the panel board 1110A etc. (in front view, from the opening 1112) It is also possible to make the outside parts of the body invisible. This panel board 1110A etc. has a translucent property, so when the decoration body etc. provided at the rear is decorated with light, the light from the rear decoration body passes through the panel plate 1110A, and the decoration body is illuminated. The light-emitting decoration can be visually recognized by the player.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 195(a), in the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel board 1110A, etc., in front view, the panel board 1110A etc. The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. located outside the opening 1112 are not visible from the front. When the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. are decorated with light, they have translucency as shown in FIG. 195(b). Light passes through the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 provided at the rear through the panel board 1110A, and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration are illuminated. The portion 3123 and the like become visible.

Since this panel board 1110A etc. is milky white, the luminous color of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 etc. that are luminescently decorated can be transmitted in their original color, and the color can be changed. It is possible to show players a rich light-emitting effect.

Note that it is desirable that the opaque material having light transmission properties in the panel board 1110A has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to provide luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. In addition, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the members provided at the rear will be easier to recognize, and there is a risk that the effect of concealment will not be sufficiently obtained.

In addition, the panel board 1110A etc. is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but "white Munsell value (N 9.5)", "white Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2)" /0.5)", "Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Ecru color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Grey-white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "Indigo white Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "Secret color Munsell Value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory Munsell Value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream Yellow Munsell Value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", "Cherry Blossom Munsell Value It is also possible to use a white color such as "value (10RP 9/2.5)".

By the way, since the panel board 1110A and the like are translucent and milky white, if a colored decoration such as black, red, or blue is provided behind the panel board 1110A, the decoration will emit light. Even if it is not decorated, depending on the color of the decoration, it may be visible through the panel board 1110A. Since the decoration can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the player becomes aware of the existence of the decoration behind the panel board 1110A, and the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decoration is decorated with light is reduced. There is a possibility that the performance decreases and it becomes impossible to obtain the desired performance effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. The first left decorative body 3124, the second front left decorative body 3125, the third front left decorative body 3126, and the front left decorative body base 3127 are made of colorless and transparent members, so that they are transparent. The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. cannot be seen through the milky white panel board 1110A. Therefore, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. are not decorated with light, they are not visible to the player, making it difficult for the player to notice their existence. . When the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, etc. are decorated with light, they become visible through the translucent milky white panel board 1110A, which surprises the player. This makes it possible to enjoy the light-emitting effect, and since the light of the light-emitting decoration can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to look bright and beautiful, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. .

In addition, the game board 5A of this embodiment is provided with a panel decoration board 1130 on the outside of the translucent milky white panel board 1110A, on which a plurality of LEDs 1130a are mounted to irradiate light onto the outer peripheral surface of the panel board 1110A. It is being The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 are made to emit light, the panel board 1110A can be decorated with light emission, as shown by hatching in FIG. 196. As a result, the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) through which the game balls B circulate in front becomes self-illuminating, so the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, and the game balls B circulate within the game area 5a. The game ball B can be made more visible, and the appearance within the game area 5a can be improved, which can strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 emits light, the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen in silhouette, making it easier to visually recognize the game balls B, and making subtle adjustments to the firing intensity. It can be made easier. Furthermore, by providing the panel decorative board 1130 on both the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, it is possible to intuitively understand when giving advice to players about "hitting with the right" or "hitting with the left." become. In detail, depending on the game situation, the LED 1130a of either the left or right panel decoration board 1130 is made to emit light, and the left or right part of the panel board 1110A is decorated with light, thereby providing information to the player. It is possible to intuitively understand that the advice is to "hit left-handed" or "hit right-handed," and it allows players to enjoy the operation of hitting game ball B. Players can be entertained by a new sensation of light-emitting effects.

To be more specific, in conventional pachinko machines, the game board uses opaque plywood as a game panel, and by pasting a decorative film with a predetermined pattern printed on the front of the plywood, the inside of the game area can be covered. I try to decorate it. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the decorative film decoration does not make it stand out from other game machines, making it difficult to increase its appeal to players. On the other hand, when the panel board 1110 through which the game balls B circulate in the front is made transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 On the other hand, the game balls B circulating in front of the transparent panel board 1110 appear to be floating in the air, and some players may There is a possibility that it will be difficult to understand the movement of B.

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, the light-transmitting panel board 1110A can be decorated with light by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, so the color of the light emitted by the LEDs 1130a, the light emission pattern, etc. By appropriately combining these, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be varied in a variety of ways, allowing players to see the self-luminous game board 5A that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, and also attracting players' attention. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players and has high appeal to players. Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is illuminated by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative board 1130, the game balls B flowing in front of the panel board 1110A can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls B. This can prevent a decline in interest.

According to the game board 5A of this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned effects, the panel board 1110A etc. are made of milky white synthetic resin, and it is sufficient to use resin of a lower grade than transparent resin. Compared to the case where resin is used, the cost of the panel board 1110A can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided outside the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can also do it. Thereby, the same effects as described above can be achieved. Moreover, compared to the case where the panel board is transparent, the point-like light from the LED 1130a etc. provided at the rear can be diffused by the milky white panel board 1110A having optical properties. The game board 5A can be decorated with soft luminescence, suppress glare, and be easy on the eyes.

Further, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also referred to as a cell) with a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. As a result, wear of the panel board 1110A due to the circulation of game balls B can be suppressed, and the appearance of the game area 5a is suppressed from deteriorating when the rear decorative body is not decorated with light emitting light due to the pattern of the cells. can be improved. In addition, the light from the LED provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A allows the cell pattern to be illuminated together with the panel board 1110A, making the decoration of the panel board 1110A look more beautiful.

In addition, when cells are provided on the front side of the panel board 1110A as described above, by making the pattern applied to the cells an outline, the light emitting decoration by the LEDs provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A ( It is possible to make the illuminations clearer and to further enhance the decorative effect of the luminescent decorations.

Furthermore, cells may be provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A. As a result, the shadow of the cell (or the pattern applied to the cell) will be reflected on the panel board 1110A due to the light from the LED etc. provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A (cell), so the light emitted from the LED This allows the decoration of the panel board 1110A to be changed, thereby making it possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest. The shadow reflected on this panel board 1110A may be, for example, characters such as "Right-handed hitter", "Left-handed hitter", "Chance", etc., to entertain the players by suggesting a change in the game situation. I can do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (back front left decorative unit 3120) whose position is fixed is provided at the rear of the milky white panel board 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A, which is movable between a retracted position behind the panel plate 1110A and an appearance position inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the entire panel board 1110A, etc., including the inside, is milky white; however, the present invention is not limited to this. may be milky white. Specifically, for example, a panel board formed by two-color molding of a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel board made by laminating a transparent resin board and a milky white resin board, and at least one side of a transparent resin board. Examples include panel boards with a milky white film (cell) pasted on them, panel boards with a stiffening process applied to the back of a transparent resin board using ultraviolet curing ink, and panel boards with sandblasting applied to the back of a transparent resin board. It will be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110A and the like are shown as milky white, but the panel board is not limited to this, and may be of an appropriate color such as red, blue, yellow, etc. good.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown as having a translucent milky white color, but the front component is not limited to this. It may be used as the component 1000, or it may be a front component with a color different from that of the panel board 1110A.

[15. Third embodiment of game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and cells of the game board of the third embodiment as seen from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment except that a cell 1140 is provided at the rear of the panel board 1110, and the same configuration parts will be described in detail. is omitted.

In the game board 5B of the second embodiment, a film-like cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is removably provided on the back side of the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100. . The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and a predetermined pattern is printed on it. The materials of the cell 1140 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin," "polycarbonate resin," "ABS resin," "AES resin," "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin," "polypropylene resin," and "polyethylene resin." , "polystyrene resin," "impact-resistant polystyrene resin," "polyvinyl chloride," and the like.

This cell 1140 is formed in a size that covers only a portion (here, the portion from the left side to the bottom of the center accessory 2500) of the entire surface of the panel board 1110. Although not shown, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel board 1110 using screws with a predetermined amount of wobble. As a result, compared to the case where the cells 1140 are attached to the entire surface of the panel board 1110, the labor required for attaching the cells 1140 can be made easier, and the amount of cells 1140 used can be reduced. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cells 1140 are provided in a part of the panel board 1110, the number of cells 1140 that can be removed from the resin sheet can be increased compared to conventional cells that are pasted on the panel board, and the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel board 1110 with some wobbling, even if the cell 1140 expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel board 1110 can be absorbed by the wobbling. can. As a result, even if the cells 1140 shrink relative to the panel board 1110, the cells 1140 can be prevented from being wrinkled or cracked, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the cells 1140 can be maintained. .

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel board 1110 with screws, the cell 1140 can be easily attached and detached from the panel board 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cell 1140 with a different pattern cell, it is possible to change the specs of the pachinko machine 1 or change the model. Changes, design changes, etc. can be easily accommodated, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.In addition, by replacing the cell 1140 with a pattern cell 1140 that has a higher decorative effect, the game can be improved. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the cell 1140 is provided on the back side of the transparent panel board 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is longer than when the cell 1140 is provided in the front of the panel board 1110. It is possible to reduce the feeling of pressure on the person.

In addition, it is desirable that the cell 1140 has translucency, and the pattern of the cell 1140 can be decorated with light emitting light from the LED provided at the rear of the panel board 1110 (cell 1140). Not only can the appearance of the area 5a be improved, but also the light-emitting decoration of the cells 1140 can strongly attract players' attention, and the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the cell 1140 can be attached to the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120. It may be installed by sandwiching it in between.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in which the center accessory 2500 is provided is provided at a position that is offset toward the upper right direction (eccentrically toward the upper right) with respect to the panel board 1110. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be biased upward (eccentrically upward) or horizontally (eccentrically horizontally). The same effect as described above can be obtained by providing the cell 1140 at the rear of the area where the opening 1112 becomes wider due to its deviation (eccentricity).

Further, the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 is provided may be offset with respect to the center or outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or may be offset with respect to the center or outer edge of the game area 5a. good. Therefore, for example, if the centers of the panel board 1110 and the gaming area 5a do not match each other, even if the center of the opening 1112 that is offset with respect to the center of the panel board 1110 matches the center of the gaming area 5a. Alternatively, the center of the opening 1112, which is offset with respect to the center of the gaming area 5a, may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

[16. Another embodiment of function display unit]
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided in the game board 5 and the like will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 198 to 203 and the like. FIG. 198(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, FIG. 198(b) is a sectional view taken along the Soso line in FIG. 198(c), and FIG. (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind; FIG. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198 as seen from the front, and FIG. 200 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198 as seen from the rear. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 198 and the player. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player according to the third embodiment. FIG. 203 is a sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

Similar to the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment displays a variable display by blinking a plurality of LEDs 1401 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Later, by lighting or extinguishing each light in a predetermined combination, you can check the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), and regular lottery results. It displays the number of pending results, the number of special lottery results, the number of rounds in the event of a "jackpot", etc.

To be more specific, in the game board 5 etc. of the first embodiment, for example, when a game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays a special lottery result as an internal process. will be selected by lottery. Then, the main control board 1310 transmits a control signal for displaying the special lottery result to the function display unit 1400, and displays the special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401 in the function display unit 1400. That's what I do.

Further, the control signal of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 as a performance suggesting the special lottery result. Is displayed. Since the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 are focused on entertaining the players, the special lottery results drawn on the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, but the details are difficult to understand. It has become. On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the special lottery results, but because the display is performed by emitting light from a plurality of small LEDs 1401, it is difficult to understand the displayed contents at a quick glance. It has become difficult.

Therefore, by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera, a camera attached to a mobile phone, etc., the light emitting state of the LED in the function display unit 1400 is analyzed, and the content displayed on the function display unit 1400 is analyzed. It is possible to try to find out as soon as possible.

However, if the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is a "lose", if the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is a "lose", an effect display will be displayed. Even if the device 1600 displays an effect image to suggest the result of the special lottery, knowing the result makes it difficult to enjoy the effect using the effect image and makes the user want the effect image to end quickly. , some players may feel irritated and lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, although the player's eyes can clearly see the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401 are This makes it unclear, making it difficult to discern what is being displayed.

Specifically, the function display unit 1400A includes a function display board 1402 on which a plurality of LEDs 1401 are mounted on the front surface, and a function display board 1402 provided on the front side of the function display board 1402 to independently transmit light from the LEDs 1401 forward. A rear reflector 1403 that allows the light from the LED 1401 that is provided on the front side of the transparent sheet 1404 and that has passed through the rear reflector 1403 to be and a reflector front 1405 for emitting radiation in different directions.

As shown in FIG. 199, the function display board 1402 has a plurality of LEDs 1401 mounted at random. A plurality of through holes 1403a are provided in the rear reflector 1403 so as to correspond to each LED 1401 of the function display board 1402. The plurality of through holes 1403a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the function display board 1402 (see FIG. 198(b), etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has a plurality of display holes 1405a that correspond to the through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plurality of display holes 1405a are located just in front of the through-holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403 to which the rear end side corresponds, and the front end side thereof is located from the front vertical line of the function display board 1402 passing through the center of the rear end side. They are located far apart. In other words, the axial directions of the plurality of display holes 1405a are directed in different directions with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the function display board 1402.

Further, the front reflector 1405 has a distinguishing recess 1405b that is recessed from the front to the rear so as to connect the plurality of display holes 1405a. The plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into two display holes 1405a (LED 1401) related to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) related to the second special lottery result by the differentiation recess 1405b.

As shown in FIG. 201, the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 are equipped with LEDs 1401 when viewed from a player seated at a distance of 50 cm to 70 cm from the function display unit 1400A at the front of the pachinko machine 1. Light is directed in three directions: one that can be seen only with the left eye, one that can only be seen with the right eye, and one that can be seen with both the left and right eyes. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into three types: one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

According to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the player can see the light from all the LEDs 1401 by looking with both eyes, so when displaying special lottery results, etc., the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen. It can be visually recognized, and the same functions as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited without inferiority.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, when a digital camera or the like is used to take a picture, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, the picture is taken for either the left eye or both eyes, or the right eye or both eyes. Therefore, it is difficult to photograph the light emitting conditions (light emitting states) of all the LEDs 1401. In other words, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be made unclear, making it difficult to distinguish the display contents on the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photographed photo, the display content on the function display unit 1400A becomes clear, and the special lottery result is a "lose", a simple "jackpot", a "probable win", a "time-saving win", By knowing the "second jackpot (ST hit)", etc., you will no longer be able to enjoy the performance that suggests the special lottery result, or you will not be able to enjoy the advantageous gaming state that is occurring (for example, the "jackpot" game). This makes it possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game by keeping them entertained.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a in the front reflector 1405 is different, and the display content is adjusted according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the function display unit 1400A is made to be clearly visible, the display contents of the function display unit 1400A can be viewed unclearly from behind the seated player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to understand the gaming situation, so it is possible to reduce the possibility of other players looking into the game, and to play without worrying about other players. can be entertained.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the display contents are made to be clearly visible according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, functions using a digital camera, etc., can be performed from a position behind the player. It is possible to make it more difficult to photograph the display content on the display unit 1400A, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in the front reflector 1405 is oriented in different directions not only in the left and right directions but also in the up and down direction, so that the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 are The display contents are made to look good when viewed from a height. As a result, when attempting to take a picture with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to match the height direction as well, making it more difficult to take a picture of the display contents on the function display unit 1400A.

In addition, since the display holes 1405a of the front reflector 1405 are oriented differently for the left eye, right eye, etc., it is possible to suppress the distance between the plurality of LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402 from increasing in the left and right direction. The width of the display unit 1400A in the left-right direction can be reduced.

Note that in the above embodiment, the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions for the left eye, right eye, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a function display unit 1400B having a configuration as shown in FIG. 202 may be used.

The function display unit 1400B includes a function display board 1411 on which a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b are mounted at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (distance between the left and right pupils of the player); A rear reflector 1412 is provided on the front side of the substrate 1411 and transmits the light from the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b forward independently, and a light transmitting element is provided on the front side of the rear reflector 1412. It includes a sheet 1413 and a reflector front 1414 that is provided on the front side of the light-transmitting sheet 1413 and radiates the light from the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b transmitted through the reflector rear 1412 forward.

The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are separated from each other by 40 mm to 80 mm in the left-right direction. A plurality of through holes 1412a are provided in the rear reflector 1412 so as to correspond to the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411. The plurality of through holes 1412a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the function display board 1411. A plurality of display holes 1414a are provided in the front reflector 1414 so as to correspond to the plurality of through holes 1412a in the rear reflector 1412. The plurality of display holes 1414a are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1411.

This function display unit 1400B is configured so that, when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a can be seen only by the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b can be seen only by the right eye. ing. Therefore, when the player looks with both eyes, the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, so that the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be achieved without any inferiority.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated from each other in the left and right direction, a monocular digital camera or the like cannot photograph only one of them. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the function display unit 1400A.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, it is difficult to see from a position other than the front of the function display unit 1400B. Since the displayed content cannot be clearly seen, it may be difficult to photograph the displayed content using a digital camera or the like.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414 are oriented in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, and all face the same direction, so that the front reflector 1414 can be easily viewed. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to be molded in a manner that reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B are shown with a configuration that is difficult to photograph with a monocular digital camera, etc., but the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B are not limited to this. It may also be a unit 1400C.

The function display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, etc.) that can be photographed with a digital camera or the like, thereby making it difficult to distinguish the displayed contents. Specifically, a function display board 1421 with a plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the front surface, a reflector rear 1422 provided on the front side of the function display board 1421, and a flat plate-shaped reflector rear 1422 provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1422. It includes a light guide plate 1423, an auxiliary substrate 1424 on which an invisible light LED 1424a that irradiates invisible light to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423 is mounted, and a reflector front 1425 provided on the front side of the light guide plate 1423.

The rear reflector 1422 has a plurality of through holes 1422a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 1421a of the function display board 1421, respectively. When the light guide plate 1423 receives light from the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 from the side, at least a portion of the display hole 1425a in the front reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 emits either infrared rays or ultraviolet rays as invisible light. The invisible light LED 1424a emits light when the plurality of LEDs 1421a are displaying special lottery results, etc., and causes the light guide plate 1423 to emit invisible light. The front reflector 1425 has a plurality of display holes 1425a corresponding to the through holes 1422a of the rear reflector 1422. The plurality of through holes 1422a on the rear reflector 1422 and the plurality of display holes 1425a on the front reflector 1425 are provided perpendicularly to the front surface of the functional display board 1421.

According to this function display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light by the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light, so the LED 1421a provided at the rear through the light guide plate 1423 light can be seen and the displayed content can be viewed in good condition.

On the other hand, if this function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like, if it is capable of photographing invisible light, all the display holes 1425a will appear to be emitting light due to the light guide plate emitting light with invisible light. , the displayed content can be made unclear, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

In addition, although the above-mentioned embodiment shows the one equipped with the reflector rear 1403 (reflector rear 1412) and the light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413), the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display substrate 1402 (function display board 1402) A configuration may be adopted in which the front reflector 1405 (front reflector 1414) is provided directly on the front surface of the display substrate 1411).

In addition, as a configuration that makes it difficult for a digital camera etc. to photograph the display contents on the function display unit, for example, LEDs may be distributed and displayed over a wider range than the photographing range of the digital camera etc. It may appear that the LED is off, but when photographed with a digital camera, the LED may be displayed by blinking at a speed that makes it appear as if the light is off, or the LED that has nothing to do with the display may be turned off for the player. You can use multiple dummy LEDs that look like they are on or off when photographed with a digital camera, or you can display them by placing a high-intensity LED near the function display unit. When photographing with a digital camera or the like, halation may be caused so that the display contents are not photographed.

[17. Second embodiment of magnetic sensor installation]
Next, a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor 1050, which is different from the above game board 5 etc., will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 204. FIG. 204(a) is a sectional view showing the second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor, FIG. 204(b) is an explanatory view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor of FIG. 204(a) in a perspective view, and FIG. FIG. 4(d) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor shown in FIG.

The second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050 is a holding member 1071 that is attached to a predetermined position of the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed of a penetrating hole, and the holding member 1071 is locked. The holding container 1072 has an elastic claw 1072a that is engaged with the portion 1071a and houses the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the magnetic sensor 1050 to be visually recognized from the outside. Furthermore, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of a non-magnetic material.

Further, the holding container 1072 has a hole on the surface opposite to the elastic claw 1072a. An electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be drawn out through the hole in the holding container 1072.

According to the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, when the magnet is brought close to the gaming area 5a, the holding member 1071 and the like pull the lines of magnetic force from the magnet. It is possible to avoid the magnetic field lines from coming close together, and it is possible to prevent the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a can be easily detected, and fraudulent activities using magnets can be detected at an early stage, and fraudulent activities can be carried out by notifying the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1071. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 without using metal screws, and the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier. The increase in costs can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by providing a locking portion 1071a penetrating through the holding member 1071 and locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 to the locking portion 1071a. The structure of the attached holding member 1071 can be simplified, and the cost of the holding member 1071 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are to be locked to the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 1071a, and by locking the elastic claw 1072a to any locking portion 1071a, the position at which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached can be arbitrarily set. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a position different from the locking portion 1071a to which the elastic claw 1072a is locked. This makes it possible to change the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 or add more magnetic sensors 1050 without having to replace the holding member 1071 with a new one. The versatility of the member 1071 can be increased.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and by locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be placed in any position and its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, a pachinko machine 1 is provided that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

Further, a biasing portion such as a protrusion may be provided inside the holding container 1072 to press the magnetic sensor 1050 housed therein. As a result, it is possible to suppress fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050, so it is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 will come off or cause a poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic Sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

In the above embodiment, a penetrating hole is shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but the hole is not limited to this, and any shape that allows the elastic claw 1072a to lock may be used. , slit, etc.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the holding container 1072 is shown to house the magnetic sensor 1050 vertically, but the holding container 1072 is not limited to this, and may be a holding container that houses the magnetic sensor 1050 horizontally.

Further, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claws 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sensor case of the magnetic sensor 1050 is not limited thereto. 1053 may be formed with an elastic claw so as to be engaged with the engagement portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Moreover, although the above description has been made regarding the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050, this attachment structure may also be used to attach a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be attached by housing the vibration sensor in a holding container having elastic claws and locking the elastic claws to the locking portions of the holding member. Although the vibration sensor is not affected by surrounding magnetic materials, using a mounting structure similar to this magnetic sensor 1050 is effective in changing or moving the mounting location and reducing costs related to mounting.

[18. Another embodiment regarding attachment of decorations such as stickers]
Next, another embodiment regarding attachment of a decoration such as a seal, which is different from the above embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208 and the like. In this chapter, we will refer to a member that has a predetermined decoration as a decoration, a member that has a decoration attached to one side as a first member, and a member that has a decoration attached to the other side of the first member. The second member will be referred to as the second member. In addition, the decoration body, the first member, and the second member may be lined up one after the other, may be lined up one above the other, or may be lined up left and right.

FIG. 205(a) is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as a positioning hole for the second member, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing in cross section an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member, and (c) is a state in which a decorative body with a different thickness is attached in (b). FIG. 3(d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decoration is also used as the attachment hole of the decoration. FIG. 206(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body attached to the first member from the front, FIG. 206(b) is a sectional view of FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(c) is a decorative body different from that in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the first member attached with the first member from the front.

FIG. 207(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, FIG. 207(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c ) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symmetrically provided decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symmetrically provided decorative body and the first member with a shape different from that in (c). It is a diagram. FIG. 208(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, FIG. 208(b) is a sectional view taken along the tartar line in FIG. 208(a), and FIG. (a) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative body in a different form from that in (a) and the movable first member. (e) is a sectional view taken along the Chi-Chi line in (d).

First, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(a) includes a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is pasted on one side. , and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 has a flat plate portion 1821a, a mounting recess 1821b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1821a and to which the decoration 1801 is attached, and a side opposite to the mounting recess 1821b of the flat plate portion 1821a. A boss portion 1821c protrudes from the other surface, a separation hole 1821d passes through the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and a separation hole 1821d protrudes from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The rib 1821e is provided. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 includes a base portion 1841a on which the boss portion 1821c and the tips of the ribs 1821e of the first member 1821 are in contact, and a base portion 1841a that protrudes from one surface of the base portion 1841a to separate the first member 1821. A positioning protrusion 1841b inserted into the hole 1821d. By inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with respect to each other.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 affixed to the mounting recess 1821b, and on the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841. The interior is a closed space. The separation hole 1821d is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801. This separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 to the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1801 cannot be correctly pasted to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, from the other side of the first member 1821. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the decorative body 1801 so that the vicinity of the edge can be rolled up to one side, and the rolled-up The decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b by pulling the portion, and the decoration 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed from the other side of the first member 1821 through the separation hole 1821d, and the decoration body 1801 is pressed from the other side with its tip. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, the task of replacing the decorative body 1801 when changing models can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the decoration body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d. The component parts can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side by pasting the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1821b, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1821d, and also to prevent players from seeing the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1821d, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1821d.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is fixed by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decoration 1801 is attached. It is closed from the other side, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, it does not have a hole that goes all the way through. It is possible to avoid inserting a fraudulent tool into the game board 5, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole 1821d through the decorative body 1801 from one side, the second Since the positioning protrusion 1841b of the member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, unauthorized tools are prevented from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, as well as leaving traces on the decorative body 1801 when the fraudulent tool pierces the decorative body 1801, making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent force against.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 is connected to the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, second The second member 1841 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(b) includes a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side. and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a having a flat plate shape, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and a portion that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. The flat plate portion 1822a includes a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is assembled, one side is closed by the decorative body 1801 affixed to the mounting recess 1822b, and the other side is closed by the plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It opens into a closed space surrounded by a wall, making the entire space a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1801 cannot be correctly pasted to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the decorative body 1801 so that the vicinity of the edge can be rolled up to one side, and the rolled-up The decoration 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decoration 1801 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side with the tip of the rod-shaped member. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the task of replacing the decorative body 1801 when changing models can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decoration body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by pasting the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1822b, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1822c, and also to prevent players from seeing the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decoration 1801 is attached. In addition, unlike conventional pachinko machines, a hole that passes through the entire area is not penetrated, so a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent the device from being inserted into the computer, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted into the separation hole 1822c from one side through the decorative body 1801, the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the unauthorized tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from occurring. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that is capable of preventing fraud, as well as leaving traces on the decorative body 1801 when a fraudulent tool pierces through the decorative body 1801, making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts. can do.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(c) includes a decorative body 1802 made of a seal with a predetermined decoration and a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm), and a decorative body 1802 on one side. It includes a first member 1822 that is pasted, and a second member 1842 that is attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a having a flat plate shape, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and a portion that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. The flat plate portion 1822a includes a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed to be shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is assembled, one side is closed by the decorative body 1802 affixed to the mounting recess 1822b, and the other side is closed by the plurality of ribs 1822d and one side of the second member 1842. It opens into a closed space surrounded by a wall, making the entire space a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1802.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1802 cannot be correctly pasted to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the decorative body 1802 so that the vicinity of the edge can be rolled up to one side, and the rolled-up The decoration 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decoration 1802 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1802 is pressed from the other side with its tip. Since the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the task of replacing the decorative body 1802 when changing models can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily separated into materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by pasting the decorative body 1802 in the mounting recess 1822b, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c, and also to prevent players from seeing the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and to make it difficult for the user to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decoration 1802 is attached. In addition, unlike conventional pachinko machines, a hole that passes through the entire area is not penetrated, so a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent the device from being inserted into the computer, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Furthermore, since the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decoration body 1802 from one side and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the unauthorized tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from entering into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from occurring. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent fraud, and also deter people from committing fraudulent acts because traces are left on the decorative body 1802 when a fraudulent tool penetrates the decorative body 1802. can do.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

Examples of the decorative body 1802 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal. Examples of the decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, pressure molding, high frequency molding, and the like.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 205(d) includes a decorative body 1803 that is decorated with a predetermined decoration and is thick (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached to one side. and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has a mounting dowel 1803a projecting to the other side. The decorative body 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822 by press-fitting this attachment dowel 1803a into a separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later.

The first member 1822 includes a flat plate portion 1822a having a flat plate shape, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1803 comes into contact, and a mounting dowel that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It includes a separation hole 1822c into which the portion 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed to be shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least some of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is assembled, one side is closed by a mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decoration body 1803, and the other side is closed by a plurality of ribs 1822d and one side surface of the second member 1842. It opens into a space that is enclosed and enclosed, making the entire area a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the decoration body 1803 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, it can be separated from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-like member through the hole 1822c and pressing the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side with the tip thereof, the other surface of the decorative body 1803 is separated from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b, and the decorative body 1803 is removed. can be easily removed from the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1803 can be reattached.

In addition, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and its tip presses the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side. By doing so, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822, so that the work of replacing the decorative body 1803 when changing the model can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decoration body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c. The component parts can be easily separated by material, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by press-fitting the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1822c. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to plan fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, and unlike the conventional pachinko machine, Since the hole that passes through the whole part is not penetrated, it is possible to avoid inserting a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side than the second member 1842. can prevent fraudulent acts from occurring.

Furthermore, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, an attempt is made to insert an unauthorized tool from one side through the decorative body 1803 into the separation hole 1822c. However, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the attachment dowel 1803a can prevent penetration. Even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering into the game board 5 from one side through which the unauthorized tools are inserted, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out. Since traces are left behind, it is possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, The second member 1842 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decoration holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

Further, as the decorative body 1803, a relief-shaped decoration can be given and formed by injection molding. Further, the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative body 1803, may be insert molded, or may be assembled separately. good.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 206(a) and 206(b) includes a decorative body 1804 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1804 pasted on one side. A first member 1823. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker having a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. printed on its surface, and has translucency. This decorative body 1804 has a substantially square outer shape, and chamfered portions 1804a having a predetermined radius are provided at three corners. Since the overall shape of this decorative body 1804 is difficult to identify, the orientation can be determined by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. . Note that although the chamfered portion 1804a is shown here as having a rounded chamfer, it may also be a rounded chamfer.

In addition, the decorative body 1804 has a glue surface 1804b (shaded area in FIG. 206(a)) provided on the back surface with a substantially constant width (width within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm) along the outer periphery. have. The width of the glue surface 1804b is set to an appropriate width depending on the size of the decorative body 1804. Limiting the glue surface 1804b to only the outer periphery in this way is often used especially for transparent stickers (decoration body 1804) when it is desired to show the illumination or design surface such as LEDs at the rear.

The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1804 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) from one side of the flat plate portion 1823a. ) It has a mounting recess 1823b that is recessed and to which the decoration 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate part 1823a at the location of the mounting recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed transparent.

The separation hole 1823c is provided close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b at a position where the adhesive surface 1804b does not cover when the decorative body 1804 is attached (a position inside the adhesive surface 1804b). This prevents the attachment strength of the decorative body 1804 from decreasing due to the adhesive surface 1804b covering the separation hole 1823c.

This separation hole 1823c is a round hole. The separation hole 1823c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and make it impossible to press the decorative body 1804 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, there is a possibility that the decorative body 1804 will be bent at the separation hole 1823c, and the appearance of the decorative body 1804 will be poor.

Furthermore, the first member 1823 is provided with chamfered portions 1823d that are formed at three corners of the mounting recessed portion 1823b and have a larger (radius) than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining corner is used as an erroneous pasting prevention section 1823e. As a result, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two end sides forming the corners of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as abutting surfaces that serve as a reference for pasting the decorative body 1804. This ensures at least two clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1804, making it easy to perform the pasting work.

Further, the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f in the attachment recess 1823b to indicate the portion of the contact surface. The identification portion 1823f is recessed relative to the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By looking at this identification part 1823f, the operator can immediately recognize the position of the abutment surface for pasting the decorative body 1804, and can prevent mistakes in the position of the abutment surface, and can also improve the pasting work. It is designed to be easy to implement.

Note that in the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer periphery of the mounting recess 1823b be 0.5 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1823b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first place the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered portion 1804a is not provided on the abutting surface of the mounting recess 1823b (incorrectly pasted) indicated by the identification portion 1823f. The adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b from that region and pasted. Note that when trying to bring the corner of the decorative body 1804 where the chamfered part 1804a is provided into contact with the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e), the shape of the wrong pasting prevention part 1823e will be different from the chamfered part 1804a. Since the numbers are different, it is possible to make the user realize that the decoration 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decoration 1804 can be attached in the correct orientation.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the other side to one side with its tip, the end edge of the decorative body 1804 is The decorative body 1804 can be removed by being rolled up to one side, and the worker can easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823) by pulling the rolled up part. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided in a position where it does not cover the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is pasted on the mounting recess 1823b, the adhesive surface 1804b covers the separation hole 1823c. Decrease in the adhesion strength of the body 1804 can be avoided, and the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to come off.

Furthermore, since the attachment recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is pasted is provided with an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1823e, if the decorative body 1804 is attached in a direction different from the normal orientation, the decorative body 1804 The difference between the shape of the chamfered portion 1804a and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1823e makes it possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1804, and to avoid pasting the decorative body 1804 on the first member 1823 in the correct orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the identification portion 1823f indicating the contact surface is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823, it is possible for the operator to immediately recognize the position of the contact surface, which serves as a reference for pasting the decorative body 1804. This makes it possible to prevent mistakes in the position of the abutment surface, and to facilitate the pasting work.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, (second attacker unit 2600, right middle side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decoration holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1804 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment of FIG. 206(c) differs from the embodiment of FIGS. 206(a) and (b) in that the glue surface 1804b of the decoration body 1804 is added to the area along the outer periphery and also to one diagonal line. It is designed so that it is also provided in the area of . The other configurations are the same as those in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 206(a) and 206(b), and description thereof will be omitted.

According to this embodiment, in addition to producing the same effects as those described above, since the glue surface 1804b is also provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the adhesion strength is increased and the decorative body 1804 is more difficult to come off. In addition, even if the decoration body 1804 shrinks at a rate different from that of the first member 1823 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the central part is stuck by the adhesive surface 1804b on the diagonal line. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative body 1804 from swelling or waving, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from becoming unsightly.

Furthermore, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally, the number of glue surfaces can be reduced compared to the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface of the decoration body 1804, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can. Furthermore, since the adhesion strength of the decoration 1804 is lower than in the case where the adhesive surface is provided on the entire surface, the removal work of the decoration 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be made easier.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 207(a) includes a horizontally long rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded part) made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1805 on one side. A first member 1824 to which 1805 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1824 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the first member 1824 is omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. The decorative body 1805 has a horizontally elongated rectangular outer shape, and is provided with a C-chamfer-shaped chamfered portion 1805a that is diagonally cut out at one corner (lower left corner in the figure). Since this decorative body 1805 has a shape that makes it difficult to specify the vertical direction, the direction can be determined by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 206(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1805 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) from one side of the flat plate portion 1824a. ) It has a mounting recess 1824b which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

Further, the first member 1824 has a C-chamfered erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c that protrudes into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (lower left corner in the figure) of the mounting recess 1824b. As a result, the mounting recess 1824b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the diagonally extending end portion of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1824c are the standards for pasting the decoration 1805. It is set on the contact surface. As a result, three clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1805 are secured: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the perpendicular direction to the oblique side of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c. This makes it easy to perform pasting work.

Note that in the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1824b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first connect the oblique side of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfered portion 1805a to the abutment surface (incorrectly) of the mounting recessed portion 1824b. The oblique side of the adhesion prevention part 1824c and the short side part connected to the erroneous adhesion prevention part 1824c), and from this part, gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b, and paste it. wear.

Note that if you try to bring the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered part 1805a is not provided into contact with the abutting surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c), the shape of the wrong pasting prevention part 1824c will be different from the chamfered part 1805a. Since the numbers are different, it is possible to make the user realize that the decoration 1805 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decoration 1805 can be attached in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decoration 1805 is attached to the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decoration 1805 will protrude from the attachment recess 1824b at the incorrect attachment prevention part 1824c, making it difficult for the operator to It is possible to make the user aware of erroneous pasting of the decorative body 1805.

According to this embodiment, since the attachment recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decoration 1805 is pasted is provided with the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c, if the decoration 1805 is pasted in a direction different from the normal one, Then, since the shape of the corner of the decoration 1805 where the chamfered part 1805a is not provided is different from the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decoration 1805, and the decoration 1805 can be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation, and it is possible to prevent the decoration 1805 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, (second attacker unit 2600, right middle side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decoration holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1805 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 207(b) includes a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded area) that is a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1806 on one side. and a first member 1825 to which is pasted. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the first member 1825 is omitted.

The decorative body 1806 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. This decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape, and is provided with a notch 1806a cut out in an arc shape from the outside (from the bottom in the figure). Since the decorative body 1806 has a shape that makes it difficult to specify its orientation, a notch 1806a is provided so that its orientation can be determined. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 206(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one side of the flat plate portion 1825a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) A recessed mounting recess 1825b to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

The first member 1825 also has an erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape with a radius that matches the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at the periphery of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end of the periphery in the figure). are doing. As a result, the mounting recess 1825b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In this first member 1825, the arcuate edge of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c is set as a contact surface that serves as a reference for pasting the decorative body 1806. As a result, the clearance direction for pasting the decorative body 1806 is at least two directions: a direction along the arc of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c, and a direction away from the erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c (vertical direction in the figure). This makes it easy to perform the pasting work.

Note that in the first member 1825, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1825b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, and the adhesive surface on the back side is removed from the said part. Gradually bring it into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and attach it.

Note that when the decorative body 1806 is pasted against the circumferential surface of the mounting recess 1825b other than the contact surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c), the decorative body 1806 protrudes from the attachment recess 1825b at the portion of the wrong pasting prevention portion 1825c. This allows the operator to notice that the decoration 1806 has been erroneously pasted.

According to this embodiment, since the attachment recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decoration 1806 is pasted is provided with the erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c, if the decoration 1806 is pasted in a direction different from the normal one, Then, the decorative body 1806 protrudes from the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1825c, making it possible to make the user aware of the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1806, and making it possible to attach the decorative body 1806 to the first member 1825 in the correct orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1806 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 is connected to the front component 1000, the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, (second attacker unit 2600, right middle side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decoration holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1806 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 207(c) and (d), a pair of decorative bodies 1807L on the left side and a right decorative body 1807L and 1807L on the right side are provided laterally symmetrically and are made of sheet-like stickers on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed. 1807R (shaded portion), and a pair of first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R, to which a left decoration 1807L and a right decoration 1807R are attached. Note that the configuration of the other side of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, descriptions of identification portions indicating the separation holes and abutting surfaces in the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are omitted.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are stickers on which predetermined patterns, characters, etc. are printed. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have end sides that are close to each other extending vertically in a straight line, and the upper and lower ends of the end sides are formed by arc-shaped end sides that bulge away from each other. It is formed into an approximately semicircular shape that is vertically long and connected to each other.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in FIG. 207(c) have different radii of R chamfers provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, that is, at the upper and lower ends of the semicircles. On the other hand, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in FIG. 207(d) have a semicircular upper end (one longitudinal end) with an R chamfer, and a lower end (other longitudinal end) with a straight chamfer. Notched. Both the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to identify whether they are for left or right use if the top and bottom are reversed. I am making it possible to identify it.

The adhesive surfaces of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 206(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are formed symmetrically with respect to each other. The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R have a flat plate portion 1826a, a left decorative body 1807L and a right decorative body 1807R, which are one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one side of the flat plate portion 1826a. It has a mounting recess 1826b that is recessed deeper than the thickness (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) to which the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are pasted, and an erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c at the lower end of the installation recess 1826b. are doing.

The erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c of the first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R in FIG. It is set in. On the other hand, the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c of the first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R in FIG. 207(d) are provided in the shape of horizontally extending linear notches. In both the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the edge of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c is set as the abutting surface that becomes the reference for pasting the decoration left 1807L and the right decoration 1807R. has been done.

As a result, in the embodiment of FIG. 207(c), the clearance direction for pasting the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is an arcuate direction in which the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1826c rolls on the arc, and a direction in which the erroneous pasting At least two directions are ensured: a direction away from the prevention portion 1826c (up and down direction in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 207(d), the clearance direction for pasting the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R is the direction along the straight line of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c (the left-right direction in the figure); At least two directions are ensured: a direction away from the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c (up and down direction in the figure). In this way, in any of the embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making it easy to perform the pasting work.

Note that in the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1826b will easily break.

When attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached in the longitudinal direction. Of both ends, the one with the larger radius of the R chamfer or the one with the linear notch faces downward, and comes into contact with the abutment surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c). Then, gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b from that part and paste it.

Note that if you try to paste the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R upside down and then reversed left and right, the shape of the lower end will be 1826c), the shapes of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R can be made aware that they are pasted in the wrong direction. It can be attached.

According to this embodiment, since the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1826c are provided in the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R to which the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R are pasted, If you try to paste the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R in a direction different from the normal one, the shapes of the longitudinal ends of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c. By having different orientations, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. In addition, it is possible to prevent the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R from being shipped in a state where they are pasted in the wrong direction.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R may be members (decoration holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Further, examples of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R include PET seals, flex metal seals (trade name), metallic seals (trade name), potting seals, aluminum seals, and the like.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 208(a) to 208(c) includes a decorative body 1808 consisting of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1808 pasted on one side. A movable first member 1827. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative body 1808 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. The decorative body 1808 has a horizontally elongated rectangular outer shape, and the upper two corners are rounded and the lower two corners are rounded. The orientation of the decorative body 1808 can be determined by the difference in the chamfered shapes on the upper side and the lower side. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 206(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1827 includes a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1827a, and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1808 from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a depth (0.0 mm) that is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1808. A mounting recess 1827b that is recessed (4 mm to 1.0 mm) to which the decoration 1808 is pasted, a separation hole 1827c that penetrates the flat plate part 1827a at the mounting recess 1827b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b. and an erroneous pasting prevention section 1827d provided in the section.

Further, the first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e that protrude in a cylindrical shape in the left-right direction from near the lower ends of both left and right sides of the flat plate portion 1827a, respectively. The shaft portion 1827e is located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b, as shown in FIG. 208(b). In the first member 1827, a pair of shaft portions 1827e are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). In other words, the first member 1827 is rotatable and movable around the axes of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portion 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., may be insert molded, or may be assembled separately. good.

The separation hole 1827c is a round hole, and is provided near the upper corner of the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at a position far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when rotating (rotating) the first member 1827 can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved easily. can. In addition, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the left and right corners of the upper side, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be made equal, and the first member 1827 is balanced. This can reduce uneven wear and the like.

The separation hole 1827c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-like member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and make it impossible to press the decorative body 1808 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, the decorative body 1808 may be bent at the separation hole 1827c, and the appearance of the decorative body 1808 may deteriorate.

The erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d has a shape corresponding to the C chamfer of the lower corner of the decorative body 1808 and protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b. In this embodiment, the oblique end of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d and the lower end of the attachment recess 1827b are set as the abutment surface that serves as a reference for pasting the decoration 1808.

Since the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 increases. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous pasting prevention section 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1827d are provided at the lower two corners of the mounting recess 1827b, the balance of the first member 1827 can be maintained and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. In addition, the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

Note that in the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1827b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d) of the mounting recess 1827b. Then, the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from that part, and the adhesive is pasted. Note that if you try to paste the decoration 1808 upside down, the orientation of the decoration 1808 will be different because the shape of the incorrect pasting prevention part 1827d is different from the shape of the rounded chamfer at the corner of the decoration 1808. It is possible to make the user realize that he/she has made a mistake, and to attach the decorative body 1808 in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decoration 1808 will protrude from the attachment recess 1827b at the erroneous attachment prevention part 1827d, making it difficult for the operator to attach the decoration. 1808 can be made aware of pasting errors.

Further, the first member 1827 has a separation groove 1827f that is recessed in a portion near the end edge of the mounting recess 1827b and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 208(b)). When the decoration 1808 is attached to the attachment recess 1827b, the separation groove 1827f is straddled by the decoration 1808, forming a space between the separation groove 1827f and the decoration 1808. This separation groove 1827f causes a part of the decoration 1808 to sink into the separation groove 1827f when the part of the separation groove 1827f in the decoration 1808 is pressed from the outside while the decoration 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b. At the same time, the edge side of the decoration 1808 is raised from the mounting recess 1827b, and by pulling the raised portion, the decoration 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-like member through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827 and pressing the decorative body 1808 from the other side to one side with its tip, the end edge of the decorative body 1808 is The decorative body 1808 can be removed by being rolled up to one side, and the worker can easily remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827) by pulling the rolled up part. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration.

In addition, since the attachment recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is pasted is provided with an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1827d, if the decorative body 1808 is attempted to be pasted in a direction different from the normal direction, the decorative body 1808 The difference in the shape of the corner and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d makes it possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1808, thereby allowing the decorative body 1808 to be pasted on the first member 1827 in the correct orientation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation, and the erroneous pasting prevention part 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1827 is rotated. Since the rotational moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be easily moved (rotated).

In addition, since two separation holes 1827c and two erroneous pasting prevention parts 1827d are provided in the first member 1827, the forces acting on the left and right shaft parts 1827e can be balanced, and the Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be used as a door member of a variable winning opening such as a big winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or may be provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may also be a movable member for performance.

Examples of the decorative body 1808 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

By the way, when the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the grand prize opening 2005, the accessory prize opening 2006, etc., since the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1808 and the second It is desirable to have the following relationship with one member 1827.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208(c), the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, and the distance from the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 is If the distance to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, then the distance d is within the range [0<d<r], and the distance It is desirable that c be within the range of [0≦c<(2rd^2-d^2)^0.5]. Note that the formula is shown in the above key parentheses.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the game ball B coming into contact with the upper end side of the decoration body 1808, so it is possible to prevent the decoration body 1808 from coming off due to the contact of the game ball B, thereby suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions. can be done.

Note that the distance d is preferably within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. This is because if the distance d is smaller than this, depending on the tolerance of the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1808 may protrude further forward than the flat plate portion 1827a, and the game ball B may come into contact with the upper end side. If is larger than this, the decorative body 1808 is likely to be cast a shadow by the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, which may reduce the decorative effect of the decorative body 1808.

Further, the contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b may be set on the upper edge. As a result, the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 comes into contact with the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, so the game ball B does not come into contact with the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, and the same It can produce effects.

Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 208(d) and (e) includes a decorative body 1809 consisting of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1809 pasted on one side. A movable first member 1828 is provided. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Further, in this embodiment, description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed. This decorative body 1809 has a horizontally elongated rectangular outer shape, has two upper corners that are rounded, and two lower corners that are provided with rectangular notches 1809a. . This notch portion 1809a is formed in a shape corresponding to an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners allows the direction of the decorative body 1809 to be identified. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided with a constant width along the outer periphery, as in FIG. 206(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1828 includes a horizontally long rectangular flat plate portion 1828a, and a size that is one size larger than the decorative body 1809 from one side of the flat plate portion 1828a, and a depth (0.0 mm) that is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1809. A mounting recess 1828b that is recessed (4 mm to 1.0 mm) to which the decorative body 1809 is pasted, a separation hole 1828c that penetrates the flat plate part 1828a at the mounting recess 1828b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b. and an erroneous pasting prevention section 1828d provided in the section.

The first member 1828 also includes a semi-cylindrical shaft support portion 1828e that bulges to one side with the axis in the left and right direction at the lower left and right corners of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a shaft support portion It includes a shaft hole 1828f provided on each end surface on the outer side in the left and right direction of the shaft 1828e, and a columnar shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft hole 1828f. In the first member 1828, a pair of shaft portions 1828g are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1828 is movable and rotatable around the axes of the pair of shaft portions 1828g. The shaft portion 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during molding of the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, or may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the mounting recess 1828b, and a portion of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d. The shaft support portion 1828e (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d) forms the lower left and right corners of the mounting recess 1828b into a square cutout shape.

The separation hole 1828c is a round hole, and is provided near the upper corner of the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g, the weight of the portions of the first member 1828 far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when rotating (rotating) the first member 1828 can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved easily. can. In addition, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the left and right corners of the upper side, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be made equal, and the first member 1828 is balanced. This can reduce uneven wear and the like.

The separation hole 1828c of this embodiment has an inner diameter within a range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c will become smaller, which may cause it to bend easily and make it impossible to press the decorative body 1809 sufficiently. This is because if the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, the decorative body 1809 may be bent at the separation hole 1828c, and the appearance of the decorative body 1809 may deteriorate.

The incorrect pasting prevention part 1828d has a rectangular shape that projects from the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support part 1828e, and has a shape corresponding to the cutout part 1809a of the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. It has become. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d is set as the abutting surface that serves as a reference for pasting the decoration 1809.

Since the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d protrudes into the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 increases. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the erroneous pasting prevention portions 1828d are provided at the lower two corners of the mounting recess 1828b, the balance of the first member 1828 can be maintained and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. In addition, the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

Note that in the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b be 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the portion outside the mounting recess 1828b will easily break.

When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the notch 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the abutting surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and the corresponding part is Then, gradually bring the adhesive side into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b and paste. Note that if you try to paste the decorative body 1809 upside down, the shape of the incorrect pasting prevention part 1828d is different from the shape of the rounded chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1809, so the orientation of the decorative body 1809 will be incorrect. It is possible to make the user realize that he/she has made a mistake, and to attach the decorative body 1809 in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decoration 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong direction, the corner of the decoration 1809 will protrude from the attachment recess 1828b at the incorrect attachment prevention part 1828d, making it difficult for the operator to attach the decoration to the mounting recess 1828b. 1809 can be pasted incorrectly.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828, and the end edge of the decorative member 1809 is pressed from the other side to the one side with its tip. The decorative body 1809 can be removed by being rolled up to one side, and the worker can easily remove the decorative body 1809 from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828) by pulling the rolled up part. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration.

In addition, since the attachment recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is pasted is provided with an erroneous pasting prevention portion 1828d, if the decorative body 1809 is attached in a direction different from the normal orientation, the decorative body 1809 Since the shape of the corner of and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d are different, it is possible to make the user aware of the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1809, and to make the decorative body 1809 adhere to the first member 1828 in the correct orientation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1809 from being shipped in a state where it is attached in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation, and the erroneous pasting prevention part 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1828 is rotated. Since the rotational moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be easily moved (rotated).

In addition, since two separation holes 1828c and two erroneous pasting prevention parts 1828d are provided in the first member 1828, it is possible to balance the forces acting on the left and right shaft parts 1828g, and Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be used as a door member of a variable winning opening such as a big winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or may be provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may also be a movable member for performance.

Examples of the decorative body 1809 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, and an aluminum seal.

[19. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1805, the decorative body 1806, the decorative body 1807L, the decorative body 1807R, the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1809, and the gate seal 2811 in this embodiment are the adhesive surface 1804b in this embodiment. The first member 1823, the first member 1824, the first member 1825, the first member left 1826L, the first member right 1826R, the first member 1827, the first member 1828, and the gate in this embodiment are attached to the adhesive surface of the present invention. The main body 2810 is the pedestal member of the present invention, and the flat plate part 1823a, flat plate part 1824a, flat plate part 1825a, flat plate part 1826a, flat plate part 1827a, flat plate part 1828a, and front plate part 2810a in this embodiment are the flat plate part of the present invention, They are equivalent.

Further, the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess 1824b, the mounting recess 1825b, the mounting recess 1826b, the mounting recess 1827b, the mounting recess 1828b, and the pasting recess 2810b in this embodiment are the mounting recess of the present invention, and the separation hole 1823c in this embodiment and the separation The hole 1827c, the separation hole 1828c, and the separation hole 2810d are the separation hole of the present invention, and the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1824c, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1825c, the erroneous pasting prevention part 1826c, and the erroneous pasting prevention part in this embodiment. The erroneous pasting prevention section 1827d, the erroneous pasting prevention section 1828d, and the erroneous pasting prevention section 2810c correspond to the erroneous pasting prevention section of the present invention, respectively.

Further, in this embodiment, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surface of the left decoration 1807L and the right decoration 1807R, and the contact surface of the first member 1827. , the contact surface of the first member 1828, and the contact surface of the gate main body 2810 correspond to the positioning section of the present invention.

[20. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Next, the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be explained. From here to paragraph [1835], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the pedestal member is the first member 1823, the flat plate part is the flat plate part 1823a, the mounting recess is the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole is the separation hole 1823c, and incorrect pasting is prevented. They will be described as representative parts, such as the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e and the positioning part as the contact surface of the first member 1823 (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e), and other configurations (members) corresponding to the present invention will be described. Since the same functions and effects are obtained, the description thereof will be omitted here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a part of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is pasted is used as the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e) of the first member 1823. Therefore, when attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 are attached to the first member 1823 on the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b. The decorative body 1804 can be positioned with respect to the first member 1823 by contacting and aligning the position with the area defined as the surface (erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e), and the positioning work of the decorative body 1804 is completed. This makes it possible to easily attach the decorative body 1804 to the correct position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the decorative body 1804 is pasted in a tilted or misaligned state with respect to the first member 1823 due to the abutment surface (erroneous pasting prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. Also, since it is possible to prevent the first member 1823 from becoming unsightly, the decorative effect of the decoration body 1804 can be reliably exhibited, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to prevent players from losing interest. It can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decoration 1804 can be accurately pasted at the correct position by the abutment surface (misapplication prevention part 1823e) of the first member 1823, the decoration 1804 can be easily pasted at the correct position, and the decoration It is possible to reduce failures in attaching the body 1804 and suppress an increase in cost for the Pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is difficult to mistake the orientation of the decorative body 1804, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 in the correct direction. The decorative effect of 1804 can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, since the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823 is provided, if the decoration 1804 is pasted in an incorrect direction, the decoration will be damaged at the part of the erroneous pasting prevention part 1823e. Since the body 1804 is rolled up, it is possible to recognize that the decorative body 1804 has been pasted in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 can be pasted in the correct direction to ensure the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804. can be demonstrated.

In addition, since a separation hole 1823c passing through the flat plate portion 1823a is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 of the first member 1823 is attached, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823. When the back side of the decorative body 1804 is pressed with the tip, a part of the decorative body 1804 is lifted up from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 to the front side against the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804b, and the decorative body 1804 is By pulling this part, it can be removed from the flat plate part 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative body 1804 having a predetermined decoration is pasted on the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 has a predetermined decoration. The appearance of the first member 1823 can be improved, and the decoration body 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823. Furthermore, since the attachment recess 1823b to which the decoration 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate part 1823a, when the decoration 1804 is attached to the attachment recess 1823b, the attachment recess in the flat plate part 1823a of the first member 1823 Since the surrounding area of 1823b surrounds the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be highlighted by being bordered by the area, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 1804 can be easily exhibited. Thus, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a consists of a band frame-shaped portion on the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a band-shaped portion diagonally crossing the band frame-shaped portion. Since it is provided only in a specific area and not on the entire back surface, the adhesion strength is weaker than in the past. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the tip of the rod-shaped member is pressed against the back surface of the decorative body 1804, even a relatively weak force can resist the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b and the first member The decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the decorative body 1823, and even if the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, it can be removed without tearing the decorative body 1804 in the middle, which improves the workability of removing the decorative body 1804. can be improved.

Also, from the above, if the decorative body 1804 cannot be correctly attached to the flat plate part 1823a of the first member 1823 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, it can be separated from the back side of the first member 1823. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1823c and pressing the decoration 1804 from the back side with the tip thereof, the decoration 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, so that the decoration 1804 can be easily reattached. . In addition, when the first member 1823 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, a rod-like member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the decoration body 1804 is pressed from the back side with the tip of the rod-like member. Since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, it is possible to easily replace the decorative body 1804 when changing the model. Furthermore, as described above, since the decoration body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate part 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, it is easy to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material. Therefore, the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position that does not contact the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the glue surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, by providing the adhesive surface 1804b only on a part (specific part) of the decorative body 1804, the attachment strength will be lower than in the past, but since the entire adhesive surface 1804b is attached to the flat plate part 1823a, It is possible to avoid unnecessarily lowering the adhesion strength due to the separation holes 1823c on the glue surface 1804b, and the adhesion strength of the decorative body 1804 can be maintained sufficiently and adhered to the flat plate part 1823a in good condition. Can be attached.

In addition, since the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on the band frame-shaped portion on the periphery and the band-shaped portion diagonally across (the diagonal portion), the decorative body Since the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from rising from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to peel off from the peripheral edge. In addition, since the part near the center of the decorative body 1804 can be pasted to the flat plate part 1823a by the band-shaped part diagonally crossing the adhesive surface 1804b, the first member Even if the shrinkage difference between the decorative body 1823 and the decorative body 1804 becomes large, swelling or wrinkles of the decorative body 1804 can be reduced, and deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be reliably exhibited, and the larger decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate part 1823a in good condition, which can strongly attract the attention of the players. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made to have translucency, and the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 toward the decorative body 1804 side. In the case where a light source such as an LED that irradiates light is provided, the band frame-shaped glue surface 1804b is located in a location where it does not obstruct the light from the light source, and the light is diffused and attenuated by the glue surface 1804b to decorate the room. Since it is possible to reduce deterioration in the appearance of the luminescent decoration etc. of the body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be decorated with luminescent light in a good condition, and the light source can be seen in a good condition through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823. Thus, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high production effects and display effects.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made difficult to see or hidden from the front side by pasting the decoration 1804 on the mounting recess 1823b. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole 1823c, and to make it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1823c. be able to.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 to press the back surface of the decorative body 1804. Then, since the part of the decorative body 1804 that is pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the edge side tends to float away from the part that the rod-shaped member is in contact with, and the attached decorative body 1804 can be more easily removed.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side of the first member 1823 with a bar member through the separation hole 1823c, the decorative body 1804 is pressed as described above. In addition, since the edge side of the part of the decoration 1804 that is in contact with the rod-shaped member will be lifted from the flat plate part 1823a, by grasping and pulling the raised part of the decoration 1804, the decoration 1804 can be lifted from the flat plate part 1823a. It can be easily removed by rolling it up.

In addition, since the separation hole 1823c is set to a size that allows a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to come into contact with it, in addition to the same effect as described above, an upper limit on the size of the separation hole 1823c is set. Therefore, the presence of the separation hole 1823c can prevent the size of the adhesive surface of the decoration body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary, and the desired adhesion strength to the flat plate part 1823a can be maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is pasted is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the decorative body 1804 is pasted using the border between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide. By attaching the decorative body 1804 to the correct position, it is possible to make it easier to paste the decorative body 1804 in the correct position, reduce failures in pasting the decorative body 1804, and suppress an increase in the cost of the Pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate part, in order to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side, it is possible to insert a flat head screwdriver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom of the mounting recess 1823b. Even if an attempt is made to insert a tool, the insertion of the tool will be blocked by the peripheral wall of the recessed mounting recess 1823b. Since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, as described above, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side to attach the decorative body 1804. By pressing toward the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in conventional technology (pachinko machines), the hole for peeling off the seal penetrates to the rear of the pachinko machine (gaming board), so a linear tool such as a piano wire cannot be passed through the hole. This makes it possible for the game ball B to reach the path, signal line, etc., and there is a problem in that fraudulent acts are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) capable of closing the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. As a result, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member closes the back side of the separation hole 1823c from the outside, so that the hole that passes through to the opposite side of the game board as in a conventional pachinko machine is Since the hole is not penetrated through the hole, it is possible to avoid inserting a wire-shaped illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game board 5 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed.

In addition, when a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 205) for closing the separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 as described above, an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the front side. Even if it is inserted into the separation hole 1823c through the decorative body 1804, the tip of the unauthorized tool will come into contact with the second member, and the insertion (intrusion) of the second member to the outside (inside the game board 5) will be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing unauthorized acts from being carried out, and preventing unauthorized tools from entering the decoration body 1804. By penetrating the decorative member 1804, a trace is left on the decorative body 1804, thereby making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game can be played in the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided on the base unit 700 which is below the game board 5 in the main body frame 4. If the game ball B released from the board 5 becomes jammed, open the security cover 714 that closes the release port 711b of the front base 711, and remove the minus from the notch 713q above the release port 711b among the plurality of notches 713q. By inserting a rod-shaped tool such as a screwdriver and hitting the jammed game ball B, the game ball B can be broken and the jam can be easily cleared. Thereafter, by closing the release port 711b with the security cover 714, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is not inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the release port 711b and the notch 713q. This can be prevented by the security cover 714. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the tip of the tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. And in order to extend the second ball path 702 from the entrance (ball socket 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the tip of the unauthorized tool is brought into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Even if you try to move the unauthorized tool, if it comes into contact with any of the plurality of inhibiting ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the movement of the unauthorized tool will be obstructed by the inhibiting rib 713o. can do. In this way, the security cover 714 and the plurality of inhibiting ribs 713o can prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and have a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the base unit 710 is formed transparently, when the game balls B become clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the location where the balls are clogged can be easily seen from the outside. can be easily recognized, and the troubleshooting work can be facilitated, thereby reducing the maintenance burden on the game hall side.

In addition, in the base unit 710, since the discharge passage for discharging the game balls B is constituted by an independent first ball route 701 and a second ball route 702, a large number of game balls B are discharged from the game board 5 in a short time. When the game ball B is released, it is possible to distribute and discharge the game balls B to each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, so that many of the game balls B can be distributed to one first ball path 701 or second ball path 702. It is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B, and it is possible to avoid the tendency for ball jams to occur due to the concentration of the game balls B. B can be promptly discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect the game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path Since the number of game balls B discharged from the path 702 can be counted, by comparing the number of game balls B discharged from the upstream game board 5, the number of game balls B ejected from the game board 5, the first ball path 701, and the first ball path 702 can be counted. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a fraudulent act on the two-ball path 702, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the discharge path is constituted by the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are independent in the front and back direction, the game ball B (safe By releasing the game ball B (out ball) that was not accepted into the winning hole to different positions in the front and back directions, the game ball B that was accepted into the winning hole and the game ball B (out ball) that was not accepted into the winning hole are released. The game balls B that have not been accepted can be discharged through the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 which are different from each other. Since the game board is equipped with a first ball sensor 703 and a second ball sensor 704 that can detect each game ball B flowing through the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, the game board 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) accepted into the winning hole and the number of game balls B (out balls) not accepted into the winning hole can be counted, so the game board By comparing the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted in step 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity with respect to the prize opening of the game board 5, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 provided in the base unit 710 (ball path member 713). There is no need to provide a sensor, an electronic circuit, etc. for counting the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside on the board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is attached to the front base 711 so that the security cover 714 can rotate with a hinge, even if the release port 711b is opened by the security cover 714, the security cover 714 is closed due to the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation. It is now attached to the front base 711. Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, even if the security cover 714 is opened, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711. This makes it difficult for the security cover 714 to be lost.

Further, the security cover 714 is provided on the lower surface of the base unit 710, and the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so as to be hinge-rotatable. Since it is provided so as to extend to the right (horizontal direction), when clearing the clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall is used. 2, the main body frame 4 is opened forward, the security cover 714 is opened, and a predetermined tool is inserted into the clearing port 711b to clear the ball jam. After that, after closing the security cover 714, the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. At this time, if the security cover 714 is open, the tip of the security cover 714 may be attached to the outer frame 2 (there is a risk of contact). Since the main body frame 4 cannot be closed due to contact with an object), the user can be made aware of forgetting to close the security cover 714, and the security cover 714 can be closed to reliably close the release port 711b. Furthermore, even if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is opened. As a result, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so the main body frame 4 does not become stuck, allowing the main body frame 4 to be opened well, and preventing damage to the security cover 714 and the like. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, since a plurality of notches 713q are provided in the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, dirt and debris that have entered the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are prevented. , the dust attached to the game ball B can be discharged down the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the notch 713q, and the dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 By reducing this, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B due to dust, and it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since a part of the plurality of notches 713q is also used as a tool insertion port for inserting a tool to eliminate ball clogging, there is no need to separately provide a tool insertion port, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is improved. can be simplified, an increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the base unit 710, since the dust that has fallen through the notch 713q is prevented from touching the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 may be damaged by the adhesion of dust. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in the sensor 704, and it is possible to reliably detect the game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member (playing area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) forming the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game balls B circulate on the game board 5 Front component 1000, front member 2531, gate main body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and second member (gaming panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second 1842, etc.) of the first member (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.) 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) are decorated with predetermined decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, Since the decorative bodies 1801, 1802, 1803, etc.) are attached, the appearance of the first member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. In addition, since the adhesive part to which the decoration is attached is recessed from one side of the flat plate part, when the decoration is attached to the adhesive part, the adhesive part on the flat plate part of the first member Since the surrounding area surrounds the decorative body, the decorative body can be highlighted by being bordered by the area, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be easily exhibited, making it possible to improve the pachinko machine. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, the adhesion parts (spec sticker pasting part 1021, The attachment recess 2531a, the attachment recess 2810b, the attachment recess 1821b, the attachment recess 1822b, etc.) are attached to the flat plate part (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate part 1821a, the flat plate part 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate part 2810a, etc.) Since it is recessed from the bottom, the decorative body can be attached in the correct position by using the border between the flat plate part and the adhesive part as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative body. It is possible to reduce the number of failures and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, Decorate the recessed adhesive parts (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) from the flat plate part 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate part 2810a, etc. Since the parts (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decoration 1801, decoration 1802, decoration 1803, etc.) are attached, remove the decoration from one side. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body and the bonding portion, the insertion of the tool will be blocked by the recessed peripheral wall of the bonding portion. In contrast, the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) of the first member are provided in a portion where one side is closed by the decorative body. Therefore, a separation hole is provided in the bonding part where the decorative body is bonded. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative body to one side, the bonding can be completed. The decorative body can be easily released from the attached part, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the recessed attached part. Therefore, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, if it is not possible to properly attach the flat plate part of the first member, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decoration is attached using the tip of the rod-shaped member. By pressing from the other side, the attachment to the flat plate part can be easily released, so the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate part of the first member, and the decorative body can be reattached. . In addition, with the first member and the second member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and by pressing the decorative body from the other side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, the flat plate of the first member can be removed. Since the adhesion to the flat plate part can be easily released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate part, and the work of replacing the decorative body when changing the model can be facilitated. Furthermore, as described above, when the first member and the second member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the flat plate part using the separation hole. It is possible to make it easier to separate the materials, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the flat plate portions (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, Since separation holes (separation holes 1023, separation holes 1821d, separation holes 1822c, separation holes 2531b, separation holes 2810d, etc.) are provided on the front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc., decorations can be placed on the flat plate portion. By adhering (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), the separation hole can be made difficult to see or hidden from one side. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole, and to make it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole. .

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the first members (front component 1000, first component, From the other side of the flat plate part (the front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate part 1821a, the flat plate part 1822a, etc.) of the first member 1821, the first member 1822, etc.), the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c) , etc.) by extending the extending portions (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) to the second member (gaming panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). , the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and a closed space is formed in which the other side of the separation hole is cut off from the outside by the extending portion and the one side surface of the second member. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension part or the other side of the second member, and the hole is not passed through to the opposite side as in conventional pachinko machines. First, it is possible to avoid inserting a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed.

Furthermore, since the second members (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) make the other side of the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) a closed space, , even if the unauthorized tool was inserted into the separation hole from one side through the decoration (spec seal 1020, decoration 1801, decoration 1802, decoration 1803, etc.), the tip of the unauthorized tool was blocked from the outside. It will be inserted into the closed space, and the extension parts (insertion pin 1022, boss part 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) of the first member (front component member 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and the Since the two members can block insertion (intrusion) into the passage section (gaming area 5a, etc.) side and into the pachinko machine 1, unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole. Intrusion can be prevented, and unauthorized acts can be prevented from being carried out through the separation holes and passages, and traces will be left on the decoration when the unauthorized tool penetrates the decoration, making it possible to prevent unauthorized acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can deter players from playing the game and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other. This effort can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with respect to each other by inserting the positioning projection 1841b into the separation hole 1821d, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning projection 1841b. 1821d itself can be made into the above-mentioned closed space, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that has the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a passage member (such as the gaming area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, etc.) having a passage part through which the game balls B circulate ( The front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) provided on the front side of the game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc. Decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532, gate seal) have predetermined decorations on the decorated parts (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, etc.) that are the front side. 2811, etc.), the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. In addition, since the decorated part to which the decorative body is attached is recessed backwards relative to the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction, when the decorated body is attached to the decorated part, the decorated part of the front member is recessed. Since the surrounding parts protrude further forward than the front of the decorative body, the decorative body can be highlighted by being framed by the forwardly protruding portion of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by making it easier to perform the functions.

In addition, the parts to be decorated (the spec seal pasting part 1021, the pasting recess 2531a, the pasting recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorations (the spec sticker 1020, the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532, the gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached are rearward. Because it is recessed, the decoration can be placed around the protruding portion of the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide. By adhering, it is possible to make it easier to attach the decoration to the correct position, to reduce failures in attachment of the decoration, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the parts to be decorated (the spec sticker pasting part 1021, the pasting recess 2531a, the pasting recess 2810b, etc.) are recessed rearward, so that when the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached to the decorated part, the decorative body and the cover are recessed. Since the contact surface with the decorative part is at a recessed position, even if an attempt is made to remove the decorative body adhered to the decorated part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove it. On the other hand, since separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the part to be decorated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the decoration body can be pressed forward. By doing so, the adhesion to the decorated part can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part. Therefore, if it is not possible to properly attach the decoration to the decorated part of the front member during manufacturing, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and its tip presses the decoration from the rear. By doing so, the adhesion to the decorated part can be easily released, so the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part, and the decorative body can be reattached.

In addition, the front members (the front component 1000, the front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage members (the game panel 1100, the center base plate 2540, the gate sensor 2801, etc.) In the separated state, pass the rod-like member from the rear of the front member through the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.), and use the tip of the rod-like member to attach the decoration (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532). , gate seal 2811, etc.) from the rear, it is possible to easily release the adhesion from the part to be decorated (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, etc.). The decoration can be easily removed from the decoration part, and the work of replacing the decoration when changing models can be facilitated. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decoration body can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole. This makes it easier to separate each pachinko machine 1, and the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated part (spec sticker pasting part 1021, pasting recess 2531a, pasting recess 2810b, etc.), the decorated part By attaching decorations (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the separation hole can be made difficult to see from the front or hidden, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance due to the separation hole. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the front member (front component 1000, center role A separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, there are no holes that pass through to the rear, so the piano wire can be inserted through the holes. It is possible to avoid inserting such a linear illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed.

In addition, since the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), unauthorized tools Even if it is inserted into the separation hole from the front through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. This prevents unauthorized tools from entering from the front through the separation hole into the passage section (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole (gate 2003) of gate sensor 2801, etc.). In addition to being able to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out, it also leaves traces on the decorative body when the fraudulent tool pierces the decorative body, making it possible to deter people from committing fraudulent acts and preventing fraudulent acts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent force against.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 is equipped with an LED 3176 for displaying the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by emitting light. In front of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, there are a back front lower middle decorative board 3168, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, and a back front lower left outer decorative board in the back front lower direction unit 3160. Decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3161, back front lower middle decorative body 3161 that can be decorated with light emitting light using LEDs that emit light forward that are mounted on the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc. A left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided, and behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. By providing the LED 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175), the LED 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) from the player by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. However, the presence of the LED 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110, can be made difficult to notice. In this state, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is displayed with light emission by the LED 3176, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. is decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decoration board 3168 etc. Then, the light from the LED 3176 is the light reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, whereas the light from the LEDs on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc. is the light irradiated directly forward. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. which are decorated with luminescence can be made to shine brighter than the second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the player's attention is strongly attracted to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be done. Since the second picture 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 that is displayed as a light-emitting device extends upward from a predetermined position (a position slightly above) close to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. that is decorated with light-emitting light, This can strongly mislead the player into thinking that the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is displayed as a light emitting display using the light from the back, front, lower and middle decorations 3161 etc. that are decorated with light as a light source. A light emitting effect using a light guide plate 3110, which has never been seen before in a pachinko machine, can be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate The light from the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 illuminates the light guide plate 3110, and the transparent light guide plate 3110 can be prevented from being seen by the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can fully exhibit the performance effect of the light emitting display such as 3112, and can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since a light-transmitting back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate When the LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3175 is made to emit light, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be decorated with light emitting light, so in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the second pattern 3112 etc. of the light guide plate 3110. , back, front, lower and middle decorations 3161 and the like can also be shown to the player, and the variety of effects makes it difficult for the player to get bored and prevents the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is displayed by emitting light and the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative board 3174 and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate are made to emit light, as described above, the lower left of the light guide plate is displayed. The LEDs mounted on the decorative board 3174 and the lower right decorative board 3175 of the light guide plate cause the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. to shine brightly, thereby attracting the player's attention. At the same time, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from a predetermined position above the back front lower middle decoration 3161 attracts the player's attention to the back front lower middle decoration. 3161 etc., it can be directed upward through the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to the point where the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that moves up and down in the upper rear effect unit 3200, etc. are provided at the upper end of the second pattern 3112. , depending on whether or not further effects (effect images, movable effects, etc.) are executed at the end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, the player can be excited and excited. This can prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of line groups 3114 including a set of five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each line 3113 independently emits light. In addition, since LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided to correspond to each line 3113, the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 are made to emit light in order. The displayed line 3113 changes to create a pseudo-animation. Since the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is provided at a lower position close to the lower end position (predetermined position) of the plurality of lines 3113, the back side where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with luminescence. Since the light from the front and lower middle decorations 3161 etc. can be used as a light source to make it appear as if it is moving, it can give a strong impact to the players and make them think that something good is going to happen. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special lottery (special lottery result) is drawn when the starting condition is satisfied by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Then, in the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, after the special symbol is variably displayed by lighting and blinking the plurality of LEDs 1401 of the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411, A special symbol indicating a special lottery result is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is partially emitted forward by the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a in the front reflector 1414, respectively. is emitted only to one eye of the player, and at least a portion of the remaining part is emitted only to the other eye of the player, so that the player can see it with both eyes at the same time. As a result, it is possible to see the light from all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b, so it is possible to visually check whether the multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b are turned on or off, etc. The special design by the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be clearly seen, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be exhibited without inferiority.

Then, when the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b (function display unit 1400A and function display unit 1400B) are photographed using a digital camera or a mobile phone camera, as described above, when viewed with both eyes of the player, all Since the light from the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b is made visible, a monocular camera can only take a picture of one of the eyes, and the light emitting status of all the LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b can be seen. This can make it difficult to photograph accurately. Therefore, since the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b cannot be accurately captured, special symbols that generate advantageous gaming conditions (for example, "jackpot" games) that are advantageous to the player are not displayed. It is possible to make it impossible to easily determine whether or not there is a special lottery, and to suppress a decrease in interest by keeping the performance suggesting the lottery result of the special lottery enjoyable until the end.

Further, in the function display unit 1400A, a part of the plurality of display holes 1405a in the front reflector 1405 is tilted in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the remaining part is tilted toward the position of one eye of the player. One is inclined in the front-rear direction and the other is oriented straight in the front-rear direction. As a result, in addition to the same effects as described above, due to the inclination of the display hole 1405a, the light from all the LEDs 1401 can be seen in good condition from players other than those seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to understand the gaming situation, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of other players looking into the game. You can enjoy playing games without worrying.

In addition, in the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of left LEDs 1411a and the plurality of right LEDs 1411b mounted on the function display board 1411 are separated by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) in the left and right direction, and Since the front reflector 1414 is provided with a plurality of display holes 1414a, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.In addition, since each display hole 1414a is oriented straight in the front-rear direction, a plurality of display holes 1414a can be provided. The hole 1414a can be easily removed when molded, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400C, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display board 1421 can be seen from the player side through the transparent light guide plate 1423, so that the special symbols by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be played in good condition. can be shown to others. At this time, if invisible light is irradiated from the invisible light LED 1424a to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side surface will be emitted from the light guide plate 1423 toward the player in front. Since the emitted invisible light cannot be seen by the player, the special symbols formed by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be equally demonstrated. If you take a picture from the front with a digital camera or the like while the invisible light LED 1424a is emitting light, depending on the model of the digital camera, invisible light emitted forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured. By shining brightly in the photograph, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a provided at the rear becomes difficult to photograph, making it difficult to distinguish the light emitting conditions of the plurality of LEDs 1421a, and ensuring the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. It can be realized.

Further, in the function display unit 1400 or the like, the main control board 1310 may cause a plurality of LEDs to blink at a speed that allows the player to recognize that the special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the multiple LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, they appear to be lit from the player's perspective, so the special symbols can be clearly displayed using the multiple LEDs. The display function of the plurality of LEDs can be fully demonstrated. If you take a picture of the LED that is blinking at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 with a digital camera, depending on the shutter speed, the LED may appear to be off even though it is on, so the same situation ( Even if you take a picture of multiple LEDs that are visible in the photo (status), the LEDs may appear lit or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to discern the light emission status of the multiple LEDs. , it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned functions and effects. It should be noted that the predetermined speed at which the LEDs are blinked by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30Hz to 100Hz; if the blinking speed is slower than this, the LEDs will no longer appear to be lit and the special symbol will change. This is because the light appears to be blinking, as if the light is on, and if the blinking speed is faster than this, the light will appear lit when the photo is taken.

Furthermore, a high-brightness LED that can emit light of higher brightness forward than the LED of the function display unit 1400 or the like may be provided close to the function display unit 1400 or the like. As a result, when a high-brightness LED placed close to the function display unit 1400 etc. is emitted, the high-brightness light from the LED makes the user feel dazzling, but the dynamic range allows the player (human being) to feel the brightness. Since the area is wide, the light from the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 etc. can be seen even though it is dazzling, so the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 etc. can be recognized. The display function can be fully demonstrated. If you take a picture of the function display unit 1400 etc. with a digital camera while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, the light from the high-brightness LED will cause halation because the dynamic range of the brightness of the digital camera is narrower than that of a human. occurs, and the area around the LED is blown out, making it possible to make part of the function display unit 1400 etc. invisible. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 etc. unclear, and it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, a plurality of decorations (back front left first decoration 3124, back The respective decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left upper logo decoration part 3122, and back front left decoration part 3127) In a normal state where the left sub-decoration part 3123) is not decorated with light emitting means (LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, etc.), it is provided in front of the back front left decoration unit 3120. The translucent, opaque, white panel board 1110A makes the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 invisible and difficult to recognize, making it difficult for players to recognize the back front upper left corner. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the logo decoration part 3122, etc., and the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be made to look brighter due to the white color, so that the present pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out.

Then, when the back front left upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like are appropriately illuminated and decorated with light by the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration unit 3120 as the game progresses, the light of the back front left upper left logo decoration part 3122 etc. will be irradiated forward through the translucent panel board 1110A, and the light-emitting decorations such as the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 will be reflected on the white panel board 1110A. The light-emitting decorations such as the front upper left logo decoration part 3122 can be shown to the player, and the players can enjoy the light-emitting decorations such as the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Furthermore, by decorating the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 etc. of the back front left decoration unit 3120 with light emitting decoration, it is possible to make the player aware of the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 etc. which could not have been foreseen. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the player can be strongly made to think that a chance has arrived, and the player can be shown a light-emitting display with a high production effect, which can entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the color of the opaque panel board 1110A having light-transmitting properties is white, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3124, back front left decorative body 3124, The respective decorative parts (first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first back left logo decoration part 3124c) One upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, second left sub decoration part 3125f, third back left logo decoration part 3126d, The luminescent colors decorated in the three upper left logo decoration parts 3126e, the third left sub decoration part 3126f, and the base left upper logo decoration part 3127d can be shown to the player as they are through the panel board 1110A. In addition to being able to show players the light-emitting effects of various colors, it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, decorative parts having mutually related shapes ("first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first front left logo decoration part 3124c," 1 upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, 1st left sub-decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub-decoration part 3125f, 3rd A plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body The bases 3127) are overlapped in the front and back direction, and each decorative part is decorated with light emitting light independently by means of light emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130). Since the positions of each decorative part in the front and back directions are different, when each decorative part is decorated with light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect with a sense of depth. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining people.

Further, decorations related to each other are provided on each of the plurality of decorative bodies (first back left decorative body 3124, second front left decorative body 3125, third front left decorative body 3126, and front left decorative body base 3127). section ("first front left logo decoration section 3124c, first back left logo decoration section 3124d, second back left logo decoration section 3125d, third back left logo decoration section 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration section 3124e, 2 upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f). Therefore, the decorative parts can be illuminated in an appropriate order using the light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130), allowing for dynamic light emission. The effect can be shown to the players, and it can strongly attract the attention of the players, and it can also make the players think that something good is going to happen, increasing their expectations for the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the level of interest.

Further, a plurality of decorative bodies (front front left first decorative body 3124, second front left decorative body 3125, third front left decorative body 3126, and front left decorative body base 3127) are provided respectively. Decorative parts ("first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f) , each can be decorated with light emission independently by means of light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130). By appropriately combining the decorative parts, it is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. In addition, since each decorative part can be decorated with light emission independently, the player can create an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) by combining the decorative parts that are decorated with light as the game progresses. ) can be made to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that this will occur.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , a light-shielding part (partition decorative part 3124a, Since the dividing decorative part 3125c and the dividing decorative part 3126c) are provided, the light for making one decorative part emit light is blocked by the light shielding part from being irradiated to the other decorative part, and the other decorative part emits light. Decoration can be prevented, and only one (desired) decoration part can be decorated with light. Therefore, since a plurality of decorative parts provided on one decoration body can be decorated with light emission independently, a variety of light-emitting effects can be created by making the appropriate decorative parts light-emitting decoration according to the progress of the game. can be shown to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , a plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and back front left sub decoration part 3123) are provided at different positions, and a light shielding part (dividing decorative part 3124a) is provided between them. , the dividing decorative part 3125c, and the dividing decorative part 3126c) are provided so that each can be decorated with light emission independently, so that the progress of the game can be improved by making each decorative part of the decorative body decorated in a completely different manner. It is possible to show the players different types of light-emitting decorations depending on the game, and it is possible to strongly attract the players' interest, and it is also possible to entertain the players with the light-emitting effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. can be done.

Furthermore, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) , a hole-shaped light-shielding part (dividing decorative part 3124a, dividing decorative part 3125c) is provided between the plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front upper left logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub-decorative part 3123). , a dividing decorative part 3126c) is provided, so the light for making one decorative part luminescent decoration will be emitted from a part of the light shielding part to the outside. can be done. Therefore, by forming the light-shielding part in a predetermined shape, the light-emitting decoration of the light-shielding part can be shown to the player in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative part, and a more diverse light-emitting effect can be performed.

In addition, since the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a penetrating decorative part 3124b that penetrates back and forth in a predetermined shape, the decorative part When the (first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f) is decorated with light, the surrounding surface of the penetrating decoration part 3124b will emit light. Therefore, in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decoration part, the light-emitting decoration of the penetrating decoration part 3124b can also be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5B, due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the cells 1140 provided at the rear of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 may be damaged by the panel board 1110. Since the cell 1140 is provided in a state where it can expand and contract with respect to the panel board 1110, the cell 1140 can freely expand and contract, even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. No wrinkles or cracks occur in the cells 1140, and the decorative effect of the cells 1140 can be maintained. At this time, the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the panel board 1110 in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction where the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached is biased, that is, behind a wide part of the panel board 1110. Therefore, the pattern of the cell 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be easily seen by the player, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be fully exhibited. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the pictures, and it is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the cells 1140 are provided in the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in an expandable state, and are not pasted on the game panel (panel board) as in the past, so the effort for decorating the transparent panel board 1110 is simplified. Therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Specifically, in the panel board 1110 to be cut, the cells 1140 can be provided after the cutting process, so that the cells 1140 are not damaged during the cutting process of the panel board 1110. Further, the cut surface is not roughened due to the difference in materials between the panel board 1110 and the cell 1140, and a finishing step after cutting can be omitted. On the other hand, in a game panel (panel board) formed by cutting or injection molding to have an opening, the cells 1140 are not pasted, so the effort required for pasting can be eliminated. Therefore, the cell 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 more easily than in the conventional technology, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a part of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the amount of cells 1140 used is reduced compared to the case where the cells 1140 are provided on the entire surface of the panel board 1110. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the cells 1140 are removable from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, by attaching or replacing the cells 1140 with different designs to the panel board 1110, you can ) It is possible to easily respond to changes in specifications and models, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the cell 1140 can be decorated with light by emitting light from various LEDs provided in the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the pattern of the cell 1140 that can be seen through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 will emit light. By being decorated, the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the inside of the game area 5a, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened. The game balls B circulating within the area 5a can be easily seen.

Furthermore, the cells 1140 provided at the rear of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 can be decorated with light by various LEDs provided in the back and front presentation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The light-emitting decorations can illuminate the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a from behind and make them look like silhouettes, making the game balls B easier to see and making the movement of the game balls B more entertaining and entertaining. The impact force of the game ball B can be finely adjusted to suppress the drop and to make it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a by showing it in silhouette. It can be made easier, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 in which the driving operation of the game ball B is devised can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, it becomes easier to focus on the picture in the cell 1140. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the focus will naturally be on the game balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a, and the gaming balls B circulating within the gaming area 5a will be visually recognized. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since a cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is provided at the rear of a part of the transparent panel board 1110, the back-front effect of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear is changed depending on the pattern of the cell 1140. Decorative bodies and the like of the unit 3100 can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, when the decoration provided behind the cell 1140 is not decorated with light, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decoration. Then, when the decoration is decorated with light as the game progresses, the cell 1140 is decorated with light from the decoration, so the presence of the decoration that could not have been predicted by the player. This makes it possible to make the player aware of this, greatly surprising the player, making the player feel strongly that an opportunity has arrived, and making it possible to show the player a light-emitting production with a higher production effect. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, since the back left movable decorative body 3301 of the back rear lower production unit 3300 as a movable decorative body provided at the rear can be hidden from the player's view by the cell 1140, As the game progresses, the back left movable decorative body 3301 is moved from a state where it is invisible due to the cell 1140 to a state where it is visible through the opening 1112 penetrating the front and back of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. As a result, a movable effect in which the back left movable decorative body 3301 appears according to the progress of the game can be shown. Therefore, the appearance of the back left movable decorative body 3301 etc. can indicate to the player that a chance has arrived, so that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, It is possible to make the player feel strongly that a "big hit" game state will occur, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a through which the game balls B circulate is provided in front is made of an opaque milky white color having translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear brighter, and the game balls B circulating inside the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the LEDs and effect display device 1600 etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be When the game panel 1100 is irradiated with light, light from lighting in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, etc. By diffusing in the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the panel board 1110A can be made to appear dimly bright and self-luminous. Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative board 1130 that can irradiate light onto the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110A are emitted, the light is diffused by the opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A that has translucency. Therefore, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be decorated with soft, soft light emitting light like a fluorescent lamp for indirect lighting, making it possible to brighten the inside of the game area 5a and reducing the glare caused by the LEDs 1130a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the eyes of players. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel (panel board), this machine has a game area 5a that emits light like a fluorescent light, which has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the gaming panel 1100 (gaming area 5a), and the player can feel that something good is going to happen, so that the player can enjoy the game. To increase the sense of anticipation, and to make the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a look like silhouettes due to the light from the rear panel board 1110A, thereby making the game balls B easy to visually recognize. This makes it possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, if a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the milky white panel plate 1110A can improve the coloring of the pattern applied to the decorative film. The appearance of the inside of the game area 5a can be improved by decoration of the patterns, and the patterns of the decorative film can be illuminated and decorated through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 by emitting light from the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130. Therefore, the appearance of the gaming area 5a can be further improved, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the area decorated with light emitted by the LEDs 1130a etc. tends to become unclear due to the opaque panel board 1110A having translucency. This can be achieved by devising the pattern (or devising the placement of the LED 1130a, etc.) so that the area where the luminescent decoration becomes unclear is hidden by a part of the decorative film pattern. The decoration can be clearly seen and the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, when a decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material with excellent wear resistance as the decorative film, the panel board 1110A can be protected. Thereby, it is not necessary to use a material with high wear resistance as the material for the panel board 1110A, and a low-grade, inexpensive material can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the shadow of the design of the decorative film is reflected on the panel board 1110A due to the light irradiated from the rear of the decorative film to the front. The pattern can be shown to the player, and the player can see a light-emitting effect in which the pattern, characters, etc. of the minor injury film are projected onto the panel board 1110A from behind, so that when the effect is executed, the player can see the light emitting effect. This can make the player think that something good is going to happen, and can heighten expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. Alternatively, as the light-emitting effect, a decorative film may be used to project a pattern, text, etc. that encourages "hitting right", operation of the effect operation section 301, etc. from the rear onto the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B It is possible to enjoy the typing operation of , the operation of the performance operation section 301 in the player participation type performance, etc., and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is provided on both the front and rear surfaces of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, when light is irradiated onto the side surface of the panel board 1110A using the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, the panel When the board 1110A emits light, the decorative film on the front side is decorated with light, allowing the player to enjoy the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is irradiated from the back to the front of the game panel 1100 using an LED or the like, the shadow of the pattern on the decorative film on the rear side is reflected on the panel board 1110A, and the shadow overlaps with the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. The pattern of the decorative film on the side will appear to change. As a result, a variety of light emitting effects can be shown to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are provided at the rear of the translucent opaque milky white panel board 1110A. When the light is decorated with light as the game progresses, the light passes through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 to some extent forward (to the player's side). It can be partially decorated with light in the same manner as the decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the existence of the back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 provided at the rear can be made visible. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Therefore, by being able to see the light-emitting decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, we believe that something good will happen to the players. This can increase expectations for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 provided at the rear of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a colorless and transparent material, the panel board 1110A has a milky white color. Since it is white in color, the color of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be assimilated with the color of the panel board 1110A and cannot be seen from the front. The presence of the upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be prevented from being noticed. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are decorated with light, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front right upper logo decoration part 3142 are decorated with light through the panel board 1110A as described above. can be seen, so by noticing the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, which could not have been predicted, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can feel that an opportunity has arrived. It is possible to make the player think strongly, and also to show the player a light emission performance with a higher performance effect, to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower production unit 3300 are located behind the opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A in a normal state, making them invisible from the front. As the game progresses, the panel board 1110A moves to the rear of the opening 1112, and becomes visible through the opening 1112, so that the rear left side of the back is visible to the player. A movable effect in which the movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear can be shown. Therefore, the appearance of the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back back right movable decorative body 3302 can suggest to the player that a chance has arrived, which gives the player an advantage over the player. It is possible to make the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) will occur, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by enabling the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 to be decorated with light, when the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are in an invisible state, the back By lighting and blinking the luminous decorations of the rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 (or the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142), a panel with translucency is created. Through the plate 1110A, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rear rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear rear right movable decoration 3302, and the rear rear left movable decoration 3301 and the rear rear right movable decoration 3302 can be visually recognized. The player can be made nervous and excited depending on whether or not the back left movable decorative body 3301 and the back back right movable decorative body 3302 appear or not, and the player is further entertained. It is possible to perform movable performances that are possible.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is provided in the front is made transparent and opaque, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the front side of the panel board 1110A is transparent. Since it becomes easier to focus, just by looking at the panel board 1110A, the game ball B flowing within the game area 5a will naturally come into focus. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A becomes self-illuminating due to light from the outside or the light from the emitting LED 1130a, etc., so that the panel board 1110A becomes self-lit. Since the game ball B that is present can be made to look like a silhouette due to the light from the rear panel board 1110A, the game ball B that is circulating within the game area 5a can be easily recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be made to look like a silhouette. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which can suppress a decline in interest by making players enjoy the game, and which can make it easy to make subtle adjustments to the driving force of a game ball B, and which improves the driving operation of a game ball B. You can enjoy playing games on the main unit.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made of a translucent, opaque, milky white material (synthetic resin), lower grade synthetic resin is used compared to a case where the panel board is transparent. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is made of an opaque milky white color with translucency, the color of the decoration provided on the pachinko machine 1 is made relatively conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the decoration is strongly exhibited. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players, and also to improve the LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 and the decorations provided at the rear of the game panel 1100. When the body or the like is decorated with light emission, the light emission color can be transmitted forward as it is, and the player can enjoy a colorful light emission performance.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A is translucent, opaque, and milky white, the decorations provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 (for example, the back front left decoration unit 3120) etc. can be viewed from the front (player side). It can be made invisible. When the decorative body provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is decorated with light, the light from the decorative body is transmitted forward through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) having translucency. It is possible to partially decorate with light emission, and also to make the player aware of the existence of the decoration provided at the rear. Furthermore, when the decoration provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 is moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the decoration becomes visible from the front through the opening 1112. This allows the player to see a movable effect in which decorations hide and appear. In this way, a variety of light emitting effects and movable effects can be presented to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, the translucent, opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A can diffuse the light from the LEDs 1130a, etc. of the panel decoration board 1130, so that the game panel 1100 can be decorated with soft light and a soft feel. This makes it possible to brighten the inside of the gaming area 5a with a feeling similar to indirect lighting, and also to suppress the glare caused by the LED 1130a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the eyes of players.

In addition, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be decorated with light by the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, for example, the LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, and each can be made to emit light independently. When the right side of the game area 5a is illuminated according to the game situation (progress), the right side of the game area 5a becomes brighter through the panel board 1110A. It is possible to prompt the player to hit the game ball B toward the right side of the game area 5a ("hit to the right"). On the other hand, when the left side is illuminated, the left side of the gaming area 5a becomes brighter through the panel board 1110A, so that the player's attention can be directed to the left side of the gaming area 5a. It is possible to prompt the player to hit the game ball B into the ball ("hit to the left"). In this way, by emitting light from the LEDs 1130a at appropriate positions, it is possible to intuitively understand that the light-emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) advises "hitting left-handed" or "hitting right-handed." This allows the player to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and also allows the player to enjoy the new sense of light-emitting performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the game panel 1100 is configured by a plate-shaped panel board 1110A (panel board 1110) and a panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A in a frame shape that is thicker than the panel board 1110A. Therefore, if the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is the same as the thickness of the game panel of a conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel board 1110A (panel board 1110) where the game area 5a is provided in the front will be made thicker than that of the conventional game panel. Since the amount of material used for the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel board 1110A) is reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Moreover, since the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel board 1110 or the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be attached and detached, and the panel holder 1120 can be used as a common general-purpose component. becomes. As a result, the cost of the panel holder 1120 can be reduced by mass-producing the panel holder 1120, and by manufacturing the panel plate 1110 or panel plate 1110A compatible with each model, it is possible to make new or etc. costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by locking the elastic claw 1062 to the magnetic sensor 1050 while the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060, The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060. Furthermore, when the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in a holding container 1072 having an elastic claw 1072a, by locking the elastic claw 1072a to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, A magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5. At this time, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the gaming area 5a, the holding member 1060 and the like attract lines of magnetic force from the magnet 1055. It is possible to avoid the magnetic sensor 1050 from being put away, and it is possible to prevent the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and fraud using the magnet 1055 can be detected at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can deter illegal acts and has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, as described above, the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 made of non-magnetic materials can avoid attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet 1055, thereby preventing a decrease in the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a with a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in a conventional pachinko machine, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced compared to the conventional pachinko machine. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the accommodating portion 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 and 1072a without using metal screws made of magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. This effort can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and by locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be placed in any position and its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, a pachinko machine 1 is provided that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged into the housing part 1061 by the protrusion 1063 on the holding member 1060, it is possible to suppress fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050 due to the urging by the protrusion 1063. This can reduce disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or occurrence of poor contact, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor substrate 1052 is attached to the sensor board 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. The mounted sensor body 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and by making the magnetic sensor 1050 visible, it is possible to make the player aware of the fact that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy. It is possible to deter people from committing acts, and it is also possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, even if the sensor main body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, an ordinary player does not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, so it does not bother him. On the other hand, since a person who intends to commit a fraudulent act gazes at the inside of the gaming area 5a, the contrast between the white sensor board 1052 and the black sensor main body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 easy to see. I can see it. Therefore, by noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to deter players from committing fraudulent acts using magnets, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made less noticeable, and the sensor board 1052 can be used as a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. It can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a normal player, and it is possible to avoid deteriorating the appearance of the gaming area 5a.

Furthermore, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether or not the sensor body 1051 is damaged, thereby making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 easier. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material, the holding member 1071, the holding container 1072, etc., the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071 are attached to the game board 5. When attaching using a magnetic material such as a screw, the portion of the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 to be attached to the game board 5 may be placed at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or in the gaming area 5a. It becomes possible to provide it at a position outside the magnetic detection range. As a result, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetism acting on the gaming area 5a, and prevent fraudulent activities using the magnet 1055. A pachinko machine 1 with high deterrent power can be provided.

[21. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 210 to 215. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 210, and FIG. 212 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, and error processing. Display processing will be explained.

[21-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc. are available. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is used to determine whether or not to open/close the second starting port door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and this normal To use for determining the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for symbol hit determination, and for determining the fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol that is fluctuatedly displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers etc. for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

[21-2. Movement of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and quickly presets it based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the stored various information as numerical values is calculated as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the sum value does not match, the main control MPU 1310a uses its internal The ID code is retrieved from the non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining per symbol. The mechanism is such that the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is used when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the ID code.A two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous power outage is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate 2003 at each predetermined interval, the second starting port door 2411 is opened and closed to cause the game ball B to pass through the second starting port 2004. cannot generate an inducible state.

[21-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211. When this main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error release switch), and here, it completely erases information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. It operates as a RAM clear switch function. In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is to be cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated. Note that since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing of this routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not pressed. The person who does this will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where it can perform a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when the various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and turning it ON. This is performed based on the key being turned on and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Note that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

In the determination in step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and also switches the setting key on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the setting key switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting changes and confirmation display of the set values 1 to 6 at the time of the ON operation. The value is set to 1 when display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when changing settings or confirmation display is not permitted. Note that the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. Note that at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510. ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that no power outage warning signal is input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. (Step S25). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not the value 1, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1. , and determines whether the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined that various information is to be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). . This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This is a flag indicating whether or not the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main control side power off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After turning the pachinko machine 1 clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the push operation section of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, which returns to this routine. Main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-described step S14 that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 in the above-described step S16A. In the determination in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on due to the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination of step S25 described above. , and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and following the setting change processing of step S37, which will be described later, the step described below is performed. In the process of S38, by clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error"). ``How to cancel'').

An alternative method to this first RAM error release method is to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and leave the setting key cylinder at its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-described step S14 that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is being operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above-described step S16A. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is activated due to the setting key ON signal. 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned on, and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Therefore, in the determination of step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set. Assuming that the value is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the same as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are cleared except for a specific area, so that the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be continued. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error release method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control internal A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is present, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined setting value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, a setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be described in detail later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633. As mentioned above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, settings switch button, and error release switch), and here, the settings switch button is used to select and switch setting values. It operates as a function of Every time the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal to that effect (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined If the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, a specific area will be deleted from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. and clear it (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area in which setting values are stored, an out port 1008, a first sub out port 2021, and a second sub out port provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. 2022, and a dedicated area for counting out balls, in which the result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected in step 2022 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out pitch counting area stores the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the The result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected through the second sub-out port 2022 is stored.

Note that the main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a controls the thumbnail when erasing various information because the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the push operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 has been operated is an instruction to clear the RAM. If the values do not match, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is retrieved, and the retrieved ID code is An initial value derivation process is performed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the above-mentioned initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination. Set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to games, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so a random number is input to a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power restoration) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning/losing random number updating process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a outputs output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory prize winning port solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the special monitor, etc. The current drive signal is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and then executes the main control side power-on process again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM is It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is subsequently restored, this main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the determination in step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when changing the setting value is permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that if the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 will be in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, when the game hall is closed) , etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information mentioned above before the next business starts, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall must press the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation section. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information, including various information such as game information, from the main control's built-in RAM.As mentioned above, in addition to changing the setting values, the setting key can also be used to Because it is an important key that allows you to check the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, the setting value Even if no changes are made to the information, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, staff such as game hall clerks can erase (clear) game backup information from the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the clear switch, game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, and the island equipment of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the main control side is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time waiting process of step S22, the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the charged charge is applied as +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer described later Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may become impossible to complete the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process. Therefore, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall, and the RAM is forcibly stored in the built-in RAM of the main control even if the staff such as the staff member at the game hall does not express their intention to clear the RAM. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information that is currently available must be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control board performs the main control side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is configured to be able to complete the process, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM by using the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 In S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is continued. If you do this repeatedly, you will not be able to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination A mechanism has been adopted that can avoid updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The software is used to ensure that the contents of the main controller's built-in RAM (game information, game information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, we will discuss the problem when the main control return destination command upon power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. A problem that occurs when the command to be sent when the power is turned on is not reserved as the main control return destination command at power-on is not set in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 controls the main control board 1310 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes. The state changes from being closed by the member to being open.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round it is at all. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, the main control board sends a big winning hole 1 count display command that tells the number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005. 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot gaming state, for example. From the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between rounds). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and the jackpot 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the opening of the grand prize opening for the fifth time to instruct the state to shift to the open state (that is, to start opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed that informs the player that the gaming state is such that a game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player (for example, the second starting port door 2411 is open). While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen that informs the player on the display area of the production display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the second starting port door 2411. If a momentary power outage or power outage occurs when the game ball B can be guided to the second starting port 2004 by the opening operation, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in step S34. The starting port solenoid 2412 is restored to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of the built-in RAM. The drive is started and the second starting port door 2411 is closed, thereby transitioning to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to return by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey the information in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game cannot be played. There was also the problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to start driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the big prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen that indicates what round it is). cannot be displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600, but the screen informs that the jackpot game state is in progress and the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the grand prize opening.") This can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the player who is seated at the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. When the game state is such that game balls can be accepted into the secondary start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen (for example, The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that tells the player the message "The second starting port door 2411 is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port." 1600 to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when the power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command is used when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is The above-mentioned low-level information is included in the information that instructs when clearing is to be performed, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be explained when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) )), it is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state where

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[21-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 210 and 211.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, detects the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the out sensor 664, detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, and from the RAM clear switch. Operation signal (RAM clear signal), detection signal from the door frame release switch, detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, signal from the setting change button, transmitted by prize ball control processing described later. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the given prize ball command is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are respectively read, the corresponding starting port prize command classified into others is sent as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if no game ball entered or the input will be ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state in which inputs are being made to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which empty terminal processing has been performed) is performed from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the big winning prize. Detection signal from mouth sensor 2402, detection signal from out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), The payout control board receives the detection signal from the door frame release switch, the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has been normally received can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been performed among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, the ball is ejected from the game board 5, and distributed through the out ball path 663. Game balls (those that are driven into the gaming area 5a and accepted into winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.) A game ball ejected from the board 5 and a game ball that is hit into the game area 5a and then is not received in any winning hole but is accepted in any of the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022. When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball (game ball ejected from the game board 5), an operation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the total collected ball counter, and a detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 is output. is input and the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that is received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 and circulates through the first ball path 701, the out port 1008, An operation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of an out ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called out balls, collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, and the second A detection signal from the ball sensor 704 is input and driven into the gaming area 5a to open the general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc. When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that is received in the winning hole and circulates through the second ball path 702, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole 2005 are detected. An operation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of a safe ball counter that counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, accepted into the winning openings such as , accessory winning opening 2006, etc. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects the game balls received in the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. and the game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022, and the first ball sensor 703 detects both the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022. Detects the collected game balls, and the second ball sensor 704 accepts them into the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. Detects the game ball that has been played.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the value of the total recovered ball counter which is the calculation result of the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. The total number of game balls accepted into the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022 is stored in an area dedicated to counting the total recovered balls in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control; The value of the out ball counter is stored as the total number of out balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub out port 2021, and the second sub out port 2022 in an out ball counting area in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control, and the safe ball counter is stored. The value of is specified in the main control built-in RAM as the total number of safe balls accepted into the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. Store in the safe ball counting area in the area. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total recovered ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls that have been hit, is calculated. , stores the calculation result in a base calculation area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the total recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, Every time the total number of game balls collected at the winning opening, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is created to notify that fact, and the command is sent as the transmission information. Store in the output information storage area. Note that the main control MPU 1310a is configured to collect further balls when the calculated results of the recovered ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, the value is 65535). If you add (increment) the value of the counter, out ball counter, or safe ball counter by 1, the values of the recovered ball counter, out ball counter, or safe ball counter will overflow and become the value 0. conduct.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey this fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If the payer ACK signal indicating that the command has been successfully received by the payout control board 633 is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command is issued to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It may be created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5. , the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5"), etc. This counts the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. There is. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of pitches is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave emission has occurred in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display informing that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnet counter is incremented by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is initialized. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet notification command classified into a notification display to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by using such a mechanism to reliably detect and notify magnet spots, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game hall clerks to discover magnet spots at an early stage. It has become.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2402 is input when the jackpot game state is not (big winning hole When a game ball enters a game ball in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is categorized as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Or, the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting area is the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the accessory winning opening. The total number of game balls detected by the sensor 2601, that is, the games actually accepted into the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. If the total number of balls is different, a winning abnormality display command is created which is classified as an abnormal state into a notification display, and is stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation spot and/or the magnet spot are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection; When no fraud is detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame release switch detects that the main body frame release switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 due to the input of the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set such that the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine is performed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). It is constituted by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set until the firing is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is The random number is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery"), and takes out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number and stores it in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2401. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal is sent to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening/closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the 2nd round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. A lighting signal is set to be output to the second round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of rounds is 15, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is The function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp lights up, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights it in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and used as the normal winning opening winning information built in the main control. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether or not the second starting port door 2411 is to be opened and closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting port door 2411 is in an open state, and a game state is established in which a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. It's a state. The fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above, various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization performance are created, and the transmission information described above is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output information is set to output a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. While storing it as information in the transmission information storage area, setting the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 to open and close the second starting port door 2411, and storing it as output information in the output information storage area described above, If the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. A pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created, and are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the normal symbols of the function display unit 1400 are displayed according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. A lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the display, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information, the main control MPU 1310a sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. The second starting port door 2411 outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening/closing member of the big winning opening 2005 when in the jackpot game state, and opens and closes the second starting port 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display. Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as an information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting slot prize information output signal, are output to the payout control board 633, and firing permission logic or firing stop logic (launch disallowance logic) outputs a launch permission signal set to the payout control board 633, and outputs a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls that have been hit. Or, it outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a big winning hole 1 count display command that corresponds to the big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2402 when a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 is detected) , various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands categorized as related to normal electric role production, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands categorized as status display. commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 plans to pay out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls that enter the various winning holes provided on the game board 5) A main prize ball that instructs to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 every time the number of game balls reaches 10 balls. number information output command, etc.), and various commands categorized into specific histories (for example, general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.) Every time the number of game balls collected at the mouth or out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to notify that fact, and a ball collection command is provided to notify that the setting value has been changed. A setting change command to notify the user, an error display command to report that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that it cannot be trusted), and a dedicated setting value described later in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. (such as a setting key ON operation command that conveys confirmation of the setting value stored in the area) is stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main serial transmission port built in the control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission as main serial data from the transmission shift register. It is now possible to do so. When powering on the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the data is transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

In addition, the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub out opening 2021, and the second sub out opening 2022. Every time the number of game balls collected reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 responds to each received ball collection command. In, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, and other winning openings and out openings 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022. The number of game balls collected is counted, and the ball collection information (the counted value (i.e., general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening The total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022) and the updated date and time. (information that associates with). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the game hall's business hours without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022. ) and the updated date and time are stored in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 for operation. Ball recovery information is created again from the day it started, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is now possible to do so. That is, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which constitute the main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and the power is restored afterwards, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage can be restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 can be kept in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 211, the power-on state command classified as power-on is set. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[21-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a obtains the current installation values as shown in FIG. 213 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when taking out the setting value, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed as a setting value, and in this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines in the determination in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, in the determination in step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the setting change is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button is operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is being input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is being operated when a detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while determining that the setting switching button is not being operated when a detection signal from the setting switching button is not being input. It is determined that the

In the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222 ). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (in other words, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting key switch is turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turning it OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, When the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether the setting switching button is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, and performs the determination of step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. If it is determined that this is the case, the process returns to step S216, and each time the setting switch button is operated, the set value is updated by adding 1 until the enter key is operated, and the setting display 1310g is updated. , and if the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value that was updated when the setting switch button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage will be used for main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when determining in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the enter key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of .

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, when the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and by performing the OFF operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow changes to the settings (values set among settings 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permission is given to change settings. The value is set to 1, and the value is set to 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting value from being changed from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU 1310a confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a settings change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. This is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[21-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. 214. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the value is 1, the setting Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not displayed for confirmation.

In the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, detects the detection from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move against the outer frame 2. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no setting value, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a immediately ends this routine, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and the current setting value is subsequently obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a checks the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ), this routine ends. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process that is this routine has started (that is, to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is a command to convey.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates setting key ON operation history information (when the setting value has been confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). information that associates the date and time).

Further, upon receiving the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates the above-mentioned ball recovery history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. A predetermined condition for permitting display of specific history information is established, such as permitting display of specific history information such as . The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information to rotate the touch operation section 302 and press the press operation section 303 in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By doing this, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, if the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as is, but if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it does not display the setting value for confirmation. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , sets the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and ends this routine. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). This is a command that conveys.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the CPU enters a state in which the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 controls the CPU immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image that was displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt disallowance (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but since the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped once started, the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU 1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Furthermore, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[21-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 214), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 215 (step S400). As mentioned above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of launch permission logic, it is possible to communicate that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts the step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, so when the power is restored, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic becomes firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the main control MPU 1310a starts as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the process has started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and the prescribed output port is It is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633.

When the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting shown in FIG. Since interrupts are not permitted in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine is finished, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. 212 Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the specified output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial settings in step S406 are the same as the serial communication initial settings in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213 and the serial communication initial settings in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board sending command sending process in step S410 is the same as the peripheral control board sending command sending process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 213 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This processing is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 210, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 214) and the process performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) to update.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a message in the display area of the production display device 1600 with a message "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member" on a blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of a message image in white text, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the attendant." is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed such that the volume is forcibly set to the maximum volume without depending on the volume set, and is played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker of the body frame 4, etc.). The process of notifying the RAM error using the error display command is the process with the highest priority. Give top priority to error notification.

[22. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 216, and FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[22-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 216 to 218. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is not an instruction to clear the RAM. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match. When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination at step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands sent in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to time management such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if you are unable to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when the power is restored. The values are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal can be outputted to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the payout device 580 is sent to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of game balls is abnormal. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the CR unit. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. and determine whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not by using the current fullness and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the out-of-ball judgment time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball judgment time is reached, check whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information informing that fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area mentioned above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, in step S546 the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, in step S548 port output processing is performed, in step S550 port input processing is performed, and in step S552 performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 216 to 218.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibit and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 219 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[23. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 224. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority order of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") includes the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and Various I/O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[23-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 220. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing described later, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs commands related to control of game effects, which are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), it returns to step S1006 and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, The rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the contact operation section 302 is based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various information obtained from the operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation The rotation direction of the touch operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the touch operation section 303 is set. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, press operation section 303), and the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of LED used as direct light is changed, while the touch operation unit 302 is When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the touch operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. A staff member such as the above can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the touch operation section 302, a specified brightness value from a first brightness value to a 31st brightness value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that there is only one level, and it is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values mentioned above. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is set by the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can use the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, it is possible to use the LED as direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (in other words, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, since the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), The lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without disturbing the relationship.

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, delays in processing time can be prevented, but so-called dropped frames may occur. 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") is configured to give priority to presentations using presentation sounds such as music and sound effects that match various presentations.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extract it) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the production operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance specification value is used. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of decorative symbols on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, and the big winning hole 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted into the big winning hole 2005 are analyzed, and it is determined which game is currently being played. Recognize the condition.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed from the highest priority registered in advance, and will automatically transition to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the voltage is changed from 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the sound is muted, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass frame speaker on the main body frame 4. Sound effects are played. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the volume adjustment switch, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. ing.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for the performance sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board during the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC are Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is In fact, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and converted into audio data. It is designed to be output as .

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3, The volumes flowing from the top side speaker and the bass body frame speaker of the body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the The speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data. , it completely depends on the sound data of the notification sound built into the truck being used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the truck being used. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. This amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 may occur or a fraud against the pachinko machine 1 may occur. To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of an action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the performance sound is installed is forcibly set to mute, and the sound performance is set to mute. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is installed, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined, and this synthesis is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value that becomes the volume flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. Then, the amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it does not flow from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is generated by the above-mentioned sound generation. progress according to schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the board volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch as a sub-volume value. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set again. The sound is set) and is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass body frame speaker on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass sound on the main body frame 4. Although the production sound is played from the main body frame speaker, the muted sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the main body frame speaker for bass in the main body frame 4, the performance sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but the sound generation schedule data continues until a predetermined period of time has passed after the notification sound starts playing. The flow will start again from the point where it progressed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the IC's sound source. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or fraudulent activity by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeatedly performed until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this manner, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value 1, and in step S1010, 1ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[23-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 220 is being executed; Each is set to a value of 0 when the execution of the process is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control section steady processing, and when the peripheral control section steady processing is executed, the value is 1; They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220. In order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 1, the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes about 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 220. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control section steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[23-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 220. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. 222 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 220. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, contact operation unit (rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation section 301, the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, It is possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the effect progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[23-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 223 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer.When the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data, which is the mode. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the sum value (sum value), and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[23-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control block power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 224, and checks whether the power outage warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving process. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal is input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal is inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 220 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage notice signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first starts the process using the first starting port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 225. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the mode suggests a "5R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode suggests a "2R jackpot", A process for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the big winning opening 2005, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, and the 2R jackpot game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state becomes a mode that suggests a "2R jackpot". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set. The time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches 0, but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches 0. Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later.

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S237), executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), and executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238). On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. 226, In step S241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game performance is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passing process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1 (value of the special reservation number counter), and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the command is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of retained memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the starting winning that has occurred is regarded as a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot. A peripheral control installed in the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting prize. You will be able to understand IC.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. , and upon receiving the first variation pattern command that notifies the start of variation display of the first special symbol, the advance data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. 228, In step S251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "1" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as a process in step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in a second special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special retention number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 1). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the number of game balls entering the second starting port 2004 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second pending memory number based on the ball being entered is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the number of second pending memories is reduced. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", if the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuating continues for a long time, or if the period in which the number of second pending memories is at the upper limit continues for a long time, the second starting port 2004 This prevents the player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to get a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball enters the ball.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to

In addition, the said 1st special symbol process flag is operated in the said main control side power-on process (refer FIG. 210) so that it may indicate that the said 1st special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Thereafter, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process regarding the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special random number (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 232(A) shows that the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). The system includes a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game is in a low probability time saving state) and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time saving state). . In the low probability hit judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the setting value is 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3. The first special random number wins the jackpot with a probability of 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 5, 1/279 if the set value is 6, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is a loss determination value. In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process, in the low probability hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, and when the setting value is 2. 1/309 if the setting value is 3, 1/299 if the setting value is 4, 1/289 if the setting value is 5, 1/279 if the setting value is 6, and 1/269 if the setting value is 6. The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are a loss. That is, the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than that of the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This is considered to be a more advantageous situation for the player. Furthermore, the hit determination table at high probability is configured such that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased ten times as compared to the hit determination table at low probability.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a jackpot (step S312), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S314), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that the winning is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reaching, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating not reaching. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table in the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S317) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) and whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232(B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

in particular,
1. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is set 15 times. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are 15R Probable Variable Jackpot that controls the execution period of the variable display to be shorter than normal until the variable display is executed 77 times, and controls to a high probability time saving state in which special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual 2. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is changed five times ( By repeating 5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed. 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the display is executed 77 times,
3. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is changed twice ( By repeating (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state ends. If the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed 77 times later, the time-saving state will be terminated if the jackpot does not occur, and the 2R jackpot that is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the time saving state,
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

Also, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, compare the second symbol random number read out in the second special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232(B). The type of jackpot is determined by, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.
in particular,
1. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is set 15 times. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are 15R Probable Variable Jackpot that controls the execution period of the variable display to be shorter than normal until the variable display is executed 77 times, and controls to a high probability time saving state in which special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual 2. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is changed five times ( By repeating 5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed. 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the display is executed 77 times,
3. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is changed twice ( By repeating (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state ends. If the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not executed 77 times later, the time-saving state will be terminated if the jackpot does not occur, and the 2R jackpot that is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the time saving state,
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R jackpot. 92 judgment values are distributed in the case where . That is, when a lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a jackpot, there is a 4% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed for a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed for a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R Eight judgment values are distributed in case of a jackpot. That is, if a lottery result based on the second special random number yields a jackpot, there is a 46% probability that it will be a 15R variable jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 4% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. . In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This creates an advantageous situation for the player.

Moreover, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, if it is determined to be a 5R jackpot, the 5R jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be a 15R jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol. The 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads the small hit flag in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the jackpot flag is not set in step S131 and the small hit flag is set (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. 232(C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 200 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball into a small winning game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the accessory prize opening 200. When the game ball accepted into the object winning hole 2006 is distributed to the V winning hole 2007 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time. (For example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won the big winning hole 2005, the game ball can win a big prize by repeating the opening/closing pattern 14 times. The control is made to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the ball into the mouth 2005, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the fluctuation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. 1. First small win that shortens the display execution period than usual and controls to a high probability time saving state in which special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual 2. The opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 200 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball into a small winning game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the accessory prize opening 200. When the game ball received in the material winning hole 2006 is distributed to the V winning hole 2007 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or the big winning hole 2005 A 15R jackpot in which game balls can (easily) enter the big winning hole 2005 by repeating the opening/closing pattern that closes 14 times when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the big winning hole sensor 2402. If the game state is controlled and the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state. The second small win is controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated if there is no jackpot during this period, and if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state ends. One of the two types of small wins is determined.

In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed in the case of the first small win. That is, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% probability that the first small win will be won and the second small win will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability that it will be a first small win, and a 90% probability that it will be a second small win.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a first small hit, the first small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be a second small winning symbol, the second small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol. .

If neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a losing symbol (step S327). After the process of determining the stop symbols has been performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, in which the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, out of reach) is selected. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328 ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R jackpot from the received judgment result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, is determined to be a small hit symbol ("Final Battle"), and if a 5R time-saving jackpot is specified, the 5R time-saving jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot is specified, the 15R probability-variable jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right will be the same odd-numbered symbol among the symbols ``0'' to ``9''). combination). In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the pattern is determined and a miss is identified, it is determined to be a miss symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation is determined. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbols are controlled to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time-saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times after the jackpot game state. The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of jackpots have occurred after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot game state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state, and then a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, twice) occurs, the time-saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the predetermined number of times. , it may be controlled to a normal state. Further, even if the number of jackpot occurrences is less than a predetermined number, the control may be made to be in a non-time saving state during the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If it is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit corresponding to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal If it is a loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, a variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S348), and the surroundings for starting the determined variation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the fluctuation random number with the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol fluctuation display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter, in which the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, is "0". do. If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state control (time saving control) is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a miss, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second in the time short state, is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in such a way that the special symbol fluctuation time information, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the time-saving state is such that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the non-time-saving state. Fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, a variable timer in which a variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process moves to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 236, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the step As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time saving control (control in the time saving state) is ended and the non-time saving control is performed. (normal state control) starts.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. Then, the jackpot game is controlled to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) and the jackpot opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S402) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S403) and the jackpot game ends. Executes control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time saving jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time saving jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is finished, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A). Opening/closing control of the grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 2005, the grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects It is reset when the opening/closing control (opening/closing control that repeats an opening/closing pattern that closes when detected 2, 5, or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386), and if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying a message indicating that the small winning game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S392). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S393). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, similarly, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) 2 small winning start command) is set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set in the small winning process (step S411) of the small winning control process (step S236A), which will be described later. ), when the opening/closing control of the accessory prize opening 200 according to the type of small win (for example, the opening/closing control that repeats twice the opening/closing pattern of opening the accessory prize opening 200 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it) is completed. will be reset. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stops displaying) until the next special symbol variable display starts in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process moves to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the state will shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change display stop state becomes a jackpot symbol. 1510 or the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a jackpot symbol, or the big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be opened based on the start of the next round. A big winning hole that is controlled and closed after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the big winning hole 2005. Opening process (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for the jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state ends when all rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, in the above-mentioned big winning hole opening process (step S402), at the start of a round to control the big winning hole 2005 in an open state, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the big winning hole 2005 is closed. At the end of the round controlled by the state, a jackpot round end command is set according to the number of rounds. In addition, the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Rainbow color effect]
Next, a description will be given of a rainbow effect that is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot (for example, when a jackpot occurs (jackpot confirmation effect), when a decorative pattern becomes a reach (ready-to-reach notice), etc.). The rainbow effect in this example is to display a predetermined form (pattern, character, text, etc.) using multiple colors on the effect display device 1600, and then change the display color in any display area of the effect display device 1600 for a short time. At the same time, in conjunction with the transition of the display color on the performance display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are changed to a plurality of emitting colors (at least two or more emitting colors). ), and the color of the emitted light changes in a short period of time. In the following, the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are all linked to execute a rainbow color effect, and a predetermined form to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is executed. The display color and the LED light emitting color of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are shown to change in a short time, The display color or the emitted light color may be changed in a short time using one or any combination of the LEDs on the decorative board and the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 238(A), in this example, when a rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas, the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and each area is A rainbow effect display mode with different colors is displayed. Then, as the variable time passes, the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the sizes of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, and Change shape in a short time.

Note that the rainbow color effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be in a form that does not have information such as characters or letters over the entire area of the effect display device 1600, for example, a plurality of striped forms as shown in FIG. 238(A). The display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of areas (in the example shown in FIG. 238(A), five display areas from the first display area a to the fifth display area e) by the lines shown in FIG. 238(B). ), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas (in the example shown in FIG. 238(B), five display areas from the first display area a to the sixth display area f) by a plurality of radial lines. The first display area a to the fifth display area may be divided and colored in different colors for each area, and the color of some or all of these multiple areas may be changed in a short time. Characters (people, plants, animals, objects, landscapes, etc.) and letters, etc., are colored in different colors for each character and/or for each character (for each block (composition) that has one meaning, such as a character, letter, word, etc.) Coloring (for example, the first "C" of the letter "CHANCE" is "white", "H" is "yellow", "A" is "green", "N" is "blue", the second letter is "white", "H" is "yellow", "A" is "green", "N" is "blue", ``C'' is displayed in purple and ``E'' is displayed in red.), one character or letter is divided into multiple areas and each area is colored in a different color (for example, each petal is displayed in a different color). The word "CHANCE" can be displayed in a striped pattern in multiple colors, or the word "CHANCE" can be displayed in the first area a by seven virtual lines from line 1 to line 7, as shown in FIG. 238(C). (The area surrounded by lines 1 and 2 of the letters “CHANCE”) to 6th area f (the area surrounded by lines 6 and 7 of the letters “CHANCE”) By displaying the areas of ``CHANCE'' in different colors, each character of ``CHANCE'' is displayed in a striped pattern in multiple colors (for example, the first area a (the area surrounded by line 1 and line 2 of the characters ``CHANCE'') is "white", the second area b (the area surrounded by lines 2 and 3 of the letters "CHANCE") is "yellow", and the third area c (the area surrounded by lines 3 and 4 of the letters "CHANCE") is The fourth area d (the area surrounded by lines 4 and 5 of the letters "CHANCE") is colored blue, and the fifth area e (the area surrounded by lines 5 of the letters "CHANCE") is colored green. and line 6) is displayed in purple, and the sixth area f (the area surrounded by line 6 and line 7 of the letters "CHANCE") is displayed in red), the color or shape of these forms, Alternatively, it may be possible to change both the color and shape of the form in a short time, change the size and shape of each of multiple areas displayed in a predetermined color, or change the display position (move). ) to change the display color in any display area of the effect display device 1600 (the area where the background other than the characters "CHANCE" is displayed has the same color as the characters "CHANCE"). It may also be possible not to display the information (for example, by changing the value in a short period of time).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are divided into multiple groups, and the light emission can be controlled for each group. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined color for each group. The emitted light color of each group is changed in a short period of time as the variable time passes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 239, the plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are the back front upper left decorative board for illuminating the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board are used to decorate the first board light emitting group, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123. 3128 is the second board light emitting group, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 is the third board light emitting group. A back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for luminescent decoration of the front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, and a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for luminescent decoration of the front lower middle decorative body 3161; A back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for luminescent decoration of the decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and a back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the fourth board light emitting group, a back front lower right decorative board for lighting the back front right logo decoration part 3141. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 are divided into a fifth board light emitting group, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are divided into a sixth board light emitting group. When the rainbow color effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group so that the LEDs in the same group emit light in the same color, and the light emission is controlled so that the emitted light color is different from the emitted light color of the LEDs in different groups. It looks like this.

Note that among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 as a rainbow color effect, multiple LEDs mounted on the same board are not limited to dividing them into the same group and controlling the light emission for each group. Even the LEDs to be mounted may be divided into different groups and the light emission may be controlled for each group. For example, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 on which the letters "Queen" are printed are divided into different groups for each letter. The light emission may be controlled for each group, or each character may be divided into a plurality of areas by predetermined virtual lines, and the light emission may be controlled for each group (for example, each character of "Queen" is divided into three areas: upper, middle, and lower, and among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173, the LEDs belonging to the upper area are collectively controlled to emit light as an upper group. Among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the logo decoration board 3173, the LEDs belonging to the middle area are collectively controlled to emit light as a middle group, and among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower logo decoration board 3173, the LEDs belonging to the middle area are controlled to emit light. (For example, the LEDs belonging to the group are controlled to emit light together as a lower group, and the letters "Queen" are controlled to emit light in a striped pattern.)

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 240, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame top left decorative board 456. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457 are included in the frame light emitting group A, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 are included in the frame light emitting group. B, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the plate left decorative board 273 provided behind the plate left decorative lens 272 are frame light emitting group C, production operation A plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the production operation section of the unit 300, a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and an LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are in the frame light emitting group D, and the door A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the frame right side unit 430 and the dish right decorative board 278 provided behind the dish right decorative lens 277 are in the frame light emitting group E, door frame right side unit. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame 430 are divided into frame light emitting groups F, and when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs in the same group are controlled to emit light for each group. The light emission is controlled to be the same color, and the light emission is controlled so that the light emission color is different from the light emission color of the LEDs of different groups.

FIG. 241 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 changes the fluctuation display of decorative symbols etc. in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbols. The performance starts, and the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the display on the performance display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern for executing a rainbow color effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of decorative patterns reaches a predetermined timing t1, , a plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on at least the performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300 among the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and an annular outer button decorative board The plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the button 355, the LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364, and the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged side by side to illuminate the rear upper first decorative part 3211. Executes a button operation promotion effect in which all but the LEDs are turned off, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display (for example, "Press the button!") to prompt the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Light emission is controlled for a plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on a production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 of a unit 300, a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on an annular outer button decorative board 355, and an LED 364a of a button inner decorative board 364.

Then, at timing t2, the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 being pressed. Then (timing t2), a rainbow color effect is created in which the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into first display area a to fifth display area e, and each of the first display area a to fifth display area e is displayed in a different display color. The display mode is displayed, and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the above-mentioned frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F, and included in each of the frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F. In addition to emitting light in different colors for each group, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are divided into the above-mentioned 1st board light emitting group to 6th board light emitting group. The LEDs included in the group are caused to emit light in different colors for each group.

In addition, the display color of each of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the emission color of each of the frame light emission groups A to frame light emission group F, and the first The light emitting color of each group from the board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) (timings t2 to t100).

In this example, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at the timing t2, the button operation promotion performance (in this example, "Press the button!") executed on the performance display device 1600 is executed. ), the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is reduced in size and displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, and the first display area a of the effect display device 1600 is displayed with "white" and the second display. "Yellow" is displayed in area b, "green" is displayed in third display area c, "blue" is displayed in fourth display area d, and "purple" is displayed in fifth display area e for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Change the display area that displays "white" to "yellow", change the display area that displays "yellow" to "green", and display the display that displays "green". Change the area to "blue", change the display area displaying "blue" to "purple", change the display area displaying "purple" to "red", and change the display area displaying "purple" to "red". Change the display area where is displayed to "white".

In addition, when the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 is set to "white", the second board light emitting group is set to "yellow", and the second board light emitting group is set to "yellow". The 3rd board light emitting group is made to emit green light, the 4th board light emitting group is made to emit light in "blue", the 5th board light emitting group is made to emit light in "purple", and the 6th board light emitting group is made to emit light in "red". every second), the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting white light is changed to yellow, and the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting yellow light is changed to green. , change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting green light to "blue", and change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting blue light to "purple". , change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "purple" to "red", and change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "red" to "white". Change to

Similarly, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the frame light emitting group A provided on the door frame 3 is set to "white", the frame light emitting group B is set to "yellow", and the frame light emitting group The group C is made to emit green light, the frame light emitting group D is made to emit blue light, the frame light emitting group E is made to emit purple light, and the frame light emitting group F is made to emit red light, and every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), " Change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "white" to "yellow", change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "yellow" to "green", and Change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "green" to "blue", change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "blue" to "purple", and The light emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "purple" is changed to "red", and the light emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting light in "red" is changed to "white".

In this way, by controlling the light emitting colors of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to be switched sequentially to a plurality of light emitting colors in a short unit light emitting time, it is possible to visually create a rainbow color. It is now possible to visually recognize the light as if it were emitting light, and it is possible to perform an impactful light emitting effect. In addition, the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are controlled in conjunction with each other, and the effect display device 1600 display in multiple colors, or cause the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in multiple colors, and for even shorter periods of time. By switching the display color and emitting color, you can create a more impactful performance than usual.

In addition, in this example, the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the light emission of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F provided in the door frame 3 The colors and the emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 are regularly set in a predetermined order for each display area or each group. The items to be changed are the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the frame light emitting groups A to F provided in the door frame 3. Any combination of one or more of the LED light emitting color and the LED light emitting color belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 (all It is also possible to change the display color and the emitted light color irregularly for the display color (which may be used as a color), and to change the remaining color regularly.

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F, and the display colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emitting groups A to F, and the display colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth light emitting groups. The display colors of the LEDs belonging to the panel light emitting groups and the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600 and the frame light emitting groups A to Any combination of one or more of the following: the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the frame emission group F and the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the 1st to 6th plate emission groups (all (for example, the emission color of the LEDs belonging to frame emission group A to frame emission group F may be changed to "white → yellow → green → blue → purple → red → white → yellow → →..."). Change the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple → →..." (e.g., change with ).

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F, and the display colors of the LEDs belonging to the frame light emitting groups A to F, and the display colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth light emitting groups. For any one or more arbitrary combinations (or all of them) of the LED light emitting colors belonging to the panel light emitting group, a combination of multiple colors in which at least some of the colors differ (for example, a frame light emitting color) The LEDs belonging to Group A to Frame Light Emission Group F are controlled to emit light in one of the following colors: "white", "yellow", "green", "blue", "purple", and "red", and the first panel Light emitting group - Controlling the LEDs belonging to the 6th board light emitting group to emit light in one of the following colors: "white", "orange", "yellow green", "blue", "pink", "red", etc.) You can also use it as

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, and the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F provided in the door frame 3, The light emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 is not limited to changing at the same timing (matching the timing of changing colors). , the timing of changing the display color of the production display device 1600, the timing of changing the light emitting color of the LEDs belonging to frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3, and the timing of changing the display color of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 The timing of changing the emission color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group that are The timing may be changed (for example, after 1 second), and the remaining values may be changed at different timing (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

In addition, the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, and the emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F provided in the door frame 3, The period (predetermined period) from when the light emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 is changed until it is changed again is always constant. However, some or all of the periods may be different. For example, at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) among timings t2 to t100, the display color and emitting color are changed every second, and at even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10), , t98, t100), the display color and emitted light color may be changed every 2 seconds.

In this example, prior to the rainbow effect, the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 control the light emission of the LEDs that illuminate the rear upper first decoration part 3211, which is arranged side by side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310 and starts a fluctuation effect such as a fluctuating display of decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600. During the period from timing t0 to timing t1 from when the button promotion effect is executed, the back upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up from side to side is turned off. When the button promotion effect is executed at timing t1, the back upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side is adapted to the rainbow color effect. Light emission is controlled by the light emission mode. In this example, when the button operation promotion effect is started (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display parts of the back upper first decoration part 3211 are controlled to emit red light, and Light emission is controlled so that the words "Atsui!" are repeatedly displayed from right to left in the five 7-segment display parts of one decorative part 3211.

In addition, during the execution of the button operation promotion performance, the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is not pressed and the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds), the button operation promotion effect ends, and then the rainbow color effect starts (timing t2), the light emitting color of the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is changed. Until the rainbow color effect ends (timing t2 to timing t100) while maintaining the red luminescent color without incident, "Rainbow" will be displayed from right to left of the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211. The light emission is controlled so that the words ``Chance!'' are repeated. As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear first decorative part 3211 are controlled to emit red light. In addition, in the rainbow color effect, either the LEDs belonging to frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F, or the LEDs belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group, Light emission is controlled in the same red color as the five 7-segment display parts of the decorative part 3211. Therefore, although the emitted light color of the five 7-segment display parts of the back upper first decorative part 3211 is not changed, the player can be made to recognize that the emitted light control related to the rainbow color effect is being performed. .

Furthermore, frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups provided on the door frame 3 are arranged around the back upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. The LEDs belonging to F (decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted) and the LEDs (decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5, is provided, and when the button operation promotion effect is finished, it is possible to give the impression that the light-emitting decoration spreads around the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decoration part 3211, which is illuminated in red. It is possible to enhance the effect and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, even after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100 to timing t101), the light emission control is continued without changing the light emission color of the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211. It has become. Specifically, after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100), for example, in response to the occurrence of reach of the decorative pattern, the five 7-segment display sections of the first decorative section 3211 on the rear upper side display "Reach!" from the right to the left. ” is displayed repeatedly, and when a decorative pattern reaches and a reach effect is executed, the five 7-segment display areas of the first decorative section 3211 on the upper back of the back display from right to left “Gekiatsu! The lighting is controlled so that the words ``'' appear repeatedly. Further, in this example, based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped, the five 7-segment display parts of the first back upper decorative part 3211 are controlled to be turned off. This allows the player to recognize that the variable performance has ended. In addition, the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back first decorative part 3211 may be controlled to be turned off when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped; in this case, When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is stopped, the moving display of the characters in the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back first decorative part 3211 may be stopped. In this case as well, the player can recognize that the variable performance has ended because the moving display of the characters on the five 7-segment display sections of the upper rear first decorative section 3211 has stopped.

In this way, the five 7-segment display parts of the back upper first decorative part 3211 are controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow effect, and the five 7-segment display parts of the back upper first decorative part 3211 are controlled to emit light even after the rainbow color effect is finished. In order to continuously control the light emission of the segment display parts, the light emission control of the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear first decorative part 3211, which is executed in advance, can increase expectations for the start of the rainbow color effect. Even after the end of the rainbow effect, expectations for a jackpot can be increased by controlling the light emission of the five 7-segment display sections of the first decorative section 3211 on the rear upper side.

In addition, the light emission control of the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is started at least prior to the rainbow color effect, and is continued even after the rainbow color effect ends. It may be started at any timing between the timing t0 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and the timing t2 when the rainbow color effect starts (including when the light emission control starts at the timing t0). However, it may be ended at any timing between the timing t100 at which the rainbow color effect ends and the timing t101 at which the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is stopped (including the timing at which the light emission control is stopped at the timing t101). In addition, even if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern stops, if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern starts again before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the five 7-segment display parts of the first decorative part 3211 on the back are turned off. In this case, when the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern stops, the moving display of the characters in the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back first decorative part 3211 is stopped (timing t101). ), when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, the characters displayed on the five 7-segment display parts of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear are updated to display the five 7-segment display parts of the first decorative part 3211 on the back rear. The moving display of the character may be restarted from the right to the left of the section (timing t0). Even in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not a decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner based on whether or not characters are being displayed in a moving manner in the five 7-segment display portions of the back upper first decorative portion 3211.

Further, the mode displayed on the back upper first decorative portion 3211 during the execution of the rainbow color effect is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and for example, an effect display device that becomes difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow color effect. As a supplementary display to the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern executed in 1600, after the rainbow color effect is executed, by displaying the manner in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner or by controlling the blinking of multiple LEDs in a predetermined lighting pattern. (For example, when displaying decorative symbols in a stopped state), the mode may be derived in accordance with the special lottery result, or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 may be operated by the player during the execution of the variable production. The number of LEDs that are turned on may be changed when a predetermined increase condition or decrease condition such as . As a result, there are concerns that the fluctuating display of decorative patterns will be difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow color effect, and that the fluctuating display of decorative patterns will not be executed, and that special lottery results will not be derived. It is possible to avoid giving Furthermore, while the rainbow color effect is being performed, the display of decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden, and in this case as well, the above-mentioned anxiety can be avoided.

Furthermore, in the above example, the button operation promotion effect ends (during execution of the button operation promotion effect, the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed). In the above example, the rainbow color effect is started when the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without being pressed. If the result is established, execution of the rainbow effect may be started. For example, the execution of the rainbow color effect is started when the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect or when the non-variable effect period in which the variable effect is not executed after the end of the variable effect reaches a predetermined period. Good too.

Furthermore, in this example, when the rainbow effect ends, decorative patterns are displayed in a ready-to-reach state at a high rate (those that are not in a ready-to-reach state (including so-called false patterns)) (timing t100). When the rainbow color effect is finished, the rainbow color effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 disappears, and the reach effect is executed, and the display mode of the rainbow effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is executed, and the display mode of the rainbow effect display mode is executed. After finishing the light emission control of the rainbow color effect between the LEDs located on the door frame 3 and the LEDs belonging to the frame light emission groups A to F frame light emission groups provided on the door frame 3, the reach effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started. Light emission is controlled in a corresponding light emission mode.

In this way, in this example, a rainbow color effect is performed as a ready-to-reach notice that is executed during the period from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols until the ready-to-win state is displayed. In addition, if the decorative pattern does not become a reach (the decorative pattern may not become a reach and result in a jackpot, or the decorative pattern may not become a reach and result in a miss), or even if the decorative pattern becomes a reach, it will not be a jackpot. The rainbow color effect may be performed at a predetermined rate even when the game does not result in a jackpot, or the rainbow color effect may be performed only when a jackpot is guaranteed (as a jackpot confirmed effect). Furthermore, the timing of execution is not limited to the ready-to-reach notice; it is also possible to perform a rainbow color effect as a reach effect that is executed during the period from displaying the reach state of the decorative pattern to stopping and displaying the decorative pattern. It may be executed as a pre-reading notice before the start of the pattern change, or it may be performed independently of the change display of the decorative pattern (for example, a customer waiting event that is executed when the change display of the decorative pattern does not start for a predetermined period of time). A rainbow color effect may be performed (as a demonstration effect).

Furthermore, as described above, the rainbow effect is performed when there is a high probability of winning the jackpot, and is an important effect that increases the expectations of the player. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted has a feature so that the LEDs whose light emission is controlled in the rainbow color effect produce vivid colors. Specifically, a plurality of decorative boards are provided on the game board 5 and mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, that is, a back front upper left decorative board 3129 is used to decorate the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 with light emission. , a back front left decorative board 3128 for luminescently decorating the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub-decoration part 3123, and the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 for luminescent decoration. A back front lower logo decorative board 3173 for displaying the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for luminescent decoration the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and a back front lower center decorative board 3168 for luminescent decoration the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163. A lower left inner decorative board 3169, a back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, and a back front lower right outer decorative board 3170 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165. An inner decorative board 3171, a back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back front lower right decorative board 3152 for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration part 3141. and a back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, the surface of which is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the mounted electronics such as LEDs. Letters and symbols to avoid confusion with parts and other decorative substrates are screen printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the plurality of decorative boards mounted on the game board 5 on which are mounted the LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. In addition, to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted, characters and symbols are screen-printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). ing.

In addition, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 and mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, namely, a door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, and a door frame top left decorative board 456. , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 , the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420 , and the plate left decorative lens 272 The plate left decorative board 273 provided on the rear side, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the plate right decorative board 278 provided on the rear side of the plate right decorative lens 277, and the door frame. The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame of the right side unit 430 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface, and is also coated with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted. Letters and symbols to avoid confusion are screen-printed using ink in a bright or saturated color (for example, yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the plurality of decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 on which the LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors are coated with a white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflection efficiency. In addition, to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted, characters and symbols are screen printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). ing.

Further, the rear upper first decorative board (not shown) is mounted with an LED for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 are arranged side by side. The surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the brightness and color of the letters and symbols are changed to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing using highly colored ink (for example, yellow). However, while full-color LEDs are mounted on the plurality of decorative boards mounted on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, the first decoration on the back A monochromatic (red in this example) LED is mounted on the board. Therefore, even if the LEDs provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 are decorated with light to produce a rainbow color effect, the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 do not change the emitted light color. All that is required is to display letters, numbers, pictures, etc. on five 7-segment display sections with the same luminescent color (red in this example). In other words, in the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that display letters, numbers, patterns, etc., even if the rainbow color effect is performed, the letters and numbers displayed by not changing the emitting color, Information such as pictures is displayed in a state that is easy for the player to see, and it is possible to prevent incorrect information from being conveyed to the player.

In this way, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with white solder resist (protective material) to increase reflection efficiency, so it is possible to emit light in multiple full colors. Even when LEDs emit light in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to reflect all the light uniformly and produce vivid colors. Logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, back front left sub decoration part 3123, back front lower logo decoration body 3167, back front lower middle decoration body 3161, back front lower left inner decoration body 3163 , back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, back front right logo decoration part 3141, back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, Each of the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side unit 420, the plate left decorative lens 272, and the door can be decorated with brighter light. Each of the frame right side unit 430, the plate right decorative lens 277, and the door frame right side unit 430 can be decorated with light emitting light more brightly and vividly (clearly), and the presentation effect is enhanced. Furthermore, the five 7-segment display parts of the first back upper decorative part 3211 that emit light in a single color (red in this example) can also be decorated with brighter and more vivid light, increasing the presentation effect.

In addition, to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted, characters and symbols are screen printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). By doing this, it is possible to bring the reflection efficiency of the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed characters and symbols closer together, making it possible to make the reflection efficiency on the board surface nearly uniform, so it is possible to emit light in multiple full colors. Even when available LEDs emit light in a wide variety of colors, all the light can be reflected uniformly, the occurrence of uneven light emission in the light emitting decoration is suppressed, and the presentation effect is enhanced. In addition, since the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed characters and symbols can be reduced, the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed characters and symbols can be reduced, so regardless of whether the LED is emitting light or not, when viewed through the lens covering the decorative board, The characters and symbols screen-printed on the surface of the decorative board become less noticeable, and when players look directly at the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards, they can visually see information unrelated to the game, reducing the enjoyment of the game. can suppress the decline in In addition, with conventional decorative boards in which characters and symbols are screen printed using ink with low brightness or saturation (dark color) such as black, the characters and symbols are clearly visible when viewed through a lens that covers the decorative board. Even if you can't see it, the lens itself may look darkened, which can make it look bad, but by screen printing letters and symbols using ink with high brightness and saturation, the lens can appear brighter. This also has the effect of not degrading the appearance. In addition, as a color with high brightness and saturation, it is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflection efficiency to white, but colors other than yellow-green, light blue, and other colors with low brightness and saturation (dark colors, black, brown, etc.) If so, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the above example, all of the multiple decorative boards on which the LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect are coated with white solder resist (protective material) on the surface, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the surface of some of the multiple decorative boards on which the LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors are mounted is coated with a non-white (for example, green or black) solder resist (protective material). For some or all of the decorative boards on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow-colored manner are mounted, a white solder resist ( The back surface on which the LED is not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than white (for example, green or black).

In addition, characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted are printed on the LED mounting surface by screen printing using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). Ink of a color with low brightness or saturation (for example, black, etc.) may be applied to some of the decorative substrates that are mounted with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect. The LEDs may be printed on the LED mounting surface using screen printing, or all or some of the decorative boards on which the LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors may be mounted. To avoid confusion with other electronic components or other decorative boards, letters and symbols are printed with foil letters (in other words, letters are made with a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and the surrounding area is The surface of the foil-cut letters may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LED. Some of the decorative boards on which LEDs whose light emission is controlled by color rendering are mounted are formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist (the entire LED mounting surface is white). After coating with solder resist (first layer), characters and symbols are masked to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted, and the entire area except these is painted white. By coating it again with solder resist (second layer), you can form the masked area, that is, the characters and symbols, as characters without white resist), or you can implement LEDs that control light emission with a rainbow color effect. For all or some of the decorative boards to be used, other than screen-printing characters and symbols using ink of a color with high brightness or saturation (for example, yellow) on the surface on which the LED is mounted. For example, on the back side where LEDs are not mounted, ink of a predetermined color (not only colors with high brightness and saturation, but also colors with low brightness and saturation) is applied by screen printing, or with foil-cut letters. Avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards mounted on decorative boards by forming them with white resist or by forming characters with white resist using two coats of white resist. You can. Even in these cases, it is possible to suppress the decline in reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LED is mounted, and furthermore, it is possible to achieve uniform light emission by making the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface approximately uniform, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect. .

The LED mounted on the decorative board is an electronic component whose package color is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream), and the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards is Only the packaged LEDs are mounted, and no other electronic components are mounted. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED package also prevents a decrease in reflection efficiency, thereby achieving uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface. In addition to connectors for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and circuits that control the light emission of multiple LEDs (for example, constant current drive circuits) are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. One or more may be implemented. In addition, the connector is an electronic component whose housing is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream), and the constant current drive circuit is an integrated circuit that is black. The resistor is an electronic component that is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver IC that is housed in an IC package that can have a color such as black, blue, or white. A capacitor is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component having a color such as black, brown, gray, or white. In addition, in the above-described decorative board, at least electronic components having colors with low brightness or saturation such as black, brown, or gray may be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface without being mounted on the LED mounting surface. Alternatively, electronic components having colors with high brightness or saturation such as colors close to white (for example, ivory, beige, cream) may be mounted on the LED mounting surface. This makes the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative board less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the decorative board, and also suppresses the decline in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface and makes the reflection efficiency approximately uniform. This makes it possible to achieve highly efficient and uniform light emission and enhance the performance effect.

In this example, even when performing a rainbow color effect as a variable effect, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted, and various decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are displayed at the timing when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. It is now possible to change (adjust) the light intensity of the LED on the board. Specifically, when one of the two buttons of the light amount adjustment button 228 is pressed, the one with the character "+" is pressed, and the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 immediately brighten. (intensify the light intensity), and when you press the button with the character "-", the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 will immediately dim (weaken the light intensity). It has become.

As shown in FIG. 241, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the 1st to 6th disk light emission groups are activated regardless of whether the LEDs are in the off state or not. Immediately change the light intensity of the multiple LEDs in the group and the multiple LEDs in the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F, and the LEDs that perform the rainbow color lighting decoration, and use the changed light intensity for the first board light emitting group. Light emission is controlled for a plurality of LEDs in the sixth panel light emission group and a plurality of LEDs in frame light emission groups A to frame light emission group F. In this example, while the button operation promotion effect is being executed, multiple LEDs from the 1st to 6th board light-emitting groups, frame light-emitting groups A to frame light-emitting groups C, and frame light-emitting groups E to frame light-emitting groups F are activated. Although the LEDs in the frame light emitting group D are controlled to be off, the plurality of LEDs in the frame light emitting group D (the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 of the production operation unit 300, the annular outer button decoration board 355) The plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the button and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are turned on, and when the player operates the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect is displayed on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit 300. Since the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light with the changed light intensity, the production operation unit 300 While watching the changes in the light intensity of the plurality of LEDs 320a mounted on the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decoration board 355, and the LED 364a of the button inner decoration board 364, the first board is displayed. It is possible to adjust the light intensity of all of the plurality of LEDs in the light emission group to the sixth board light emission group and the plurality of LEDs in the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F.

On the other hand, among the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the rear upper first decorative section 3211, where the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is arranged on the rear upper first decorative section 3211. For LEDs that are mounted on the first decorative board and do not perform the rainbow color effect lighting decoration, the light intensity is not changed (adjusted) even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect. (light intensity is fixed). In this way, during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are arranged in the upper back rear first decoration part 3211 that is arranged side by side. Since it is impossible to change (adjust) the light amount (brightness) of the LED mounted on the first decorative board, and the light amount (brightness) remains constant regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the first board It can be used as a reference when changing the light intensity of the multiple LEDs in the light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F. The difference in brightness from the LED mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided in the rear upper first decorative part 3211 becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the first rear upper decorative board provided in the upper rear first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side have a rainbow color effect. Regardless of whether or not a variable effect is being executed, the light amount may not always be able to be changed (adjusted) even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated.

Furthermore, in this example, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided with a rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that do not perform rainbow color light emitting decoration because the amount of light (brightness) cannot be adjusted. Around the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where two 7-segment display parts are arranged on the left and right, LEDs (LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame light emitting groups A to F provided in the door frame 3 are mounted. It is possible to adjust the amount of light (brightness) of the decorative board (decorative board) and the LEDs (decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted) belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5. LEDs are provided. In this way, since the LED that serves as a reference for adjusting the light amount (brightness) and the LED that changes the light amount (brightness) are placed close together, it is easy to compare the light amount (brightness), and the player can adjust the light amount (brightness) according to his/her preference. brightness).

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example executes the rainbow effect when there is a high probability of winning the jackpot, but depending on the state of the gaming machine, there may be situations in which the rainbow effect cannot be performed properly. In such a case, not only is it impossible to expect the effect of increasing interest due to the rainbow color effect, but there is also a risk that interest in the game may be reduced.

For example, an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 (an abnormality in which the backlight LEDs (part or all) of the effect display device 1600 do not emit light, or an abnormality in which the display is disturbed due to noise, etc.) etc.), or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow color effect of the LEDs on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (such as when the door frame 3 or the game board 5 If an abnormality occurs in which the LEDs (part or all) of the various decorative boards provided do not emit light, or the light emitting pattern is disrupted due to noise, etc., the display and door display by the effect display device 1600 may occur. It was not possible to realize the rainbow effect in the complete form as designed using the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, and the display by the effect display device 1600 and the display on the door frame 3 and the game board were difficult to achieve. An incomplete rainbow effect is performed in which part of the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the board 5 is missing.

By executing such an incomplete rainbow color effect, not only can the original effect of improving the interest of the rainbow color effect not be expected, but also the player may perceive that a different effect from the rainbow color effect is being performed. This may lead to misunderstandings. In this example, such misunderstandings are avoided as much as possible to the players. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 242.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there is an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 at timing t6 while the rainbow color effect is being executed, and the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. An abnormality has occurred in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow color effect, or an abnormality in which it is difficult to control the light emission of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. When an abnormal state occurs, a plurality of LEDs from the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and a plurality of LEDs from the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 are activated. , completes the rainbow color lighting decoration, controls the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group to turn off, and turns off the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F. Light emission is controlled in an abnormality warning light emission mode (in this example, a blinking red light at maximum brightness (light amount)) for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 242, it is difficult to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect. An abnormality in which it is difficult to control the rainbow color effect of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and an abnormality in which it is difficult to control the rainbow color effect on the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5. If an abnormality occurs in which any of the following abnormalities occurs, including an abnormality in which light emission control is difficult, the first light emitting device provided on the game board 5 may Without starting the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration by the plurality of LEDs of the board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3, An abnormality notification light emitting mode (this mode) is used to control the light emission of the plurality of LEDs in the 1st panel light emitting group to the 6th panel light emitting group and turn off the light emission of the plurality of LEDs in the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F to notify the occurrence of an abnormality. In the example, the light emission is controlled in a mode in which the light flashes in red at maximum brightness (light intensity).

In addition, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 disappears to indicate that the abnormality has occurred. Display a notification. Similarly, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at any timing from timing t0 to timing t2 before the start of the rainbow color effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the effect display device 1600 displays the rainbow color effect. A display notifying that the abnormality has occurred is performed without starting to display the mode. Note that a part of the rainbow effect display mode may not be executed, and even in this case, the occurrence of an abnormality can be recognized by a display notifying that an abnormality has occurred.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example uses the display by the performance display device 1600 and the light emitted by the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to produce a rainbow in the perfect shape as designed. Since the rainbow color effect is controlled so as not to be interrupted or started if the color effect cannot be realized, it is possible to prevent the rainbow color effect from being executed in an incomplete form, and to prevent misleading players. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the LEDs mounted on the first rear upper decorative board provided in the upper rear first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side have a rainbow color effect. Even if an abnormal state occurs during execution of a variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect, the light emission control corresponding to the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect is continued without controlling the lights to turn off or the abnormality warning light emission mode. good. In this case, due to the occurrence of an abnormal condition, a plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and a plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 are Even if the rainbow-colored lighting decoration of the LEDs and does not end or start, or even if multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F are controlled to emit light in the abnormality warning lighting mode, the fluctuating effect will continue. To prevent a player from being misled into thinking that a variable performance has ended.

Further, depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency), whether or not to turn off the rear upper first decorative section 3211 may be changed, so that, for example, the effect on the execution of games and rainbow color effects is small. Error (Minor error: When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected (The opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. ), if a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibrations of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (if it detects that an act such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, the vibration sensor (not shown) When the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 vibrate, and the display on the performance display device 1600 becomes blurred and difficult to see), the full tank detection sensor 154 (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), when a detection signal from the ball cutout detection sensor 574 is input (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls) Errors that are unlikely to be caused by a game ball, such as when it is detected that no game ball is present, are implemented on the back upper first decorative board provided in the back upper first decorative part 3211 On the other hand, errors that seriously affect the execution of games and rainbow effects (serious errors: When radio wave irradiation is detected (electromagnetic waves etc. cause damage to the door frame 3 or game board 5) (If there is noise in the light emitted by the LEDs of the various decorative boards installed in the display or if there is noise in the display of the effect display device 1600), the second starting port 2004 is not open when the magnet is detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input, when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402 is input when it is not in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, etc. For errors that are highly likely to have occurred, the variable effect may be interrupted or ended even if the variable effect is in progress by controlling the rear upper first decorative section 3211 to turn off. Thereby, the control state of the first rear upper decorative portion 3211 can be varied depending on the degree of error, and it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

Further, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), whether or not to erase the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be changed. For errors that have a small impact on the execution of , a warning display (for example, "Door is open", etc.) is displayed so as to partially overlap the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 without causing the rainbow color effect display mode to disappear. ), while at the same time, in case of an error that seriously affects the execution of the above-mentioned game or rainbow effect, the display of the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is deleted and a warning is displayed (for example, ``Unauthorized winning has occurred!'', etc.) ), the display of the rainbow color effect (rainbow color effect display mode) may be interrupted or ended even if the rainbow color effect is being executed. Thereby, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 can be changed depending on the degree of error, and it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred. In addition, in case of an error that seriously affects the execution of the above-mentioned game or rainbow color effect, the first decoration section 3211 on the rear side is controlled to be turned off, and the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is also made to disappear. In this case, the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be ended at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing at which the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is turned off. . In this case, the display contents can be prevented from being suddenly switched in the effect display device 1600, and the display contents can be switched while leaving the lingering effect of the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode.

In addition, when an abnormal condition occurs, depending on the type of the abnormal condition (degree of emergency), a display notifying that the abnormal condition has occurred on the effect display device 1600 and an LED provided on the door frame 3 are displayed. notification by controlling the light emission in an error mode, and notification of the occurrence of an abnormal state by audio output, or any combination of two or more (including all). It may also be executed. For example, if a minor error that has a small impact on the game occurs, the effect display device 1600 will display a notification that an abnormal state has occurred, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 will emit light in the same manner as when the error occurs. A serious error that has a serious impact on the game occurs when either one or a combination of two of the following: notification by control and notification that an abnormal state has occurred by audio output. In this case, the effect display device 1600 displays a display to notify that there is an abnormality, a notification is made by controlling the light emission of the LED provided in the door frame 3 in the manner at the time of an error, and an abnormality is output by audio. It is also possible to perform all of the following, including notification that a condition has occurred.

In addition, in this example, in a variable performance that executes a rainbow color effect, an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow color effect (any timing from timing t0 to timing t2). If the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow color effect (before the rainbow color effect ends) and the abnormal state returns to the normal state, the abnormality is notified by multiple LEDs of frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F. Although the light emitting mode is finished, the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F provided in the door frame 3. , does not execute the rainbow color effect light emission decoration (does not restart the rainbow color effect light emission decoration (does not return to the rainbow color effect light emission decoration)).

In other words, due to an abnormality in which the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are disrupted by noise or the like, the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect may be terminated, or the light emission of the rainbow color effect may be stopped. If decoration is not started, noise may occur again even if it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved. In such a case, if the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration is controlled to restart when the abnormality is resolved, there is a risk that the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration will be repeatedly executed and terminated, which may confuse the player. There is a risk of causing Therefore, in this example, if the rainbow color effect is ended or the rainbow color effect is not started based on the occurrence of an abnormality, even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow color effect, the rainbow color effect The lighting decoration of the performance is not executed or restarted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 242, in a variable performance that executes a rainbow color effect, at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow color effect, a plurality of light emitting groups from the first board to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 due to noise etc. If an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to control the light emission of a rainbow color effect by any of the LEDs (timing t6), multiple LEDs from the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and , completes the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration with multiple LEDs from frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F provided on door frame 3, and turns off multiple LEDs from 1st board light-emitting group to 6th board light-emitting group. The light emission is controlled in an abnormality notification light emission mode in which a plurality of LEDs of frame light emission groups A to frame light emission groups F blink red at maximum brightness (light amount).

At this time, although the effect display device 1600 disappears the display of the rainbow color effect display mode and displays a warning (such as "abnormality occurrence"), the control data of the rainbow color effect display mode is updated in accordance with the scheduler. It has become. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided in the rear upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side are used to create a rainbow color effect. Although the light emitting decoration is not executed, the light emission control corresponding to the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect is continued, and even if the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 disappears, the variable effect continues. This makes it possible for players to recognize what they are doing. Further, in the above-mentioned abnormal state, a warning sound is output, so that the player and the game store staff can recognize that an abnormal state has occurred by listening to the warning sound.

Further, at timing t10 after the abnormal state occurs, the noise etc. are eliminated and the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 are in a state where the rainbow color effect light emission control is possible. When it returns to (timing t10), the effect display device 1600 ends the warning display and resumes displaying the rainbow color effect display mode. As described above, the control data for the rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler even during the occurrence of an abnormal state, and the effect display device 1600 is updated in accordance with the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect. The rainbow color effect display mode is displayed, and due to noise etc., the rainbow color effect by any one of the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 is displayed. Instead of the rainbow color effect display mode displayed at timing t6 when an abnormality that makes light emission control difficult occurs, a rainbow color effect display mode corresponding to timing t10 when noise etc. is eliminated and the abnormal state is recovered is displayed.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the abnormality warning light is emitted for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) by causing the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F to flash and emit red light at maximum brightness (light intensity). The mode continues (timing t10 to timing t11). In other words, if the abnormality occurs again before a certain period of time has passed after the abnormality has been resolved (timing t10), the abnormality notification will be issued even after the certain period of time has elapsed without terminating the abnormality notification light emission mode at the timing when the certain period of time has elapsed. The light emitting mode continues. As a result, when an abnormality frequently occurs and is resolved, the light emission control can be continuously performed in the abnormality warning light emission mode without repeating the termination and restart of the light emission control in the abnormality warning light emission mode each time. becomes easier to notice.

Furthermore, even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10 after turning off the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 (timing t6) when an abnormality occurs at timing t6, The plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 continue to be turned off and do not return to the rainbow color effect lighting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, when an abnormality occurs at timing t6, after controlling the multiple LEDs of frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F provided in the door frame 3 in the abnormality warning light emission mode (timing t6), an abnormality occurs at timing t10. When the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time passes without the abnormality occurring again, the multiple LEDs of frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to be turned off, and a rainbow color effect is produced. It does not return to the light emitting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, when the rainbow color effect ends and the reach effect starts at timing t100, a plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the frame provided on the door frame 3 The plurality of LEDs of light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F are controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow color effect, it does not return to the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect. Identifiable. In addition, if an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow color effect and the abnormality is resolved before the start of the rainbow color effect, the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect is started at timing t2 when the rainbow color effect is started. You may also do so.

Furthermore, the setting is provided on the game board 5 not at the timing t10 when the abnormality is resolved, but at the timing t100 when the rainbow effect ends (the timing at which the effect to be executed after the rainbow effect (in this example, the reach effect) starts). It is not limited to the one that starts light emission control with the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group and the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 (at timing t100). (not limited to those that start light emission control), when a variable effect that executes a rainbow color effect ends, or when a variable effect that executes a rainbow color effect ends and the next variable effect starts, the rainbow color effect It may be the case that a demonstration effect is started without starting the next variable effect after the variable effect that executes has ended. Even in this case, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect or the variation effect.

In addition, if the abnormality is resolved after the end of the variable performance that executes the rainbow color performance, the plurality of LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 at the timing when the abnormality is resolved. Light emission control of at least the plurality of LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 among the plurality of LEDs of the frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 is started. In this case, if the abnormality is resolved during execution of a variable effect different from the variable effect in which the abnormality occurred, and the rainbow color effect is executed at the timing when the abnormality is resolved, The light emitting mode may be controlled to produce a rainbow color effect.

Furthermore, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs may be returned to the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, among the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group provided on the game board 5, the multiple LEDs of the 4th board light emitting group are restored to the rainbow color lighting decoration. Then, when the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has passed, the frame light emitting group A of the plurality of LEDs of frame light emitting groups A to frame light emitting groups F provided in the door frame 3 is set to return to the rainbow color lighting decoration. You may also do so. In this case, the schedule data of the light emission control pattern is advanced even though the light emission is not controlled during the occurrence of the abnormal condition, and the light emission mode is restarted not from the light emission mode at the timing when the abnormality occurred but from the light emission mode at the timing when the abnormality is resolved. Become so. In this way, if the abnormality is resolved and some LEDs are returned to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration, and other LEDs are turned off, only some of the LEDs will be returned to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration. It becomes possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred during execution of the rainbow color effect because the light emitting decoration is not performed.

Furthermore, in this example, even in an abnormal state, the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is accepted, and the plurality of LEDs in the first to sixth board light emission groups and the plurality of LEDs in frame light emission groups A to frame light emission group It is now possible to change the setting value for the amount of light (brightness).

However, under normal conditions where no abnormality has occurred, multiple LEDs from the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group and the frame light emitting groups A to 5th frame light emitting group Immediately change the light intensity (brightness) of multiple LEDs, and use the changed light intensity (brightness) to change the light intensity (brightness) of multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group, and in the frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F. In contrast to controlling the light emission of multiple LEDs, when an abnormality occurs, multiple LEDs of the 1st board light emission group to 6th board light emission group and the frame are controlled at the timing when the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is received. Although the setting value of the light amount (brightness) of multiple LEDs of light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F is changed, multiple LEDs of the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group and , multiple LEDs of frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F do not emit light to the changed light intensity (brightness), and after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting After timing t10 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved, the plurality of LEDs in the group are controlled to emit light with the changed light intensity (brightness), and the plurality of LEDs in the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F are The LEDs are controlled to emit light with the changed light intensity (brightness) after timing t11 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has elapsed.

In this way, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the plurality of LEDs in the 1st board light emission group to the 6th board light emission group and the plurality of LEDs in the frame light emission group A to frame light emission group By not changing the amount of light (brightness) of the LED, it is possible to suppress the abnormality warning light emission mode from becoming difficult to notice. In addition, even when an abnormality occurs, the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 is accepted, the light amount (brightness) setting value is changed, and the setting value is reflected in the actual LED light emission state after the abnormality is resolved. To prevent a player from being deprived of an opportunity to adjust the amount of light (brightness) even in a state where this occurs.

In addition, in this example, a plurality of LEDs (hereinafter referred to as dimming LED group) that belong to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group provided on the game board 5 and whose light intensity can be adjusted are mounted. Separately from the decorative substrate, a rear upper first decorative substrate is provided on which a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity cannot be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a non-dimmable LED group) are mounted to decorate the 7-segment display section with light emission. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment display section may be used to emit light on a part of any one of the decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs belonging to the first to sixth board light-emitting groups are mounted. You may also mount an LED for decoration. That is, a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity can be adjusted (a dimming LED group) and a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity cannot be adjusted (a non-dimmable LED group) may be mounted on a single decorative board.

For example, a dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity can be adjusted and a non-dimming LED group consisting of a plurality of LEDs whose light intensity cannot be adjusted may be arranged with a predetermined interval, In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimming LED group or the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimming LED group should be determined from the distance between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. They may also be placed close to each other. With this configuration, it becomes easy to distinguish between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it becomes easy to compare the brightness of LEDs whose light amount can be adjusted and LEDs whose light amount cannot be adjusted.

In addition, LEDs whose light intensity can be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as dimming LEDs) and LEDs whose light intensity cannot be adjusted (hereinafter referred to as non-dimmable LEDs) are made of resin of the same or very similar color (white in this example). The same type of package may be adopted in addition to this, and this allows dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs to emit light under similar conditions, so dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs By comparing the brightness with the non-dimming LED, the difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, a plurality of through holes may be formed between the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group. In the area where the through hole is formed on the surface of the decorative board, the light emitted from the LED is not reflected and leaks to the back side of the decorative board (the surface where the LED is not mounted), so there is a difference between the dimming LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. By forming a through hole between the light LED group, interference between the light from the dimming LED and the light from the non-dimming LED is suppressed, and the light from each LED can be viewed individually. As a result, the brightness can be adjusted based on the light from only the dimming LED group, and the light from only the non-dimming LED group can be used as an indicator for brightness adjustment, which improves the accuracy of comparison. This increases the brightness, making it easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. In addition, through holes are formed with an outer diameter smaller than that of dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs (ratio (area) occupied by one through hole on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front) of the decorative board ≦ one dimming LED). By increasing the proportion (area) occupied by a light LED or one non-dimming LED, more light from the dimming LED and non-dimming LED leaks from the through hole to the back surface of the decorative board (the surface where the LED is not mounted) than necessary. It may be possible to prevent this from happening. In this case, the number of through holes formed between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is set to be larger than the number of dimming LEDs and the number of non-dimming LEDs mounted on the side of the through hole. By increasing the number of dimming LEDs, it is possible to suppress the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the dimming LED and non-dimming LED, but also to prevent the brightness of the dimming LED and non-dimming LED from lowering more than necessary. You may also do so.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative board, a three-dimensional object (such as an electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness) that separates part or all of the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group By providing this, it may be possible to realize suppression of reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. For example, on the LED mounting surface (front, front) of the decorative board, electronic components mounted on the circuit board, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers, are mounted between dimming LEDs and non-dimming LEDs. You may also do so. In this way, by providing an electronic component that has a predetermined thickness and is mounted so as to protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the decorative board between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED, dimming can be achieved. Part or all of the LED and the non-dimming LED may be separated to suppress reflection or interference of light emitted from the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED, respectively.

In addition, the electronic components installed between the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED have a dark color (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) appearance with low reflection efficiency (some parts are different from dark colors). It may have a part (for example, a metallic color such as silver or a transparent part). Thereby, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED can be further enhanced.

Further, in the above example, the rear upper first decoration in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 on which the rear upper first decorative board on which the non-dimmable LED is mounted are arranged left and right. The section 3211 is formed to have a size that spans the left and right ends of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can display the characters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed by the 7-segment display section of the upper rear first decorative section 3211. Although it is easy to notice, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be formed of, for example, one 7-segment display portion, or a decorative substrate that is smaller than other decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted may be provided. For example, an effect that is difficult for the player to notice may be executed. In this case, the player who has noticed the existence of the 7-segment display section can be given further enjoyment by the performance executed on the 7-segment display section in addition to the performance provided by the performance display device 1600 or the like. In addition, the surface of a single decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is divided into an area where a plurality of LEDs are mounted to emit light and decorate a decorative body covering the decorative board, and 7 segments provided in a part of the decorative body. In the case where the display section is arranged separately into an area where a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the display area and a region where a plurality of LEDs are mounted to decorate the display area, the decoration body covering the decorative board is more decorative than the area where a plurality of LEDs to decorate the display area are mounted. The area where a plurality of LEDs for illuminating a 7-segment display section provided on a part of the body are mounted may be narrowed.

In this way, the non-dimmable LED, which is the standard for brightness adjustment, and the dimmable LED, which changes the brightness, are mounted on one decorative board and are placed close to each other. Compared to the case where the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED are mounted on different substrates, it is possible to arrange the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED closer to each other, and it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED.

In addition, in the above example, the LEDs that perform the rainbow color lighting decoration, specifically the LEDs included in the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group, and the LEDs included in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F. An LED whose brightness can be adjusted and which does not display rainbow-colored light emitting decoration, specifically, the rear upper first decorative part in which five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. 3211, the brightness of which cannot be adjusted, is shown. However, in addition to the LEDs that emit light and decorate the first decorative part 3211 on the back of the door frame 3 and game board 5, there are also LEDs that emit light with a rainbow color effect. One or more non-iridescent LEDs without decoration may be provided. This non-iridescent LED is controlled to be turned off when a rainbow color effect is executed, or is controlled to perform a light emitting decoration different from the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect. Unlike the LED which does not perform any light-emitting decoration, but which emits light to decorate the back upper first decorative portion 3211, the brightness can be adjusted. In this way, it is possible to reflect the brightness adjustment results during the execution of the rainbow effect even for non-iridescent LEDs that do not perform the rainbow effect decoration, so even after the rainbow effect is applied to these non-iridescent LEDs, the brightness adjustment results can be reflected. The light-emitting decoration that is executed allows the player to emit light at the brightness (light intensity) desired by the player.

In addition, when the above-mentioned dimming LED is performing a rainbow-colored luminous decoration, the emitted light color changes (flickers) in a short time, so the accurate amount of light (brightness) can be determined based on the light of these dimming LEDs. It is difficult to determine the Therefore, there is a problem in that even if the player intends to adjust the light amount (brightness) to the player's preference, the light amount (brightness) is actually set to a different light amount (brightness) from the player's favorite light amount (brightness). As described above, if a non-iridescent LED is provided that does not perform the luminous decoration of the rainbow color effect even during the execution of the rainbow color effect, and a light emission decoration different from the light emission decoration of the rainbow color effect is executed, the door frame 3 When adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 or the game board 5, the light intensity (brightness) can be accurately determined based on the light from the non-iridescent LED. This makes it possible to easily adjust the amount of light (brightness) to the player's preference.

In addition, as a light emitting decoration during execution of a rainbow color effect of non-iridescent LEDs, at least LEDs that perform a rainbow color effect light emission decoration, specifically, LEDs included in the 1st board light emitting group to the 6th board light emitting group. Any LED included in frame light emitting group A to frame light emitting group F may be used as long as it switches its emitted light color in a longer unit light emitting time, or it can perform light emitting decoration with the same emitted color without changing its emitted color.

In addition, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided with the rear upper first decorative board on which the non-dimming LED which does not perform the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration because the amount of light (brightness) cannot be adjusted as described above is mounted. The non-iridescent LED (full-color LED) is controlled to emit light in a color different from that of the five 7-segment display parts of the rear and upper movable decorative body 3210. (or may be one that controls the light emission of monochromatic LEDs that emit light in a color different from that of the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210). The light emission may be controlled; in this case, it becomes easier to distinguish between non-iridescent LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs, and it becomes easier to compare the light amount (brightness) when adjusting the light amount (brightness). The amount of light (brightness) can be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the back rear upper movable decoration body 3210 has five 7-segment display parts lined up from side to side, which does not perform rainbow-colored luminescent decoration, that is, luminescent decoration that changes the luminous color in a short time. A white solder resist (protective material) with the highest reflection efficiency is also applied to the surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which monochromatic LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) for illuminating the upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted. In order to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards that are coated and mounted, letters and symbols should be printed in colors with high brightness and saturation (e.g., colors with reflective efficiency similar to white, such as yellow). ) has been shown to be applied by screen printing using the ink of the above to increase the reflection efficiency of the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted. By suppressing the interference of light on the surface of the rear upper first decorative board, the light emission of each LED is made clearer, so that letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display section can be displayed more clearly. good.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243(A), LEDs are mounted to emit light and decorate the back upper first decorative section 3211 in which the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. the back upper first decorative board 3211, and the back upper second decorative part on which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row, which is provided on the back side of the back upper first decorative part 3211. A rear upper movable decoration body 3210 containing a rear upper second decorative board on which LEDs for emitting light decoration 3212 are mounted, and a rear upper movable decoration body 3210 containing a Except for the predetermined characters of the second decorative portion 3212, it is formed of an opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have translucency and has a predetermined thickness (approximately 10 mm in this example).

Further, as shown in FIG. 243(B), a cylindrical penetrating portion corresponding to each segment is formed in the seven-segment display portion of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211, and one or more cylindrical penetrating portions are formed in this penetrating portion. The surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is partitioned so that the plurality of LEDs are arranged. In addition, a cylindrical penetration part corresponding to each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") is formed in the second rear upper decorative part 3212, and one or more LEDs are arranged in this penetration part. The surface on which the plurality of LEDs of the rear upper second decorative board are mounted is defined in this manner.

In addition, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed to be divided into two front and rear decorative bodies, and the inside of one of the decorative bodies is brought into close contact with the surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted. With the inside of the other decorative body in close contact with the surface on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the upper second decorative board on the rear side, the decorative body divided into the front and rear parts is assembled (fixed). The upper movable decorative body 3210 is configured.

This suppresses the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the penetration parts corresponding to each segment in the 7-segment display part of the upper rear first decorative part 3211 from leaking into the penetration parts corresponding to other segments. Since the interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of segments of the seven-segment display section can be suppressed, information (letters, numbers, pictures, , etc.) can be easily identified individually. In addition, since the light from the LED arranged inside the penetration part can be emitted from each segment in the 7-segment display section of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 without leaking out of the penetration part, the amount of light inside the penetration part can be radiated. (brightness) can be suppressed.

Similarly, the light emitted from the LEDs placed in the penetration parts corresponding to the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the upper second decorative part 3212 on the back leaks into the penetration parts corresponding to other characters. Since it is possible to suppress the interference of light emitted from each of the predetermined characters, it is possible to make each of the predetermined characters of the second rear upper decorative portion 3212 easier to identify individually. In addition, since the light from the LED arranged in the penetration part can be emitted from each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the second upper rear decorative part 3212 without leaking outside the penetration part, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the penetrating portion.

In addition to the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 described above, or separately from the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 described above (without adopting the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210), A rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 in which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, and a predetermined character (here In this case, the rear upper second decorative board is mounted with LEDs that emit light and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 on which "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row, and the surface on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is white. Instead of the solder resist (protective material), a dark colored solder resist (protective material) with low reflection efficiency (black, purple, dark blue, deep green, etc.) may be coated. In this case, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted. Although the reflection efficiency at the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board is reduced, the light from each penetration part can be emitted independently without interference, so the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board is Letters, numbers, patterns, etc. shown by the five 7-segment display parts of the decorative part 3211, as well as predetermined characters in the second decorative part 3212 on the rear back, can be clearly displayed, and these information can be displayed to the player. can be conveyed accurately.

Note that the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the back surface on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted. Even when the LED mounting surface of the second upper rear decorative board is coated with a dark solder resist (protective material), the LED that emits light and decorates the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is not mounted on the upper rear first decorative board. The LED non-mounted surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted are colored in colors other than dark (for example, white, green, etc.). It may also be coated with a solder resist (protective material). Further, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the back side on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted. A white solder resist (protective material) is coated only on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board and the area inside the penetration part, or a white coating film is formed by silk printing, etc., and the area outside the penetration part is coated with white solder resist (protective material). It is also possible to coat the board with a dark solder resist (protective material) or to form a dark coating film by silk printing, etc. In this case, the reflection efficiency of the board surface is reduced and the light from each penetration part is reduced. While suppressing interference, a high proportion of the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the penetration part is reflected to display each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decoration body 3210 and the second rear upper decoration. Each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") in the portion 3212 can be decorated with bright light.

In addition, the back upper movable decoration corresponds to each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 and the predetermined characters (herein, "JACKPOT") of the second rear upper decorative part 3212. The surface of the body 3210 (the part where the penetration part is formed) is coated with a semi-transparent (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass-like) film or a semi-transparent (in this example, red, etc.) film. A cover body made of resin or the like may be provided. This prevents the light from the LED that emits light to decorate the back upper first decorative part 3211 and the LED that emits light to emits the back upper second decorative part 3212 to be seen directly, so that the player does not feel dazzled. can do. Furthermore, by making the film or cover body emit light from the surface, the light source becomes less noticeable when the LED that emits light to decorate the back upper first decorative portion 3211 or the LED that emits light to decorate the back upper second decorative portion 3212. can do.

Further, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the back side on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted. To avoid confusion between the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board and other electronic components such as LEDs that are also mounted, or other decorative boards, the letters and symbols should be in a color with high brightness or saturation (for example, yellow). This is done by screen printing using ink. Note that the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the back surface on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted. For one or both of the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board, ink of a color with low brightness or saturation (for example, green, etc.) may be applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing. To avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted, characters and symbols are printed with foil-cut characters (in other words, wiring patterns made of copper foil on the layer where wiring patterns are formed (copper plane)). The letters are formed by cutting out the surrounding copper foil (cutting letters), and the surface of the foil cutting letters is coated with a dark solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the mounting surface of the LED. Alternatively, the ink of a predetermined color (including not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation) may be applied to the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) by screen printing. In this case as well, the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LEDs for illuminating the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted. Interference of light with the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board can be suppressed.

In addition, the back upper first decorative board is mounted with an LED that emits light to decorate the back upper first decorative part 3211, and the rear upper second decorative board is mounted with an LED that emits light to decorate the back upper second decorative part 3212. The decorative substrate is firmly attached to the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (difficult to remove, or at least part of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear upper first decorative substrate, or the rear upper second decorative substrate is attached to the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 by welding, etc.) In this way, the LED mounting surfaces of the rear upper first decorative board and the rear upper second decorative board can be attached to the rear upper movable decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions of the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate and the rear upper second decorative substrate due to mischief or the like.

Furthermore, among the plurality of decorative boards on which the plurality of LEDs belonging to the first board light emitting group to the sixth board light emitting group are mounted, an LED for decorating the 7-segment display section by emitting light is provided on a part of one of the decorative boards. In other words, when mounting multiple LEDs whose light intensity can be adjusted (dimmable LED group) and multiple LEDs whose light intensity cannot be adjusted (non-dimmable LED group) on a single decorative board. Alternatively, a decorative body in which the above-mentioned through-hole is formed may be provided on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimmable LED group. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED is further enhanced.

As mentioned above, information such as letters, numbers, patterns, etc. are displayed on the back upper first decorative part 3211 and the back upper second decorative part 3212, and important information in game performance is displayed. It can play an important role. Note that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may directly control the main control board 1310, and in this case, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the first Compared to the case of controlling the decorative part 3211 and the second rear upper decorative part 3212, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions (such as displaying content different from the content originally displayed), and there is no disadvantage to players, etc. You can do it like this.

Additionally, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control steady processing approximately every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. , the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decoration part 3211 and the rear upper second decoration part 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 at a shorter cycle. The display contents of the upper rear upper decorative part 3211 and the upper rear upper decorative part 3212 can be updated, and even if a problem occurs, the display contents of the upper rear upper decorative part 3211 and the upper rear upper decorative part 3212 will be updated. Even when content different from the originally displayed content is displayed, the displayed content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) and changed to the original display content, and no disadvantage is given to players or the like. In other words, the first decorative part 3211 on the back which displays important information (high importance) and the second decorative part 3212 on the back back which display important information are more important than the light-emitting decorations which do not display important information (low importance). Since a control signal is output in short cycles to update the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (LED), there is a problem with the display contents of the first rear upper decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 that display important information. Even if this occurs, the display content can be immediately changed to normal display content, and it is possible to prevent content that is different from the original from being displayed and causing a disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, in the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the back upper first decoration part 3211 and the back rear upper second decoration part 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, There is a risk that a communication error may occur between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, resulting in a malfunction in the information shown by the upper rear upper decoration part 3211 and the rear upper second decoration part 3212. In the example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the back upper first decorative part 3211 and the back upper second decorative part 3212, so that the peripheral control part 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the back upper first decorative part 3211 and the back upper second decorative part 3212. Compared to the case where the back upper second decorative part 3212 is controlled, problems are less likely to occur in the information shown by the back upper first decorative part 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative part 3212, resulting in a disadvantage to the player. You can restrain yourself from giving.

[Variation example 1 of rainbow color production]
Next, a modification of the above-mentioned rainbow effect will be explained. In this example, the player can determine the degree of expectation of a jackpot by pressing the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 while the rainbow color performance is being performed. In addition, in Modification 1, only the parts that are different from the above embodiment will be explained, and no redundant explanation will be given.

Specifically, when a rainbow color effect is being executed as shown in FIG. Even if a press operation part 303 of a performance operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during execution of the rainbow color performance, the rainbow color performance is continuously executed until timing t100 without ending the rainbow color performance.

On the other hand, when a rainbow color effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 245, if a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot is not in progress, such as when the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow color effect, the rainbow color effect When the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during execution, the rainbow color effect being executed ends at timing t6 when the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed. The performance display device 1600 displays a predetermined performance mode (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, etc.), and the various decorations provided on the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are displayed on the performance display device 1600. The LEDs on the board are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (a part or all of them may be turned off).

As a result, it is possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot when the rainbow effect is being executed, and during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being executed, the player presses the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to encourage the user to actively press the operation unit 303. Furthermore, if the player presses the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow color effect is being executed, and it is determined that the jackpot expectation is high, the game interest is improved. can be done.

In addition, after the rainbow color effect being executed is completed based on the fact that the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow color effect, a message unrelated to the rainbow color effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. An effect display may also be performed. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the rainbow effect has ended, and can be made to reliably make the player realize that the expectation level of the jackpot is low. Further, when a performance display unrelated to the rainbow color effect is executed on the effect display device 1600, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect can also be terminated in accordance with the operation of the effect operation unit 300. Alternatively, if the performance operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period while the performance display unrelated to the rainbow color performance is being executed, the performance display unrelated to the rainbow color performance may be terminated. You may also do so. Further, after finishing the effect display unrelated to the rainbow color effect being executed on the effect display device 1600, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period) (or when the non-fluctuation performance period in which the fluctuation performance is not executed reaches a predetermined period), the rainbow color performance may be restarted. As a result, the light emitting mode and display mode of the rainbow color effect are imprinted in the player's mind, and when the rainbow color effect is executed in a subsequent variable effect, a variable effect with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed. The production operation unit 300 can be operated with such expectations.

In addition, in FIG. 245, when the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the rainbow color effect is being executed, the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs on the door frame 3 After completing the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration in the LEDs of the various decorative boards, the rainbow-colored effect display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing at which the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration is finished. etc., ends the presentation display. This prevents the display contents from being suddenly switched on the effect display device 1600, and allows the display contents to be switched while retaining the lingering effect of the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode.

Further, a predetermined sound may be output when the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow color effect; in this case, the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 After outputting a predetermined sound based on the pressing operation, the predetermined sound is outputted at a predetermined timing than the timing at which the predetermined sound was output (this may be the same timing as the timing at which the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration ends, or a different timing). Period (If a predetermined sound is output at the same timing as the end of the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration When outputting a predetermined sound at a timing different from the timing at which the rainbow color effect lighting decoration ends, the rainbow color effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is output at a delayed timing (a period different from the predetermined period from the timing at which the rainbow color effect light emitting decoration ends). The presentation display may be terminated. In this case as well, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being suddenly switched in the effect display device 1600, and to switch the display contents while leaving the aftertaste of the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode.

In addition, when the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow effect, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the various types provided on the door frame 3 After completing the rainbow-colored light emitting decoration on the LEDs on the decorative board, the rainbow-colored LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are displayed again. It may also be possible to start a light-emitting decoration for the performance. In this case, after finishing the illumination decoration of the rainbow effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600 Before ending the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode (while continuing the effect display such as the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600), the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be displayed again. It is also possible to start a rainbow-colored light emitting decoration on the LEDs and the LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of players who are disappointed because they have judged that their expectation of a jackpot is low because the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect has ended, and to draw their attention to the rainbow effect again.

Further, in addition to the above-described example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be determined by varying the sound output mode during the execution of the rainbow effect. For example, when the above-mentioned rainbow color effect is being executed, if a variable display with a high expectation of jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach after the rainbow color effect, the mode corresponding to the rainbow color effect may be changed. While the sound output is being executed, if a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot is not in progress, such as when a rainbow color effect is being executed and the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow color effect, the system will respond to the rainbow color effect. It is also possible to perform sound output in another mode without performing sound output in one mode, or to not perform sound output in another mode. In this case as well, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be determined based on the execution of the rainbow effect and the manner of sound output, and if it is determined that the degree of expectation of a jackpot is high, the game's interest can be improved.

[Variation example 2 of rainbow color effect]
The above rainbow effect does not involve the movement of movable objects, but the movable objects that are decorated with light in the above rainbow effect must be illuminated in addition to the light emission decoration in the rainbow effect, or at a predetermined rate. It may also be possible to perform an action linked to the rainbow color effect. This will be shown below as modification example 2. In addition, in modification 2, only the parts different from the above embodiment will be explained, and no redundant explanation will be given.

As shown in FIG. 246, at timing t2, the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is not pressed and the button validity period (for example, 5 When the rainbow color effect starts (timing t2) in response to the elapse of seconds (seconds), the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back, front, lower, and middle decorative boards 3168 belonging to the fourth board light emitting group are illuminated with a predetermined light emitting color (in this example, After emitting light (blue), the emitted light color is controlled to change at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds) (in this example, "blue" → "purple" → "red" → "white" → "yellow"). " → "Green" → "Blue" → "Purple" →...).

Also, at timing t2, the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or the button validity period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 being pressed. When the rainbow color effect is started in response to this, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 of the back front lower display unit 3160 on which the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is provided rises from the normal standby position as shown in FIG. The front of the effect display device 1600 (in this example, a part of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 rises so as to overlap the front of the effect display device 1600. In addition, by rising to the vicinity of the center of the effect display device 1600, etc. The entire back front lower middle decoration body 3161 may be raised so as to overlap with the front of the effect display device 1600.), and then rotated around the axis in the front and back direction.

As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect, the light emitting decoration by LED and the operation by the movable body (back front lower middle decoration board 3168) are executed in front of the effect display device 1600, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is Since the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back, front, lower, and middle decorative substrates 3168 for light-emitting decoration change the emitted light color every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), it is possible to perform a highly attention-grabbing performance. In addition, since the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is exposed in front of the effect display device 1600 and rotates with the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 partially overlapping the effect display device 1600, it is not visible to the player. It can make the player think that something good is going to happen, and it can make the player feel more excited about the game.

In addition, to end the rainbow effect (timing t99), the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 stops rotating around the axis in the front and back direction, descends from the front of the effect display device 1600, and returns to the normal standby position. Stop. In this example, the effect display device 1600 generates a reach of the decorative pattern in synchronization with the movement of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 to the normal standby position. In this way, by rotating the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 that is exposed in front of the effect display device 1600 while decorating it with light, a part of the effect display device 1600 is covered and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is rotated. In order to attract attention, it is possible to surprise the player when the reach of the decorative pattern occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 to the normal standby position, thereby increasing expectations for a jackpot. .

In addition, if an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect as described above, a plurality of lights mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that emits light and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 End of the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration using LEDs. This prevents the rainbow effect from being performed in an incomplete manner.

On the other hand, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the back, front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 does not stop its operation, and performs the same operation as when no abnormal condition has occurred. . In addition, in a variable performance that executes a rainbow color effect, even if an abnormal condition occurs before the start of the rainbow color effect, the operation will be performed at the timing when the original rainbow color effect starts as in the state where no abnormal condition has occurred. It has become. In other words, if it is not possible to completely control the light emission for the rainbow effect as designed, the light emission decoration using the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back, front, lower, and middle decorative boards 3168 will be canceled or not executed. Operations that do not affect the light-emitting decoration of the performance are executed as scheduled (as designed) without being canceled. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the variable performance is continuing, and it is possible to prevent the player from having the misunderstanding that the variable performance has ended because the rainbow color performance has been stopped.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247, when an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the light is mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that emits light and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161. The light emitting decoration of a rainbow color performance by a plurality of LEDs of a first board light emitting group to a sixth board light emitting group provided on a game board 5 including a plurality of LEDs is ended and the lights are controlled to be turned off. Even if the door frame 3 is closed during the rainbow color effect and the abnormality is resolved, it will not return to the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect (the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect will not restart). There is.

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 when the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is operating in conjunction with the rainbow color effect (timing t6), the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect. The operation linked to the predetermined rainbow color effect is continuously performed without stopping (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow color effect, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is configured to continue the operation of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 while ending the light emitting decoration of the rainbow color effect. Since the operation continues, the player can be made aware that the variable performance is continuing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the variable performance that executes the rainbow color effect and the abnormality is resolved before the rainbow color effect ends and the abnormal state returns to the normal state, the back front, lower and middle decorative bodies 3161 are decorated with light. The rainbow-colored light emitting decoration by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back, front, lower and middle decorative substrates 3168 is not restarted. In other words, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of a rainbow color effect in a variable effect that executes a rainbow color effect, and the abnormality is resolved and the abnormal state returns to the normal state before the rainbow color effect ends, the back The front lower middle decoration body 3161 performs an operation linked to the rainbow color performance in an unlit state where no light-emitting decoration is performed. As a result, when the rainbow color effect display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an abnormal state occurs in the variable effect that executes the rainbow color effect depending on whether or not the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is decorated with light emission. It is possible to determine what has been done, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts, etc.

It should be noted that depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), it may be configured to vary whether or not to continue or start the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, for example, the above-mentioned For errors that have a small impact on the game, continue the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front, lower and middle decorations 3161, or execute the operation linked to the rainbow color effect as scheduled (operate at the timing set in the scheduler). On the other hand, in the case of an error that seriously affects the game, the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the back front, lower and middle decoration body 3161 is stopped (after the operation linked to the rainbow color effect is stopped, it is returned to the normal standby position). ) or by controlling so as not to perform operations linked to a pre-scheduled rainbow effect (set in the scheduler), even when a variable effect is in progress. The variable performance may be interrupted or terminated. As a result, the operating state of the back, front, and lower middle decorative bodies 3161 can be varied depending on the degree of error, and it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

Further, depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency), whether or not to display the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be made to disappear may be changed, for example, the effect on the above-mentioned game is small. Regarding errors, a warning display (for example, "Door is open", etc.) is displayed so as to partially overlap the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 without causing the display of the rainbow color effect display mode to disappear. For errors that have a serious impact on the performance, the display of the rainbow color effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is deleted and only a warning display (for example, "Unauthorized winning has occurred!") is displayed, so that the rainbow color effect is not executed. Even if there is, the display of the rainbow color effect (rainbow color effect display mode) may be interrupted or terminated. Thereby, the display mode on the effect display device 1600 can be changed depending on the degree of error, and it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, as shown in the first modification of the rainbow color effect, when a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach after the rainbow color effect, it is necessary or a predetermined ratio. The back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is operated in conjunction with the rainbow color effect, and if a variable display with high expectation of jackpot is not executed, such as when the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow color effect, the back front The lower middle decorative body 3161 may not be operated in conjunction with the rainbow effect. As a result, expectations for a jackpot can be improved if the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow color effect. Even if the player does not do so, there is a possibility that a fluctuating display with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed, so that expectations for a jackpot are not lost.

Further, although the above embodiments (all embodiments including Modifications 1 and 2) are related to rainbow color effects, the present technical idea can be applied to effects other than rainbow color effects. For example, in the second modification, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is not limited to operating in conjunction with a rainbow color effect, but can also be applied to a case in which it is operated in association with other effects.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above embodiment, separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, etc. ) is shown in the form of a penetrating hole, but it is not limited to this, and may be in the form of a slit or notch.

For example, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a mahjong ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate rotating drums or reels. Here, the slot machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 209, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, insert the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turn it clockwise to lock the front door (front frame) 6002 into the main body. Part (box) 6004 can be opened.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body part (box) 6004. It is used to open and close the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal keyhole 6005 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. It includes a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates when a regular metal key is rotated. The cylinder body of the metal locking device passes through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. If the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

In addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and connects the main body ( It is electrically connected to the ground board provided inside the box (box) 6004. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) is capable of consolidating electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall. Electrically connected to equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004 is arranged on the main body part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. Rather, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch should not be placed near the metal locking device, and should be located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise were to enter the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch would not be affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts have no decorative plating applied at all, while others have decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating, such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may penetrate. Among the various decorative parts, those whose entire front and back surfaces are decorated with decorative plating are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through wiring (not shown), while others have electrically conductive members attached directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. (Some are connected electrically). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative sections from entering the board ground of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative sections by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. In addition, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into various decorative parts that have decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, and from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the gaming hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side, as described above.

Note that a static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box) 6004, A static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative parts. Some have decorative plating applied to the entire surface, and among various decorative parts, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown. The ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are connected electrically to the terminals of the power supply board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow through it, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the overvoltage disappears, the surge protection element (surge absorber) , which has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protrusion. Further, a storage payment button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 as well as a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a that can change setting values is mounted. That is, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Note that the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, or It may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 includes a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). A settings display device 1310g configured with the above-mentioned settings change permission lamp 1310z, etc. may be implemented.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000, performance devices (not shown), etc. can be viewed. It is now possible to see through. The three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, a presentation device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

For these variable rotating bodies, a translucent pattern band with multiple types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) printed as pattern information is attached to each cylindrical frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and each variable rotary body is connected to an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in the display window that changes continuously from top to bottom. It looks like this.

The performance device includes a plurality of movable performance bodies (not shown), the above-mentioned performance display device 1600, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable presentation objects, the drawing control of the presentation display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The progress of the performance is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310 starts displaying symbol information in a variable manner based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 6008 as game media, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026 on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

In addition, in the integrated gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 controls when a predetermined number of game balls as game media are inserted into the ball slot 6008', and when the starting lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount to the game ball receptacle 6026 as a game medium.

(Solution 1)
A game machine having a game board in which a game area is formed in which a game ball can flow, a lottery is drawn based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the game machine having a plurality of light-emitting bodies. is mounted, and includes a specific mounting area in which a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface, a performance display means capable of displaying an image, and a performance control means for controlling the performance, and the performance control means includes: In addition to controlling the performance display means to display a specific performance image, it is also possible to perform multicolor light emission control in which a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area emit light in different colors at the same time. If the predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission by the multicolor light emission control, the brightness of the plurality of light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area can be changed while continuing light emission by the multicolor light emission control. Features. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 1, since a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which a plurality of light emitters are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface is improved, and uneven illuminance is reduced. etc. can be suppressed from occurring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the effect of simultaneously causing a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area to emit light in different colors. In addition, during multicolor light emission control, which is executed with reflection efficiency improved by the white coating, the player can change the brightness of the light emitted by the multicolor light emission control, allowing the player to adjust the brightness according to the player's preference. It becomes possible to perform light emission under multicolor light emission control based on the brightness, and it is possible to improve the troublesomeness and difficulty in viewing light emission under multicolor light emission control. This eliminates the factor of reducing interest in light emission in multicolor light emission control, and it is possible to suppress a reduction in interest in the game.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine according to Solution 1, a special mounting area in which a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface where a plurality of light emitting bodies are mounted is provided separately from the specific mounting area, and the effect control means is configured to control the effect display means. Multiple light emitters mounted in a special mounting area when controlling to display a specific effect image and performing multicolor light emission control in which multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area simultaneously emit light in different colors. It is possible to perform a control different from the multicolor light emission control, and if a predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission by the multicolor light emission control, the light emission by the multicolor light emission control is continued. At the same time, it is possible to change the brightness of a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area, and furthermore, while the brightness of a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area is adjusted in response to an operation on an adjustment unit, The plurality of light emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area are not subjected to brightness adjustment, and control other than multicolor light emission control is continued at a predetermined constant brightness. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 2, it is possible to use the light emitted by the plurality of light emitters mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for brightness adjustment. The accuracy of comparison between the light emitted by the light emitting device and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitters mounted in the special mounting area increases, and it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine according to Solution 1 has a plurality of special mounting areas in which control other than multicolor light emission control is performed as the special mounting area, and for a first special mounting area among the plurality of special mounting areas. While the brightness of multiple light emitters emitting light under multicolor light emission control is adjusted in response to operations on the adjustment unit, the brightness adjustment for multiple light emitters mounted in the first special mounting area The first control, which is different from the multicolor light emission control, is continued at a predetermined constant brightness without being subject to While the brightness of the plurality of light emitters emitting light in the light emission control is adjusted in response to the operation on the adjustment section, the brightness of the plurality of light emitters mounted in the second special mounting area is also adjusted in synchronization. The present invention is characterized in that the second control, which is different from the multicolor light emission control, is continued. According to the game machine described in Solution 3, it is possible to use the light emitted by the plurality of light emitters mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for brightness adjustment. The accuracy of comparison between the light emitted by the light emitting device and the light emitted by the plurality of light emitters mounted in the special mounting area increases, and it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 4)
A game machine having a game board in which a game area is formed in which a game ball can flow, a lottery is drawn based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the game machine having a plurality of light-emitting bodies. A specific mounting area in which a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface, an effect display means that can display an image, an effect control means that controls the effect, and a state that detects the state of the gaming machine. Detecting means, the effect control means controls the effect display means to display a specific effect image, and performs multicolor light emission control that causes a plurality of light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. When the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission under multicolor light emission control, some or all of the plurality of light emitters emitting light under multicolor light emission control can be It is characterized by turning off the light. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 4, since a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the plurality of light emitters are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface is improved and uneven illuminance is reduced. etc. can be suppressed from occurring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the effect of simultaneously causing a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area to emit light in different colors. In addition, when the state detection means detects that a specific state is detected during light emission by multicolor light emission control, some or all of the plurality of light emitting bodies emitting light by multicolor light emission control are turned off, so that, for example, a game machine When the state is such that the light emitting effect cannot be properly performed by multicolor light emitting control, it is possible to prevent the incomplete light emitting effect from being executed and the game interest being reduced. (For example, see paragraphs 2869 to 2891, FIGS. 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 5)
In the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention, a special light-emitting region section in which a white coating film is provided on the mounting surface on which the light-emitting body is mounted is provided as the light-emitting region section, separately from the specific light-emitting region section, and the effect control means , in relation to a specific effect image displayed on the effect display device, while controlling the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area to emit light in a predetermined rainbow color mode, the light emitting body mounted in the special light emitting area It is possible to perform control to cause the light emitting body mounted in a specific light emitting area to emit light in a rainbow color mode, and furthermore, it is possible to perform control to cause the light emitting body mounted in a specific light emitting area to emit light in a rainbow color mode. When the means detects that the specific state is present, the device is implemented in the special light emitting area while performing control to end the light emission in the rainbow color mode regardless of whether or not the specific light emitting period remains. Even if the state detection means detects a specific state within a specific light emitting period, the light emitting body does not terminate light emission in another mode and continues to emit light in another mode until the specific light emission period has elapsed. It is characterized by performing control to continue emitting light. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 5, even if some or all of the plurality of light emitting bodies are turned off due to the state of the gaming machine becoming a specific state, the specific light emitting period remains. This can be determined by the continuation of light emission by the light emitting body mounted in the special light emitting area, and the player is not given the misunderstanding that the specific light emitting period has ended.

(Solution 6)
The gaming machine according to Solution 4 or Solution 5 has a plurality of special light emitting regions in which the luminous body emits light in a manner different from the rainbow color mode, and the plurality of special light emitting regions have Regarding the first special light emitting area, it is possible to emit light in a special manner within a specific light emitting period, and even if the state detection means detects that the specific state is within the specific light emitting period. Control is performed to continue emitting light in the special mode until a specific light emitting period has elapsed without terminating the light emission in the special mode, and for the second special light emitting area among the plurality of special light emitting areas. , it is possible to emit light in a special mode different from the special mode within the specific light emission period, and when the state detection means detects that the specific state is within the specific light emission period, at the same time as the light emission in the rainbow color mode ends. The present invention is characterized in that the light emitting body mounted in the second special light emitting area is controlled to end light emission in a special mode. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 6, even if some or all of the plurality of light emitting bodies are turned off due to the state of the gaming machine becoming a specific state, the specific light emitting period remains. This can be determined by the continuation of light emission by the light emitting body mounted in the special light emitting area, and the player is not given the misunderstanding that the specific light emitting period has ended.

(Solution 7)
A game machine having a game board in which a game area is formed in which a game ball can flow, a lottery is drawn based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the game machine having a plurality of light-emitting bodies. A specific mounting area in which a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface, an effect display means that can display an image, an effect control means that controls the effect, and a state that detects the state of the gaming machine. Detecting means, the effect control means controls the effect display means to display a specific effect image, and performs multicolor light emission control that causes a plurality of light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. It is possible to generate a specific period in which the process is performed, and if the state detection means detects a specific state during the specific period, the multicolor light emission control is terminated regardless of whether the specific period remains. The light emitting device is characterized in that even if the specific state changes to a normal state within the specific period, light emission by multicolor light emission control is not restarted. According to the game machine described in Solution 7, since a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the plurality of light emitters are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface is improved, and uneven illuminance is reduced. etc. can be suppressed from occurring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the effect of simultaneously causing a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area to emit light in different colors. In addition, the multicolor light emission control is terminated when the state detecting means detects that the specific state is present during light emission by the multicolor light emission control, and even if the state changes from the specific state to the normal state within the specific period, the multicolor light emission control is terminated. Since the light emission by the color light emission control is not resumed, for example, when the state of the gaming machine is such that the light emission effect by the multicolor light emission control cannot be properly performed, an incomplete light emission effect is executed and the game interest is prevented from decreasing. Even if the state becomes normal, it can be determined that the specific state has occurred within the specific period until the specific period has elapsed. (For example, see paragraphs 2869 to 2891, FIGS. 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 8)
In the gaming machine according to Solution 7, a special light emitting region section is provided as the light emitting region section, in addition to the specific light emitting region section, and the mounting surface on which the light emitting body is mounted is provided with a white coating film, and the effect control means , in relation to a specific effect image displayed on the effect display device, while controlling the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area to emit light in a predetermined rainbow color mode, the light emitting body mounted in the special light emitting area It is possible to perform control to cause the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area to emit light in a rainbow color mode, and furthermore, the state detection means can be used to control the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area to emit light in a rainbow color mode within a specific period. When it is detected that the device is in a specific state, control is performed to end the rainbow-colored light emission regardless of whether or not the specific period remains, and the device returns from the specific state to the normal state within the specific period. The light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area is controlled so as not to return to rainbow-colored light emission even if control to continue emitting light in another mode without terminating it even in the case of a specific period of time, and to continue emitting light in another mode even after the specified state changes to a normal state within the specified period. Features. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 8, even if some or all of the plurality of light emitting bodies are turned off due to the state of the gaming machine becoming a specific state, it is possible to detect that the specific period remains. The discrimination can be made by the light emitting body mounted in the special light emitting area continuing to emit light in a mode different from the rainbow color mode, and the player is not given the misunderstanding that the specific period has ended.

(Solution 9)
In the gaming machine according to solution 8, the effect control means is implemented in the specific light emitting area in relation to a specific effect image displayed on the effect display device when the specific state changes to a normal state after a specific period has elapsed. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control the light emitting body to emit light in a predetermined rainbow color manner. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 9, the light emitting body is colored in a predetermined rainbow color in relation to the specific effect image displayed on the effect display device when the specific state changes to the normal state after a specific period has passed. Since it is possible to control the light emission in a rainbow-colored pattern, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest by controlling the light emission in a rainbow-colored pattern.

(Solution 10)
A game machine that has a game board in which a game area in which a game ball can fall is formed, performs a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a winning game based on the result of the lottery, the game machine having a plurality of light emitting lights. A specific mounting area where the body is mounted and a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means controls the possibility of execution of the winning game to the player. The first light emission control causes a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in the same color, and the second light emission control causes multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. The second light emission control is for notifying that the possibility of executing a winning game is higher than the first light emission control, and furthermore, apart from the second light emission control, It is possible to perform a third light emission control in which a plurality of light emitting bodies mounted in a specific mounting area emit light in different colors at the same time, and the third light emission control is a control that is performed when there is no possibility of executing a winning game. It is characterized by According to the game machine described in Solution 10, since a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the plurality of light emitters are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface is improved, and uneven illuminance is reduced. etc. can be suppressed from occurring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the effect of simultaneously causing a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area to emit light in different colors. Furthermore, rather than the first light emission control in which a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area simultaneously emit light in different colors, a second light emission control is executed in which a plurality of light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area simultaneously emit light in different colors. If this happens, it will notify you that there is a high possibility of playing a winning game, but similarly to the second light emission control, a third light emission control is executed in which multiple light emitting bodies mounted in a specific mounting area emit light in different colors at the same time. If this happens, there is no possibility of a winning game being executed, so if the second light emission control is executed, expectations for the winning game can be increased, but there is a possibility that the third light emission control may have been executed. It is possible to create anxiety and draw attention to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. (For example, see paragraphs 2921 to 2929, FIGS. 244 to 245, etc.).

(Solution 11)
In the game machine according to the solution 10, when the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow color mode by the third control, the game machine receives an operation of a predetermined effect operation part by the player. However, if the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow color mode by the second control, the player can terminate the light emission in the rainbow color mode. The present invention is characterized in that even if the effect operation section is operated, the light emission in the rainbow color mode cannot be terminated. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, when the light emitting body mounted in the specific light emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow color mode, the production operation section can be caused to be operated, and the production operation section It is possible to improve the game's interest in the operation.

(Solution 12)
In the gaming machine according to Solution 11, after the player operates the predetermined effect operation section during execution of the third control and the rainbow color mode ends, the rainbow color mode continues until a specific period elapses. It is characterized in that it is impossible to emit light in a rainbow color pattern, and after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to emit light in a rainbow color pattern. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, if the emitting light in the rainbow color mode is terminated in response to the player's operation of the predetermined effect operation section during execution of the third control, the emitting light is emitted until a specific period elapses. Since it is impossible to emit light in a rainbow color mode, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the end of light emission in a rainbow color mode.

(Solution 13)
A game machine having a game board in which a game area is formed in which a game ball can flow, a lottery is drawn based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, the game machine having a plurality of light-emitting bodies. A first specific mounting area where a plurality of light emitters are mounted and a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface, and a second specific mounting area where a plurality of light emitters are mounted and a dark coating film is formed on the mounting surface. and an effect display means capable of displaying an image, and causes a plurality of light emitting bodies mounted in the first specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors when a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display means. Multicolor light emission is possible, and the plurality of light emitters mounted in the second specific mounting area are capable of emitting multicolor light even when the plurality of light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area are performing multicolor light emission. , is characterized in that monochromatic light emission, which is different from the multicolor light emission, is possible. According to the game machine described in Solution 13, since a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the plurality of light emitters are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface is improved, and uneven illuminance is reduced. etc. can be suppressed from occurring. As a result, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the effect of simultaneously emitting light of different colors from a plurality of light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area where a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface. . Further, even when multicolor light emission is performed by a plurality of light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area, the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area is capable of emitting monochrome light that is different from multicolor light emission. Since a dark-colored coating film is formed on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, it is possible to suppress interference caused by the light emission of each of the plurality of light emitters mounted, and it is possible to make the light emission of each of the plurality of light emitters clear. become. (For example, see paragraphs 2913 to 2916, FIG. 243, etc.).

(Solution 14)
A gaming machine that has a game board in which a game area where a game ball can fall, performs a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and awards profits based on the result of the lottery, and controls the performance. A display control means to be performed, a movable body that can operate in a predetermined operation mode, a plurality of specific decorative boards on which a plurality of light emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating film formed on the mounting surface, and the state of the gaming machine. the specific decorative board is also provided on the movable body, and the effect control means operates the movable body in a predetermined operation mode and is mounted on the plurality of specific decorative boards. It is possible to perform multicolor light emission control in which a plurality of light emitting bodies simultaneously emit light in different colors. The present invention is characterized in that, while some or all of the plurality of light emitters mounted on the specific decorative substrate are turned off, the movable body continues to operate in a predetermined operation mode. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 14, since a white coating film is formed on the mounting surface of the plurality of specific decorative boards on which the plurality of light emitters are mounted, the light emitted from the light emitters on the mounting surface of the specific decorative board is By improving reflection efficiency, it is possible to suppress uneven illuminance and the like. Thereby, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the effect of simultaneously causing a plurality of light emitting bodies mounted on a specific mounting board whose mounting surface has a white coating film to emit light in different colors. In addition, when the state detection means detects a specific state during execution of multicolor light emission control, part or all of the plurality of light emitters mounted on the plurality of specific decorative boards are turned off, while the movable body In order to continue operation in a predetermined operating mode, even if some or all of the plurality of light emitting bodies are turned off due to the state of the gaming machine becoming a specific state, multicolor light emission control is originally performed. If so, the continuation can be determined by the continuation of the motion of the movable body in a predetermined motion mode, and the player will not be misled or anxious. (For example, see paragraphs 2930 to 2942, FIGS. 246 to 247, etc.).

[Split game board]
The pachinko machine 1 is constructed by removing the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 out of the frame body consisting of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and replacing it by attaching a new game board 5 to the main body frame 4. This makes it possible to change to a pachinko machine 1 with different specifications. In addition, as described above, the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a, and the front and rear of this plate-shaped game panel 1100. Various units and various parts are attached to the. By dividing the plate-shaped game panel 1100 and attaching various units and various parts to each, it is possible to easily consider combinations of designs and appearance at the development stage, and the various prize openings provided on the game board 5 can be easily considered. It is also possible to accommodate changes in the number and arrangement of decorative members, the shape of the game area 5a, etc.

A completely new game board 5A (hereinafter may simply be referred to as "divided game board 5A") in which the plate-shaped game panel 1100 is divided and various units and various members are attached to each part (hereinafter, "A" may be simply referred to as "split game board 5A". A specification) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 248 to 250. FIG. 248 is a schematic front view (a) of the divided game board, and a schematic back view (b) of the divided game board. Figure 249 is a rear perspective view (a) of the split game board seen from the lower left rear before the right and left game boards constituting the split game board are combined; It is a perspective view (b). FIG. 250 is a schematic front view of the divided game board in which the divided game board in FIG. 248(a) has been decorated. Note that, in FIGS. 248 to 250, various units and various members corresponding to the various units and various members attached to the game board 5 already explained in FIG. 129 etc. are omitted.

The divided game board 5A is attached to the above-mentioned front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and to the rear side of the front component 1000, and is attached to the rear end of the game area 5a. The above-mentioned plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions the game board 1100 is divided into two parts in the left-right direction to form a left-side game board 5AL and a right-side game board 5AR. The left game board 5AL has a length of about three-quarters of the horizontal distance of the split game board 5A, while the right game board 5AR has a length of about 4 as the horizontal distance of the split game board 5A. It has one-half the length. The right side of the left side game board 5AL and the left side of the right side game board 5AR, where the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are combined, have a spigot structure, and the right side of the left side game board 5AL is formed in a convex shape. , the right side game board 5AR is formed in a concave shape. After combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are connected by passing and tightening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of connecting members (not shown) provided on the left side game board 5AL and right side game board 5AR, respectively. The surface of the game area 5a, which is the connecting part between the board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR and where the game ball rolls, is automatically made flush (that is, so that there is no step) between the left side game board 5AL and the right side. The game board 5AR is fixed.

In addition, the split game board 5A is made by combining the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, and then connecting members (not shown) provided on the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, respectively, from one side to the other (not shown). By tightening the bolts, the left side game board 5AL and right side game board 5AR are fixed, and the split game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, but the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are They may each be configured to be individually fixed to the main body frame 4. Even in this case, the surface of the game area 5a, which is the connecting part between the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, and where the game ball rolls, is automatically made flush (in other words, so that there is no step). A left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR are fixed to the main body frame 4.

In the left game board 5AL, a function display unit 1400 capable of displaying the game status using LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 is arranged on the front (surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000. . On the other hand, the left side game board 5AL has a sub-function display unit 2250 (the "sub-function display unit" is replaced by a "fourth symbol") that can display the gaming situation using LEDs based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510. ) is placed on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 and protrudes toward the gaming area 5a. Note that the sub-function display unit 2250 was disposed on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 and protruded toward the gaming area 5a, but instead of this, the sub-function display unit 2250 constitutes the above-mentioned front unit 2000. It may be arranged in any unit or member. In addition, the gaming situation displayed on the sub-function display unit 2250 includes at least the first special symbol display and/or the second special symbol display displayed on the function display unit 1400, and the game status displayed on the function display unit 1400. The game information may be displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner, or may be displayed in the same light emitting manner as the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400.

The left side game board 5AL includes a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left side front component 1000L"), and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 (hereinafter referred to as "left side front component 1000L") on the back side of the left side front component 1000L. (Sometimes referred to as "left side game panel 1100L.") is arranged. The right side game board 5AR includes a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left side front component 1000R"), and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 (hereinafter referred to as "left side front component 1000R") on the back side of the right side front component 1000R. (Sometimes referred to as "right side game panel 1100R") is arranged. The above-mentioned back unit 3000 is arranged on the back side of the split game board 5A, that is, on the back side of the left side game panel 1100L and the right side game panel 1100R. When looking at the split game board 5A from the front, the back box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left side back box 3010L") of the back unit 3000 located behind the left side game panel 1100L on the left side game board 5AL. The right side (the side facing the right side game panel 1100R) is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the right side opening of the left side back box 3010L"), and the back side is located behind the right side game panel 1100R on the right side game board 5AR. The left side (the side facing the left gaming panel 1100L) of the back box 3010 of the unit 3000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right side back box 3010R") is open (hereinafter referred to as the "left side opening of the right side back box 3010R") ) has been done.

At the rear of the left rear box 3010L, there is the above-described effect display device 1600 that is detachably attached, a peripheral control unit 1500 that accommodates the above-mentioned peripheral control board 1510, etc., and a main compartment that accommodates the above-mentioned main control board 1310. A drive that drives the control unit 1300 and various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc.) A left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L") in which a board (board, etc.) is accommodated is arranged. Note that the main control board 1310 is equipped with the above-mentioned setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting values.

Behind the right back box 3010R, there are various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various presentation units housed in the right back box 3010R, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc.). A right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "right drive board unit 1700R") that accommodates a drive board (drive board, etc.) is disposed.

In this way, in the split game board 5A, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, which are boards on which microprocessors are mounted, are placed behind the left game board 5AL, whereas the boards on which the microprocessors are mounted are placed behind the right game board 5AR. A decorative board on which various LEDs are mounted, a drive board for driving a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. in various production units housed in the right rear box 3010R are arranged. That is, the divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL on which the microprocessor is mounted, and a right game board 5AR on which the microprocessor is not mounted. In addition, in front of the right game board 5AR, only the objects to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the movable body on the game board side, etc.) are provided to execute the game performance, whereas in front of the left game board 5AL, the peripheral Not only the control target of the control board 1510 (sub-function display unit 2250, etc.) but also the control target of the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) is provided to display information directly related to the progress of the game (information about wins and losses, information about jackpots, etc.). Information about the type, etc.) is displayed. In this way, the right game board 5AR is configured so that only the board on which no microprocessor is mounted is provided at the rear, and only the control target of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided at the front. It becomes easy to change the game board 5AR.

[Drawer connector]
As described above, various relay boards are accommodated in the left drive board unit 1700L arranged behind the left rear box 3010L. Among these various relay boards, there is a drawer connector relay for the left side game board in which two left side game board drawer connectors LDRW are mounted vertically on the rear upper side of the left side back box 3010L and near the right opening of the left side back box 3010L. A substrate 5ALDRW is arranged. The two left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are of a convex type. The left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. The peripheral control board 1510 is further electrically connected to various relay boards, and various LEDs are mounted thereon, which are attached to various presentation units in the left drive board unit 1700L via the various relay boards or directly. It is electrically connected to a drive board that drives a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc., and is also electrically connected to a sub-function display unit 2250.

Further, as described above, various relay boards are accommodated in the right drive board unit 1700R arranged behind the right rear box 3010R. Among these various relay boards, two left side game board drawer connectors LDRW are arranged on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW at the rear upper side of the right side back box 3010R and near the left opening of the right side back box 3010R. , LDRW is arranged with a right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW on which right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted. The two right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of a concave type. The drive board that drives the decorative board on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc., which is attached to the various production units in the right drive board unit 1700R, is connected to the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right game board via various relay boards. or directly connected electrically.

At the bottom of the left back box 3010L of the left game board 5AL, and in the center of the lower side of the split game board 5A that combines the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, there are two lower game boards in the left and right direction. A lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW on which the drawer connector UDRW is mounted is arranged. The two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of a convex type. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. At the front of the main body frame 4 and at a position corresponding to the two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided in the left back box 3010L of the left side game board 5AL, there is a main body frame side relay board (not shown), and a main body frame side relay board (not shown). Two main body frame side drawer connectors are provided. The two main body frame side drawer connectors are of a concave type. Various substrates provided in the door frame 3 (decorative substrates and various relay substrates provided in the plate unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450).The various relay substrates include the plate unit 200, (includes one that relays detection signals from various sensors of the production operation unit 300) is electrically connected to the drawer connector on the main body frame side.

Here, the drawer connector LDRW for the left side game board (convex type), the drawer connector RDRW for the right side game board (concave type), the drawer connector UDRW for the lower side game board (convex type), and the drawer connector for the main frame side (concave type) Drawer connectors such as the following will be explained. The drawer connector LDRW (convex type) for the left side game board and the drawer connector RDRW (concave type) for the right side game board automatically connect the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board just by combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR. This is a connector that can be electrically connected to the game board 5AR. The lower game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) automatically connect the main body frame 4 and the split game board 5A just by attaching the split game board 5A to the main body frame 4. A connector that can make electrical connections.

[Drawer connector for left side game board, drawer connector for right side game board]
When the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are combined, the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL, which are convex types, are of concave type. It is guided and fitted to the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, and then fitted to the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. Each terminal of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW to be mounted, and each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, It is designed to be electrically connected.

The left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are combined to connect the terminals of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW and LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL, and the right side game board 5AR. By electrically connecting the terminals of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, the terminals are electrically connected to the rear of the left side back box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL. Control signal lines are formed for transmitting various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 arranged and various boards arranged behind the right back box 3010R on the right side game board 5AR. The ground (GND, circuit ground) of various control boards and other various boards placed behind the , and the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various boards placed behind the right back box 3010R of the right game board 5AR. , is electrically connected to the right side game board 5AL via various control boards and/or other various boards placed behind the left side back box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL. Various power supply lines are formed to supply various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) to various boards arranged behind the right rear box 3010R in 5AR.

Incidentally, mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior portions of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW and the insulating exterior portions of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, respectively. The left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL on which the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are mounted has a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through hole of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW. A through hole is provided in the. In addition, the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR on which the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted corresponds to the insulating mounting through holes of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW. A through hole is provided at the position.

When mounting the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL, first connect the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW of the left game board 5AL. , from the mounting surface of the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL to the terminal through hole formed on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. The terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left game board, which are inserted toward the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW and protrude from the soldering surface, are soldered to the land portions of the terminal through holes. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the ends of the rivets are caulked to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through-holes by soldering the respective terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and The insulating exterior parts of the drawer connectors LDRW and LDRW are fixed to the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL by rivet caulking.

By being fixed in this way, when the left side game board 5AL and right side game board 5AR are combined, the left side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided to the right side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type). The land portion of the through hole for the terminal to which each terminal of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW is soldered is used as a relay for the left side game board drawer connector of the left side game board 5AL against the load that occurs when the left side game board drawer connector LDRW and LDRW are fitted together. This makes it possible to prevent the substrate 5ALDRW from peeling off from the base material.

When mounting the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, install the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. As in the case of mounting the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, first, each terminal of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW of the right side game board 5AR is formed on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR. Insert the terminal from the mounting surface of the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR toward the soldering surface of the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW into the through hole for the terminal. Solder each terminal of the drawer connector RDRW for the right side game board protruding from the terminal to the land part of the through hole for the terminal. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, and the ends of the rivets are caulked to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through holes by soldering the respective terminals of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, and The insulating exterior parts of the drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW are fixed to the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR by rivet caulking.

By being fixed in this manner, when the left side game board 5AL and right side game board 5AR are combined, the left side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided to the right side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type). The land portion of the through hole for the terminal to which each terminal of the right game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW is soldered is used as a relay for the right game board drawer connector of the right game board 5AR against the load that occurs when the right game board drawer connector RDRW and RDRW are fitted together. This makes it possible to prevent the substrate 5ARDRW from peeling off from the base material.

[Lower game board drawer connector, main frame side drawer connector]
When the split game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, the drawer connectors for the lower game board UDRW, UDRW mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left game board 5AL, which is a convex type, are of the concave type. They are guided by two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of a certain main body frame 4 and are fitted together, and are mounted on the lower side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left side game board 5AL. The terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are electrically connected to the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. It is now possible to do so.

When the split game board 5A is mounted on the main body frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left side game board 5AL and the main body frame 4 are connected. By electrically connecting each terminal of two main body frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main body frame-side relay board (not shown), the terminals are arranged behind the left rear box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL. Peripheral control board 1510 and various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the pan unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450). includes those that relay detection signals from various sensors of the production operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200 and control signals that transmit various information.) A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals to and from the plate unit 200. In addition, the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various control boards and other various boards arranged behind the left side back box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL, and the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided on the main body frame 4. A ground (GND) line is formed to which the ground (GND) is electrically connected to the main body. Various power lines are formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5 V, +12 V, +24 V, etc.) created by the power source board 630 provided in the frame 4.

In addition, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL when the split game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, and the main body frame By electrically connecting the terminals of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of 4, the drawer connector is placed behind the left side back box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL. A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4.

Incidentally, mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW, and in the insulating exterior part of the main body frame side drawer connector, respectively. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted, has insulating mounting through holes for the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. Through holes are provided at corresponding positions. Further, the main body frame side relay board (not shown) on which the main body frame side drawer connector is mounted is provided with a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating attachment through hole of the main body frame side drawer connector.

For example, when mounting the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, first install the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. Connect each terminal to the through-hole for the terminal formed in the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL on the mounting surface of the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL. Insert the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW from the left side game board 5AL toward the soldering surface of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, which protrudes from the soldering surface, and connect each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW to the terminal through-hole. Solder to the land part of the hole. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and the ends of the rivets are caulked to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through holes by soldering the respective terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and The insulating exterior parts of the side game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are fixed to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL by riveting.

By being fixed in this manner, when the split game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) is guided and fitted to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). In response to the load that occurs when the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are connected, the land portion of the through hole for the terminal to which each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW is soldered is the lower game board drawer connector relay board of the left game board 5AL. 5ALUDRW can be prevented from peeling off from the base material.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 including the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, uses a self-identification code (hereinafter referred to as "ID") that can identify itself in response to various commands to the control board including the microprocessor. ). In other words, various commands from the main control board 1310 are configured to include an ID. In other words, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands including an ID to a control board equipped with a microprocessor, so that the microprocessor on the receiving side control board It is now possible to judge the compatibility (compatibility) of the combination of 1310 and the control board on the receiving side.

The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors provided at both ends, and are unidirectional from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. various commands are sent. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 extracts the ID from the received various commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is compatible (matched). This determination is performed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is mismatched in the received command analysis process in step S1022, it displays a notification of the received command. The command is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading (extracting) target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, a process for stopping the progress of the performance is set.

As described above, since the main control board 1310 can only transmit data in one direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the compatibility of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 with the peripheral control board 1510 is It is not possible to obtain a determination result regarding (consistency), and the game continues.

On the other hand, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the split game board 5A is mounted on the main body frame 4 and mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL. The terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are electrically connected to the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. As a result, various commands are transmitted bidirectionally between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 via this drawer connector. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 extracts the ID from the received various commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matching). This determination is made in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG.

When the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 determines that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched) in the command analysis process of step S560, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Information indicating that the combination with the board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) is set in the status information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and information to stop the payout operation is set in the output information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. , the LED display data creation process in step S564 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 218, and the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The command is passed to the command transmission process in step S566. In the LED display data creation process of step S564, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 displays display data (for example, alphabetical characters) to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 as an aspect of non-conformity (inconsistency). Display data that displays "H") is created and set as LED display information in the output information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and in the command transmission process of step S566, a non-conforming command is issued to notify that it is non-conforming (inconsistent). (mismatch command) and sends it to the main control board 1310. In addition, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 stores information in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in the port output process of step S548 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the output information, the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 584 is stopped, and display data (for example, the alphabet "H") to be displayed on the error LED display is output.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 by the payout control board 633, since various commands are transmitted bidirectionally between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It is possible to obtain a judgment result regarding the suitability (compatibility) of , and send this judgment result to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. The peripheral control board 1510 determines the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. This is carried out in the received command analysis process in step S1022, and if the determination result is non-conformance (inconsistency), the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Set up the process to notify. At this time, the progress of the performance may be continued as is, or processing for stopping the progress of the performance may be set.

In addition, the main control board 1310 receives a judgment result regarding the compatibility (compatibility) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 by the payout control board 633, and the received judgment result indicates that the combination is incompatible (inconsistency). When this is the case, the progress of the game may be continued as it is, or the progress of the game may be stopped.

The game board 5A shown in FIGS. 248 and 249 is composed of a left side game board 5AL and a right side game board 5AR, which constitute the A specification. Here, the A specification of the split game board 5A to the A2 specification (here, although the shape of the decorative member on the right side game board and the shape of the game area 5a are different from those of the A specification, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 The necessary various data and various programs are the same as the contents of various ROMs, and if you simply change the decoration of the right side game board to create the game board 5A2, as shown in FIG. The board 5A2 is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5A2R. The A2 specification is for changing the decoration of the right game board in the A specification, and the left game board 5AL in the A specification can be used in common, and the right game board 5AR in the A specification can be changed from the right game board 5AR in the A specification. All you have to do is replace it with 5A2R (that is, replace only the right game board).

In addition, various parts that can be used in common for various specifications, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and other various boards (for example, various relay boards, attached to the various production units housed in the left rear box 3010L) Decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive boards for driving drive motors, drive solenoids, etc.) may be arranged on the left game board 5AL. Specifically, various data and various programs necessary for the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged on the left side game board 5AL because it is only necessary to change the contents of various ROMs. Further, among the various winning holes, the winning holes whose arrangement and number are fixed without depending on the specifications are arranged on the left game board 5AL. Also, among the shapes of the decorative members and the shape of the game area 5a, those that can be used in common without depending on the specifications are arranged on the left side game board 5AL. In addition, various other boards that can be used in common regardless of specifications (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to various production units housed in the left rear box 3010L, A drive board for driving a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.) are arranged on the left game board 5AL.

On the other hand, parts depending on the specifications may be arranged on the right game board 5AR. Specifically, among the various winning holes, the winning holes that depend on the specifications are arranged on the right game board 5AR. Furthermore, the shapes of the decorative members and the shape of the game area 5a that depend on the specifications are arranged on the right side game board 5AR.

[Self-identification code of right side game board in split game board]
As mentioned above, the split game board adopts a configuration in which the left side game board and the right side game board are combined, and the left side game board is equipped with a microprocessor, whereas the right side game board is equipped with a microprocessor. In contrast, we adopted a configuration that does not include a microprocessor.

However, with such a split game board, while the left side game board and right side game board can be simply combined, workers who assemble the split game board may mistakenly combine the left side game board and the right side game board correctly. Human error may also occur, allowing the assembling of something that does not exist (resulting in an incompatible combination). If a player plays a game by attaching such an incompatible split game board to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment of the game hall, for example, the design of the entire pachinko machine will be affected. There is a risk that the sense of unity will be lost and players will lose interest in the game, and a pachinko machine that is different from the one whose specifications were submitted to the applicant institution and obtained permission in the first place will be installed in the game hall, which is not desirable. If, due to human error, decorative members corresponding to the old game board were not replaced with decorative members compatible with the new game board, the sense of unity throughout the game machine would be lost. This may lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

[ID output circuit]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the right side game board 5AR (right side game board 5A2R) is equipped with an ID output circuit that can output a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself to the left side game board 5AL. We are prepared. Here, the ID output circuit will be explained with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit.

The right game board 5AR is provided with an ID output circuit IDC that can identify itself. This ID output circuit IDC may be arranged on a dedicated board on which only itself is mounted behind the right game board 5AR, may be mounted on one of various relay boards, or may be mounted on a decorative board. It may be mounted together with an LED mounted on a board, or it may be mounted together with an electronic component mounted on another board.

The ID output circuit IDC mainly includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa is an electronic component that is mainly composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits) and can be connected in a daisy chain. , B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, F terminal, G terminal, and H terminal (that is, there are 8 parallel input terminals that can set the ID in 8-bit width). ), the CK terminal where the ID acquisition clock signal is input, and the 8 ID setting terminals A to H terminals are taken in and output as serial data without being inverted. Inverted QH terminal that takes in the information set on the QH terminal and the eight ID setting terminals from A terminal to H terminal, inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data (indicated by a solid line above the letter "Q" in the figure) ), a CK INH terminal that prohibits the input of clock signals, a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal, and each flip-flop circuit to the eight ID setting terminals A to H terminals. The S/inverted L terminal (indicated by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) switches between parallel operation and captures the set information, the SI terminal receives serial data, and the control power is supplied. It mainly consists of a power supply terminal Vcc and a GND terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

In the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, the power supply terminal Vcc is electrically connected to +5V, and the GND terminal, CK INT terminal, and SI terminal are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground). The non-inverting QH terminal is in an unconnected state, and the inverting QH terminal outputs serial data that is serially converted from the ID, which is parallel data set in the eight ID setting terminals, as an ID code signal. .

The S/inverted L terminal receives an SH/LD switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is The information set on the eight ID setting terminals from the terminal to the H terminal is captured and stored (retained), while the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is a shift operation logic (+5V and electrically Connected logic: HI) and when the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground), the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal for the captured information Shift operations are performed sequentially at the rising edge of .

The SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal may be output from the peripheral control board 1510, or may be output from a delay circuit provided together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. This delay circuit is mounted as a circuit that constitutes the ID output circuit IDC on the board together with the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and outputs the SH/LD switching signal for a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine is powered on. The logic of the circuit is a parallel operation logic, and when this predetermined time has elapsed, the circuit can switch from the parallel operation logic to the shift operation logic.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined time" is set to, for example, 30 milliseconds. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The current time information acquisition process in S1002 ends. This is determined by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 acquiring an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal in an ID determination process to be described later, and determining the compatibility (consistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. This is because it is necessary to determine.

When configuring the peripheral control board 1510 to output the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 sets eight ID setting terminals from the A terminal to the H terminal. It is possible to adjust the timing at which information is started to be captured, so it is possible to confirm the parallel operation of the parallel-to-serial converter IDCa (failure inspection). It is necessary to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal up to the inverted L terminal.

On the other hand, when configuring the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to be output from the delay circuit, each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa is connected to the A terminal to the H terminal. The period during which the information set in the eight ID setting terminals starts to be loaded is limited to a predetermined time period (for example, 30 milliseconds) after the pachinko machine is powered on, and the peripheral control board 1510 While it is not possible to confirm the parallel operation (fault inspection) of the serial converter circuit IDCa, a path is provided to transmit the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial converter IDCa. There's no need. When transmitting various control signals via the drawer connector, the number of control signals must be reduced as much as possible because the number of terminals on the drawer connector is limited. In the case of configuring the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to be output from the delay circuit, the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is Since there is no need to provide a signal transmission path, it is possible to contribute to reducing the number of control signals transmitted via the drawer connector.

In this embodiment, among the eight ID setting terminals on the right game board 5AR, the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and D terminal are electrically connected to +5V, and the E terminal, F terminal, and G terminal are electrically connected to +5V. , and H terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right game board 5AR is 11110000B when expressed in 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit. Expressed as F0H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number). On the other hand, among the eight ID setting terminals on the right game board 5A2R shown in FIG. 250, the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, and H terminal are electrically connected to +5V, and The E terminal, F terminal, and G terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right game board 5A2R is 11110001B when expressed in 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit (the alphabet "B" represents a binary number), which is expressed in hexadecimal. Expressed as F1H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In this way, the ID of the right game board 5AR and the ID of the right game board 5A2R are set in advance to be different. In this embodiment, the A specification and the A2 specification of the split game board 5A are different in the shape of the decorative member on the right side game board and the shape of the game area 5a, as described above, but the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are different. The various data and various programs necessary for this are the same as the contents of various ROMs, and the right game board can be decorated, so the combination of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR is They are compatible (matched), and the combination of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5A2R is also compatible (matched).

Further, in this embodiment, in a state where the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, each flip-flop circuit in the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa receives the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal. In order to perform a sequential shift operation (that is, the information input to the A terminal → the information input to the B terminal → the information input to the C terminal → the information input to the D terminal → the information input to the E terminal) information → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shift operation one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal and ID as serial data. (in order to output a code signal), the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa operates as an 8-bit shift register.

By combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, each of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL, as described above. By electrically connecting the terminal with each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, Control signal lines are formed to transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 placed behind the left back box 3010L and various boards placed behind the right back box 3010R on the right game board 5AR. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR outputs the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, which is mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR. The peripheral control board of the left side game board 5AL is connected to the peripheral control board of the left side game board 5AL via each terminal of RDRW and each terminal of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. When the ID acquisition clock signal from 1510 is input, an ID code signal that can identify itself based on the input ID acquisition clock signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL. I can do it. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL acquires an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, and determines the compatibility between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the overall design of the pachinko machine from losing its sense of unity, thereby preventing players from losing interest in the game. Note that this determination will be explained later.

Note that the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR connects each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, and the left side game board The ID code signal is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL through the drawer connectors LDRW and LDRW, which are mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of 5AL, and the drawer connectors. However, instead of this, connectors are provided at both ends of the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. It may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) to transmit the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right game board 5AR to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL, The board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL are directly electrically connected via an electrical wiring (harness) with connectors provided at both ends, and the board is installed on the right side game board 5AR. The ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL.

Note that the ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal to the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR are two types. The data may be transmitted through one of the drawer connectors, or may be distributed and transmitted to two drawer connectors.

[Detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions of various movable objects on the right side game board]
Next, when the right side game board 5AR is provided with various movable bodies, detection signals from the photosensor for detecting the positions (original positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies will be explained with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit.

Detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions (original positions and operating positions) of various movable bodies provided on the right game board 5AR are now collected in the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, as shown in FIG. 252. ing. The photosensor information serial output circuit PSO mainly includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit PSOa in this photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is the same circuit as the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the above-mentioned ID output circuit IDC, and here, explanations of each terminal, parts with the same circuit configuration, and operations will be omitted.

Detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (original positions and operating positions) of various movable bodies provided on the right game board 5AR are A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, F terminal, G terminal, Signals corresponding to the eight input terminals (that is, there are eight parallel input terminals capable of setting an ID with an 8-bit width) are respectively inputted. In addition, if the number of photosensors that detect the positions (original positions and operating positions) of various movable bodies provided on the right side game board 5AR is less than 8, out of the 8 input terminals, the fewer than this number and the The corresponding input terminal is electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground).

The inverted QH terminal (indicated by a solid line above the letter "Q" in the diagram) takes in the information set to the eight input terminals from the A terminal to the H terminal, inverts it, and serially outputs it as serial data. It is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above. That is, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit PSOa and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are connected in a daisy chain.

The S/inverted L terminal (indicated by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) performs a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal, and performs a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal, and performs each flip-flop circuit between the A terminal and the H terminal. The SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to switch between parallel operation and capture information set to eight input terminals. Note that the SH/LD switching signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC in addition to the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO. be done.

The S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right side game board 5AR and the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are electrically connected to +5V. In this state, the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the ID output circuit IDC. Because each flip-flop circuit of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa sequentially shifts at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, the information input to the A terminal → the information input to the B terminal) → Information input to the C terminal → Information input to the D terminal → Information input to the E terminal → Information input to the F terminal → Information input to the G terminal → Information input to the H terminal (In order to shift the information → one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal and output the ID code signal as serial data), the 8-bit It operates as a 16-bit shift register consisting of a shift register and an 8-bit shift register formed by the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

By combining the left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, each of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL, as described above. By electrically connecting the terminal to each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, the terminals on the left side game board 5AL are electrically connected. Control signal lines are formed to transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 placed behind the left back box 3010L and various boards on the right game board 5AR. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 placed behind the left rear box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL, the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right side game board 5AR becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage. , the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right game board 5AR serves as a subsequent 8-bit shift register. In other words, in the peripheral control board 1510, following the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC in the right game board 5AR, which serves as an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, The contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right game board 5AR, which serves as a shift register, are sequentially input one bit at a time as serial data.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR and the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO provided on the right side game board 5AR are connected to the right side game board drawer connector relay board of the right side game board 5AR when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. Each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the left side game board 5ARDRW, and each terminal of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. When an ID acquisition clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL is input through the drawer connector of the , the ID can identify itself based on the input ID acquisition clock signal. The code signal and detection signals for detecting the positions of various movable bodies provided on the right game board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL as a photo and ID code signal, which are one serial signal. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL acquires the photo and ID code signal by outputting the ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, and checks the compatibility between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. It is possible to make judgments and grasp the positions of various movable objects. For example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets the logic of the SH/LD switching signal at a predetermined timing in the movable body information acquisition process in step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. After outputting a clock signal for parallel operation and serial operation, outputting an ID acquisition clock signal acquires a photo and ID code signal to check the compatibility (matching) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. It is possible to determine the position of various movable objects.

Note that the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right side game board 5AR connects each terminal of the right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, and the left side game board The photo and ID code signals are transmitted to the peripheral control board of the left side game board 5AL through the drawer connectors LDRW and LDRW, which are mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of 5AL. 1510, but instead of this, the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right game board and the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left game board of the left game board 5AL are connected to each other with connectors at both ends. The photo and ID code signals may be electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via the provided electric wiring (harness), or the ID output provided on the right side game board 5AR. The board on which the circuit IDC is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL are directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, and the photo and ID code signals are transmitted to the left game board 5AL. It may also be possible to transmit it to the peripheral control board 1510 of the 5AL.

In addition, by electrically connecting the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right side game board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC, As mentioned above, it operates as a 16-bit shift register, and the photo and ID code signals are the detection signals from the photo sensor that detects the positions (original positions and operating positions) of various movable bodies provided on the right side game board 5AR. The right side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW is configured as a serial signal containing information and ID information of the right side game board 5AR, and is mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR. and the terminals of the left side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL, and the periphery of the left side game board 5AL through the drawer connector. It was transmitted to the control board 1510, but instead of this, the inverted QH terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right side game board 5AR and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are transmitted to the control board 1510. The SI terminal and the terminals of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR and the left side of the left side game board 5AL, respectively, are treated as separate serial systems. The terminals of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW enable transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL via the drawer connector. You can.

[Self-identification code when the right side game board is further divided]
Here, an ID output circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 253 in the case where the right side game board 5AR is further divided into an upper side and a lower side, and is composed of an upper right side game board 5ART and a lower right side game board 5ARU. . FIG. 253 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits.

The right game board 5AR can be assembled by combining the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU. The right game board 5AR is formed by combining the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, and then connecting the connecting members (not shown) provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, respectively, from one to the other. By passing bolts (not shown) and tightening them, the surface of the game area 5a, which is the connecting part between the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU and where the game ball rolls, automatically becomes flush ( In other words, the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are fixed so that no level difference occurs.

In addition, the right side game board 5AR is formed by combining the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU, and then connects the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU from one of the connecting members (not shown) provided respectively on the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU. By tightening bolts (not shown) toward the other side, the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are fixed, and after combining the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, the left game board 5AL is fixed. The left side game board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR are fixed by tightening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of connecting members (not shown) provided on the and right side game board 5AR, respectively, and the split game board 5A is fixed to the main body frame. Although the left game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU may be configured to be individually fixed to the main body frame 4. Even in this case, the surface of the gaming area 5a, which is the connection part between the left side game board 5AL, the right upper side game board 5ART, and the right lower side game board 5ARU, and where the game ball rolls, automatically becomes flush (i.e. , the left game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU are fixed to the main body frame 4 so that no level difference occurs.

On the upper right side game board 5ART, a right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW on which the above-mentioned right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted is arranged. The two right side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of a concave type. Further, an upper right game board drawer connector relay board on which two upper right game board drawer connectors (not shown) are mounted is arranged on the upper right game board 5ART. The two upper right game board drawer connectors are of the convex type. Decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive boards that drive drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to various production units on the upper right game board 5ART, are connected to the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right game board via various relay boards. or directly connected electrically.

The lower right game board 5ARU has two drawer connectors for the lower right game board (not shown) at positions corresponding to the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board arranged on the relay board (not shown) for the drawer connector for the upper right game board. A drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board is mounted. The two lower right game board drawer connectors are of the concave type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive boards that drive the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units in the lower right game board 5ARU, are connected to the drawer connector relay board for the lower right game board (not shown). They are electrically connected via a relay board or directly.

Two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) combine the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU. This is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU by simply using the connector.

When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, the two upper right game board drawer connectors are mounted on the convex type upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART. , the lower right game board drawer connector of the lower right game board 5ARU, which is a concave type, is guided and fitted to the two lower right game board drawer connectors mounted on the relay board, and the upper right of the upper right game board 5ART Each terminal of the two upper right game board drawer connectors mounted on the side game board drawer connector relay board, and the two right terminals mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector is electrically connected. This electrical connection forms control signal lines that transmit various control signals between various boards on the upper right game board 5ART and various boards on the lower right game board 5ARU. A ground (GND) line is formed in which the ground (GND, circuit ground) is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various boards in the lower right game board 5ARU, and Various power supply lines are formed to supply various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) to various boards in the lower right game board 5ARU via various boards in the 5ART.

The insulating exterior parts of the two upper right game board drawer connectors and the insulating exterior parts of the two lower right game board drawer connectors are similar to the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW described above. Mounting through holes are formed respectively, and by inserting rivets into the respective mounting through holes and caulking the ends of the rivets, the rivets are plastically deformed to connect the two upper right game board drawer connectors to the upper right game board 5ART. The two lower right game board drawer connectors are fixed to the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU.

By being fixed in this way, when the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, the drawer connector for the upper right game board (convex type) is connected to the drawer connector for the lower right game board (concave type). The land portion of the through-hole for the terminal to which each terminal of the drawer connector for the upper right game board is soldered is against the load that occurs when the connector is guided by the upper right game board 5ART. In addition to preventing the drawer connector relay board from peeling off from the base material, the land portion of the through hole for the terminal to which each terminal of the lower right game board drawer connector is soldered is It is possible to prevent the lower right game board 5ARU from peeling off from the base material of the lower right game board drawer connector relay board.

The upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART may be configured to place a dedicated board on which only itself is mounted behind the upper right game board 5ART, or one of the various relay boards of the upper right game board 5ART. It may be mounted on a relay board, it may be mounted together with the LED mounted on the decorative board of the upper right game board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with the electronic components mounted on other boards of the upper right game board 5ART. They may be implemented together. The ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right game board 5ARU may have a dedicated board mounted only on itself behind the lower right game board 5ARU, or may be installed on various relay boards of the lower right game board 5ARU. It may be mounted on one of the relay boards, it may be mounted together with the LED mounted on the decorative board of the lower right game board 5ARU, or it may be mounted on another board of the lower right game board 5ARU. It may also be mounted together with other electronic components.

The ID output circuits IDCT and IDCU have the same circuit configuration as the above-mentioned ID output circuit IDC, and although a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted, they are mainly composed of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa, respectively. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART is the above-mentioned ID output circuit IDC, and the ID of the upper right game board 5ART is represented by an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit. The result is 11110000B (the alphabetic character "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes F0H (the alphabetic character "H" represents a hexadecimal number). On the other hand, the ID of the lower right game board 5ARU is 11111000B when expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit (the alphabetic character "B" represents a binary number). When expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes F8H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is the same as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above, except that the SI terminal is not electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground). A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, the CK terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU is connected to the CK terminal (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART, as described above. Electrical connection is made automatically by the drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) on the lower right game board 5ARU. Therefore, the drawer connector is electrically connected to the CK terminal and S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right game board 5ART, and the clock signal for ID acquisition from the peripheral control board 1510 is is input.

The SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, whereas the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART is input to the The SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the board 5ARU, and the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa, IDCUa is inputted. are input with SH/LD switching signals from separate delay circuits. As mentioned above, the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART and the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU convert the logic of the SH/LD switching signal into parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine. When this predetermined time has elapsed, the circuit can switch from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic.

In addition, instead of this, the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART is connected to two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board drawer connector (convex type). It is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the board 5ARU. You can do it like this. Further, the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL is connected to each terminal of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. , the terminals of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit in the upper right side game board 5ART via the drawer circuit. It is input to the S/inverted L terminal of IDCTa, and is further input to two upper right game board drawer connectors (convex type) (not shown) on the upper right game board 5ART, and two lower right side connectors (not shown) on the lower right game board 5ARU. It may be input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right side game board 5ARU via a drawer connector for the game board (concave type).

The parallel/serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU has its SI terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground), and its inverted QH terminal connects to the two upper right sides (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART. A drawer connector for the game board (convex type) and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) on the lower right game board 5ARU are used to connect the parallel controller to the upper right game board 5ART via the drawer connector. It is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the serial conversion circuit IDCTa. That is, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU and the parallel to serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART are connected in a daisy chain.

In the state where the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel to serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are Each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU sequentially performs a shift operation at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, the input to the A terminal Information being input to the B terminal → Information being input to the C terminal → Information being input to the D terminal → Information being input to the E terminal → Information being input to the F terminal → Information input to the G terminal → Information input to the H terminal → Shift operation one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal to output the ID code signal as serial data), upper right game board It operates as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU.

By combining the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR (that is, combining the left game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU), the left game board 5AL can be combined as described above. Each terminal of the drawer connector LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board, and the drawer connector for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of the upper right side game board 5ART. By electrically connecting the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW, the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left back box 3010L on the left game board 5AL and various boards on the upper right game board 5ART and the right Control signal lines are formed to transmit various control signals to and from various boards in the lower game board 5ARU. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 placed behind the left side back box 3010L on the left side game board 5AL, the parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa on the upper right side game board 5ART becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, and the lower right side The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the game board 5ARU serves as a subsequent 8-bit shift register. In other words, in the peripheral control board 1510, following the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, the contents are stored in the peripheral control board 1510, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the latter stage. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are sequentially input one bit at a time as serial data.

The ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU are connected to the drawer connector for the right game board of the upper right game board 5ART when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. Each terminal of the drawer connector RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the board 5ARDRW, and each terminal of the drawer connector LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. When an ID acquisition clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL is inputted via , an ID code signal is generated that can identify itself based on the input ID acquisition clock signal. can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL acquires an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, and determines the compatibility between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. be able to.

Note that the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right side game board 5ART connects each terminal of the right side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW mounted on the right side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side game board 5AR, and the left side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW. The ID code signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL through the drawer connectors of the left side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the board 5AL. However, instead of this, the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board and the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL are provided with connectors at both ends. The ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right side game board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL by electrically connecting the ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL through the electrical wiring (harness) provided in the , the board on which the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL are directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors provided on both ends. However, the ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right side game board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left side game board 5AL.

In addition, the ID output circuit IDCU provided in the lower right game board 5ARU is connected to each of the two lower right game board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU. and the respective terminals of the two upper right game board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, and then through the first drawer connector of the right game board 5ART. Each terminal of the drawer connector RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right side game board of 5AR, and the left side game board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left side game board of the left side game board 5AL. The ID code signal can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL through the terminals of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW and the second drawer connector. , the drawer connector relay board for the lower right game board and the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left game board of the left game board 5AL are connected to the lower right game board 5ARU via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors provided at both ends. The ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided in the left game board 5AL to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL, or the ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided in the lower right game board 5ARU to the board mounting the ID output circuit IDCU provided in the left game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the board 5AL is directly electrically connected via an electrical wiring (harness) provided with connectors at both ends, and the ID code signal is transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided in the lower right game board 5ARU to the left side. It may also be possible to transmit it to the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5AL.

Note that the first drawer connector and the second drawer connector each consist of two drawer connectors, and the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit provided on the lower right game board 5ARU. An ID acquisition clock signal to the circuit IDCU, an SH/LD switching signal, an ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, may be transmitted through one of the two drawer connectors in the first drawer connector, or may be transmitted in a distributed manner to the two drawer connectors, or may be transmitted through the second drawer connector. The information may be transmitted through one of the two drawer connectors in the drawer connector, or may be transmitted in a distributed manner between the two drawer connectors.

In the combination of the upper right side game board and the lower right side game board, the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU should be combined, but the other lower right side game board does not match (match) with the upper right side game board 5ART. When combined with a game board, the left side game board 5AL and the upper right side game board 5ART are compatible (matched), so the various LEDs provided on the upper right side game board 5ART change the lighting mode as the performance progresses. However, the various LEDs provided on the other lower right game boards that are not compatible with the upper right game board 5ART are turned off (all lights are turned off). In addition, instead of this, the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU should be combined by combining the upper right game board and the lower right game board, but it is compatible with the upper right game board 5ART. ) If it is combined with another lower right game board that does not have a Various LEDs and various LEDs provided on other lower right game boards that are not compatible with the upper right game board 5ART may be turned off (all lights off).

[ID determination process]
The performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 in this embodiment may be replaceable according to the specifications of the split game board. In this case, the performance operation unit 300 may be treated as a component of the game board 5. That is, the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is provided with a game board 5 on which a microprocessor is mounted and a performance operation unit 300 on which no microprocessor is mounted. Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the door frame unit, and are driven by various LED drivers.

On the other hand, door frame units (hereinafter referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 ) are items that cannot be replaced to match the specifications of the split game board, and are used in common for all split game board specifications, regardless of the split game board specifications. It becomes. Various LEDs are provided on the divided game board and the door frame unit, and are driven by various LED drivers. Here, see FIGS. 254 and 255 for combinations of the performance operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the split game board that are compatible (matched) as Pachinko machine A and combinations that are compatible (matched) as Pachinko machine B. and explain. FIG. 254 is a list showing a combination compatibility/incompatibility table, and FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process that can perform ID determination. The peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255 is almost the same as the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 220, and in FIG. 255, steps that perform the same process have the same names and Indicated by step number. Note that a detailed explanation of the same names and step numbers will be omitted.

Here, the above-mentioned ID output circuit that can identify itself as the performance operation unit 300 that can be replaced according to the specifications of the split game board is provided, and the ID used for the pachinko machine A is When expressed in binary, it is 00110000B (the letter "B" indicates a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it is set as 30H (the letter "H" indicates a hexadecimal number). The performance operation unit used is described as "performance operation unit 300A"), and the ID used for Pachinko machine B is 00110001B when expressed in binary (the alphabet "B" represents a binary number). , expressed in hexadecimal, 31H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number) is set (Hereinafter, the performance operation unit used in Pachinko machine B will be referred to as "performance operation unit 300B" ).

The combination of split game boards in pachinko machine A is set as A specification (for example, a type with a setting key, a type that is not a so-called sweet digital type, etc.), and the above-mentioned left side game board 5AL and the above-mentioned right side game board The game board 5AR is compatible (matched), and in the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B, the B specification is different from the A specification (for example, one that does not have a setting key, or a so-called sweet digital type) etc.), and the new left game board 5BL and the above-mentioned right game board 5AR are compatible (matched).

Then, as a combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board provided in the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine A, the left side game board 5AL is a combination of the right side game board 5AR and the effect operation unit 300A, as shown in FIG. 254(a). The combination of is compatible (matched). In addition, as a combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board provided in the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine B, the left game board 5BL has a combination of the right game board 5AR and the performance operation unit 300B, as shown in FIG. 254(b). The combination of is compatible (matched). Note that the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 are adjusted according to the specifications of the split game board, as described above. 254(a) and (b). ), in the A specification, the combination of the left game board 5AL and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched), and in the B specification, the combination of the left game board 5BL and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched). ) is not covered by

The peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL acquires the ID from the ID code signal transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on, and connects the production operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the divided game board. Determine whether the combination is compatible (matching). Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the initial setting process in step S1000, as shown in FIG. Then, the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 is performed. Subsequently, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs ID determination processing in step S1003. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right side game board) and a performance operation are sent to the right side game board. An ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the production operation unit) is output to each unit. Then, the peripheral control IC 1510a separates the ID code signal from the right side game board (ID code signal dedicated to the right side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the performance operation unit). A combination of split game boards (that is, a right game board (a board without a microprocessor) and a left game board (peripheral control board 1510 and main control board 1310 with a microprocessor) The determination (comparison) is made with reference to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM (combinations of), and the combination table stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM regarding combinations of production operation units and split game boards. Judgment (comparison) is made with reference to (FIG. 254).

In addition, in this ID determination process, the above-mentioned combination of the divided game boards (i.e., the right side game board (a board on which no microprocessor is mounted) and the left side game board (the peripheral control board 1510 and main control board on which a microprocessor is mounted) 1310)) and the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board may be determined (compared) a plurality of times (for example, five times). In this case, if compatibility (matching) can be obtained three times in a row as a judgment result, it will proceed to the subsequent processing as compatibility (matching), while obtaining compatibility (matching) three times in a row as a judgment result. If it is not possible to do so, it will be treated as non-conforming (inconsistent) and proceed to subsequent processing.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that, in the ID determination process in step S1003, when the determination result for the combination of the divided game boards is incompatible (inconsistency), that is, the right game board (not equipped with a microprocessor) If the judgment result for the combination of the board) and the left side game board (peripheral control board 1510 equipped with a microprocessor and main control board 1310) is non-conforming, the command classified as notification display is The process is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading out (extracting) the target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processes related to the performance are set.

Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003, when the determination result regarding the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is incompatible, the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the information. The command is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading out (extracting) the target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processes related to the performance are set.

The peripheral control board 1510 needs to receive various commands from the main control board 1310, so when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the system is configured to complete startup before the main control board 1310 system starts. It has become. For this reason, if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is incompatible (inconsistent), even if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible), this fact will be displayed. Until the command to transmit is received, an aspect in which the combination of the production operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistency) will take precedence. After that, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible, the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command indicating that the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is incompatible (incompatible). Priority is given to an aspect in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is mismatched (mismatched). The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is such that the main control board 1310 is placed on the split game board, the payout control board 633 is placed on the main body frame 4, and the split game board is placed on the main body frame 4. In other words, it is a combination of a split game board and a main body frame.

Note that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process before the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started and when the power is turned on (when power is restored due to a power outage, (This includes when power is restored due to a momentary power outage.) This was done only once, but in order to be able to perform ID determination processing at any time, the peripheral control unit power Performed as part of the peripheral control unit steady processing of the input processing (for example, following the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010, ID determination processing is performed as the processing in step S1012, and then the production operation unit monitoring processing in step S1014) ). In this way, the peripheral control IC 1510a can further confirm the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board at any time and multiple times.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends SH/LD switching signals to the right side game board and the production operation unit (SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the right side game board and SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the production operation unit). ), or one SH/LD switching signal may be split into two signals and inputted to the right side game board and production operation unit, respectively. In the case of output, in the ID determination process, first, for a predetermined period of time (the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit in the right side game board and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit in the performance operation unit) This is a sufficient time to capture and store (hold) the information set to the ID setting terminal, for example, 2 milliseconds, and the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is set to parallel operating logic, and After switching from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal exclusively for the right side game board) is sent to the right side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal is sent to the production operation unit. It outputs a clock signal (a clock signal for ID acquisition dedicated to the production operation unit), an ID code signal from the right side game board (an ID code signal dedicated to the right side game board), and an ID code signal from the production operation unit ( ID code signal dedicated to the production operation unit) and are obtained through separate serial systems, and the combination of the divided game boards (i.e., the right side game board (board with no microprocessor) and the left side game board (board with no microprocessor) The combination with the mounted peripheral control board 1510 and main control board 1310) is determined, and the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is determined.

Next, returning to FIG. 254, the state, behavior, and countermeasures of the pachinko machine due to compatibility (matching)/mismatching (mismatching) due to the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board, and the combination of the split game board and the main frame I will explain about it. As mentioned above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 are replaced according to the specifications of the split game board. It is not dependent on the specifications of the split game board, and is commonly used for all split game board specifications, so the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board , and does not have any influence on the compatibility (matching)/mismatching (mismatching) caused by the combination of the split game board and the main body frame.

Here, the contents regarding Pachinko machine A will be explained, and the contents regarding Pachinko machine B will be omitted except for some parts because they are the same as those for Pachinko machine A. (In some cases, the code related to Pachinko machine B is shown in parentheses.)

The combination of the split game board in Pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game board and the performance operation unit in Pachinko machine A are performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 255. The combination of the split game board 5A and the main body frame is performed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In other words, the combination of the split game boards in Pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the production operation unit in Pachinko machine A are performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 arranged in the split game board. The combination of the split game board 5A and the main body frame is performed by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 to which the split game board is mounted. The determination result made by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provides information on whether or not the combination of the divided game boards in the pachinko machine A and the combination of the divided game board and the production operation unit in the pachinko machine A are compatible (matched). and information as to whether the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main body frame is compatible (matched).

The combination of the split game board and production operation unit in pachinko machine A is set as A specification (for example, a type with a setting key or a type that is not a so-called sweet digital type), and the combination of the split game board As such, the split game board 5A composed of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR is compatible (matched), and the split game board 5A and performance are the combination of the split game board and the performance operation unit in pachinko machine A. The one consisting of the operation unit 300A is compatible (matched). In addition, in the combination of the split game board in Pachinko machine B, and the combination of the split game board and production operation unit in Pachinko machine B, B specifications (for example, those that do not have setting keys or those that are of the so-called sweet digital type) etc.), and the split game board 5B consisting of the left game board 5BL and the right game board 5AR is compatible (matched) as a combination of the split game boards, and the split game board in pachinko machine B As a combination of a board and a performance operation unit, one composed of a divided game board 5B and a performance operation unit 300B is compatible (matched).

The state of the pachinko machine depending on the combination of the performance operation unit 300A and the divided game board 5A, and the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main body frame (matching)/mismatching (mismatching), is as shown in FIG. 254(c). There are 10 states from state 1 to state 10.

Condition 1: Normal Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are compatible (matched).
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are configured and matched.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during error: Normal operation (no error response).
Remedy: None as it is working normally.

Status 2: ID error 1 (incompatibility of right side game board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not configured and are incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are configured and matched.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during error: Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Remedy: After turning off the power, replace the product with a compatible ID product (compatible ID product).

Status 3: ID error 2 (incompatibility of production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched.
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during error: Error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Remedy: Replace with a compatible ID product (compatible ID product) (replacement is possible even when the power is turned on).

Status 4: ID error 3 (mismatch between main control board and payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched.
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are configured and matched.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Pachinko machine behavior during error: Error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Remedy: After turning off the power, replace the product with a compatible ID product (compatible ID product).

Status 5: ID error 4 (Incompatibility of right side game board (incompatibility) + Incompatibility of production operation unit (incompatibility))
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not configured and are incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during errors: Error handling 4.
Remedy: Replace with a compatible ID product (compatible ID product) after turning off the power.

Status 6: ID error 1, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) of right side game board + mismatch (mismatch) between main control board and payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not configured and are incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are configured and matched.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Pachinko machine behavior during errors: Error handling 5.
Remedy: After turning off the power, replace the product with a compatible ID product (compatible ID product).

Status 7: ID error 2, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) of production operation unit + mismatch (mismatch) between main control board and payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched.
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (inconsistent).
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Pachinko machine behavior during errors: Error handling 6.
Remedy: After turning off the power, replace the product with a compatible ID product (compatible ID product).

Status 8: Unconnected error 1 (Unable to confirm connection with right side game board)
Combination of split game boards: There is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR (it is not possible to confirm the ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR), and there is a short circuit or disconnection in the transmission path that transmits various signals. A problem such as this occurs and the connection cannot be confirmed.
Combination of split game board and production operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and production operation unit 300A are configured and matched.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during errors: Error handling 7.
Remedy: Check the connection after turning off the power.

Status 9: Unconnected error 2 (Unable to confirm connection with production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched.
Combination of split game board and performance operation unit: There is no ID code signal input from the performance operation unit 300A (it is not possible to confirm the input of the ID code signal from the performance operation unit 300A), and transmission for transmitting various signals. A state in which a problem such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the route, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during errors: Error handling 8.
Remedy: Check the connection after turning off the power.

Status 10: Unconnected error 3 (Unable to confirm connection with right side game board + Unable to confirm connection with production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: There is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR (it is not possible to confirm the ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR), and there is a short circuit or disconnection in the transmission path that transmits various signals. A situation where it is not possible to check the connection due to a problem such as.
Combination of split game board and performance operation unit: There is no ID code signal input from the performance operation unit 300A (it is not possible to confirm the input of the ID code signal from the performance operation unit 300A), and transmission to transmit various signals. A state in which a problem such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the route, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of the split game board and main body frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Pachinko machine behavior during errors: Error handling 9.
Remedy: Check the connection after turning off the power.

Next, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), regarding error response 1 to error response 9, when the power is turned on (including recovery from a power outage and recovery from an instantaneous power outage; the same applies hereinafter). , when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the entry of game balls into various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image When magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) is not involved (such as when the game is turned on), when the performance progresses after the power is turned on (for example, the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize openings) 256 to 258 as a specific example. The second specific example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 259 to 261. FIG. 256 is a table showing how to deal with various errors when the power is turned on (specific example 1), and FIG. 257 is a table showing how to deal with various errors that do not involve magnetic detection when the performance is progressing or waiting for customers after the power is turned on (specific example 1) FIG. 258 is a table showing various error handling (specific example 1) that involves magnetic detection when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or when waiting for a customer. Furthermore, FIG. 259 is a table showing how to deal with various errors when the power is turned on (specific example 2), and FIG. 2), and FIG. 261 is a table showing various error countermeasures (specific example 2) accompanied by magnetic detection during the progress of the performance after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. Various ID errors (including single ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as ID errors in combinations of these) are various types of unconnected errors (Figure 254(c)). The degree of inhibition of the game is higher than the non-connection error 1, non-connection error 2, and non-connection error 3) shown in 254(c). Further, although magnetic detection is resolved after a certain period of time has passed, ID errors and unconnected errors are not resolved even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

In addition, regarding the "error response number" as an item described in the upper row of the table in FIGS. 256 to 261, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c) is Error Response 1 to Error Response 9. , "audio" indicates the sound mode played from the various speakers installed in the pachinko machine, and "various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to presentation (various decorative LEDs)") Various LEDs (various LEDs related to presentation (various LEDs for decoration) provided in door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3) ), and "Various LEDs on the game board (Various LEDs related to performance (Various LEDs for decoration))" refers to various LEDs (Various LEDs related to performance (Various LEDs for decoration) provided on the game board (divided game board)). The "effect display device" indicates the display mode of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), and the "sub effect display device" is provided on the game board (split game board) or door frame unit separately from the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), and indicates the display mode of the sub effect display device. Yes, the "function display unit" indicates the display mode of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board (split game board), and the "sub-function display unit" indicates the display mode of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board (split game board). This shows the display mode of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the "gaming board side movable body (movable body related to performance)" indicates the operation of various movable bodies (movable body related to performance) provided on the game board (split game board). The "door frame side" indicates the operations of various movable bodies provided in the door frame unit.

Among the above items, "sound", "various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to production (various LEDs for decoration))", "various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to production (various LEDs for decoration))" , "effect display device", "sub effect display device", "sub function display unit", "game board side movable body (movable body related to effect)", and "door frame unit side movable body", the game board ( The "function display unit" is controlled by the main control board 1310 provided in the game board (split game board), whereas the "function display unit" is controlled by the main control board 1310 provided in the game board (split game board). . Note that if the pachinko machine is not provided with a sub-performance display device, the content displayed on the sub-performance display device is displayed on a performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board).

Furthermore, as described above, the door frame unit includes the pan unit 200 and the production operation unit 300. The production operation unit 300 is not provided with the above-mentioned ID output circuit, that is, the production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification, and the production operation unit 300 is used in common in all specifications. There are also things that do. In such a case, when the production operation unit 300 is provided with a movable body such as the production operation section 301, the movable body provided in the production operation unit 300 is treated as being included in the "door frame unit side movable body". In addition, various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, , LED 364a, etc.) are treated as included in "various LEDs of the door frame unit".

"Game board side movable body" refers to various movable bodies provided on the left side game board in error response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and error response 7, and error response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) and error response 8. It is treated as meaning the various movable bodies provided on the left side game board and/or the various movable bodies provided on the right side game board.

In the state where error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to deal with these various errors. Or, it is necessary to release the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. At this time, although the pachinko machine 1 is in the state where the door is open, it does not notify that the door is open in order to give priority to error response 1 to error response 9. ing.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum values in step S30 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 do not match, , performs error display processing in step S33 in the same processing as a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, and then restarts. Even if the game is restarted, the contents of the main control built-in RAM are not updated at all, and the process proceeds to the error display process of step S33 again based on the determination in step S30, where the restart is repeated and the game is stopped.

In a state where such a RAM error occurs, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), it does not indicate that a RAM error has occurred. In contrast to the notification (error display) that only indicates that error response 1 to error response 9 have occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), There is no such thing.

In order to prevent repeated restarts, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on, press the press operation section of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633. At the same time, it is necessary to power on the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630. With this operation, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process, clears all areas of the RAM in step S38, and then performs the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The game progresses through side timer interrupt processing and the like. Since the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to two to three people.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "power is being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. At this time, "setting in progress" may be displayed following "power restoration in progress", or "setting in progress" may be displayed in place of "power restoration in progress". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting change start command to notify the start of setting change to the main peripheral serial data. It is necessary to send it to the control board 1510.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310 after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process. Then, using this as a trigger, if error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), a notification to that effect is issued. In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the main control board 1310 even when error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c). If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a in preparation for Until a predetermined period of time has elapsed to complete this setting change process, in other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, ID errors and unconnected errors in error handling 1 to error handling 9 Even if an error has occurred, the error notification start time to notify the user can be changed by operating a setting key held by a limited number of people in the game hall.

[Specific example 1: When power is turned on]
First, error response 1 to error response 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 256 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) when the power is turned on.
[Error support 1 (ID error 1 support)]
Sound: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played seven times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as ``Power is being restored'' and ``Please wait for a while'' on a black background, and displays an image during the performance when the startup music ends.
Sub effect display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification character "Game Board ID Error" is displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub function display unit: Turns off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board side: No movement such as returning to original position (not working).
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working).

[Error support 2 (ID error 2 support)]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-effect display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification character saying ``Performance Operation Button ID Error'' is displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played twice. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub effect display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, a predetermined background image displays the main control board provided for the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided for the main body frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached. If the combination of and is inconsistent, the message "Primary Payment ID Error" is displayed.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board side: There are movements such as returning to the original position (movement).
Door frame unit side movable body: There are movements such as returning to the original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub effect display device: Displays the notification characters "Game board ID error" and "Production operation button ID error" on a predetermined background image at the same time as the startup music starts (Contents and errors of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) This is obtained by combining the contents of correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) (error correspondence 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) + error correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, display the notification characters "Main payment ID error" and "Game board ID error" on a predetermined background image (Contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response The contents of 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) are combined together (error handling 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + error handling 1 (corresponding to ID error 1))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub production display device: Displays the notification characters "Main payment ID error" and "Production operation button ID error" on a predetermined background image at the same time as the startup music starts (Contents and errors of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) This is obtained by combining the contents of correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) (error correspondence 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + error correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: After the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Game board is not connected" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashing red.
Performance display device: Displays notifications such as "Restoring power" and "Please wait for a while" on a black background, and displays messages such as "We have detected that the game board cable is not inserted" and "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable.""Please do so" is displayed, and when the startup music ends, an image of the performance is displayed.
Sub-effect display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, the notification characters "Game board not connected" are displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub function display unit: Turns off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board side: No movement such as returning to original position (not working).
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashing red.
Performance display device: Displays notifications such as ``Power is being restored'' and ``Please wait for a while'' on a black background, and ``We have detected that the cable for the production operation unit is not inserted.'' and ``Please disconnect the cable after cutting off the power.''"Pleaseinsert" is displayed, and when the startup music ends, an image from the performance is displayed.
Sub-effect display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification character saying ``Performance operation unit is not connected'' is displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, the first announcement sound that says "Game board is not connected" is played, the specified error notification sound is played four times, and then the second announcement sound is played that says "The production operation unit is not connected". A predetermined error notification sound is played four times. Such a voice mode is repeatedly played (the content of error response 7 and the content of error response 8 are combined (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashes red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays notifications such as "Restoring power" and "Please wait for a while" on a black background, and displays messages such as "We have detected that the cable for the game board is not inserted" and "We have detected that the cable for the production operation unit has not been inserted.""Detected" and "Please cut off the power and then insert the cable" are displayed, and when the startup music ends, the image at the time of production is displayed (Contents of error response 7 and contents of error response 8). (Error handling 7 + error handling 8))
Sub effect display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, display the notification characters "Game board not connected" and "Production operation unit not connected" on a predetermined background image (Contents of error response 7 and contents of error response 8) (Error handling 7 + error handling 8))
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Specific example 1: Case where magnetic detection (so-called magnetism) is not involved when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers]
Next, when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the entry of game balls into various winning holes) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed, FIG. 257 shows error response 1 to error response 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. Explain with reference to.

[Error support 1 (ID error 1 support)]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played seven times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Images displayed during the performance (such as images displayed during the progress of the performance, hereinafter the same applies) or images while waiting for customers (such as images displayed during the progress of the demonstration, hereinafter the same) display the message ``Please wait for a while.'' Please display the message "Please."
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or the image when waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub function display unit: Turns off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board side: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the performance, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.

[Error support 2 (ID error 2 support)]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub performance display device: Displays the notification text ``Performance operation button ID error'' on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played twice. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub performance display device: The main control board provided for the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided for the main body frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached are shown in the image during performance or while waiting for customers. If the combination of and is inconsistent, the message "Primary Payment ID Error" is displayed.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Movable body on the door frame unit side: In addition to the progress of the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and works to return to its original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub performance display device: Displays the notification characters "game board ID error" and "performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (contents and errors of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) This is obtained by combining the contents of correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) (error correspondence 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) + error correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub performance display device: Displays the notification characters "Main payment ID error" and "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or the image when waiting for customers (Contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response The contents of 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) are combined together (error handling 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + error handling 1 (corresponding to ID error 1))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub production display device: Displays the notification characters "Main payment ID error" and "Production operation button ID error" on the image during production or the image when waiting for customers (Contents and errors of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) This is obtained by combining the contents of correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) (error correspondence 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + error correspondence 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "Game board is not connected" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashing red.
Performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``We have detected that the game board cable is not inserted'' and ``Please cut off the power and then insert the cable'' on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters "Game board not connected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Movable body on game board side: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the performance, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the performance, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashing red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as ``It has been detected that the cable for the performance operation unit is not inserted'' or ``Please cut off the power before inserting the cable'' on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers. .
Sub production display device: Displays notification text "Production operation unit not connected" on the image during production or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: The first announcement sound, "Game board is not connected," is played, and the specified error notification sound is played four times, followed by the second announcement sound, "The production operation unit is not connected," and the specified error notification sound is played. Run 4 times. Such a voice mode is repeatedly played (the content of error response 7 and the content of error response 8 are combined (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Images displayed during performance or while waiting for customers will display messages such as ``We have detected that the game board cable is not inserted'', ``We have detected that the cable for the performance operation unit is not inserted'', and ``Turn off the power. Please insert the cable from here.'' is displayed (this is the combination of the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub production display device: Displays notification characters such as "Game board not connected" and "Production operation unit not connected" on the image during production or the image when waiting for customers (Contents of error response 7 and contents of error response 8) (Error handling 7 + error handling 8))
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Specific example 1: When accompanied by magnetic detection (magnetic detection) while the performance is progressing or while waiting for customers after the power is turned on]

Next, when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the entry of game balls into various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed, Refer to FIG. 258 for error response 1 to error response 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. I will explain. In addition, when the magnetic detection (act of magnet goto) disappears, when the performance progresses after the power is turned on as shown in FIG. ) or the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error (error response 1 to error Correspondence 9) is obtained.

[Error support 1 (ID error 1 support)]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played three times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (such as images displayed during the progress of the performance, hereinafter the same applies) or images while waiting for customers (such as images displayed during the progress of the demonstration, hereinafter the same applies).
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``Magnet Detection'' and ``Game Board ID Error'' on images during performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub function display unit: Turns off (all lights off).
Movable body on game board side: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.

[Error support 2 (ID error 2 support)]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``Magnet Detected'' and ``Performance Operation Button ID Error'' on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played twice. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub performance display device: The main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main body frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached are shown in the image during performance or while waiting for customers. If the combination of and is inconsistent, the notification characters ``Main Payment ID Error'' and ``Magnet Detected'' are displayed.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Movable body on the door frame unit side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and works to return to its original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters such as "magnet detection", "game board ID error", and "performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (error support 1 (ID error 1 support) ) and the contents of error handling 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) are combined (error handling 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) + error handling 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters such as "Main payment ID error", "Game board ID error", and "Magnet detection" on the image during the performance or the image when waiting for customers (Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)) and the contents of error handling 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) are combined (error handling 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + error handling 1 (corresponding to ID error 1))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub production display device: Displays notification characters such as "Main payment ID error", "Production operation button ID error", and "Magnet detection" on the image during production or the image when waiting for customers (Error response 3 (ID error 3 response) ) and the contents of error handling 2 (corresponding to ID error 2) are combined (error handling 3 (corresponding to ID error 3) + error handling 2 (corresponding to ID error 2))).
Function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "Game board is not connected" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashing red.
Performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``We have detected that the game board cable is not inserted'' and ``Please cut off the power and then insert the cable'' on the image during the performance or the image when waiting for customers.
Sub performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``Magnet Detected'' and ``Game Board Not Connected'' on images during performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Movable body on game board side: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashing red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as ``It has been detected that the cable of the performance operation unit is not inserted'' or ``Please cut off the power before inserting the cable'' on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers. .
Sub production display device: Displays notification characters such as "Magnet Detected" and "Production Operation Unit Not Connected" on the image during production or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected" is played, and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times, followed by an announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" and a predetermined error notification sound is played four times. . Such a voice mode is repeatedly played (the content of error response 7 and the content of error response 8 are combined (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Images displayed during performance or while waiting for customers will display messages such as ``We have detected that the game board cable is not inserted'', ``We have detected that the cable for the performance operation unit is not inserted'', and ``Turn off the power. Please insert the cable from here.'' is displayed (this is the combination of the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub production display device: Displays notification characters such as "Magnet detection", "Game board not connected", and "Production operation unit not connected" on images during production or while waiting for customers (Contents of error response 7) Together with the contents of Error Handling 8, it becomes the same (Error Handling 7 + Error Handling 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Specific example 2: When power is turned on]
Next, error response 1 to error response 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 259 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) when the power is turned on.
[Error support 1 (ID error 1 support)]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the sound is muted. After that, the specified error notification sound is played once, and the message ``A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board.'' Plays an announcement sound. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Effect display device: After displaying "Power restoration in progress" on a black background, "Game board error occurred", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", "Turn off the power and check the game board". Please display the message "Please", and display an image of the pachinko machine's game board connection error section lit up.
Sub-effect display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub function display unit: Turns off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board side: There are movements such as returning to the original position and progressing the performance (movement).
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working).

[Error support 2 (ID error 2 support)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the sound is muted, then the specified error notification sound is played once and the message "A connection error has occurred with the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit." Please make an announcement. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Production display device: After displaying "Power restoration in progress" on a black background, "Production operation unit error occurred", "Error number:", "Production operation unit connection error", "Turn off the power and then restart the production operation unit". "Please check" is displayed, and an image of the pachinko machine's direction control unit connection error section is displayed.
Sub-effect display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification character saying ``Performance Operation Button ID Error'' is displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the sound is muted, then a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff" is played. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Effect display device: After displaying "Power is being restored" on a black background, the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main body frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is installed. If the combination of and is inconsistent, notifications such as ``Primary payment error occurred'', ``Error number:'', ``Primary payment connection error'', and ``Please check the main control and payout control after turning off the power'' will be issued. Display characters and display images that cannot be combined with the game board and frame.
Sub-effect display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board side: There are movements such as returning to the original position (movement).
Door frame unit side movable body: There are movements such as returning to the original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "Game board is not connected" is played. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Blinks white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Effect display device: After displaying "Power is being restored" on a black background, it switches to the image during the effect (images displayed during the progress of the effect, the same applies hereinafter), and displays "Error number:", "Game Displays the message "Panel disconnection error".
Sub production display device: Displays images during production.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub function display unit: Turns off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board side: There are movements such as returning to the original position (movement).
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working).

[Error handling 8]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the sound is muted, and then a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected." This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Blinks white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Production display device: After displaying ``Power is being restored'' on a black background, the display switches to an image during production, and displays the notification characters ``Error number:'' and ``Production operation unit disconnection error.''
Sub production display device: Displays images during production.
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the sound is muted, then the specified error notification sound is played once, the announcement sound "Game board is not connected" is played, and then the specified error notification sound is played. The message is played once, and an announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" is played (this is a combination of the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Blinks white (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off) (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays "Power is being restored" on a black background, then switches to the performance image, displays the notification characters "Error number:", "Game board disconnection error", and displays "Error number:". :", and the notification characters "Production operation unit disconnection error" are displayed (the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 are combined (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub effect display device: Displays the image during the effect (the content of error response 7 and the content of error response 8 are combined (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, in the case where the production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and the production operation unit 300 can be used in common in any specification, specific example 2: When the power is turned on. In error response 1 to error response 6, the various LEDs on the door frame unit are blinking in red, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit are also blinking in red. Only some of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all lights are turned off) ), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit may be turned off (all lights off). In addition, in specific example 2: error response 7 to error response 9 when power is turned on, various LEDs on the door frame unit are flashing white, so various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit are also white. However, some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) Only a specific LED) may be turned off (all lights out), or all of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit may be all turned off (all lights off). In other words, some of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) ) is turned off (all lights off), some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or the various decorative boards There is no restriction to turn off (all lights off) other various LEDs other than a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the device.

[Specific example 2: Case in which magnetic detection (so-called magnetism) is not involved when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers]
Next, when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the entry of game balls into various winning holes) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed, FIG. 260 shows error response 1 to error response 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. Explain with reference to.

[Error support 1 (ID error 1 support)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying ``A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board.'' This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``Game board error occurred'', ``Error number:'', ``Game board connection error'', and ``Please check the game board after turning off the power'' on a black background. Displays an image with the game board connection error part of a pachinko machine lit.
Sub-effect display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.

[Error support 2 (ID error 2 support)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and then check the production operation unit." This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Production display device: On a black background, the following notification characters are displayed: ``Production operation unit error has occurred'', ``Error number:'', ``Production operation unit connection error'', and ``Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit''. An image is displayed in which the connection error part of the performance operation unit of the pachinko machine is lit.
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Effect display device: On a black background, there is a mismatch between the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main body frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is installed. If there is, the message "Main payment error has occurred", "Error number:", "Main payment connection error", "Please check the main control and payout control after turning off the power" will be displayed, and the game board and frame will be displayed. Display images that cannot be combined with.
Sub-effect display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Movable body on the door frame unit side: In addition to the progress of the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and works to return to its original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: In addition to playing the performance sound, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected" is played. This type of audio is played repeatedly along with the performance sound.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Blinks white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (such as images displayed during the progress of the performance, hereinafter the same applies) or images while waiting for customers (such as images displayed during the progress of the demonstration, hereinafter the same applies).
Sub performance display device: Displays images during performance or images while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Movable body on the door frame unit side: In addition to the progress of the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and works to return to its original position (movement).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Along with playing the production sound, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "The production operation unit is not connected" is played. This type of audio is played repeatedly along with the performance sound.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Blinks white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during performance or while waiting for customers.
Sub performance display device: Displays images during performance or images while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Plays the production sound, plays the predetermined error notification sound once, plays the announcement sound "The game board is not connected", then plays the predetermined error notification sound once, and then plays the predetermined error notification sound once, "Production operation unit "is not connected" is played. Along with the performance sound, such a sound mode is played repeatedly (the content of error response 7 and the content of error response 8 are combined (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Effect display device: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub effect display device: (Same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, in the case where the production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and the production operation unit 300 can be used in common in any specification, specific example 2: After turning on the power In error response 1 to error response 6 in cases where magnet goto is not involved, the various LEDs on the door frame unit are flashing red, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit are also red. Although it blinks, some of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific among various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards) It may be possible to turn off only the LED (all lights out), or to turn off all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (all lights out). In addition, in specific example 2: error response 7 to error response 9 when power is not turned on (magnet goto), various LEDs on the door frame unit are blinking white, so various decorative boards in the production operation unit The various LEDs mounted on the display also blink white, but some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or the various decorative boards It may be possible to turn off only a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the display (all lights out), or it may be arranged such that all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit are turned off (all lights off). good. In other words, some of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) ) is turned off (all lights off), some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or the various decorative boards There is no restriction to turn off (all lights off) other various LEDs other than a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the device.

[Specific example 2: Case involving magnetic detection (magnetic detection) while the performance is progressing or while waiting for customers after the power is turned on]

Next, when the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the entry of game balls into various winning holes) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed, Refer to FIG. 261 for error response 1 to error response 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. I will explain. In addition, when the magnetic detection (act of magnet goto) disappears, when the performance progresses after the power is turned on as shown in FIG. 260 (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering various prize openings) ) or the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error (error response 1 to error Correspondence 9) is obtained.

[Error support 1 (ID error 1 support)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying ``A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board.'' This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays notification characters such as ``Game board error occurred'', ``Error number:'', ``Game board connection error'', and ``Please check the game board after turning off the power'' on a black background. Displays an image with the game board connection error part of a pachinko machine lit.
Sub-effect display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Door frame unit side movable body: No movement such as returning to original position (not working). In addition to the progress of the production, if the operation is performed in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may be stopped at the time this error occurs, or may be returned to the original position.

[Error support 2 (ID error 2 support)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and then check the production operation unit." This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub production display device: Notification text on a black background: ``Production operation unit error occurred'', ``Error number:'', ``Production operation unit connection error'', ``Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit'' is displayed, and an image is displayed in which the connection error part of the performance operation unit of the pachinko machine is lit.
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error support 3 (ID error 3 support)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, and an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Effect display device: On a black background, there is a mismatch between the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main body frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is installed. If there is, the message "Main payment error has occurred", "Error number:", "Main payment connection error", "Please check the main control and payout control after turning off the power" will be displayed, and the game board and frame will be displayed. Display images that cannot be combined with.
Sub-effect display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Movable body on the door frame unit side: In addition to the progress of the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and works to return to its original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 1 (ID error 1 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 3 (ID error 3 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 2 (ID error 2 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound that says "Magnetic sensor error." This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (such as images displayed as the performance progresses, hereinafter the same applies) or images while waiting for customers (such as images displayed during the progress of the demonstration, hereinafter the same applies), The notification characters "Error number:" and "Magnetic sensor error" are displayed.
Sub performance display device: Displays images during performance or images while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A predetermined LED lights up (while waiting for a customer: lights off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board side: In addition to advancing the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and moves to return to its original position (movement).
Movable body on the door frame unit side: In addition to the progress of the production, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, and works to return to its original position (movement).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Effect display device: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub effect display device: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error support 7 (ID error 7 support).
Game board side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Door frame unit side movable body: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, in the case where the production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and the production operation unit 300 can be used in common in any specification, specific example 2: After turning on the power In error response 1 to error response 9 in cases where magnet goto is not involved, the various LEDs on the door frame unit are flashing red, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit are also red. Although it blinks, some of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific among various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards) It may be possible to turn off only the LED (all lights out), or to turn off all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (all lights out). In other words, some of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) ) is turned off (all lights off), some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the production operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or the various decorative boards There is no restriction to turn off (all lights off) other various LEDs other than a specific LED among the various LEDs mounted on the device.

In addition, error response 7, error response 8 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which correspond to state 8: unconnected error 1, state 9: unconnected error 2, and state 10: unconnected error 3 in FIG. 254(c), respectively, And in error response 9, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 drives various LEDs provided on objects for which connection cannot be confirmed among the right game board 5AR and the performance operation unit 300A (300B), as another example. Each time, non-operation data (data that turns off the lights for various LEDs, It is also possible to send inactive data (data to turn off various LEDs, data to turn off the lights to various LEDs, data to turn off the light to various LEDs, data to turn off the electric drive source, etc.) only once when an unconnected error occurs. Alternatively, reset data (data for resetting various LED drivers, data for resetting various electric drive source drivers (for example, solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.) may be sent as transmission data). (data), various LED drivers, and various electric drive source drivers may be reset.

[Combination of game board and door frame]
As described above, the door frame 3 includes door frame units (hereinafter referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. ) is installed. The door frame unit is shaped according to a unified concept. The relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to and approved by the application organization. However, when the game board 5 was attached to the main body frame 4, due to human error, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 was different from the one submitted to the application agency and approved. This is undesirable because a pachinko machine that is different from the one whose specifications were submitted to the applicant institution and obtained permission in the first place will be installed in the gaming hall.

Therefore, in this embodiment, one of the decorative boards (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board") among the decorative boards included in the door frame unit is provided with a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself. It is equipped with an ID comparison circuit that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, the ID comparison circuit will be explained with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID comparison circuit. Note that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be compatible (matched) or unmatched (mismatched), so the door frame unit may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board components provided on the main body frame 4 are composed of the game board 5 on which the microprocessor is mounted and the door frame unit on which the microprocessor is not mounted, and the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. At the same time, the door frame unit is attached to a door frame 3 that is supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. In other words, the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is provided with a game board 5 on which a microprocessor is mounted and a door frame unit on which no microprocessor is mounted. Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the door frame unit, and are driven by various LED drivers.

[Various lines formed between the game board and the door frame]
First, to briefly explain various lines formed between the game board 5 and the door frame 3, there are lines on the left and right sides, not shown, in the lower center of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. A lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW on which two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the direction is arranged. The two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of a convex type. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. At the front of the main body frame 4 and at a position corresponding to the two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the back box 3010 of the game board 5, two unillustrated connectors are attached to the main body frame side relay board (not shown). A drawer connector on the main body frame side is provided. The two main body frame side drawer connectors are of a concave type. Various substrates provided in the door frame 3 (decorative substrates and various relay substrates provided in the plate unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450).The various relay substrates include the plate unit 200, (includes one that relays detection signals from various sensors of the production operation unit 300.) is electrically connected to the drawer connector on the main body frame side.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, which is a convex type, are replaced by the main body, which is a concave type. The lower side of the game board 5 is guided by and fitted into two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the frame 4, and is mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5. Each terminal of the game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW is electrically connected to each terminal of two body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a body frame side relay board (not shown) of the body frame 4. It has become.

When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 and the terminals (not shown) of the main body frame 4 are connected. By electrically connecting the terminals of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board, the terminals are connected to the rear of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 via the drawer connectors. The peripheral control board 1510 to be arranged and various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, door frame top unit 450, etc.) The relay board includes one that relays detection signals from various sensors of the production operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200 and control signals that transmit various information.) Control signal lines that transmit various control signals are included. In addition, the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various control boards and other various boards arranged behind the back box 3010 in the game board 5, and the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided in the main body frame 4. A ground (GND) line is formed to which the circuit ground (circuit ground) and the ground (GND) line are electrically connected. Various power lines are formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by the power supply board 630 provided in 4. In addition, various substrates provided in the door frame 3 (decorative substrates and various relay substrates provided in the plate unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450). (includes a device that relays detection signals from various sensors of the production operation unit 300 of the unit 200 and control signals that transmit various information.) Various power supply lines that supply various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created on the board 630 and a ground (GND) line that electrically connects to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 are formed. has been done.

In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 are connected. By electrically connecting the terminals of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown), the back box 3010 of the game board 5 is connected via the drawer connectors. A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals between the main control board 1310 located at the rear and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4.

Incidentally, mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW, and in the insulating exterior part of the main body frame side drawer connector, respectively. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted corresponds to the insulating mounting through holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. A through hole is provided at the position. Further, the main body frame side relay board (not shown) on which the main body frame side drawer connector is mounted is provided with a through hole at a position corresponding to the insulating attachment through hole of the main body frame side drawer connector.

[ID comparison circuit]
As shown in FIG. 262, the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided in the frame-side decorative board WKB as one of the decorative boards provided in the door frame unit includes an LED driver WIDCa, an 8-bit digital comparator circuit WIDCb (hereinafter referred to as " The comparator circuit WIDCb is mainly composed of a comparator circuit WIDCb.

The LED driver WIDCa is a sink type constant current drive circuit that has 24 output channels electrically connected to the LED elements and can flow a constant current for each channel. The maximum current of this output current is set by an output current setting circuit WIDCc provided outside the LED driver WIDCa. The LED driver WIDCa is attached with a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and the ID is set from a setting value of 1 to a setting value of 64 by an address setting circuit WIDCd provided outside the LED driver WIDCa. Either setting value is set.

The output current setting circuit WIDCc is electrically connected to the Rx1 terminal, Rx2 terminal, and Rx3 terminal, which are the maximum output current setting terminals of the LED driver WIDCa, and by electrically connecting a predetermined resistor to each terminal, the output current setting circuit WIDCc can set the output channel. The maximum output current can be set for each. That is, in this embodiment, the maximum output current is set by the hardware configuration, and the maximum output current cannot be changed by software (program).

The address setting circuit WIDCd is electrically connected to the ID1 terminal, ID2 terminal, and ID3 terminal, which are ID setting terminals of the LED driver WIDCa, and sets one of the setting values 1 to 64 depending on the voltage applied to each terminal. The value is set. That is, in this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set by the hardware configuration, and the ID of the LED driver WIDCa cannot be changed by the software (program).

Note that in this embodiment, a setting value 64 is set as the ID of the LED driver WIDCa. This is because the LED drivers are mounted not only on the door frame unit but also on various decorative boards and various boards included in the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model. It is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to the set value 64 for the frame side decorative board WKB in which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided.

The RST terminal, which is the reset terminal, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, of the LED driver WIDCa are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB, and the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to +5V. It is connected to the. Of the 24 output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT23 terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, eight output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT7 output to the comparator circuit WIDCb, and the remaining 16 output terminals The OUT8 terminal to OUT23 terminal are either unconnected or electrically connected to the LED element. For single-color LEDs, one LED element is packaged and the cathode terminal is electrically connected to one output terminal, and for full-color LEDs, three LED elements (red LED element, green LED element, blue LED element) are packaged. LED elements) are packaged and electrically connected to three output terminals corresponding to each cathode terminal. +12V is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the LED element. Note that a resistor is inserted between the cathode terminal of the LED element and the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa (that is, the cathode terminal of the LED element and one end of the resistor are electrically connected, and the other end of this resistor and the LED The heat generation of the LED element may be suppressed by electrically connecting it to the output terminal of the driver WIDCa.

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives a light emission information signal, which is serial data, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, and two main body frames (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 By electrically connecting each terminal of the side drawer connector, input is made via this drawer connector. There are multiple serial communication lines electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to a plurality of serial communication lines for transmitting or receiving various serial data to and from various boards and door units within the game board 5.

The clock signal for light emission information, which is a clock signal for transmitting the light emission information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5, is connected to the SCLK terminal which is the clock signal input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the frame 4 and mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 By electrically connecting terminals of two main body frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the drawer connectors, the input signal is input via the drawer connectors.

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the LED driver WIDCa based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is an ID code that indicates which LED driver the light emission information signal is for. and light emission data instructing the light emission mode of the LED. When the ID code included in the light emission information signal matches the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver takes in the light emission data included in the light emission information signal, and sets 24 lights based on this captured light emission data. While controlling the light emission mode of various LEDs electrically connected to the output terminals OUT0 to OUT23, the ID code included in the light emission information signal does not match the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd. Sometimes, the light emission data included in the light emission information signal is not captured, but is discarded, and the light emission mode of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT23 terminal is maintained based on the previously captured light emission data. control.

As described above, the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa is composed of the ID code and the light emission data, and the light emission data includes the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB. In other words, the light emission data is information that is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb using the signals output from the 8 output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7, and the information output from the 16 output terminals, OUT8 to OUT23. It consists of information and.

Signals output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal, which are the eight output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa, are respectively input to the P0 terminal to P7 terminal, which are the eight input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb. The Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal, which are the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, correspond one-to-one to the P0 terminal to P7 terminal, which are the eight input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, and serve as the sources to be referenced. .

In this embodiment, the Q0 to Q7 terminals, which are the eight setting terminals that serve as reference sources, are expressed in an 8-bit width with the Q0 terminal as the most significant bit and the Q7 terminal as the least significant bit. " represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes F0H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The inverted G terminal, which is the enable terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb (indicated by a solid line above the letter "G" in the figure), and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, are connected to the ground (GND, electrically connected to circuit ground). A Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V.

The comparator circuit WIDCb is configured based on the logic of each signal input to the P0 terminal to P7 terminal, which are eight input terminals to be compared, and to the Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal, which are eight setting terminals to be referenced. When the logic of the ID valid signal matches the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal, the inverted P=Q terminal (indicated by a solid line above the alphabetic symbol "P=Q" in the figure), the logic of the ID valid signal is changed to the valid logic (logic LOW). ), while outputting the logic of each signal input to the P0 terminal to P7 terminal, which are the eight input terminals to be compared, and the Q0 terminal to Q7, which are the eight setting terminals that are the reference source. If the logic set to the terminal does not match, the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), which is the inversion of the valid logic (logic LOW), and output from the inverted P=Q terminal, which is the output terminal. do.

In this way, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic, it is possible to convey the determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (matching), and the ID When the logic of the valid signal is set to invalid logic, it is possible to convey a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched).

The ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb is transmitted from the frame-side decorative board WKB to the relay board TKB provided in the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 via the electrical wiring (harness). Note that the light emission information signal and the light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 input to the frame side decorative board WKB are transmitted to other frame side decorative boards via electric wiring (harness).

[Relay board installed in the pan unit]
Next, the relay board TKB provided in the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 is inputted via the electrical wiring (harness) to the ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb in the frame side decorative board WKB. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the circuit of the relay board provided in the dish unit.

The relay board TKB provided in the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 receives detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300 attached to the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3, and receives detection signals from various sensors provided in the other units of the door frame 3. Detection signals from various sensors (for example, when a movable body is provided in the door frame 3, detection signals from a photo sensor that detects the original position and movement position of the movable body, and detection signals from the player's movement (hand) on the door frame 3) The door frame side information output circuit TOC is provided with a door frame side information output circuit TOC to which a detection signal from a distance measurement sensor that detects movement (holding up, waving, etc.) is input.

The door frame side information output circuit TOC is mainly composed of two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuits IDCa and TOCb are chip-based electronic components mainly composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (eight flip-flop circuits), and are used for parallel-to-serial conversion of the ID output circuit IDC shown in FIG. 251 etc. This is the same electronic component as circuit IDCa.

The door frame side information output circuits TOCa and TOCb have eight input terminals: A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, F terminal, G terminal, and H terminal (that is, 8-bit parallel There are 8 input terminals), the CK terminal where the information acquisition clock signal is input, and the 8 input terminals A to H terminals. A non-inverted QH terminal that outputs serial data, and an inverted QH terminal that takes in information set to eight input terminals (A terminal to H terminal), inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data (in the diagram, the terminal above the letter "Q") ), the CK INH terminal that prohibits the input of clock signals, the shift operation based on the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal, and the eight terminals A to H for each flip-flop circuit. The S/inverted L terminal (indicated by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) switches between parallel operation and takes in the information set to the input terminal, the SI terminal where serial data is input, and the control power supply. It mainly consists of a power supply terminal Vcc to be supplied and a GND terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The A terminals to H terminals, which are the eight input terminals of the parallel serial converter circuit IDCa, and the A terminals to D terminals, which are four input terminals among the eight input terminals of the parallel serial converter circuit IDCb, are connected to the door frame 3. Detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 and detection signals from various sensors provided in other units of the door frame 3 are respectively input, and the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCb 8 is inputted. Three of the input terminals, E terminal to G terminal, are leftover terminals and are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) (eight input terminals of parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb). Three of the terminals, E terminal to G terminal, may be electrically connected to +5V). The ID valid signal from the frame-side decorative board WKB is input to the H terminal, which is the remaining input terminal among the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb.

In the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb, the power supply terminal Vcc is electrically connected to +5V, the GND terminal and CK INT terminal are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground), and the non-inverting QH terminal is not connected. It is in a state of being

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa has an SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and outputs serial data obtained by serially converting parallel data input to eight input terminals from an inverted QH terminal.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCb has its SI terminal electrically connected to the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and outputs serial data from the inverted QH terminal by serially converting the parallel data input to the eight input terminals. do.

An information acquisition switching signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal from outside of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb. Each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb operates at this point when the logic of the switching signal for information acquisition is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW). The information input to the eight input terminals A to H terminals is taken in and stored (held), while the logic of the information acquisition switching signal is a shift operation logic (+5V and electrical Logic connected to: HI) and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground), the information acquisition clock input to the CK terminal for the captured information Shift operations are performed sequentially at the rising edge of the signal.

The two parallel-to-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb are connected to each other by electrically connecting the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit TOCa and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit TOCb. Each flip-flop circuit sequentially shifts at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal). Information being input to the D terminal → Information being input to the E terminal → Information being input to the F terminal → Information being input to the G terminal → Information being input to the H terminal → (in order to output serial data by shifting one bit from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal), an 8-bit shift register using a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit TOCa, and an 8-bit shift register using a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit TOCb, The door frame side information signal is output as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit TOCb.

The clock signal for information acquisition and the switching signal for information acquisition from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 are transmitted to the lower game board drawer connector of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the relay board 5ALUDRW, and each terminal of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. , are electrically connected, and the signal is transmitted to the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via this drawer connector. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the lower side of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, and two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 By being electrically connected to each terminal, the information is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 via this drawer connector.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the logic of the information acquisition switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal in the production operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. By setting and outputting, the parallel operation and serial operation are achieved, and then by outputting the information acquisition clock signal, the door frame side information signal is acquired, and the effect is attached to the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3. It is possible to understand the player's operations on the operation unit 300 and the movements of the movable body (presentation body), grasp the movement of the movable body (presentation body) provided in other units of the door frame 3 and the player, A determination result regarding the suitability (consistency) of the combination of the panel 5 and the door frame unit can be obtained.

The timing to obtain the determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be performed only at the first time after the power is turned on, in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process, The above-described production operation unit information acquisition process may be performed constantly or intermittently after the power is turned on. The judgment results regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit are always intermittently acquired in the production operation unit information acquisition process described above after the power is turned on, so that the judgment results differ. By doing so, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the transmission path extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB is affected by noise.

Further, as a timing for obtaining a determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. It may also be performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process.

Note that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (compatible) based on the determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit. If not, error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling) shown in FIGS. 256 to 258 or FIGS. 259 to 261 is performed.

In this way, since the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB is included in the light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of the LED regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, the game Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the board 5, and the terminals of the drawer connector 2 (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 There is no need to take the trouble to provide a dedicated terminal for transmitting the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB to each terminal of the main body frame-side drawer connector.

In addition, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 is mounted. Each of the terminals of the two drawer connectors on the main body frame side (not shown) is provided with extra unused terminals so as to be able to correspond to the specifications of the game board 5. However, in one specification of the game board 5, even if the terminals are unused, in other specifications of the game board 5, all terminals may be used. In such a case, if the number of terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 is increased, the main body frame 4 will be increased accordingly. It is also necessary to increase the terminals of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown). The entire frame of the main body frame 4) also needs to be replaced, which increases the cost. By attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 without depending on the specifications of the game board 5, the lower game board drawer connector of the game board 5 can be replaced. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the relay board 5ALUDRW, and each terminal of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. , the convenience of electrically connecting them will be lost.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB is included in the light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of the LED regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit. Therefore, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW is mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW are mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. There is no need to increase the number of terminals of the two drawer connectors on the main body frame side (not shown).

The information acquisition clock signal and the light emission information clock signal are transmitted to each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and to the main body. A common transmission line (door frame side clock The data may be transmitted using a signal transmission line). In this case, the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a control signal to a hardware-based clock signal switching circuit on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW side or the peripheral control board 1510, and outputs a control signal to a clock signal for information acquisition and a clock signal for light emission information. One of the clock signals is transmitted to a common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line). As a result, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. This can contribute to suppressing an increase in the number of terminals of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown).

The compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the divided game boards and the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the divided game boards and the effect operation buttons shown in FIG. 254 are sent to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. A microprocessor called the peripheral control IC 1510a judges the compatibility (consistency) of each ID based on the received ID having an 8-bit width. Regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination, the compatibility (consistency) of the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of the LED driver WIDCa and the comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame-side decorative board WKB and in which no microprocessor is mounted, is determined. are doing.

[Configuration that does not convey the compatibility (compatibility) of the combination of the game board and door frame unit to the peripheral control board]
Regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, as described above, the microprocessor called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of the LED driver WIDCa and the comparator circuit WIDCb, on the frame side decorative board WKB. The circuit that is not mounted determines the compatibility, and outputs the determination result as an ID valid signal to the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the relay board TKB displays the door together with other information. It is serialized as a frame side information signal. This door frame side information signal is transmitted to each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. and each terminal of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected, so that the game board can be connected via the drawer connectors. However, instead of this, the ID valid signal is not output to the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. It may also be output to another frame-side decorative board. In other words, the configuration may be such that the compatibility (compatibility) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 264 is a circuit showing an example of a modification of FIG. 262. The circuit in FIG. 264 is basically the same as the circuit in FIG. 262, except that a plurality of LED drivers with external address setting circuits and output current setting circuits are mounted, and the output destination of the ID valid signal is different. There is a difference in . Here, the differences will be explained. Note that in FIG. 264, the same parts as in FIG. 262 are given the same reference numerals.

The frame side decorative board WKB includes LED drivers WIDCaa to LED drivers WIDCan (a plurality of LED drivers) in addition to the LED driver WIDCa. As described above, the light emission information signal and the light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. The terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are electrically connected to the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is input to the frame side decorative board WKB via this drawer connector. The light emission information signal and the light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 that are input to the frame side decorative board WKB are the SDA of each LED driver of the LED driver WIDCa and the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (a plurality of LED drivers). The signal is input to the SCLK terminal and is further transmitted to other subsequent frame-side decorative boards. Each of the LED driver WIDCa and the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (a plurality of LED drivers) is set with a unique self-identification code (ID) without duplication.

As described above, the RST terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB. On the other hand, the RST terminals of the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED drivers WIDCan (a plurality of LED drivers) receive the ID valid signal from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, and furthermore, the ID valid signal from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb is input, and being transmitted to the board. When the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), as described above, the judgment result that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (matched) is transmitted. , if the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), as described above, the determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched) is transmitted. .

In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit does not match (match) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple The voltage applied to the RST terminal of the LED driver) is pulled up to the logic HI side, and the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (a plurality of LED drivers) are reset, and the LEDs provided on the subsequent frame side decorative board are reset. The driver will also be in a reset state. On the other hand, when the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan ( The voltage applied to the RST terminal of the plurality of LED drivers) is pulled down to the logic LOW side, and the reset state of the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (the plurality of LED drivers) is released, and the subsequent frames The LED driver provided on the side decorative board also goes into a state where the reset state is released.

As a result, if the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched), the LED drivers WIDCaa to LED drivers WIDCan (a plurality of LED drivers) are reset, and the subsequent frame side decorative board Since the LED drivers provided in the LED drivers are also reset, the LED elements controlled by each LED driver can be turned off. Although the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, even if the performance progresses, the door frame unit side It is now possible to prevent the progress of the illumination effect by the door frame unit. In addition, if the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (aligned), the door frame unit will be in a state where the light goes out, so that in addition to the staff such as the clerk of the game hall, the game board 5 can be removed from the main body frame. It is possible to notify the operator who is installing the game board 5 and the door frame unit whether or not the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (aligned).

[Replacement of LED driver with serial-parallel conversion circuit]
Next, a case where the LED driver WIDCa constituting the ID comparison circuit WIDC included in the frame-side decorative board WKB shown in FIG. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a case where the LED driver constituting the ID comparison circuit included in the frame-side decorative board shown in FIG. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. In FIG. 265, various terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' having the same functions as those of the LED driver WIDCa in FIG. 262 are indicated by the same reference numerals. Here, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit will be mainly explained, and the explanation of parts having the same reference numerals as those of the LED driver WIDCa will be omitted. Note that OUT0 to OUT23, which are the 24 output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa in FIG. 262, are constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, whereas the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' The eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 are not constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, but are defined by the absolute maximum rated output current of the logic IC.

The serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is an electronic component that mainly consists of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits) and can be connected in a daisy chain. This is a circuit that can convert (restore) parallel data and output it from eight output terminals, OU0 to OUT7.

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives a light emission information signal, which is serial data, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the board 5, and the terminals (not shown) of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 By electrically connecting the terminals of the two main body frame side drawer connectors, input is made via the drawer connectors.

The clock signal for light emission information, which is a clock signal for transmitting the light emission information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5, is connected to the SCLK terminal which is the clock signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa'. 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, and each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the main body frame (not shown) of the main body frame 4. By electrically connecting terminals of two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the side relay board, input is made via these drawer connectors.

The latch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is sent to the LAT terminal, which is the latch signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, and two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 By electrically connecting the respective terminals of , input is made via this drawer connector. Each flip-flop circuit of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' receives information from the SDA terminal when the logic of the latch signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW). (Serial data) is sequentially shifted at the rising edge of the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal, and a plurality of subsequent serial-to-parallel conversion circuits (for example, , other serial-parallel converter circuits provided in the serial-parallel converter circuit WIDCa', and a plurality of subsequent serial-parallel converter circuits connected in a daisy chain provided in other frame-side decorative boards). On the other hand, when the logic of the latch signal is a shift operation logic that is an inversion of the parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI), the information taken in at this point (compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb) (information) is converted into parallel data and output from eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7, respectively.

The inverted G terminal (indicated by a solid line above the letter "G" in the figure), which is the enable terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame side decorative board WKB. has been done. An inverted CLR terminal (indicated by a solid line above the alphabet "CLR" in the figure), which is a reset terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to +5V.

The light emission information signal inputted to the SDA terminal of the serial parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' based on the light emission information clock signal inputted to the SCLK terminal of the serial parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is composed of light emission data. Regarding the light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', the information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb is output from the peripheral control board 1510 as the light emission data. The light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is outputted from the peripheral control board 1510 following the light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in a daisy chain with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa'. There is. In addition to emitting various LEDs, the serial-parallel converter circuit WIDCa' and the subsequent serial-parallel converter circuits connected in a daisy chain emit light from various LEDs. Drive data for the drive source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 as light emission data. In other words, the light emission information signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 includes information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb in addition to light emission data for various LEDs, and also includes drive data for the electrical drive source. There is.

The latch signal, the clock signal for light emission information, and the light emission information signal from the SO terminal which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' are transmitted from this frame-side decorative board WKB to other frame-side decorative boards. Note that if there is a subsequent serial-parallel converter circuit connected in a daisy chain with the serial-parallel converter WIDCa' on this frame-side decorative board WKB, a latch signal and a clock signal for light emission information are transmitted together with the serial-parallel converter WIDCa'. The light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is input to the SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the subsequent serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. The light emission information signal from the SO terminal of this subsequent serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is output to the other frame-side decorative board.

In this way, by replacing the LED driver WIDCa constituting the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided in the frame-side decorative board WKB with a serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is possible to convert the ID code indicating which LED driver it corresponds to into the light emission information signal. need to be included.

[Configuration in which each door frame unit has a self-identification code]
In FIGS. 262 and 263, the door frame 3 includes door frame units (hereinafter referred to as " A decorative board (hereinafter referred to as a "frame-side decorative board") is attached to the door frame unit. ) has a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, and is capable of determining the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and outputting the determination result. It was equipped with That is, one ID comparison circuit WIDC was provided for the door frame unit. Here, a configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit is provided with a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267. FIG. 266 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of allocation to each unit, and FIG. 267 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit.

The door frame unit is composed of a door frame left side unit 420, a door frame right side unit 430, a plate unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450. By attaching and detaching each unit to the door frame 3, the design can be improved. It is now possible to replace it or install one that corresponds to the game specifications. As mentioned above, the relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to and approved by the application organization. However, due to human error when replacing the door frame unit, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be different from the one submitted to the application agency and approved, and the specifications may not be met in the first place. This is not desirable because a pachinko machine that is different from the one for which permission has been obtained by submitting the details to the applicant institution will be installed in the game hall.

Therefore, any one of the decorative boards included in each unit of the door frame unit is provided with a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, and the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is A configuration including an ID comparison circuit that can determine compatibility (matching) and output the determination result can be considered.

Here, in the door frame units, as shown in FIG. 266, the pan unit 200 is Unit A, the door frame right side unit 430 is Unit B, the door frame top unit 450 is Unit C, and the door frame left side unit 420 is Unit D. , are allocated as four units, Unit A to Unit D.

Any one of the decorative boards provided in Unit A (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board A") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa as an ID output circuit that can identify itself. There is.

Any one of the decorative boards provided in Unit B (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board B") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa as an ID output circuit that can identify itself. There is.

Any one of the decorative boards provided in Unit C (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board C") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa as an ID output circuit that can identify itself. There is.

Any one of the decorative boards provided in Unit D (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board D") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa as an ID output circuit that can identify itself. There is.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided in the frame-side decorative substrates A to D, respectively, are the same circuits as the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in FIG. 251, Here, descriptions of each terminal, portions with the same circuit configuration, and operations will be omitted.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board A include the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, F terminal, and G terminal, which are electrically connected to +5V. At the same time, the H terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the frame-side decorative board A (that is, the ID of Unit A, which is the dish unit 200) is 11111110B (the alphabet "B " represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes FEH (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, E terminal, and F terminal are electrically connected to +5V to the ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B. At the same time, the G terminal and the H terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the frame-side decorative board B (that is, the ID of Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430) is 11111100B ( The alphabet "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes FCH (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, D terminal, and E terminal are electrically connected to +5V, and the F The terminal, G terminal, and H terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the frame-side decorative board C (that is, the ID of Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450) is 11111000B (letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes F8H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and D terminal are electrically connected to +5V, and the E terminal, F terminal The terminal, G terminal, and H terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the frame-side decorative board D (that is, the ID of Unit D, which is the door frame left side unit 420) is 11110000B ( The alphabet "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it becomes F0H (the alphabet "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The S/inverted L terminals of the parallel-serial converter circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on the frame side decorative boards A to D (indicated by a solid line above the letter "L" in the figure) are connected to the frame side decorative boards A to D. Shift operation based on the conformity determination clock signal input to the CK terminal of the ID output circuit UAa~UDa provided in D and the parallel/serial conversion circuit UAa~ of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative boards A~D Each flip-flop circuit of UDa switches between the parallel operation that takes in the information set to the eight input terminals A terminal to H terminal, and the switching signal for compatibility determination from the peripheral control board 1510 causes the game board 5 to be connected to the main body frame. 4 and each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. By electrically connecting the respective terminals of two mounted main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown), input is made via these drawer connectors.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial converter circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board D. , to the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the door frame left side unit 420, and to the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450. The SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa of the provided ID output circuit is electrically connected (either electrically via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). good). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the door frame left side unit 420, and the ID provided in the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa of the output circuit is connected in a daisy chain.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit is provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, and the frame-side decorative board B is provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430. The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit is electrically connected (it may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). ). As a result, the parallel-serial converter circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, and the ID provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the output circuit is connected in a daisy chain.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial converter circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, and the ID output provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the pan unit 200. The SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the circuit is electrically connected (the electrical connection may be made via an electrical wiring (harness) or the electrical connection may be made via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, and the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200. The parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa is connected in a daisy chain.

In this way, from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the door frame left side unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450. A parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa for the ID output circuit, a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa for the ID output circuit to be provided to the frame-side decorative board B provided to Unit B, which is the frame right side unit 430, and a frame-side decorative board provided to Unit A, which is the pan unit 200. The ID output circuit provided in A is connected in a daisy chain up to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa.

Because each of the flip-flop circuits of the four parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa sequentially performs a shift operation at the rising edge of the compliance determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (in other words, the information input to the A terminal → the B terminal Information being input → Information being input to the C terminal → Information being input to the D terminal → Information being input to the E terminal → Information being input to the F terminal → Information being input to the G terminal → Information input to the H terminal → Shift operation one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal to output serial data), 8-bit shift register by parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa, and parallel-to-serial conversion It operates as a 32-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the circuit UBa, an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial converter circuit UCa, and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial converter circuit UDa. An ID code signal is transmitted as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the conversion circuit UAa for the lower game board, which is mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. This is achieved by electrically connecting each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW to each terminal of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connector.

As described above, since the effect operation unit 300 is installed in the dish unit 200, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect operation in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the unit information acquisition process, by setting and outputting the logic of the switching signal for conformance determination inputted to the S/inverted L terminal, parallel operation is achieved, and after serial operation is achieved, by outputting the clock signal for conformity determination. , the ID code signal can be acquired, and a determination result regarding the suitability (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit can be obtained.

The timing for obtaining the determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be performed only at the first time after the power is turned on, in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process, The above-described production operation unit information acquisition process may be performed constantly or intermittently after the power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently acquiring the determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit in the above-mentioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after the power is turned on, the determination result may be different. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the transmission path extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB is affected by noise.

Further, as a timing for obtaining a determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. It may also be performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process.

Note that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (compatible) based on the determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit. If not, error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 may be performed for the entire door frame unit, or for only one part of the door frame unit. For units that do not match (for example, Unit A to Unit D, then Unit C (door frame top unit 450), error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 is applied. You may do so.

[Configuration in which each door frame unit has a self-identification code and a manufacturer identification code]
Note that the door frame 3 can be configured so that it can be used in common by a plurality of manufacturers. In this case, one manufacturer (manufacturer) gives each door frame unit a self-identification code (ID), and another manufacturer (manufacturer) gives each door frame unit a self-identification code (ID). ) coincidentally match, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 has been submitted to the application organization and approved. Despite the difference, the control board may determine that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 has been submitted to the applicant organization and obtained permission, and in the first place, the specifications should not be submitted to the application organization. This is not desirable because a different pachinko machine than the one for which permission has been obtained will be installed in the game hall.

Therefore, in addition to a self-identification code (ID), each unit of the door frame unit is provided with a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value), and the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is determined. It is possible to consider a configuration including an ID comparison circuit that can output a determination result. Here, a configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit is provided with a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) and a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit in which the ID output circuit in each unit of FIG. 267 further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value). FIG. 268 shows basically the same circuits as the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided in the frame-side decorative boards A to frame-side decorative boards D in FIG. 267, respectively. , descriptions of parts with the same circuit configuration and operations will be omitted.

Parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap are provided downstream of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided in the frame-side decorative substrates A to D, respectively. A manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) is set in the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap.

Specifically, the ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap at the subsequent stage of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided in the frame-side decorative substrates A to frame-side decorative substrates D, respectively, are connected to the A terminal. , B terminal, C terminal, and E terminal +5V, and D terminal, F terminal, G terminal, and H terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the manufacturer identification codes of the frame-side decorative boards A to D (that is, the manufacturer identification codes (manufacturer identification values) of Units A to Unit D) are 8 bits wide with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit. When expressed as 11101000B (the alphabetic character "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed as a hexadecimal number, it becomes E8H (the alphabetical character "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

S/inverted L terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap in the subsequent stage (indicated by a solid line above the letter "L" in the figure) ) is a shift operation based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided in the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap in the subsequent stages. The flip-flop circuits of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap in the subsequent stage are set to the eight input terminals of the A terminal to the H terminal. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, a switching signal for compatibility determination from the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5. The terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW to be mounted and the terminals of the two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected. By being connected to the drawer connector, input is made through this drawer connector.

The SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UDap in the latter stage of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board D. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDap at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa at the previous stage. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UDa, which is the preceding stage, and the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UCap, which is the succeeding stage of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450. The SI terminal is electrically connected (it may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or may be electrically connected via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDap, which is a subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, is transferred from the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front stage of the ID output circuit provided for the door frame top unit 450 and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear stage of the ID output circuit provided for the frame-side decorative board C provided for Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, are connected in a daisy chain. ing.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap in the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board C in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa in the previous stage are electrically connected. It is connected to the. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UCa, which is the preceding stage, and the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UBap, which is the succeeding stage of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UBa, which is the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B, which is provided in the unit B, which is the right side unit 430 of the door frame. is electrically connected to the SI terminal of (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or may be electrically connected via a drawer connector). As a result, from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, is provided in the frame-side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450. From the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa upstream of the ID output circuit to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBap after the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the right side unit 430 of the door frame. are connected in a daisy chain.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBap in the rear stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa in the previous stage are electrically connected. connected. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa at the preceding stage and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAap at the subsequent stage of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, which is the pan unit 200. and (can be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, from the parallel-serial converter circuit UBap, which is a subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board B provided in the door frame right side unit 430, Unit B, the frame side decorative board B provided in the door frame right side unit 430, Unit B is transmitted. from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa at the front stage of the ID output circuit provided for the unit A to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAap at the subsequent stage to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa for the ID output circuit provided for the frame-side decorative board A for the unit A, which is the tray unit 200. connected in a daisy chain.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAap in the subsequent stage of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A in Unit A, which is the pan unit 200, and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa in the previous stage. , are electrically connected. As a result, the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAap of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the pan unit 200, and the parallel-serial converter circuit UAap subsequent to the parallel-serial converter circuit UAa of the ID output circuit, and the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the pan unit 200. The parallel-serial converter circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided for the ID output circuit is connected in a daisy chain with the parallel-serial converter circuit UAa at the previous stage.

In this way, from the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UDap at the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board D provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, to the frame-side decorative board provided in Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame. A parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa in the preceding stage of the ID output circuit provided in Unit D, a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap in the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame side decorative board C provided in Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, Parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa in the previous stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board C provided in a certain Unit C, parallel-to-serial conversion circuit in the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430 Circuit UBap, a parallel-serial converter circuit UBa in the previous stage of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right side unit 430, and an ID output provided in the frame-side decorative board A, provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200. The circuit includes a parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAap after the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa, and a parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa to precede the parallel-to-serial converter circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200. , are connected in a daisy chain.

Each of the flip-flop circuits, a total of eight parallel-to-serial conversion circuits UAap, UAa, UBap, UBa, UCap, UCa, UDap, and UDa, sequentially shifts at the rising edge of the conformity determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, Information input to the A terminal → Information input to the B terminal → Information input to the C terminal → Information input to the D terminal → Information input to the E terminal → Information input to the F terminal Parallel-to-serial converter circuit 8-bit shift register by UAap, 8-bit shift register by parallel-serial converter UAa, 8-bit shift register by parallel-serial converter UBap, 8-bit shift register by parallel-serial converter UBa, and parallel-serial converter An 8-bit shift register formed by a conversion circuit UCap, an 8-bit shift register formed by a parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa, an 8-bit shift register formed by a parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap, and an 8-bit shift register formed by a parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa, The ID code signal is transmitted as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa to the lower game board of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, and each of the two main body frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. When the terminals are electrically connected, the output is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via this drawer connector.

[ID error judgment switch]
Of the left side game board 5AL and right side game board 5AR that make up the divided game board 5A shown in FIG. The ID is acquired from the transmitted ID code signal and it is determined whether the combination of the performance operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the divided game board is compatible (matched). This determination result can be triggered by a press operation on the press operation section of the ID error determination switch. FIG. 269 is a schematic front view (a) of a divided game board provided with an ID error determination switch, and a schematic rear view (b) of the divided game board provided with an ID error determination switch. Note that in FIGS. 269(a) and 269(b), the same components as in FIGS. 248(a) and 248(b) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the difference is that the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) is provided with a setting switch 1311a, whereas the main control board 1310 in FIG. 269(b) is not provided with a setting switch. However, while the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) is not provided with an ID error determination switch, the main control board 1310 in FIG. 269(b) is provided with an ID error determination switch 1310v. They differ in this respect.

The ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 has its press operation part exposed from the cover body of the above-described main control board box 1320 (not shown), so that the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 is in a state (not shown) exposed from the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v is pressed, a detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the system of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and executes the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211, and the main control side main processing in FIG. Repeat the main control side timer interrupt processing shown below.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v (specifically, from the ID error determination switch 1310v) in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The logic of the detection signal includes operation logic and non-operation logic, and when the operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, and the operation logic is When the inverted non-operation logic is input, it is determined that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed. Based on this, it is determined that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed. When this occurs, an ID error determination result notification start command for starting notification of the ID error determination result is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts the system of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and performs the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, and the peripheral control unit steady processing in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process shown in FIG. 222 and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. conduct).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right side game board) and a performance operation are sent to the right side game board. An ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the production operation unit) is output to each unit. Then, the peripheral control IC 1510a separates the ID code signal from the right side game board (ID code signal dedicated to the right side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the performance operation unit). A combination of split game boards (that is, a right game board (a board without a microprocessor) and a left game board (peripheral control board 1510 and main control board 1310 with a microprocessor) The determination (comparison) is made with reference to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM (combinations of), and the combination table stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM regarding combinations of production operation units and split game boards. Judgment (comparison) is made with reference to (FIG. 254).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, and turns on the power to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. When analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the time process, in order to start notification of the ID error determination result, the determination result of the combination of split game boards in the ID determination process of step S1003 is analyzed. When there was a mismatch, that is, the combination of the right side game board (board without a microprocessor installed) and the left side game board (peripheral control board 1510 and main control board 1310 with a microprocessor installed) was examined. When the determination result is non-conformity (inconsistency), the command classified as notification display is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines, in the warning process of step S1024, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data , electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC to set various processing related to the effects, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 , the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is to notify that a corresponding error among error responses 1 to 9 has occurred. Note that when the judgment result for the combination of split game boards is compatible (consistent), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and it can be resolved by Since it is "none", there is no special notification mode in normal operation (no error handling). In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect, and the dedicated notification sound is not emitted from the speaker.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result regarding the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, and the received command analysis process in step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. If this is not analyzed, the command classified as notification display cannot be passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process, and the ID error determination result It is not possible to start the notification. In other words, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occur, until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the error notification start time to notify that fact will be set to the gaming hall. The ID error determination switch 1310v can be changed by pressing the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v by an employee such as a store clerk.

Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. When analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 in the power-on process, this is used as a trigger to notify the ID error determination result in the ID determination process in step S1003. If the determination result for the combination is non-conformance (inconsistency), the command classified as notification display is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. Accordingly, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 selects the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, and the schedule data for sound generation as aspects indicating non-conformity (inconsistency). , electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC to set various processing related to the effects, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 , the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is to notify that a corresponding error among error handling 1 to error handling 9 has occurred. In addition, when the judgment result for the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is compatible (consistent), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response). Yes, and because the countermeasure is "no", there is no special notification mode in normal operation (no error handling). In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect, and the dedicated notification sound is not emitted from the speaker.

In this way, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 uses the determination result about the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Even if the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. If the command is not analyzed in the received command analysis process, the command classified as notification display cannot be passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. , it is not possible to start notification of the ID error determination result.

Note that the main control board 1310 is provided with an ID error determination switch 1310v, and the ID error determination switch 1310v is a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting value. can be substituted by In this case, the setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 248(b) is provided, and the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, but the setting key switch 1311a provided in the main control board 1310 is After inserting the setting key and turning it on, press the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 and operate the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 to turn on the power of the Pachinko machine 1. By doing so, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process is started, and the peripheral control board transmission in step S238 in the setting change process is performed based on the OFF operation of the setting key inserted in the setting key switch 1311a. In the command transmission process, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a uses this as a trigger to perform error response 1 to error response as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c). 9 has occurred, a notification to that effect is made. Since the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to two to three people.

Specifically, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 in FIG. However, when the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the peripheral control board in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. In the command transmission process, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the ID error determination result notification start command, and uses this as a trigger to proceed with the process of starting notification of the ID error determination result.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process, it then clears all areas of the RAM in step S38, and then performs the main control side main process and the process shown in FIG. Performs main control side timer interrupt processing.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "power is being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. At this time, "setting in progress" may be displayed following "power restoration in progress", or "setting in progress" may be displayed in place of "power restoration in progress". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting change start command to notify the start of setting change to the main peripheral serial data. It is necessary to send it to the control board 1510.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310 after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process. Then, the ID error determination result notification start command is received, and with this as a trigger, if error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), A notice will be issued to that effect. In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the main control board 1310 even when error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c). If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a in preparation for Until the predetermined period of time until this setting change process is completed (in other words, until the setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), even if error response 1 to error response 9 have occurred, , it is no longer possible to notify to that effect. In other words, until the setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occur, the start time of error notification will be limited to a limited number of people in the gaming hall. It can be changed by operating the setting key owned by .

On the other hand, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on, the power supply board 630 When powering on the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a in preparation for Thereafter, main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 212 are performed. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "power is being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode, and as shown in FIG. 254(c). If error response 1 to error response 9 occurs as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown, a notification to that effect is issued. In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided in the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the peripheral control board 1510 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs processing when the main control side power is turned on. If the setting change process in step S37 is not performed, if error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), a notification to that effect is provided. is now possible.

In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided in the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will not be activated when the main control side power is turned on. If the setting change process in step S37 in the process is not performed, if error response 1 to error response 9 occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), a notification to that effect is predetermined. There are times when the change cannot be performed until the period has elapsed (until the setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), and times when notification to that effect can be performed regardless of the predetermined period.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, notification can be executed in accordance with the determination result of determining whether the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR match. It is now possible to do so. As a result, it becomes possible to immediately determine that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are inconsistent, and the left game board 5AL and right game board 5AR are in a mismatched and incomplete state. It is possible to prevent the performance from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

[Summary A]
A0:
This is a game machine that includes a game frame and a game board, and the game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The first game board component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board component includes a specific board that is not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board includes a unique value that can be identified as a second game board constituent member, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting a signal of the unique value to the production control board. The performance control board is capable of comparing the unique value transmitted from the unique value transmitting means with the unique value held by itself. The first game board component and the second game board component are each individually fixed to the game frame.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left side game board 5AL that is a first game board component and a right side game board 5AR that is a second game board component. The left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, includes a plurality of boards (main control The main control unit 1300 in which the board 1310 is housed, various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors and drives) The left driving board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left driving board unit 1700L") accommodates a driving board for driving a solenoid, etc.). The right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with specific boards (such as various boards (for example, various relay boards, various LEDs attached to various production units housed in the right back box 3010R) that are not equipped with a microprocessor. Of the right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right drive board unit 1700R"), the right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right drive board unit 1700R") accommodates a decorative board on which is mounted, a drive board that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. one board). One of the various boards that are specific boards has a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that can identify it as the right game board 5AR that is a second game board component, and a self-identification code ( ID) to a peripheral control board 1510 which is an effect control board, and an ID output circuit IDC shown in FIG. 251 which is an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting a signal.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, uses a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value transmitted from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means, and a unique value that it owns (a combination stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM). table (FIG. 254)) can be compared in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255.

The left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are each individually fixed to the main body frame 4, which is a game frame.

In this way, it is a unique value that can identify the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided in the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component. Since the self-identification code (ID) is configured to transmit a signal to the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control board provided on the left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control board, At 1510, it is possible to determine the suitability (matching) of the combination of the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

A1:
It has a game frame and a game board. The game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The first game board component includes a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board component includes a board on which no microprocessor is mounted, a unique value that indicates that it is a second game board component, and unique value transmitting means that transmits the unique value. Further, the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. The eigenvalue transmitting means is capable of transmitting to the sub-control board using serial communication. The unique value transmitting means is electrically connected to the sub-control board of the first game board component. The sub control board can compare the eigenvalues from the eigenvalue transmitting means with the eigenvalues it owns.

Specifically, for example, it includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left side game board 5AL that is a first game board component and a right side game board 5AR that is a second game board component. The left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, includes a plurality of boards (main control The main control unit 1300 in which the board 1310 is housed, various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors and drives) The left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left side drive board unit 1700L") accommodates a drive board for driving a solenoid, etc.). The right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a board (various boards (for example, various relay boards, various LEDs attached to various production units housed in the right rear box 3010R) that are not equipped with a microprocessor. a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that accommodates a mounted decorative board, a drive board that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.); A self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that indicates that it is the right side game board 5AR that is a component of the second game board, and an ID in FIG. 251 that is a unique value transmitting means that transmits the self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value. It is equipped with an output circuit IDC.

Furthermore, the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main body frame 4, which is a game frame.

The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means, can transmit data to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, using serial communication. The ID output circuit IDC, which is the unique value transmitting means, is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board of the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, receives a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means, and a unique value that it owns (a combination table that is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM). 254)) can be compared in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means provided in the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, outputs an ID, which is a unique value that informs that it is the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component. Since the identification code (ID) is transmitted using serial communication to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board provided in the left-side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, the sub-control board A certain peripheral control board 1510 can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

A2:
Furthermore, the serial communication signal includes a unique value and a signal related to the game effect generated in the second game board component, and further includes a serial communication signal for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board and the payout control board. 1 serial communication means, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the first game board component and the second game board component. If this happens, the ball will no longer be paid out, and if the comparison determination by the second serial communication means is false, the decoration effect on the second game board component will no longer be performed.

Specifically, for example, the photo and ID code signals in FIG. 252, which are serial communication signals, contain a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, and a game generated on the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board. It includes a signal related to the performance (a detection signal from a photosensor that detects the position of various movable bodies inputted to the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in FIG. 252), and further includes a main control board 1310 and a payout signal. A first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the control board 633, and a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. and a second serial communication means for performing the communication.

If the comparison determination by the first serial communication means is false, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will respond to various commands to the control board equipped with a microprocessor by a self-identifying self-control board. Since the identification code (ID) is included in the transmission, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 transmits the command in step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the analysis process, when it is determined that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatching), the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatching). Information indicating the current state is set in the state information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and information for stopping the payout operation is set in the output information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. As a result, game balls are no longer paid out. In other words, if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) due to an operator's work error, even if the player is able to play and proceed with the game. Since the payout operation is stopped, game balls are not paid out to the player, so it is possible to notify the player that some kind of malfunction has occurred with the Pachinko machine, and to prevent the player from paying out the game balls. A player can inform an attendant such as a clerk of a game hall about the state of a pachinko machine in which balls are not put out. It is possible to contribute to early detection of a state where the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent).

If the comparison determination by the second serial communication means is false, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the right game board It acquires the ID code signal (ID code signal exclusively for the right side game board) from The combination with the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310) was determined (compared) with reference to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, and was determined to be incompatible. In some cases, as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261, which results in status 2: ID error 1 in FIG. The process is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading out (extracting) the target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processes related to the performance are set. As a result, the various LEDs of the divided game board 5A (various LEDs of the game board) are turned off, and the decorative effects on the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, are no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board that make up the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) due to an operator's work error, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the split game board Since the various LEDs of 5A (various LEDs of the game board) go out and the decorative effect on the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is no longer performed, the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (incompatible). This can contribute to the early detection of a state in which there is a

A3:
Further, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported and the ID error is not reported. Further, error notification of the LED in the decoration unit is not performed. Specifically, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261 )) and occur at the same time, only a notification to the effect that a RAM error has occurred is issued, whereas status 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (in Figures 256 to 261) Notification to the effect that error response 1 (ID error 1 response) has occurred is not made. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped. Status 2 in Figure 254(c): Even if ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred, the most important error, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, is Regardless of the occurrence of other errors, this is given top priority.

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 of FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine If the notification process continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

A4:
The first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected by connecting connectors to each other. Specifically, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are connectors, and the right game board drawer connector relays the right game board 5AR to the right game board 5AR. Each terminal of the drawer connector RDRW, RDRW for the right side game board mounted on the board 5ARDRW, and each terminal of the drawer connector LDRW, LDRW for the left side game board mounted on the left side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side game board 5AL. and are electrically connected via the drawer connector. With this drawer connector, simply by combining the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is automatically connected to the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component. The board 5AL can be electrically connected to the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board.

[Summary B]
B0:
This game machine includes a game frame and a game board, and the game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component, and is fixed to the game board. The first game board component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board component includes a specific board that is not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board includes a unique value that can be identified as a second game board constituent member, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting a signal of the unique value to the performance control board. The first error occurs when the performance control board cannot receive the unique value from the second game board component within a predetermined time, and the first error occurs when the unique value transmitted from the second game board component is not a predetermined value. The second error that occurs in the second error can be notified.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board. The split game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL that is a first game board component and a right game board 5AR that is a second game board component, and is fixed to a main body frame 4 that is a game frame. The left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, includes a plurality of boards (main control The main control unit 1300 in which the board 1310 is housed, various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors and drives) The left driving board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left driving board unit 1700L") accommodates a driving board for driving a solenoid, etc.). The right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with specific boards (such as various boards (for example, various relay boards, various LEDs attached to various production units housed in the right back box 3010R) that are not equipped with a microprocessor. The right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right drive board unit 1700R") accommodates a decorative board on which is mounted, a drive board that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.). one of which is equipped with one board). One of the various boards that are specific boards has a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that can identify it as the right game board 5AR that is a second game board component, and a self-identification code ( ID) to a peripheral control board 1510 which is an effect control board, and an ID output circuit IDC shown in FIG. 251 which is an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting a signal.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control board, activates the second game board within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 255). The first error that occurs when the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, cannot be received from the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component, is the state 8 in FIG. 254(c): Unconnected error 1 occurs in FIG. 256- Error handling 7 in FIG. 261 and FIG. 254 which is a second error that occurs when the self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value from the right side game board 5AR which is the second game board component is not a predetermined value. State 2 (c): Error handling 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in FIGS. 256 to 261, which is ID error 1, is notified.

In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 executes the command classified as notification display as the first error, state 8 in FIG. 254(c): error response 7 in FIGS. is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for generating light emission mode, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source as a mode of disconnection. By reading out (extracting) schedule data and the like from the peripheral control ROM and setting them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processing related to the effects are set.

The second error is state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1. The command classified as notification display as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261 is turned on when the peripheral control unit is The process is passed to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading out (extracting) the target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processes related to the performance are set.

In this way, it is a unique value that can identify the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided in the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component. Since the self-identification code (ID) is configured to transmit a signal to the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control board provided on the left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control board, 1510, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot receive the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, within a predetermined time (the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255). In this case, the first error, state 8 in FIG. 254(c): error response 7 in FIGS. If the identification code (ID) is received and the value is not a predetermined value, the second error occurs: State 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 occurs. Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261 is can occur. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

B1:
It has a game frame and a game board. The game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The first game board component includes a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board component includes a board on which no microprocessor is mounted, a unique value that indicates that it is a second game board component, and unique value transmitting means that transmits the unique value. Further, the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. The first game board component receives a first error that occurs when it cannot receive the unique value from the second game board component within a predetermined time, and receives the unique value from the second game board component, which is determined in advance. and a second error that occurs when the value is not the specified value.

Specifically, for example, it includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left side game board 5AL which is a first game board component and a right side game board 5AR which is a second game board component. The left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, includes a plurality of boards (main control The main control unit 1300 in which the board 1310 is housed, various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors and drives) A left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L")) that accommodates a drive board for driving a solenoid, etc.) is provided. The right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a board (such as various boards (for example, various relay boards) and various LEDs attached to various production units housed in the right back box 3010R) that are not equipped with a microprocessor. A right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "right drive board unit 1700R")) that accommodates a mounted decorative board, a drive board that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.); A self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that indicates that it is the right side game board 5AR that is a component of the second game board, and an ID in FIG. 251 that is a unique value transmitting means that transmits the self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value. It is equipped with an output circuit IDC.

Furthermore, the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main body frame 4, which is a game frame. The work of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 and the work of mounting the door frame unit on the door frame 3 supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable are separate works. For this reason, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame unit may not match (match) due to human error.

The left game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, is activated within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255). The first error occurs when the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, is not received from the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board. 256 to 261, and the second error that occurs when the self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value from the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is not a predetermined value. Status 2 in FIG. 254(c) which is an error: Error correspondence 1 (correspondence to ID error 1) in FIGS. 256 to 261 which is an ID error 1.

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, that is, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is in the first error state 8 in FIG. 254(c): Unconnected error 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261 As error response 7, the command classified as notification display is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for generating light emission mode, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source as a mode of disconnection. By reading out (extracting) schedule data and the like from the peripheral control ROM and setting them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processing related to the effects are set.

The second error is state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1. The command classified as notification display as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261 is turned on when the peripheral control unit is The process is passed to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading out (extracting) the target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processes related to the performance are set.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means provided in the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, outputs an ID, which is a unique value that informs that it is the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component. Since the identification code (ID) is transmitted to the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, can be The first error occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the control board 1510 does not receive the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255. 254(c) state 8: unconnected error 1, which is the error response 7 shown in FIGS. 256 to 261, can occur. If the value is not the predetermined value, a second error, State 2 in FIG. 254(c): Error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response), which becomes ID error 1, can be generated. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent incomplete performances from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

B2:
Furthermore, the second error (ID error) is various ID errors (in addition to single ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), ID errors that are a combination of these) ), which is the first error (unconnected error), is more difficult to play than various unconnected errors (unconnected error 1, unconnected error 2, unconnected error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)). The degree of inhibition increases.

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain period of time, but the first error (unconnected error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain period of time. . In these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) is to detect the so-called act of magnetism and notify that act. On the other hand, the first error (unconnected error) and the second error (ID error) are work errors by the operator, and if the first error (unconnected error) is the structural member after the power is turned off. You must check the fit between the two and the connection of the drawer connector, and if there is a second error (ID error), you must replace it with a compatible ID product after turning off the power, so even if a certain period of time has passed, Each of them is set to remain unresolved.

Further, when a second error (ID error) occurs, no decoration is performed on the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error by the operator, and the combination of the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is incorrect. This is because the right side game board 5AR may be electrically damaged if decorations are performed on the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, in this state because of the incompatibility.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetism detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, the audio in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is , the error notification sound and announcement sound are played repeatedly. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects the so-called act of magnetism and notifies you of the act. Error 2 (ID error) is a work error by the worker, and if it is the second error (ID error), it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. The error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains.

B3:
Further, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported and the ID error is not reported. Further, error notification of the LED in the decoration unit is not performed. Specifically, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261 )) and occur at the same time, only a notification to the effect that a RAM error has occurred is issued, whereas status 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (in Figures 256 to 261) Notification to the effect that error response 1 (ID error 1 response) has occurred is not made. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped. Status 2 in Figure 254(c): Even if ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred, the most important error, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, is Regardless of the occurrence of other errors, this is given top priority.

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 of FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine. If the notification processing continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

B4:
At the time of the third error (magnetic detection), the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, lights up a predetermined LED and changes. Specifically, when the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, various ID errors (in addition to single ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c)), combinations of these (including ID errors), as shown in FIGS. 258 and 261, in the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, a predetermined LED lights up and changes. In other words, at the time of the third error (magnetic detection), various ID errors (in addition to single ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)), ID errors that are a combination of these Even in a state in which the following occurs, the predetermined LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 lights up and fluctuates, so that the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is continued. .

At the time of the second error (ID error), the fluctuating grace note does not sound even if it is fluctuated. Specifically, the second error (ID error) is various ID errors (in addition to single ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c)), combinations of these ) occurs, as shown in FIGS. 257 and 260, even if the game progresses and the symbols displayed by the function display unit 1400 change, the error notification sound or announcement sound will be repeatedly played. The fluctuating grace notes created by the performance are not played. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error by the worker, and if it is a second error (ID error), it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. The second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains without playing.

The third error (magnetic detection), which is a magnetic sensor error, will be resolved after a certain period of time has passed, but there will be an error (that is, an unconnected error) of the right side game board 5AR as a decoration unit, and a right side game board as a decoration unit. The ID error on board 5AR is not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. These error notifications are different from the magnetic sensor error, which detects the so-called act of magnet goto and notifies the act, so it is detected and resolved after a certain period of time, whereas the unconnected error An ID error is a work error by the operator.If it is an unconnected error, you must carefully check the fit of structural members and the drawer connector connection after turning off the power, and if it is an ID error, you must check the connection of the drawer connector. Since the problem must be replaced with a compatible ID product after it is shut off, the problem is not resolved even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

[Summary C]
C0:
This game machine includes a game frame and a game board, and the game board is composed of a first game board component and a plurality of second game board components, and is fixed to the game board. The first game board component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board component includes a specific board that is not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board includes a unique value that can be identified as a second game board component, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting a signal of the unique value to the production control board. The plurality of second game board constituent members each have a different unique value, and if it is determined that the unique value of at least one second game board constituent member is not a predetermined value, the plurality of second game board constituent members have different unique values. The power-on operation of the panel components is different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board. The split game board 5A includes a left game board 5AL which is a first game board component and a right game board 5AR which is a plurality of second game board components (the upper right game board 5ART in FIG. 253 and the lower right game board in FIG. 253). The board 5ARU) is fixed to the main body frame 4, which is a game frame. The left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, includes a plurality of boards (main control The main control unit 1300 in which the board 1310 is housed, various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors and drives) The left driving board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left driving board unit 1700L") accommodates a driving board for driving a solenoid, etc.). The right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with specific boards (such as various boards (for example, various relay boards, various LEDs attached to various production units housed in the right back box 3010R) that are not equipped with a microprocessor. The right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right drive board unit 1700R") accommodates a decorative board on which is mounted, a drive board that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.). (certain boards). Among various boards that are specific boards, a specific board has a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that can identify it as the right game board 5AR that is a second game board component, and a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right side game board 5ART forming the right side game board 5AR in FIG. An ID output circuit IDCU for the lower game board 5ARU is provided.

The door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, includes door frame units (hereinafter referred to as "door frame ) is installed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 253, there are a plurality of right game boards 5AR, which are the plurality of second game board constituent members, each consisting of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, each having a different unique value. have. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the unique value of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B) is not a predetermined value, the state shown in FIG. 254(c) 2: ID error 1 The error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 and 259 occurs, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the plurality of second game boards, is normal (lighting, blinking). , gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the divided game board 5AR (various LEDs of the game board) go out, so the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, goes out.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and the ID output circuit, which are unique value transmission means provided in the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU, which constitute the right side game board 5AR, which are the plurality of second game board constituent members, respectively. A self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, from the IDCU, is a production control board provided on the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component. The signal is transmitted to a certain peripheral control board 1510. The self-identification code (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B) which is a unique value of at least one of the plurality of second game board components is If it is determined that the value is not a predetermined value, the status 2 in FIG. The power-on operation of the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the game board, takes a different mode (lights out) from the normal operation (lights on, flashes, gradation lighting, etc.). As a result, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the plurality of second game board components, have become mismatched (the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU)), it is now possible to immediately identify the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board, which is the plurality of second game board components. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed in a state where the game board 5AR is mismatched (including when the combination of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is mismatched). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

C1:
It has a game frame and a game board. The game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The first game board component includes a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board component includes a board on which no microprocessor is mounted, a unique value that indicates that it is a second game board component, and unique value transmitting means that transmits the unique value. Further, the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. There are a plurality of second game board constituent members, each having a different unique value, and if it is determined that the unique value of at least one second game board constituent member is not a predetermined value, the second game board The power-on operation of the component is different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, it includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left side game board 5AL that is a first game board component and a right side game board 5AR that is a second game board component. The left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, includes a plurality of boards (main control The main control unit 1300 in which the board 1310 is housed, various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, which are attached to the various presentation units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive motors and drives) The left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left side drive board unit 1700L") accommodates a drive board for driving a solenoid, etc.). The right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a board (various boards (for example, various relay boards, various LEDs attached to various production units housed in the right rear box 3010R) that are not equipped with a microprocessor. a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that accommodates a mounted decorative board, a drive board that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc.); The right side of FIG. 253 is a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that indicates that it is a right-side game board 5AR that is a component of the second game board, and a unique value transmitting means that transmits the self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right side game board 5ART constituting the game board 5AR and the ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right side game board 5ARU constituting the right side game board 5AR are provided.

Further, the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main body frame 4, which is a game frame. The door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, includes door frame units (hereinafter referred to as "door frame ) is installed. The work of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 and the work of mounting the door frame unit on the door frame 3 supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable are separate works. For this reason, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame unit may not match (match) due to human error.

Further, as shown in FIG. 253, the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is composed of a plurality of right side game boards 5ART and right side game boards 5ARU, each having a different unique value. ing. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the unique value of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B) is not a predetermined value, the state shown in FIG. 254(c) 2: ID error 1 becomes error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 and 259, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is normal (lighting, flashing, floor). Since the various LEDs of the divided game board 5AR (various LEDs of the game board) are turned off, the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is turned off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and the ID output circuit, which are unique value transmission means respectively provided in the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU, which constitute the right side game board 5AR which is a plurality of second game board constituent members. A self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that indicates that the IDCU is the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is transmitted to the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component. It has become. The self-identification code (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B) which is a unique value of at least one of the plurality of second game board components is If it is determined that the value is not a predetermined value, the status 2 in FIG. The power-on operation of the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the game board, takes a different mode (lights out) from the normal operation (lights on, flashes, gradation lighting, etc.). As a result, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the plurality of second game board components, have become mismatched (the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU)), it is now possible to immediately distinguish between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right side game board, which is the plurality of second game board components. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being executed in a state where the game board 5AR is mismatched (including when the combination of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is mismatched). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

C2:
Furthermore, if it is determined that the unique value of at least one second game board component is not a predetermined value (a predetermined value), other second game board component members whose unique values are determined to be normal. Also, the power-on operation is different from the normal operation. Specifically, among the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, for example, the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART is the value for the upper right game board 5ART (upper right game board determination). value), the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU matches the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board). Even if there is, as a power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART, various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART that are different from the normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off, and the power of the lower right game board 5ARU is turned off. As the input operation, various LEDs on the lower right game board 5ARU that are different from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off. For example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (determination value for the lower right game board), the ID of the upper right game board 5ART Even if the self-identification code (ID) matches the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), normal operation (lighting up) is performed as a power-on operation for the lower right game board 5ARU. , flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) and turning off the various LEDs on the lower right game board 5ARU, as well as turning off the various LEDs on the lower right game board 5ARU, which is different from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) as the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART. Turn off the various LEDs on the side game board 5ART.

In other words, the self-identification code (ID) of one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU is predetermined (predetermined value: determination for the upper right game board or lower right game board If the combination with the left side game board 5AL does not match the upper right side game board or the lower right side game board, it is due to a work error by the operator. Yes, and it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off, so the operation is different from normal operation.

Note that the self-identification code that is the unique value of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B) is If it is determined that the value is not the predetermined value, the status 2 in FIG. 254(c) becomes ID error 1, which is error response 1 in FIGS. 256 and 259 (ID error 1 response), and the second game board The power-on operation of the right side game board 5AR, which is a component, is different from the normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the divided game board 5AR (various LEDs of the game board) are turned off. However, among the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, for example, the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART is the value for the upper right game board 5ART (determination for upper right game board). value), the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART turns off the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART that differ from the normal operation (lighting up, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while turning off the right side game board 5ART. The power-on operation of the lower game board 5ART is assumed to be normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU is the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (lower right If the judgment value for the lower right side game board 5ARU does not match, the power-on operation of the lower right side game board 5ARU differs from the normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) of the lower right side game board 5ARU. While the LED is turned off, normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) may be performed as the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ARU. In this way, it is possible to tell which parts are non-conforming (inconsistent) and which parts are compatible (matching).

The left game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, is activated within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255). The first error occurs when the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, is not received from the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board. 256 to 261, and the second error that occurs when the self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value from the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is not a predetermined value. Status 2 in FIG. 254(c) which is an error: Error correspondence 1 (correspondence to ID error 1) in FIGS. 256 to 261 which is an ID error 1.

The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, that is, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, is in the first error state 8 in FIG. 254(c): Unconnected error 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261 As error response 7, the command classified as notification display is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 generates schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for generating light emission mode, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source as a mode of disconnection. By reading out (extracting) schedule data and the like from the peripheral control ROM and setting them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processing related to the effects are set.

The second error is state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1. When the command classified as notification display as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. The process is passed to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for generating sound are displayed as modes indicating nonconformity (inconsistency). By reading out (extracting) the target drive source schedule data etc. from the peripheral control ROM and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, various processes related to the performance are set.

In this way, the left side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board, performs the ID determination in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. If the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, is not received during processing), the first error, state 8 in Figure 254(c): Error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which results in unconnected error 1, occurs. If the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value received within a predetermined time, is not a predetermined value, the second error occurs, which is state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error. Error correspondence 1 (ID error 1 correspondence) shown in FIGS. 256 to 261, which is 1, can be generated.

Furthermore, the second error (ID error) is various ID errors (in addition to single ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), ID errors that are a combination of these) ), which is the first error (unconnected error), is more difficult to play than various unconnected errors (unconnected error 1, unconnected error 2, unconnected error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)). The degree of inhibition increases.

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain period of time, but the first error (unconnected error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain period of time. . In these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) is to detect the so-called act of magnetism and notify that act. On the other hand, the first error (unconnected error) and the second error (ID error) are work errors by the operator, and if the first error (unconnected error) is the structural member after the power is turned off. You must carefully check the fit between the two and the connection of the drawer connector, and if there is a second error (ID error), you must replace it with a compatible ID product after turning off the power, so even if a certain period of time has passed. Each of them will not be resolved.

Further, when a second error (ID error) occurs, the decoration effect on the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error by the operator, and the combination of the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is incorrect. This is because the right side game board 5AR may be electrically damaged if decorations are performed on the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, in this state because of the incompatibility.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when the second error (ID error) occurs, the audio in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is , the error notification sound and announcement sound are played repeatedly. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects the so-called act of magnetism and notifies you of the act. Error 2 (ID error) is a work error by the worker, and if it is the second error (ID error), it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. The error (ID error) occurrence warning sound remains.

C3:
Further, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported and the ID error is not reported. Further, error notification of the LED in the decoration unit is not performed. Specifically, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261 )) and occur at the same time, only a notification to the effect that a RAM error has occurred is issued, whereas status 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (in Figures 256 to 261) Notification to the effect that error response 1 (ID error 1 response) has occurred is not made. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped. Status 2 in Figure 254(c): Even if ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred, the most important error, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, is Regardless of the occurrence of other errors, this is given top priority.

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine. If the notification processing continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

[Summary D]
D0:
This is a game machine that includes a game frame and a game board, and the game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The first game board component includes an effect control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game effects and transmitting/receiving signals with the outside. The second game board component includes a light emitting body, a decoration driving means that drives the light emitting body and can receive decoration data from serial communication, a second ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration driving means, and a second ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration driving means. and a first ID code. At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the production control board includes a first ID code and a second ID code in the serial communication data.

Specifically, for example, it includes a main body frame 4 that is a game frame and a game board 5 that is a game board. The door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, includes door frame units (hereinafter referred to as "door frame ) is installed. Since the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (matched) or unmatched (mismatched), the door frame unit may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board components provided in the main body frame 4 include the game board 5, which is the first game board component in which the microprocessor is mounted, and the door frame unit, which is the second game board component in which the microprocessor is not mounted. A game board 5 is attached to a main body frame 4, and a door frame unit is attached to a door frame 3 which is supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. Here, assuming that the door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 is composed of the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the door unit, which is a second game board component. ing. The game board 5, which is a component of the first game board, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board capable of executing serial communication for performing game performance and transmitting and receiving signals with the outside. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, includes various LEDs as light emitters, and a frame side decoration in FIG. A first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa mounted on the board WKB, and a second ID uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a decoration driving means. It has a code and.

The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is the decoration driving means, uses the settings set by the address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB in FIG. 262, which is the uniquely assigned first ID code. It has a value of 64. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, has Q0 terminals to Q7 terminals, which are the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB in FIG. 262, which is the uniquely assigned second ID code. has 8-bit information: 11110000B electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards in the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the production control board, is set in the serial communication data by the address setting circuit WIDCd, which is the first ID code, and is mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB. These are eight setting terminals: a setting value 64 (an ID code that instructs the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa), and a second ID code, a comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB. 8-bit information (OUT0, which is the 8 output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) whose Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). (information to be compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb by signals output from terminals to OUT7). In other words, within the serial communication line (that is, within the serial communication data) that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission mode of the LED, which is decorative data for the door frame unit that is the second game board component, the first ID code is the LED. The ID of the driver WIDCa (the ID code that instructs the LED driver WIDCa: setting value 64) and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (the Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal, which is the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is +5V or 8-bit information electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): 11110000B).

In this way, in at least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510 which is the production control board, the first ID uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa is included in the serial communication data. Since the set value 64, which is a code, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is a component of the second game board, are included, the light emission of various LEDs, which is decorative data, is included. In addition to the serial communication line that transmits light emission data that instructs the mode, there is also a setting value 64 that is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, and a set value 64 that is uniquely assigned to the door frame unit that is the second game board component. It is no longer necessary to provide a serial communication line for exclusively transmitting the second ID code 11110000B as a serial communication line connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the production control board, and it is no longer necessary to provide a serial communication line for exclusively transmitting the second ID code 11110000B. The compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the board 5 and the door frame unit that is the second game board component can be checked in the door frame unit that is the second game board component. As a result, it becomes possible to immediately determine that the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the door frame unit, which is the second game board component, have become mismatched, and the first game board configuration It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the game board 5 as a member and the door frame unit as a second game board component are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

D1:
It has a game frame and a game board. The game board includes a light emitter and a decorative driver that drives the light emitter. The game board is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The first game board component includes a sub-control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game effects and transmitting/receiving signals with the outside. The second game board component includes a decoration driver that receives decoration data from serial communication. The decorative driver has a uniquely assigned first ID code. The second game board component has a uniquely assigned second ID code. There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the sub-control board. A first ID code and a second ID code are included in the serial communication line that transmits decoration data for the second game board component.

Specifically, for example, it includes a main body frame 4 that is a game frame and a game board 5 that is a game board. The door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, includes door frame units (hereinafter referred to as "door frame ) is installed. Since the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (matched) or unmatched (mismatched), the door frame unit may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board components provided in the main body frame 4 include the game board 5, which is the first game board component in which the microprocessor is mounted, and the door frame unit, which is the second game board component in which the microprocessor is not mounted. A game board 5 is attached to a main body frame 4, and a door frame unit is attached to a door frame 3 which is supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. Here, assuming that the door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 is composed of the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the door unit, which is a second game board component. ing. The game board 5 and the door frame unit include various LEDs that are light emitters, and an LED driver that is a decorative driver that drives the various LEDs that are light emitters. The game board 5, which is a component of the first game board, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board capable of executing serial communication for transmitting and receiving signals with the outside as well as executing game effects. The door unit which is a component of the second game board is an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB in FIG. It is equipped with The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is a decorative driver, has a setting value set by the address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of FIG. 262, which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. I have 64. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, has Q0 terminals to Q7 terminals, which are the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB in FIG. 262, which is the uniquely assigned second ID code. has 8-bit information: 11110000B electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are a plurality of serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards in the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). The address mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, is contained in the serial communication line that transmits the light-emitting data that instructs the light-emitting mode of the LED, which is the decorative data for the door frame unit that is the second game board component. The setting value 64 set by the setting circuit WIDCd (ID code instructing the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) and the second ID code of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame side decorative board WKB. Eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal are respectively electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) 8-bit information (8-bit information of LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for LED driver WIDCa) (information that is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb using the signals output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal, which are the output terminals of the book). In other words, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa (LED driver ID code that instructs WIDCa: setting value 64) and ID code of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal, which is the 8 setting terminals of comparator circuit WIDCb, is +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) ) contains 8-bit information electrically connected to each: 11110000B).

In this way, the first ID is uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver, for driving various LEDs that are light emitters in the door unit, which is a component of the second game board. The set value 64, which is the code, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is the second game board component, are the various LEDs that are decorative data for the door unit, which is the second game board component. Since it is included in the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission mode of the various LEDs, it is included in the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that indicates the light emission mode of various LEDs, which is decorative data. To exclusively transmit the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is the driver, and 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the door frame unit, which is the second game board component. It is no longer necessary to provide serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, and the game board 5, which is a component of the first game board, and the door frame, which is a component of the second game board. Compatibility (consistency) of the combination with the unit can be determined in the door frame unit which is the second game board constituent member. As a result, it becomes possible to immediately determine that the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the door frame unit, which is the second game board component, have become mismatched, and the first game board configuration It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the game board 5 as a member and the door frame unit as a second game board component are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in gaming.

D2:
Furthermore, in serial communication between the first game board component and the second game board component, a second ID code is provided (included) in the data area decorating the light emitter, and the second ID code is developed from the serial signal into a parallel signal. A decoration driver is used as a second ID code expansion means for (restoration). Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the door frame unit, which is a second game board component, light emission from LEDs, which are data areas that decorate various LEDs, which are light emitters, is performed. The ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB is included as a second ID code in the light emission data that specifies the mode (the Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal, which is the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground), respectively). 8-bit information: 11110000B) connected to the frame side decorative board which is a decorative driver as a second ID code development means for developing (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal into a parallel signal. The LED driver WIDCa installed in WKB is used. As a result, there is no need to provide a dedicated second ID code development means for developing (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal on the frame side decorative board WKB, and the LED driver WIDCa that drives various LEDs can be used to directly develop the second ID code. It can be used as a means to output to the comparator circuit WIDCb.

Furthermore, although the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the game frame. Specifically, although the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected, they are each independently connected to the main body frame, which is the game frame. It is fixed at 4. In other words, the work of mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 and the work of mounting the door frame unit on the door frame 3 that is supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable are separate tasks. For this reason, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame unit may not match (match) due to human error.

D3:
Furthermore, the serial signal from the sub-control board and the serial signal to the sub-control board, as well as various data related to the performance of the game, are communicated using the same area. Specifically, the light emitting information signal, which is a serial signal, is sent from the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, to the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door frame unit shown in FIG. The door frame side information signal, which is a serial signal, is sent from the relay board TKB to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, and the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, assuming that various data related to game performance are in the same area. Each terminal of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of 5, and two terminals (not shown) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. By electrically connecting each terminal of the drawer connector on the main body frame side, exchange (communication) is performed via this drawer connector. As a result, the existing serial line can be used as is for the drawer connector, so the real connection between the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, and the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit can be made without increasing the number of drawer connectors. It is possible to transmit the false determination ID and receive the determination result in the door frame unit.

In the system that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, if it is determined that the ID is normal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, a notification is made. However, if it is determined that the ID is abnormal within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, the notification mode can be changed when the state is changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the production operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit of 255, if it is determined that the status 1 in FIG. On the other hand, if the status 2 in Figure 254(c) is ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), that is, it is determined that the ID is abnormal, this error The notification of response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure 254 (c): After the power is turned off and replaced with a compatible ID product, the status 1 in Figure 254 (c) is determined to be normal, that is, the ID is normal. In some cases, notifications will not be made. In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is completely changed. It is designed so that no judgment is made, and even if the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be notified that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit to a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine. If the notification process continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

D4:
Another serial communication means transmits the result of the authenticity determination. Specifically, in the serial communication line (serial communication line for light emission information signal) that transmits light emission data indicating the light emission mode of the LED as a light emission information signal to the LED driver WIDCa of the frame side decorative board WKB in the door unit. The ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame-side decorative board WKB is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB at the relay board TKB provided in the pan unit 200 of the door frame 4. Serial communication line (serial communication line for light emission information signal) that is input to the door frame side information output circuit TOC and transmitted as a serialized door frame side information signal together with detection signals from various sensors such as the production operation unit 300. It is output from the door frame side information output circuit TOC to the peripheral control board 1510 in a serial communication line for the door frame side information signal () which is a different system. In other words, the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the result of the authenticity determination, is transmitted through the door frame side information signal serial communication line, which is another serial communication means different from the light emission information signal serial communication line. Transmitted by line.

The first ID code uses the final number that can be set. Specifically, a set value 64 is set as the ID of the LED driver WIDCa of the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit. This is because the LED drivers are mounted not only on the door frame unit but also on various decorative boards and various boards included in the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model. It is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to the set value 64 for the frame side decorative board WKB in which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided.

The LED is driven by a decorative driver used for the second ID code expansion means. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the door frame unit, which is a second game board component, light emission from LEDs, which are data areas that decorate various LEDs, which are light emitters, is performed. The ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB is included as a second ID code in the light emission data that specifies the mode (the Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal, which is the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground), respectively). 8-bit information: 11110000B) connected to the frame side decorative board which is a decorative driver as a second ID code development means for developing (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal into a parallel signal. The LED driver WIDCa installed in WKB is used. As a result, there is no need to provide a dedicated second ID code development means for developing (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal on the frame side decorative board WKB, and the LED driver WIDCa that drives various LEDs can be used to directly develop the second ID code. It can be used as a means to output to the comparator circuit WIDCb. Furthermore, the LED driver WIDCa selects various LEDs that are electrically connected to other output terminals (16 output terminals) that are not electrically connected to the 8 input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb based on the light emission data. Light emission can be controlled.

The drawer connector is divided into a main side connector and a sub side connector. Specifically, the clock signal for information acquisition and the switching signal for information acquisition from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 are transmitted to the lower side of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. Each terminal (main side connector or sub-side connector) of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, and the terminals (main side connector or sub side connector) mounted on the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4. By electrically connecting the terminals (sub-side connectors or main-side connectors) of two main body frame-side drawer connectors (not shown), the drawer connectors installed in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 are The data is transmitted to the relay board TKB. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the lower side of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Each terminal (main side connector or sub side connector) of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW and the main body frame side relay board (not shown) of the main body frame 4 is mounted. By electrically connecting the terminals (sub-side connectors or main-side connectors) of two main body frame-side drawer connectors (not shown), the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is connected via the drawer connectors. It is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

If the result is false (non-conformity) → true (conformity), the state becomes playable (noise countermeasure). Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives input to the S/inverted L terminal in the production operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. By setting and outputting the logic of the switching signal for information acquisition, it becomes parallel operation and then serial operation, and then by outputting the clock signal for information acquisition, the door frame side information signal is acquired, and the door frame side information signal is output. The player's operations on the production operation unit 300 attached to the unit 200 and the movement of the movable body (production body) can be grasped, and the movable bodies (production body) installed in other units of the door frame 3 and the player's It is possible to understand the operation and obtain a judgment result regarding the suitability (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit. In this way, when the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is false (incompatibility) → true (compatibility), in other words, the change If the results are reversed, even though the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible (matched), part of the door frame side information signal (game board 5 and It is assumed that the compatibility (consistency) of the combination with the door frame unit is distorted, and the performance is performed assuming that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is compatible.

While the mismatch is false, data indicating that the LED is not lit is sent to the decoration unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls various LEDs of the game board (divided game board) (various LEDs related to presentation (various LEDs for decoration)) and/or various LEDs of the door frame unit (various LEDs related to presentation). Sends light emission data for turning off (all lights off) LEDs (various decorative LEDs) to various LED drivers.

If the false mismatch is canceled, data for LED lighting is sent to the decoration unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls various LEDs of the game board (divided game board) (various LEDs related to presentation (various LEDs for decoration)) and/or various LEDs of the door frame unit (various LEDs related to presentation). The LEDs (various decorative LEDs) transmit light emission data to various LED drivers in a light emission mode according to the progress of the performance.

[Summary E]
E1:
The game board component includes a game frame and a game board component provided in the game frame, and the game board component is composed of a first game board component and a second game board component, and the first game board component and the second game board component are composed of a first game board component and a second game board component. The device further comprises: a matching determining means for determining matching with the second game board component; and an operation section provided on the first game board component; Announcements can be made.

Specifically, for example, it includes a main body frame 4 which is a game frame, and a divided game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a game board component provided on the main body frame 4 which is a game frame. The split game board 5A, which is a component of the game board, is composed of a left game board 5AL in FIG. 248, which is a first component, and a right game board 5AR, shown in FIG. 248, which is a second component. Step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It further includes an ID determination process and an ID error determination switch 1310v of the main control board 1310, which is an operation section provided on the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component in FIG. When the ID error determination switch 1310v of the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, a notification is issued according to the determination result of the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, which is the consistency determination means. It can be executed.

After power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall presses the press operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 operates as shown in FIG. In the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v includes operation logic and non-operation logic. When the operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, and when the non-operation logic in which the operation logic is inverted is input, the main control MPU 1310a determines the ID error. When it is determined that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, the ID error controller starts notifying the ID error determination result. The determination result notification start command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right side game board) and a performance operation are sent to the right side game board. An ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the production operation unit) is output to each unit. Then, the peripheral control IC 1510a separates the ID code signal from the right side game board (ID code signal dedicated to the right side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the performance operation unit). The combination of the divided game boards (i.e., the right game board (board without a microprocessor) and the left game board (peripheral control board 1510 and main control board 1310 with a microprocessor installed)) The determination (comparison) is made with reference to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, and the combination table stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM regarding the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board. Judgment (comparison) is made with reference to (FIG. 254).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, and turns on the power to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. When analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the time process, the determination result determined in the ID determination process of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent) in order to start notification of the ID error determination result. Sometimes, a command classified as a notification display is passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. Accordingly, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 selects the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for generating light emitting mode, and the schedule data for sound generation as aspects indicating non-conformity (inconsistency). , electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC to set various processing related to the effects, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 , the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is to notify that a corresponding error among error handling 1 to error handling 9 has occurred.

In this way, when the press operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation section, is pressed, the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the second game board component, It is possible to perform notification according to the determination result of determining whether the game board matches a certain right game board 5AR. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

E2:
In the case of an ID error or an unconnected error, the error notification start time can be changed by pressing the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result regarding the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. , the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, and the received command is analyzed in step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. If this is not analyzed in the process, the command classified as notification display cannot be passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process, and ID error determination will occur. Unable to start notification of results. In other words, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occur, until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the error notification start time to notify that fact will be set to the gaming hall. The ID error determination switch 1310v can be changed by pressing the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v by an employee such as a store clerk.

ID errors and unconnected errors can be detected at any timing after power is turned on. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination results regarding the combination of split game boards, etc. in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Also, when a staff member such as a store clerk at a gaming store presses the press operation section of the ID error judgment switch 1310v, an ID error judgment result notification start command is sent from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in FIG. 223. If the received command is not analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The process cannot be passed to the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and notification of the ID error determination result cannot be started. In other words, a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall can know the ID error or disconnection error at any timing after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (at any timing after the system of the pachinko machine 1 completes startup). It looks like this.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the error response when error response 1 to error response 9 do not occur as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c), that is, the error shown in FIG. 254(c). If the behavior of the pachinko machine inside is normal operation (no error handling), the countermeasure is "none", so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error handling). In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect, and the dedicated notification sound is not emitted from the speaker.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the press operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 is pressed, this triggers a notification sound ( For example, the sound "beep" may be played from a speaker.

Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned on, this triggers the control by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. A notification sound (for example, "beep") may be played from a speaker. Note that when the settings are changed by pressing the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510 is changed every time the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed. Under the control of the control IC 1510a, a notification sound (for example, "Pico", which may be the same sound as the notification sound played when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a and turned on) is made to flow from the speaker. You can.

E3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the ID setting is performed by electrically connecting the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). Assign a value (11110000B).

The ID assigned by hardware (by a hardware circuit) to the right game board 5AR is compared with the ID code for determination, and if they are the same, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the left game board 5AL in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matched), the condition 1: normal is established, provided that the other IDs shown in FIG. 254(c) are compatible, and the door frame 3 is Door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit"), and the divided game board 5A The performance will be performed by The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal for lighting a predetermined LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the divided game board 5A as a valid signal for proceeding with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) and the ID code for determination are compared, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided for the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided for the left game board 5AL of FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510 will, for example, be in state 2: ID error 1 shown in FIG. In response 1 (ID error 1 response), the control signal that lights up a predetermined LED in the sub function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A is not output as a valid signal for proceeding with the production, and the sub function display unit 2250 is turned off. (all lights off).

Even if the operation unit is operated at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on, the notification may not be reported (if the ID is a regular ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) when error response 1 to error response 9 do not occur, that is, FIG. ) When the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error is normal operation (no error response), the main control board 1310 is activated by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on. If the main control MPU 1310a is performing the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until a predetermined period of time elapses until this setting change process is completed), normal operation (no error handling) is performed. ) is no longer possible. In addition, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so the special behavior in normal operation (no error response) There is no notification mode. In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

In addition, if the regular ID, ID error, or unconnected error is to be known at any timing after the power is turned on, in other words, the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response). ID errors and unconnected errors such as Error Handling 1 to Error Handling 9 were determined during a predetermined period after power-on, called ID determination processing in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. , the information may be known at any timing after the power is turned on. Specifically, the normal ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing ID determination processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error regarding the production operation unit may be determined in the step S production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so normal operation ( There is no special notification mode for (no error handling). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

If it is determined that the ID is a regular ID, no notification will be made even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification will be made (Target law in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned on at this timing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will not perform the judgment as shown in FIG. The main control side main processing in the main control side power-on process and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the control board 1510 cannot notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification is continued at least until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 261, that is, if it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the response method shown in Figure 261 (c): Until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. , this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) notification is maintained. By such notification, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in a state where the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (inconsistent).

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 of FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine. If the notification processing continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

E4:
If there is a mismatch, the LCD will notify you of the error. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. When the startup music ends, an image of the presentation (for example, when the presentation progresses based on game balls entering various winning holes) is displayed. In the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. A notification text "Please wait for a while" is displayed on an image when a customer is waiting (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is a static image).

In the case of mismatch, no control is performed by the performance control means. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the effect control means, determines whether the left game board and the right game board If it is determined that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. The various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs on the game board turn off (all lights off), and the movable body on the game board side and the movable body on the door frame unit that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 turn off. The body does not make any movements such as returning to its original position (no movement).

If there is a mismatch, the abnormality will be notified by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256, after the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call the attendant" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played. 7 times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly. In error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 257, an announcement sound "Please call the attendant" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played seven times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.

If there is a mismatch, a lamp on the door frame (a lamp provided on a removable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-removable decorative member) is turned on in an abnormal manner. Specifically, first, door frame units such as a left side unit 420 of a door frame, a right side unit 430 of a door frame, a plate unit 200, a top unit 450 of a door frame, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit") is installed. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. In this case, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 259, various LEDs of the door frame unit flash in red as an abnormal state. The various LEDs of the door frame unit include those provided in various units (various decorative members) that are removably attached to the door frame 3, as well as those provided in various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. But that's fine.

If there are a plurality of second game board constituent members, all of the plurality of second game board constituent members will not be driven unless even one of them has a regular ID. Specifically, the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is further divided into an upper side and a lower side, and is composed of an upper right side game board 5ART and a lower right side game board 5ARU shown in FIG. In this case, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. There is. The parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is connected in a daisy chain with the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the right It operates as an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower game board 5ARU, and as a 16-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa. The peripheral control board 1510 contains the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, and the contents held in the lower right, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the latter stage. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the side game board 5ARU are sequentially input one bit at a time as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR by acquiring the ID code signal. In the combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but the other lower right side does not match (match) with the upper right game board 5ART. When combined with a game board, even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the upper right game board The various LEDs provided on the other lower right game boards that are not compatible with board 5ART are turned off (all lights are turned off).

[Summary F]
F1:
Determining alignment of the game frame, a game board component provided in the game frame and having a first game board component and a second game board component, and the first game board component and the second game board component The lottery apparatus includes a consistency determining means for performing the lottery, a lottery means for executing the lottery process based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and a plurality of display units for displaying the lottery results of the lottery means. When the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch, the display of the lottery result on some of the display units is restricted.

Specifically, for example, the main body frame 4, which is a game frame, and the left game board 5AL and second game board constituent members in FIG. A split game board 5A in FIG. 248 which is a game board component having a right game board 5AR in FIG. 248, a left game board 5AL which is a first game board component, and a right game board which is a second game board component. ID determination processing in step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 255, which is a compatibility determining means for determining compatibility with 5AR, and lottery means in FIG. The main control board is a plurality of display units that display the lottery results of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process and the special symbol and special electric accessory control process that is the lottery means. The function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 248 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1310, and the sub-function display unit 2250 shown in FIG. 248 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. When a mismatch is determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the display section of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in FIG. The controlled sub-function display unit 2250 is turned off (all lights are turned off). Note that when it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are mismatched, the sub-function display controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 The display of lottery results on one or both of the unit 2250 and the effect display device 1600 may be regulated, and in this case, the sub function display unit 2250 may be turned off or the flashing light emission may be stopped to display a predetermined light emission mode. (for example, all lights on), turning off the effect display device 1600, displaying notification characters, etc. (“Please call the staff”, etc.) on the effect display device 1600 to cover up the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, etc. The display of lottery results may be regulated by .

In this way, if there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, the main control side timer in FIG. 212, which is the lottery means, A function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-control board controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 are a plurality of display units that display the special symbols in step S114 in the interrupt process and the lottery results of the special electric accessory control process. The display of lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the display section of the function display unit 2250, is regulated. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

F2:
Further comprising a connection determination means for determining the connection state of the second game board component, and even if the connection determination means determines that the second game board component is in an unconnected state, the lottery on the plurality of display units Does not restrict display of results.

Specifically, it further includes an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Then, the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. and a function as a connection determining means to determine the connection state between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, ), it is determined that the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is in an unconnected state by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit, which is the connection determination means. Even in this case, the display of lottery results on the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which are a plurality of display units, is not restricted. For example, in error response 7 after the power is turned on in FIG. 257 (state 8 in FIG. 254(c): unconnected error, connection with the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), the function display unit controlled by the main control board 1310 In 1400, a predetermined LED lights up, and in a sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined LED lights up.

The first game board component includes a game control means that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means that controls the performance based on a signal from the game control means, and the game control means controls the display of the plurality of display units. Among them, the first display section is controlled to display the lottery result, and the effect control means is to control the second display section among the plurality of display sections to display the lottery result, and the consistency determination means determines whether the lottery result is inconsistent or not. When it is determined, the display of the lottery result on the second display section controlled by the performance control means is regulated, while the display of the lottery result on the first display section controlled by the game control means is not regulated.

Specifically, the left side game board 5AL, which is a first game board component, has a main control board 1310, which is a game control means that controls the progress of the game, and signals (various The main control board 1310, which is a game control means, has functions controlled by the main control board 1310, which is a plurality of display units. The function display is a first display part of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the display part of the display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The unit 1400 is controlled to display the special symbol in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 212 and the lottery result of the special electric accessory control process. The sub-function display controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is a part of the display section of the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display part of the unit 2250, is controlled to display the lottery result of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 212. The peripheral control unit of FIG. 255, which receives the command sent in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the side timer interrupt process and displays the lottery result based on the received command, is a matching determination means. If it is determined that there is a mismatch in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the power-on process, the lottery result is displayed on the sub function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit, which is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is the effect control means. On the other hand, the display of lottery results on the function display unit 1400, which is the first display section, controlled by the main control board 1310, which is the game control means, is not restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in FIG. In the function display unit 1400 controlled by , a predetermined LED lights up.

F3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the ID setting is performed by electrically connecting the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). Assign a value (11110000B).

The ID assigned by hardware (by a hardware circuit) to the right game board 5AR is compared with the ID code for determination, and if they are the same, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the left game board 5AL in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matched), the condition 1: normal is established, provided that the other IDs shown in FIG. 254(c) are compatible, and the door frame 3 is Door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit"), and the divided game board 5A The performance will be performed by The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal for lighting a predetermined LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the divided game board 5A as a valid signal for proceeding with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) and the ID code for determination are compared, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the left game board 5AL in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510 will, for example, be in state 2: ID error 1 shown in FIG. In response 1 (ID error 1 response), the control signal that lights up a predetermined LED in the sub function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A is not output as a valid signal for proceeding with the production, and the sub function display unit 2250 is turned off. (all lights off).

Even if the operation unit is operated at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on, the notification may not be reported (if the ID is a regular ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) when error response 1 to error response 9 do not occur, that is, FIG. ) When the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error is normal operation (no error response), the main control board 1310 is activated by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on. If the main control MPU 1310a is performing the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until the predetermined period of time until this setting change process is completed), normal operation (no error handling) is performed. ) is no longer possible. In addition, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error handling), the countermeasure is "none", so the special behavior in normal operation (no error handling) There is no notification mode. In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

In addition, if the regular ID, ID error, or unconnected error is to be known at any timing after the power is turned on, in other words, the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response). ID errors and unconnected errors such as Error Handling 1 to Error Handling 9 were determined during a predetermined period after power-on, called ID determination processing in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. , the information may be known at any timing after the power is turned on. Specifically, the normal ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing ID determination processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error regarding the production operation unit may be determined in the step S production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so normal operation ( There is no special notification mode for (no error handling). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

If it is determined that the ID is a regular ID, no notification will be made even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification will be made (Target law in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned on at this timing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will not perform the judgment as shown in FIG. The main control side main processing in the main control side power-on process and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the control board 1510 cannot notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification is continued at least until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 261, that is, if it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the response method shown in Figure 261 (c): Until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. , this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) notification is maintained. By such notification, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in a state where the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (inconsistent).

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine. If the notification process continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

F4:
If there is a mismatch, the LCD will notify you of the error. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. When the startup music ends, an image of the presentation (for example, when the presentation progresses based on game balls entering various winning holes) is displayed. In the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. A notification text "Please wait for a while" is displayed on an image when a customer is waiting (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is a static image).

In the case of mismatch, no control is performed by the performance control means. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, determines whether the left game board and the right game board If it is determined that the combination is incompatible (inconsistency), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. The various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs on the game board turn off (all lights off), and the movable body on the game board side and the movable body on the door frame unit that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 turn off. The body does not make any movements such as returning to its original position (no movement).

If there is a mismatch, the abnormality will be notified by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256, after the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call the attendant" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played. 7 times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly. In error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 257, an announcement sound "Please call the attendant" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played seven times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.

If there is a mismatch, a lamp on the door frame (a lamp provided on a removable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-removable decorative member) is turned on in an abnormal manner. Specifically, first, door frame units such as a left side unit 420 of a door frame, a right side unit 430 of a door frame, a plate unit 200, a top unit 450 of a door frame, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit") is installed. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. In this case, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 259, various LEDs of the door frame unit blink in red as an abnormal state. In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit include those provided in various units (various decorative members) that are removably attached to the door frame 3, as well as those provided in various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. But that's fine.

If there are a plurality of second game board constituent members, all of the plurality of second game board constituent members will not be driven unless even one of them has a regular ID. Specifically, the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is further divided into an upper side and a lower side, and is composed of an upper right side game board 5ART and a lower right side game board 5ARU shown in FIG. In this case, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. There is. The parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is connected in a daisy chain with the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the right It operates as an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower game board 5ARU, and as a 16-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa. The peripheral control board 1510 contains the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, and the contents held in the lower right, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the latter stage. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the side game board 5ARU are sequentially input one bit at a time as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR by acquiring the ID code signal. In the combination of the upper right side game board and the lower right side game board, the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU should be combined, but the other lower right side game board does not match (match) with the upper right side game board 5ART. When combined with a game board, even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the upper right game board The various LEDs provided on the other lower right game boards that are not compatible with board 5ART are turned off (all lights are turned off).

[Summary G]
G1:
A game frame having a movable decorative body that is driven in a predetermined operation mode, a game board component provided in the game frame and having a first game board component and a second game board component, and a first game board component and a plurality of light emitting bodies provided on the second game board component, and when the match determination means determines that there is a mismatch, the second game board component is determined to be inconsistent. 2. The movable decorative body provided on the game frame is not subject to discrimination by the matching determination means, but the movable decoration body provided on the game frame is not subject to discrimination by the first game board configuration. If it is determined that there is a mismatch between the member and the second game board constituent member, driving is regulated.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable includes a door frame left side unit 420, a door frame right side unit 430, and a tray unit 200. A door frame unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "door frame unit") such as a door frame top unit 450 is attached. The dish unit 200 is equipped with a production operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 shown in FIG. 52, and serves as a movable decorative body that is driven in a predetermined operation mode. The front frame body composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 serves as a game frame, and includes a game board and a performance operation unit 300 that includes a performance operation section 301 that is a movable decorative body that is driven in a predetermined operation mode. It is provided.

Further, a game board structure is provided on a front frame body which is a game frame and includes a left game board 5AL in FIG. 248 which is a first game board component and a right game board 5AR in FIG. 248 which is a second game board component. FIG. 255 is a matching determining means for determining matching between the split game board 5A shown in FIG. 248, which is a member, the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component. The peripheral control unit includes an ID determination process in step S1003 in the power-on process, and various LEDs as a plurality of light emitters provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board component.

This production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common regardless of the specification, and the production operation unit 301 shown in FIG. A movable body is provided. A movable body such as the production operation section 301 provided in the production operation unit 300 is treated as included in the "door frame unit side movable body" shown in FIGS. 256 to 261.

A plurality of light emitting bodies provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are determined to be inconsistent by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is a consistency determination means. The performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative body that regulates the light emission of various LEDs and is provided on the front frame body that is the game frame, is configured to use the ID in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing that is the matching determining means. If it is determined that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, although it is not determined by the determination process, the drive is performed. is regulated. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when the power is turned on in FIG. 256, the door frame unit side movable body does not perform operations such as returning to its original position (inoperative). Note that if it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are mismatched, the movable As a mode of regulating the drive of the decorative body (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are aligned. Any control may be used as long as it is controlled in a manner different from that in the case of discrimination. For example, some or all of the movable decorations provided on the front frame body that is a game frame may be driven in a specific driving manner (such as rotating at a constant speed), or It may also be possible to control some or all of the movable decorative bodies that are moved so that they are not driven.

In this way, if the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, do not match, when the peripheral control unit, which is the consistency determination means, is powered on, Driving of the performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decoration provided on the front frame, which is a game frame that is not determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the process, is regulated. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent incomplete performances from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

G2:
If the matching determining means determines that the device matches within a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, the drive of the movable decorative body is not restricted even if mismatching occurs thereafter. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the second game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. After determining the compatibility with the right game board 5AR, which is a board component, and determining that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (consistent), the left game board and the right game board are then The system does not judge the compatibility (compatibility) of The operation unit 300 operates without restriction. In other words, the performance operation unit 301 is driven and operated in a predetermined operation mode (along with the progress of the performance).

If the matching determining means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, the restriction regarding the movable decorative body is canceled based on the matching. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling) in FIG. 261, that is, determining the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, If it is determined that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (inconsistent), the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c) is to shut off the power. After replacing it with a compatible ID product, the state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is confirmed. If it is determined that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (matched), the notification is canceled.

G3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the ID setting is performed by electrically connecting the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). Assign a value (11110000B).

The ID assigned by hardware (by a hardware circuit) to the right game board 5AR is compared with the ID code for determination, and if they are the same, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided for the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided for the left game board 5AL of FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matched), and the other IDs shown in FIG. Door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit"), and the divided game board 5A The performance will be performed by The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal for driving and operating the performance operation section 301 in a predetermined operation mode to the performance operation unit 300 as a valid signal for proceeding with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) and the ID code for determination are compared, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the left game board 5AL in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of split game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510 will, for example, be in state 2: ID error 1 shown in FIG. In response 1 (compatible with ID error 1), the door frame unit side movable body is driven and activated in a predetermined operation mode without outputting the control signal as a valid signal for proceeding with the performance, and the door frame unit side movable body is activated. There is no operation such as returning to the original position (no operation).

Even if the operation unit is operated at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on, the notification may not be reported (if the ID is a regular ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) when error response 1 to error response 9 do not occur, that is, FIG. ) When the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error is normal operation (no error response), the main control board 1310 is activated by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on. If the main control MPU 1310a is performing the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until a predetermined period of time elapses until this setting change process is completed), normal operation (no error handling) is performed. ) is no longer possible. In addition, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so the special behavior in normal operation (no error response) There is no notification mode. In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

In addition, if the regular ID, ID error, or unconnected error is to be known at any timing after the power is turned on, in other words, the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response). ID errors and disconnection errors such as Error Handling 1 to Error Handling 9 have been determined during a predetermined period after power-on, called ID determination processing in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. , the information may be known at any timing after the power is turned on. Specifically, the normal ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing ID determination processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error regarding the production operation unit may be determined in the step S production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so normal operation ( There is no special notification mode for (no error handling). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

If it is determined that the ID is a regular ID, no notification will be made even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification will be made (Target law in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned on at this timing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will not perform the judgment as shown in FIG. The main control side main processing in the main control side power-on process and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the control board 1510 cannot notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification is continued at least until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 261, that is, if it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the response method shown in Figure 261 (c): Until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. , this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) notification is maintained. By such notification, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in a state where the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (inconsistent).

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control board 1510 If the control IC 1510a determines that the state 1 in FIG. 254C is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the sub effect display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine If the notification process continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification process thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

G4:
If there is a mismatch, the LCD will notify you of the error. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. When the startup music ends, an image of the presentation (for example, when the presentation progresses based on game balls entering various winning holes) is displayed. In the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. A notification text "Please wait for a while" is displayed on an image when a customer is waiting (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is a static image).

In the case of mismatch, no control is performed by the performance control means. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, determines whether the left game board and the right game board If it is determined that the combination is incompatible (inconsistency), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. The various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs on the game board turn off (all lights off), and the movable body on the game board side and the movable body on the door frame unit that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 turn off. The body does not make any movements such as returning to its original position (no movement).

If there is a mismatch, the abnormality will be notified by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256, after the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played. 7 times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly. In error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call the staff member" is played and a predetermined error notification sound is played seven times. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.

If there is a mismatch, a lamp on the door frame (a lamp provided on a removable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-removable decorative member) is turned on in an abnormal manner. Specifically, first, door frame units such as a left side unit 420 of a door frame, a right side unit 430 of a door frame, a plate unit 200, a top unit 450 of a door frame, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit") is installed. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. In this case, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 259, various LEDs of the door frame unit flash in red as an abnormal state. The various LEDs of the door frame unit include those provided in various units (various decorative members) that are removably attached to the door frame 3, as well as those provided in various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. But that's fine.

If there are a plurality of second game board constituent members, all of the plurality of second game board constituent members will not be driven unless even one of them has a regular ID. Specifically, the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is further divided into an upper side and a lower side, and is composed of an upper right side game board 5ART and a lower right side game board 5ARU shown in FIG. In this case, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. There is. The parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is connected in a daisy chain with the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the right It operates as an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower game board 5ARU, and as a 16-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa. The peripheral control board 1510 contains the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, and the contents held in the lower right, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the latter stage. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the side game board 5ARU are sequentially input one bit at a time as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR by acquiring the ID code signal. In the combination of the upper right side game board and the lower right side game board, the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU should be combined, but the other lower right side game board does not match (match) with the upper right side game board 5ART. When combined with a game board, even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the upper right game board The various LEDs provided on the other lower right game boards that are not compatible with board 5ART are turned off (all lights are turned off).

[Summary H]
H1:
A game frame having a plurality of frame light emitting means, a game board component provided in the game frame and having a first game board component and a second game board component, a first game board component and a second game board The device includes a matching determining means for determining matching with the constituent members, and a plurality of board light emitting means provided on the second game board constituent member, and when the matching determining means determines that there is a mismatch, the second game board structure It regulates the light emission of the plurality of board light emitting means provided on the member, and although the plurality of frame light emitting means provided on the game frame are not subject to discrimination by the matching determination means, they are the first game board constituent member. If it is determined that there is a mismatch between the first game board component and the second game board component, at least part of the light emission is regulated.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable includes a door frame left side unit 420, a door frame right side unit 430, and a tray unit 200. A door frame unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "door frame unit") such as a door frame top unit 450 is attached. The dish unit 200 is equipped with a production operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 includes various decorative boards (for example, a performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, a button outer decorative board 355, A decorative substrate 364 (inside the button) is provided. The front frame body composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 has a game board as a game frame and various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) as a plurality of frame light emitting means. A unit 300 is provided.

Further, the game board structure includes a left game board 5AL in FIG. 248, which is a first game board component, and a right game board 5AR in FIG. 248, which is a second game board component, which is provided on a front frame body that is a game frame. FIG. 255 is a matching determining means for determining matching between the split game board 5A shown in FIG. 248 which is a member, the left game board 5AL which is a first game board component, and the right game board 5AR which is a second game board component. ID determination processing in step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit of (Various LEDs mounted on decorative boards in various presentation units housed in the right back box 3010R arranged in the right side back box 3010R).

This production operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common regardless of the specification, and the production operation unit 300 can be used in common regardless of the specifications, and the production operation unit 300 can be used in common with the various LEDs shown in FIG. 53 (for example, , a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) are mounted on various decorative boards (for example, the effect operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, etc.). Various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a) mounted on various decorative boards provided in the performance operation unit 300 (for example, the performance operation section outer circumferential decoration board 320, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, etc.) etc.) are treated as included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit" shown in FIGS. 256 to 261.

If it is determined that there is a mismatch in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is a consistency determination means, a plurality of board light emitting means provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, It regulates the light emission of various LEDs mounted on decorative boards in various production units housed in the right back box 3010R located behind a certain right side game board 5AR, and is provided on the front frame body that is the game frame. Various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit 300, which are a plurality of frame light emitting means, are used as a step in the peripheral control unit power-on process, which is a matching determination means. In the case where it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, do not match, although they are not determined by the ID determination process in S1003. The light emission of at least a portion (for example, the LED 364a) is regulated. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 259, various LEDs on the door frame unit blink in red, but various LEDs ( For example, among the plurality of LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.), only some of the LEDs (for example, LED 364a) are turned off (all lights are turned off). In addition, if it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are mismatched, the plurality of As a mode of regulating the light emission of various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light emitting means, the left side game board which is the first game board component It is sufficient if the control is performed in a manner different from that in the case where it is determined that the board 5AL and the right side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, match. For example, some of the various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is a plurality of frame light emitting means provided in the front frame body, which is a game frame. Alternatively, all the LEDs may be turned off, or various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is a plurality of frame light emitting means provided on the front frame body, which is a game frame. etc.), some or all of the LEDs may be made to emit light in a specific light emission mode (flashing red, etc.).

In this way, if the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, do not match, when the peripheral control unit, which is the match determination means, is powered on, Various LEDs (for example, The light emission of some (for example, LED 364a) of the plurality of LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. It is possible to prevent an incomplete performance from being performed in a state where the left game board 5AL, which is a board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component, are mismatched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

H2:
If the matching determining means determines that there is matching within a predetermined period from power-on, the light emission of the frame light emitting means is not restricted even if mismatching occurs thereafter. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the second game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. After determining the compatibility with the right game board 5AR, which is a board component, and determining that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (consistent), the left game board and the right game board are then The system does not judge the compatibility (consistency) at all, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistency), the effect that is the frame light emitting means The light emission of various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the operation unit 300 is not restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light emitting means, emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (along with the progress of the performance).

If the matching determining means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, restrictions on the board light emitting means and the frame light emitting means are lifted based on the matching. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 259 to Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling) in FIG. 261, that is, determining the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, If it is determined that the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (inconsistency), this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) notification (disposed behind the right side game board 5AR, which is the board light emitting means) is issued. The various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the various presentation units housed in the right back box 3010R are turned off (all lights out) as the various LEDs of the game board, and the various decorative boards of the presentation operation unit 300 which is the frame light emitting means are turned off. Among the various LEDs to be mounted (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.), only some LEDs (for example, LED 364a) are kept turned off (all are turned off), and the solution shown in FIG. After the power is turned off and the product is replaced with a compatible ID product, state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, alignment between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. If it is determined that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (matched), the notification is canceled.

If the matching state is achieved even once, the light emission of the board light emitting means and the frame light emitting means will not be restricted even if the mismatching state again occurs until the power is cut off. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the second game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. After determining the compatibility with the right game board 5AR, which is a board component, and determining that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (consistent), the left game board and the right game board are then The system does not judge the compatibility of the left and right game boards at all, and even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible, the right The various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the various performance units housed in the right back box 3010R arranged at the rear of the game board 5AR are not restricted from emitting light as various LEDs of the game board, and the performance operation unit which is the frame light emitting means Light emission of various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative substrates in 300 is not restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the various presentation units housed in the right back box 3010R located behind the right side game board 5AR, which is the board light emitting means, are emitted in predetermined light emission modes as various LEDs of the game board ( As the performance progresses), various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light emitting means, emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (along the progress of the performance).

H3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit). Specifically, the ID setting is performed by electrically connecting the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). Assign a value (11110000B).

The ID assigned by hardware (by a hardware circuit) to the right game board 5AR is compared with the ID code for determination, and if they are the same, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the left game board 5AL in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matched), and the other IDs shown in FIG. Door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit"), and the divided game board 5A The performance will be performed by For example, the peripheral control board 1510 causes various LEDs (for example, a plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for the performance operation unit 300. The control signal is output as a valid signal for proceeding with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right game board 5AR by hardware (by a hardware circuit) and the ID code for determination are compared, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC in FIG. 251 provided in the right game board 5AR is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the left game board 5AL in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right game board 5AR from this input ID code signal, and refers to the combination table (FIG. 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM, which is the ID code for determination. Judgment (comparison). The combination of the divided game boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510 will, for example, be in state 2: ID error 1 shown in FIG. In response 1 (ID error 1 response), the production operation unit 300 is instructed to emit light from some of the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the production operation unit 300. A control signal for the control signal is not outputted as a valid signal for proceeding with the performance, and the light emission of a part (for example, the LED 364a) is turned off (all lights are turned off).

Even if the operation unit is operated at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on, the notification may not be reported (if the ID is a regular ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) when error response 1 to error response 9 do not occur, that is, FIG. ) When the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error is normal operation (no error response), the main control board 1310 is activated by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on. If the main control MPU 1310a is performing the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until the predetermined period of time until this setting change process is completed), normal operation (no error handling) is performed. ) is no longer possible. In addition, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error handling), the countermeasure is "none", so the special behavior in normal operation (no error handling) There is no notification mode. In other words, in the case of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

In addition, if the regular ID, ID error, or unconnected error is to be known at any timing after the power is turned on, in other words, the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Fig. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response). ID errors and unconnected errors such as Error Handling 1 to Error Handling 9 were determined during a predetermined period after power-on, called ID determination processing in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. , the information may be known at any timing after the power is turned on. Specifically, the normal ID, ID error, and unconnected error may be determined by performing ID determination processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222. The regular ID, ID error, and unconnected error regarding the production operation unit may be determined in the step S production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the countermeasure is "none", so normal operation ( There is no special notification mode for (no error handling). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling), no notification is made to that effect.

If it is determined that the ID is a regular ID, no notification will be made even if the operation unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 of FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. In this case, no notification will be made (laws covered in the figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left game board and the right game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left game board and the right game board will be completely changed. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned on at this timing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will not perform the judgment as shown in FIG. The main control side main process in the main control side power-on process and the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the control board 1510 cannot notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification is continued at least until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 261, that is, if it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the response method shown in Figure 261 (c): Until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is turned off. , this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) notification is maintained. By such notification, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in a state where the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is incompatible (inconsistent).

If the ID is determined to be normal within the predetermined period when the power is turned on, no notification will be made, but if it is determined to be an abnormal ID within the predetermined period after the power is turned on, the notification mode will be set when the status changes. Can be changed. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In this case, no notification is made (target method in the figure: none), whereas state 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (Error response 1 in Figures 259 to 261 (ID error 1 response) )), in other words, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, the notification of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and the countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 of 254(c): Normal, that is, when the ID is determined to be normal, notification is no longer performed. In other words, if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is determined to be normal and has a normal ID within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, then the state of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board will be completely changed. It is designed not to be judged, and even if the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), it will be reported that it is incompatible (inconsistent) and that it is an abnormal ID. It is not a notification mode. As a result, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left side game board and the right side game board within a predetermined period when the power is turned on, it contributes to reducing the processing load on the progress of the performance by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

The notification ends except for some notifications. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 detects state 2: ID error 1 (FIG. 256 to 261 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response)), that is, when it is determined that the ID is abnormal, it is stored as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved in association with the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a correct combination of the left side game board and the right side game board is mounted on the main body frame 3, and when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the peripheral control board 1510. If the IC 1510a determines that the state 1 in FIG. 254(c) is normal, that is, the ID is normal, in the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. A history of "ID abnormality" may be displayed on the performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance progresses while the history is displayed.

If the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, in order to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and repaired, so at this time the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (dropped) and the peripheral control board must be removed. The power supply is cut off, and it is necessary to reinstall the game board and turn on the power to the pachinko machine again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. ”), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, and when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine. If the notification processing continues until then, there is no need to check the ID or control the notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (in a state where the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup and is ready to proceed with the game and the presentation), the system shown in FIG. The ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 200, the production operation unit that was determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one process of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is replaced with another production operation unit that has an abnormal ID. (Alternatively, when the performance operation unit with the abnormal ID is replaced with the performance operation unit with the normal ID, the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is once determined as a normal ID, and the performance with the abnormal ID is performed again.) As a result, even if the combination of the production operation unit and the split game board is actually incompatible (inconsistency), the production continues to progress and the production operation unit is returned to the operation unit). There is no notification that the ID is abnormal. Therefore, if the system returns to normal even once, the notification mode will not be changed even if the system becomes abnormal again.

H4:
If there is a mismatch, the LCD will notify you of the error. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. Displays the messages "Pachinko board error has occurred", "Error number:", "Game board connection error", and "Please check the game board after turning off the power", and lights up the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine. Display the image. In the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. ” and “Please check the game board after turning off the power” are displayed, and an image of the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is displayed.

In the case of mismatch, no control is performed by the performance control means. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the effect control means, determines whether the left game board and the right game board If it is determined that the combination is incompatible, for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. The various LEDs of the door frame unit blinking in red, the various LEDs of the game board turn off (all lights out), and the movable body on the door frame unit side, which is controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, returns to its original position. There is no operation such as recovery (no operation).

If there is a mismatch, the abnormality will be notified by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. If it is determined that this is the case, for example, in the case of error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. An announcement sound is played saying, ``A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board.'' This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly. In the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in Figure 260, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, and the message "A game board connection error has occurred. Turn off the power, then disconnect the game board." Please confirm.'' An announcement will be played. This kind of audio mode is played repeatedly.

If there is a mismatch, a lamp on the door frame (a lamp provided on a removable decorative member or a lamp provided on a non-removable decorative member) is turned on in an abnormal manner. Specifically, first, door frame units such as a left side unit 420 of a door frame, a right side unit 430 of a door frame, a plate unit 200, a top unit 450 of a door frame, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame unit") is installed. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (inconsistent) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255. In this case, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after the power is turned on in FIG. 259, various LEDs of the door frame unit blink in red as an abnormal state. In addition, the various LEDs of the door frame unit include those provided in various units (various decorative members) that are removably attached to the door frame 3, as well as those provided in various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. But that's fine.

If there are a plurality of second game board constituent members, all of the plurality of second game board constituent members will not be driven unless even one of them has a regular ID. Specifically, the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is further divided into an upper side and a lower side, and is composed of an upper right side game board 5ART and a lower right side game board 5ARU shown in FIG. In this case, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. There is. The parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is connected in a daisy chain with the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel to serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the right It operates as an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower game board 5ARU, and as a 16-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa. The peripheral control board 1510 contains the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial converter circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the previous stage, and the contents held in the lower right, which becomes an 8-bit shift register in the latter stage. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the side game board 5ARU are sequentially input one bit at a time as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR by acquiring the ID code signal. In the combination of the upper right side game board and the lower right side game board, the upper right side game board 5ART and the lower right side game board 5ARU should be combined, but the other lower right side game board does not match (match) with the upper right side game board 5ART. When combined with a game board, even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the upper right game board The various LEDs provided on the other lower right game boards that are not compatible with board 5ART are turned off (all lights are turned off).

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1804 Decoration body (decoration body)
1804a Chamfered portion 1804b Glue surface (glue surface)
1805 Decorative body (decorative body)
1805a Chamfered portion 1806 Decorative body (decorative body)
1806a Notch 1807L Decorative body left (decorative body)
1807R Decorative body right (decorative body)
1808 Decorative body (decorative body)
1809 Decorative body (decorative body)
1809a Notch 1823 First member (pedestal member)
1823a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1823b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1823c Separation hole (separation hole)
1823e Misapplication prevention section (misapplication prevention section)
1824 First member (pedestal member)
1824a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1824b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1824c Misapplication prevention section (misapplication prevention section)
1825 First member (pedestal member)
1825a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1825b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1825c Misapplication prevention section (misapplication prevention section)
1826L First member left (pedestal member)
1826R First member right (pedestal member)
1826a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1826b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1826c Erroneous pasting prevention part (erroneous pasting prevention part)
1827 First member (pedestal member)
1827a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1827b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1827c Separation hole (separation hole)
1827d Misapplication prevention section (misapplication prevention section)
1828 First member (pedestal member)
1828a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1828b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1828c Separation hole (separation hole)
1828d Erroneous pasting prevention section (erroneous pasting prevention section)
2000 Front unit 2810 Gate body (pedestal member)
2810a Front plate part (flat plate part)
2810b Pasting recess (mounting recess)
2810c Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
2810d Separation hole (separation hole)
2811 Gate seal (decoration)
2811a Notch 3000 Back unit

Claims (1)

a frame component having an outer frame, a main body frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame;
a game component that is removably installed in the frame component;
a plurality of light emitting bodies provided in the frame component and the game component,
The game component includes a first game component and a second game component,
The first game component includes a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes a game performance,
The second game component includes a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor,
The specific board has a first unique value that can be identified as the second game component, and can transmit the first unique value to the production control board,
The production control board is capable of comparing the first eigenvalue transmitted from the specific board with a second eigenvalue that it owns,
The first game component and the second game component are each individually fixed to the frame component,
If the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is not a regular combination, the light emitting body provided in the second game component does not emit light, and the frame component and the first game component The light emission of a specific light-emitting body among the light-emitting bodies provided in the part is not set as a normal light emission mode, but is regulated,
Further, after it is determined that the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is not a normal combination, a comparison is performed to determine whether the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is a normal combination. no comparison period occurs , and a non-comparison period occurs during which it is not compared whether the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is a regular combination;
Furthermore, it is possible to execute error notification regarding the RAM during the non-comparison period, and in the error notification, what is the mode that is regulated when the combination of the first eigenvalue and the second eigenvalue is not a regular combination. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific light emitting body is controlled in different manners.

Images